Advertisement
Advertisement
DUAL / CT AND AUXILIARY
VOLTAGE (V
X
) POWERED
OVERCURRENT RELAY
MiCOM P116
Firmware 1C
Technical Manual
(P116_EN_M_A11 v2.7)
(17 th
November 2013)
Note: The technical manual for this device gives instructions for its installation, commissioning, and operation.
However, the manual cannot cover all conceivable circumstances or include detailed information on all topics. In the event of any questions or specific problems arising, do not take any action without proper authorization. Contact the appropriate Schneider Electric Energy technical sales office and request the necessary information.
Any agreements, commitments, and legal relationships and any obligations on the part of Schneider
Electric Energy including settlements of warranties, result solely from the applicable purchase contract, which is not affected by the contents of the technical manual.
This device MUST NOT be modified. If any modification is made without the express permission of
Schneider Electric Energy, it will invalidate the warranty, and may render the product unsafe.
The SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC ENERGY logo and any alternative version thereof are trademarks and service marks of
SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC ENERGY.
MiCOM is a registered trademark of SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC ENERGY. All trade names or trademarks mentioned herein whether registered or not, are the sole property of their owners.
This manual is provided for informational use only and is subject to change without notice.
© 2013, SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC ENERGY. All rights reserved.
CONTENTS
Section 8
Section 9
Section 10
Section 11
Section 12
Section 13
Section 1
Section 2
Section 3
Section 4
Section 5
Section 6
Section 7
Section 14
Safety Section
Update Documentation
Introduction
Technical Data
Getting Started
Settings
Operation
Application Notes
Measurements and Recording
Commissioning
Maintenance
Troubleshooting
Symbols and Glossary
Installation
Communication Database
Firmware and Service Manual
Version History
P116_EN_SS_A11
P116_EN_IT_A11
P116_EN_TD_A11
P116_EN_GS_A11
P116_EN_ST_A11
P116_EN_OP_A11
P116_EN_AP_A11
P116_EN_MR_A11
P116_EN_CM_A11
P116_EN_MT_A11
P116_EN_TS_A11
P116_EN_SG_A11
P116_EN_IN_A11
P116_EN_CT_A11
P116_EN_VH_A11
SS
N/A
IT
TD
GS
ST
OP
AP
MR
CM
MT
TS
SG
IN
CT
Safety Section P116_EN_SS_A11 v2.7
SS
SAFETY SECTION
Safety Section
CONTENTS
SYMBOLS AND LABELS ON THE EQUIPMENT
INSTALLING, COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR SAFETY
P116_EN_SS_A11 v2.7
(SS) - 1
SS
SS
P116_EN_SS_A11 v2.7
(SS) - 2
Safety Section
Safety Section P116_EN_SS_A11 v2.7
(SS) - 3
STANDARD SAFETY STATEMENTS AND EXTERNAL LABEL INFORMATION
FOR SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC ENERGY T&D EQUIPMENT
1. INTRODUCTION
This Safety Section and the relevant equipment documentation provide full information on safe handling, commissioning and testing of this equipment. This Safety Section also includes reference to typical equipment label markings.
The technical data in this Safety Section is typical only, see the technical data section of the relevant equipment documentation for data specific to a particular item of equipment.
Before carrying out any work on the equipment the user should be familiar with the contents of this Safety Section and the ratings on the equipment’s rating label.
Reference should be made to the external connection diagram before the equipment is installed, commissioned or serviced.
Language specific, self-adhesive User Interface labels are provided in a bag for some equipment.
SS
2. HEALTH AND SAFETY
The information in the Safety Section of the equipment documentation is intended to ensure that equipment is properly installed and handled in order to maintain it in a safe condition.
It is assumed that everyone who will be involved with the equipment is familiar with the contents of this Safety Section, or the Safety Guide (SFTY/4L M).
When electrical equipment is in operation, dangerous voltages are present in certain parts of the equipment. Failure to observe warning notices, incorrect use, or improper use may endanger personnel and equipment and also cause personal injury or physical damage.
Before working in the terminal strip area, the equipment must be isolated.
Proper and safe operation of the equipment depends on appropriate shipping and handling, proper storage, installation and commissioning, and on careful operation, maintenance and servicing. For this reason only qualified personnel may work on or operate the equipment.
Qualified personnel are individuals who:
•
Are familiar with the installation, commissioning, and operation of the equipment and of the system to which it is being connected;
•
Are able to safely perform switching operations in accordance with accepted safety engineering practices and are authorized to energize and de-energize equipment and to isolate, ground, and label it;
•
Are trained in the care and use of safety apparatus in accordance with safety engineering practices;
•
Are trained in emergency procedures (first aid).
The equipment documentation gives instructions for its installation, commissioning, and operation. However, the manuals cannot cover all conceivable circumstances or include detailed information on all topics. In the event of any questions or specific problems arising, do not take any action without proper authorization. Contact the appropriate SCHNEIDER
ELECTRIC ENERGY technical sales office and request the necessary information.
SS
P116_EN_SS_A11 v2.7
(SS) - 4
3. SYMBOLS AND LABELS ON THE EQUIPMENT
3.1
Safety Section
For safety reasons the following symbols which may be used on the equipment or referred to in the equipment documentation, should be understood before it is installed or commissioned.
Symbols
Caution: refer to equipment documentation Caution: risk of electric shock
3.2
4.
Protective Conductor (*Earth) terminal
Functional/Protective Conductor (*Earth) terminal
Note: This symbol may also be used for a Protective Conductor (Earth) Terminal if that terminal is part of a terminal block or sub-assembly e.g. power supply.
*NOTE: THE TERM EARTH USED THROUGHOUT THIS TECHNICAL MANUAL IS THE
DIRECT EQUIVALENT OF THE NORTH AMERICAN TERM GROUND.
Labels
See Safety Guide (SFTY/4L M) for typical equipment labeling information.
INSTALLING, COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING
Equipment connections
Personnel undertaking installation, commissioning or servicing work on this equipment should be aware of the correct working procedures to ensure safety.
The equipment documentation should be consulted before installing, commissioning, or servicing the equipment.
Terminals exposed during installation, commissioning and maintenance may present a hazardous voltage unless the equipment is electrically isolated.
Any disassembly of the equipment may expose parts at hazardous voltage, also electronic parts may be damaged if suitable electrostatic voltage discharge (ESD) precautions are not taken.
If there is unlocked access to the rear of the equipment, care should be taken by all personnel to avoid electric shock or energy hazards.
Voltage and current connections should be made using insulated crimp terminations to ensure that terminal block insulation requirements are maintained for safety.
Watchdog (self-monitoring) contacts are provided in numerical relays to indicate the health of the device. SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC ENERGY strongly recommends that these contacts are hardwired into the substation's automation system, for alarm purposes.
To ensure that wires are correctly terminated the correct crimp terminal and tool for the wire size should be used.
The equipment must be connected in accordance with the appropriate connection diagram.
Protection Class I Equipment
- Before energizing the equipment it must be earthed using the protective conductor terminal, if provided, or the appropriate termination of the
Safety Section P116_EN_SS_A11 v2.7
(SS) - 5 supply plug in the case of plug connected equipment.
- The protective conductor (earth) connection must not be removed since the protection against electric shock provided by the equipment would be lost.
- When the protective (earth) conductor terminal (PCT) is also used to terminate cable screens, etc., it is essential that the integrity of the protective (earth) conductor be checked after the addition or removal of such functional earth connections. For M4 stud PCTs the integrity of the protective (earth) connections should be ensured by use of a locknut or similar.
The recommended minimum protective conductor (earth) wire size is 2.5 mm²
(3.3 mm² for North America) unless otherwise stated in the technical data section of the equipment documentation, or otherwise required by local or country wiring regulations.
The protective conductor (earth) connection must be low-inductance and as short as possible.
All connections to the equipment must have a defined potential. Connections that are pre-wired, but not used, should preferably be grounded when binary inputs and output relays are isolated. When binary inputs and output relays are connected to common potential, the pre-wired but unused connections should be connected to the common potential of the grouped connections.
Before energizing the equipment, the following should be checked:
- Voltage rating/polarity (rating label/equipment documentation);
- CT circuit rating (rating label) and integrity of connections;
- Protective fuse rating;
- Integrity of the protective conductor (earth) connection (where applicable);
- Voltage and current rating of external wiring, applicable to the application.
Accidental touching of exposed terminals
If working in an area of restricted space, such as a cubicle, where there is a risk of electric shock due to accidental touching of terminals which do not comply with
IP20 rating, then a suitable protective barrier should be provided.
Equipment use
If the equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the protection provided by the equipment may be impaired.
Removal of the equipment front panel/cover
Removal of the equipment front panel/cover may expose hazardous live parts, which must not be touched until the electrical power is removed.
UL and CSA listed or recognized equipment
To maintain UL and CSA approvals the equipment should be installed using UL and/or CSA listed or recognized parts of the following type: connection cables, protective fuses/fuse holders or circuit breakers, insulation crimp terminals, and replacement internal battery, as specified in the equipment documentation.
Equipment operating conditions
The equipment should be operated within the specified electrical and environmental limits.
SS
SS
P116_EN_SS_A11 v2.7
(SS) - 6
Safety Section
Current transformer circuits
Do not open the secondary circuit of a live CT since the high voltage produced may be lethal to personnel and could damage insulation. Generally, for safety, the secondary of the line CT must be shorted before opening any connections to it.
For most equipment with ring-terminal connections, the threaded terminal block for current transformer termination has automatic CT shorting on removal of the module. Therefore external shorting of the CTs may not be required, the equipment documentation should be checked to see if this applies.
For equipment with pin-terminal connections, the threaded terminal block for current transformer termination does NOT have automatic CT shorting on removal of the module.
External resistors, including voltage dependent resistors (VDRs)
Where external resistors, including voltage dependent resistors (VDRs), are fitted to the equipment, these may present a risk of electric shock or burns, if touched.
Battery replacement
Where internal batteries are fitted they should be replaced with the recommended type and be installed with the correct polarity to avoid possible damage to the equipment, buildings and persons.
Insulation and dielectric strength testing
Insulation testing may leave capacitors charged up to a hazardous voltage. At the end of each part of the test, the voltage should be gradually reduced to zero, to discharge capacitors, before the test leads are disconnected.
Insertion of modules and pcb cards
Modules and PCB cards must not be inserted into or withdrawn from the equipment whilst it is energized, since this may result in damage.
Insertion and withdrawal of extender cards
Extender cards are available for some equipment. If an extender card is used, this should not be inserted or withdrawn from the equipment whilst it is energized.
This is to avoid possible shock or damage hazards. Hazardous live voltages may be accessible on the extender card.
External test blocks and test plugs
Great care should be taken when using external test blocks and test plugs hazardous voltages may be accessible when using these. *CT shorting links must be in place before the insertion or removal of test plugs, to avoid potentially lethal voltages.
*Note: When a MiCOM P992 Test Plug is inserted into the MiCOM P991 Test Block, the secondaries of the line CTs are automatically shorted, making them safe.
Fiber-optic communication
Where fiber-optic communication devices are fitted, these should not be viewed directly. Optical power meters should be used to determine the operation or signal level of the device.
Cleaning
The equipment may be cleaned using a lint free cloth dampened with clean water, when no connections are energized. Contact fingers of test plugs are normally protected by petroleum jelly, which should not be removed.
Maintenance and installation
For safety reason, no work must be carried out on the P116 until all power sources to the unit have been disconnected
Safety Section
5. DE-COMMISSIONING AND DISPOSAL
P116_EN_SS_A11 v2.7
(SS) - 7
De-commissioning
The supply input (auxiliary) for the equipment may include capacitors across the supply or to earth. To avoid electric shock or energy hazards, after completely isolating the supplies to the equipment (both poles of any dc supply), the capacitors should be safely discharged via the external terminals prior to decommissioning.
Disposal
It is recommended that incineration and disposal to water courses is avoided.
The equipment should be disposed of in a safe manner. Batteries should be removed from any equipment before its disposal, taking precautions to avoid short circuits. Particular regulations within the country of operation, may apply to the disposal of the equipment.
SS
6.
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR SAFETY
Where UL Listing of the equipment is not required the recommended fuse type is a high rupture capacity (HRC) type with a maximum current rating of 16 Amps and a minimum DC rating of 250 Vdc, for example the Red Spot NIT or TIA type.
To maintain UL and CUL Listing of the equipment for North America a UL Listed fuse shall be used. The UL Listed type shall be a Class J time delay fuse, with a maximum current rating of 15 A and a minimum DC rating of 250 Vdc, for example type AJT15.
The protective fuse should be located as close to the unit as possible.
Protective fuse rating
DANGER - CTs must NOT be fused since open circuiting them may produce lethal hazardous voltages.
Protective class
Class I (unless otherwise specified in the equipment documentation).
IEC 60255-27: 2005
EN 60255-27: 2005
Installation category
This equipment requires a protective conductor
(earth) connection to ensure user safety.
IEC 60255-27: 2005
EN 60255-27: 2005
Environment
Installation category III (Overvoltage Category III):
Distribution level, fixed installation.
Equipment in this category is qualification tested at
5 kV peak, 1.2/50 µs, 500
Ω
, 0.5 J, between all supply circuits and earth and also between independent circuits.
The equipment is intended for indoor installation and use only. If it is required for use in an outdoor environment then it must be housed in a specific cabinet which will enable it to meet the requirements of IEC 60529 with the classification of degree of protection IP54 (dust and splashing water protected).
Pollution Degree - Pollution Degree 2 Compliance is demonstrated by reference to safety
Altitude - Operation up to 2000 m standards.
IEC 60255-27:2005
EN 60255-27: 2005
SS
P116_EN_SS_A11 v2.7
(SS) - 8
Safety Section
Introduction
MiCOM P116
P116_EN_IT_A11 v2.7
IT
INTRODUCTION
Date:
Hardware Suffix:
Software Version:
Connection Diagrams:
17 th
November 2013
A
1C
10P11602
Introduction
MiCOM P116
CONTENTS
Ordering options Information (Required with Order)
FIGURES
Figure 1: Functional diagram of the P116A.. with all ordering options included
Figure 2: Functional diagram of the P116L.. with all ordering options included
P116_EN_IT_A11 v2.7
(IT) 1-1
8
8
IT
IT
P116_EN_IT_A11 v2.7
(IT) 1-2
Introduction
MiCOM P116
Introduction
MiCOM P116
1. MiCOM DOCUMENTATION STRUCTURE
P116_EN_IT_A11 v2.7
(IT) 1-3
The manual provides a functional and technical description of the MiCOM protection relay and a comprehensive set of instructions for the relay’s use and application.
The section contents are summarized below:
P116/EN IT Introduction
A guide to the MiCOM range of relays and the documentation structure. Also a general functional overview of the relay and brief application summary are given.
P116/EN TD Technical Data
Technical data including setting ranges, accuracy limits, recommended operating conditions, ratings and performance data. Compliance with norms and international standards is quoted where appropriate.
P116/EN GS Getting Started
A guide to the different user interfaces of the protection relay describing how to start using it.
This section provides detailed information regarding the communication interfaces of the relay, including a detailed description of how to access the settings database stored within the relay.
P116/EN ST Settings
List of all relay settings, including ranges, step sizes and defaults, together with a brief explanation of each setting.
P116/EN OP Operation
A comprehensive and detailed functional description of all protection and non-protection functions.
P116/EN AP Application Notes
This section includes a description of common power system applications of the relay, calculation of suitable settings, some typical worked examples, and how to apply the settings to the relay.
P116/EN MR Measurements and Recording
Detailed description of the relays recording and measurements functions.
P116/EN CM Commissioning
Instructions on how to commission the relay, comprising checks on the calibration and functionality of the relay.
P116/EN MT Maintenance
A general maintenance policy for the relay is outlined.
P116/EN TS Troubleshooting
Advice on how to recognize failure modes and the recommended course of action. Includes guidance on whom at SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC ENERGY to contact for advice.
P116/EN SG Symbols and Glossary
List of common technical abbreviations found within the product documentation.
P116/EN IN Installation
Recommendations on unpacking, handling, inspection and storage of the relay. A guide to the mechanical and electrical installation of the relay is provided, incorporating earthing recommendations. All external wiring connections to the relay are indicated.
IT
IT
P116_EN_IT_A11 v2.7
(IT) 1-4
P116/EN CM Communication Database
P116/EN VH Firmware and Service Manual Version History
Introduction
MiCOM P116
This section provides an overview regarding the SCADA communication interfaces of the relay.
History of all hardware and software releases for the product.
Introduction
MiCOM P116
2. INTRODUCTION TO MiCOM
P116_EN_IT_A11 v2.7
(IT) 1-5
MiCOM is a comprehensive solution capable of meeting all electricity supply requirements.
It comprises a range of components, systems and services from SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC
ENERGY T&D.
Central to the MiCOM concept is flexibility.
MiCOM provides the ability to define an application solution and, through extensive communication capabilities, integrate it with your power supply control system.
−
−
The components within MiCOM are:
−
P range protection relays;
−
C range control products;
M range measurement products for accurate metering and monitoring;
S range versatile PC support and substation control packages.
MiCOM products include extensive facilities for recording information on the state and behaviour of the power system using disturbance and fault records. They can also provide measurements of the system at regular intervals for a control centre enabling remote monitoring and control to take place.
For up-to-date information on any MiCOM product, visit our website: www.schneider-electric.com
IT
IT
P116_EN_IT_A11 v2.7
(IT) 1-6
3. PRODUCT SCOPE
Introduction
MiCOM P116
The P116 is a 3 phase and earth fault non-directional overcurrent CT-powered and/or auxiliary voltage-powered protection relay which has been designed to control, protect and monitor industrial and distribution installations. Refer to section 3.2.
The scope of P116 applications includes:
• industry and distribution MV and HV networks,
• back-up protection in HV applications.
3.1
3.2
The relay protects one, two or three-phase applications against earth fault and phase-tophase short-circuit faults. It was especially developed for compact MV switchboards with circuit breakers. Thanks to a built-in USB port, disturbance records, fault records, events and relay settings can be downloaded to a local PC.
Settings for the protection elements are entered using the front panel keyboard and can be checked on the local display or using the MiCOM S1 or S1 Studio setting software.
Key for the manual
The P116 relays are available in two base hardware versions: Model A and Model L (light).
Each model has several hardware versions offering different numbers of flag indicator outputs, case types, rated currents (1 A or 5 A), auxiliary voltage ranges, etc.
Model L is CT powering only. Model A is dual powered.
Please refer to the commercial publication for further information on the product features and application arrangements.
Functional overview
The P116 relay offers a wide variety of protection functions.
The protection features are summarized below:
50/51
50N/51N
PROTECTION FUNCTIONS OVERVIEW
Three non-directional overcurrent stages are provided for each phase. The first (
I
>) and the second stage (
I
>>) may be set to
I nverse Definite Minimum
Time (IDMT) or Definite Time (DT); the third stage (
I
>>>) may be set to DT only.
Three non-directional overcurrent stages are provided. The first stage (
I
N_1) may be set to Inverse Definite Minimum Time (IDMT) or Definite Time (DT); the second and third stage (
I
N>> and
I
N_3) may be set to DT only.
SOTF
(Model A)
Switch On To Fault Phase Overcurrent Stage.
BOL
(Model A)
SOL
(Model A)
CLP
(Model A)
46
(Model A)
49
37
The Blocked Overcurrent Logic is available for each protection element. This consists of a start signal and protection block timer that can for instance be used to implement busbar blocking schemes.
The Selective Overcurrent Logic provides the capability of temporarily altering
(i.e. lengthen) the time-delay settings for stages 2 and 3 of the phase overcurrent and earth fault elements.
Cold Load Pick-up may be used to transiently raise the settings, for both overcurrent and earth fault protection elements, following closure of the circuit breaker.
One stage is provided to be used as backup protection for both phase-toearth and phase-to-phase faults.
RMS thermal overload (single time constant) protection with thermal characteristics, suitable for both cables and transformers. Both Alarm and trip stages are provided.
A phase undercurrent element is available.
Introduction
MiCOM P116
P116_EN_IT_A11 v2.7
(IT) 1-7
PROTECTION FUNCTIONS OVERVIEW
(Model A)
46BC
(Model A)
50BF
79
(Model A)
Broken conductor (open jumper) used to detect open circuit faults using the
I
2/
I
1 ratio.
Circuit breaker failure element with undercurrent detection.
Four-shot three-pole auto-recloser with external initiation and sequence coordination capability.
Second harmonic blocking that can be associated with all the protection elements.
The P116 also offers the following relay management functions in addition to the functions listed above.
•
Up to 20 Fault Records
•
5 Instantaneous Records, 5 Alarm Records, 200 Events available via the USB port or rear optional communication port RS485 (when the available space is exhausted, the oldest record is automatically overwritten by the new one) (Model A)
•
Readout of actual settings available via the USB port or rear communication port RS485
(Model A)
•
CB Control via a rear communication port (RS485), the front panel menu or dedicated binary input (Model A)
•
Model A: 6 binary inputs; Model L: no binary inputs
•
Model A: 7 output contacts; Model L: 2 output contacts
•
2 alternative setting groups (Model A)
•
4 timers (AUX)
(Model A)
•
Energy output for the CB low energy coil
•
Energy output for flag indicator (Model A)
•
3 phase current inputs
•
Earth fault current input
•
Model A: Up to 5 internal flag indicators; Model L: 1 internal flag indicator
•
Counters (Model A)
•
Circuit breaker control, status & condition monitoring (Model A)
•
Trip circuit and coil supervision (Model A)
•
Comprehensive disturbance recording (waveform capture)
•
Programmable allocation of digital inputs (Model A) and outputs
•
Control inputs (Model A)
•
Multi-level password protection
IT
IT
P116_EN_IT_A11 v2.7
(IT) 1-8
Application overview
Introduction
MiCOM P116
CB
I, IN
USB port
Setting software S1 or Studio
Rear port
RS485 port
DCS system
Output for low energy CB coil charged in real time
(extreme fast charged)
Output for external flag indicator
(extreme fast charged)
Auxiliary power supply (Vx)
CT power supply
Internal energy for powering of electronic boards
Recording features
Fault recording:
20
Alarm recording:
5
Event recording:
200
Disturbance
Recorder: up to 6s
Counters
Start of protection recording: 5
79 86
I/O features
Outputs Relay:
RL1
Flag indicator:
TRIP.
Output Relays:
RL2-RL6
LEDs: 8
Binary Inputs: 6
Close and Trip functional keys
Watchdog contact
WD
Flag indicators:
4 optional.
50/51
50N
51N
49 46 46BC 50BF 37
AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS
- SOFT (Switch on to fault)
- Self Diagnostic
- Memorising of latched LEDs
and outputs relays (86)
- Blocking logic
- Cold Load Pick Up
- Selective Scheme Logic
- 4 Auxiliary timers
- CB Local/Remote
- CB Monitoring
- Time Synchronisation via
Binary Input
- Relay Maintenance Mode
- Remote Ctrl on Output
Relays
- Trip Circuit Supervision
- Peak and Rolling Demand
MEASUREMENTS
- Phase current
- Residual current
- Trip, start, alarm counters
- CB electrical operation
counter
- CB mechanical operation
counter
- Autoreclose counters
16x2 alphanumerical
LCD display
Function available for current above 0.2In (Ien) or when Vx (auxiliary voltage) is applied
Function available when vector IA+IB+IC+IN is greater than 0.7A
(for example: 0.28In + 0.28In + 0.28In + 0Ien) or Vx is applied
Function available even if supplying of P116 is carried from
CTs only but inputs must be triggered from an additional source of the power supply
Function available if Vx is present on P116 terminals
P0912ENb
Figure 1: Functional diagram of the P116A.. with all ordering options included
CB
I, IN
USB port
Setting software S1 or Studio
Output for low energy CB coil charged in real time
(extreme fast charged)
CT power supply
Internal energy for powering of electronic boards
Recording features
Fault recording:
20
Disturbance
Recorder: up to 6s
I/O features
Outputs Relay:
RL1
Flag indicator:
TRIP.
LEDs: 8
Watchdog contact
WD
AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS
- Self Diagnostic
- Memorising of latched LEDs
MEASUREMENTS
- Phase current
- Residual current
16x2 alphanumerical
LCD display
Function available for current above 0.2In (Ien)
Function available when vector IA+IB+IC+IN is greater than 0.6A
(for example: 0.25In + 0.25In + 0.25In + 0Ien)
50/51
50N
51N
49 50BF
PJ086ENa
Figure 2: Functional diagram of the P116L… with all ordering options included
Introduction
MiCOM P116
3.3 Ordering options Information (Required with Order)
P116_EN_IT_A11 v2.7
(IT) 1-9
P116 CT-Powered Overcurrent P116 1 N N 1 1 1
Three Phase and Earth Fault Overcurrent Protection,
4 CT inputs, 8 LEDs, USB port, 2x16 LCD display,
Universal Advanced Trip Energy Output for CB coil/striker: 12VDC-24VDC/0.1J or for MiTOP.
Model
Model A : (Dual Powered; 6 Binary Inputs; 7 Outputs Contacts)
Model L : (CT Powered; 0 Binary Inputs; 2 Outputs Contacts)
A
L
Earth current input
Ion = 1 A; 0.002 – 1 Ion
Ion = 1 A; 0.01 – 8 Ion
Ion = 1 A; 0.1 – 40 Ion
Ion = 5 A; 0.002 – 1 Ion
Ion = 5 A; 0.01 – 8 Ion
Ion = 5 A; 0.1 – 40 Ion
1
2
3
4
5
6
Phase current inputs
In=1A; 0.1 – 40 In
In=5A; 0.1 – 40 In
Auxiliary Supply
1
2
Model L : CT Powered only (Without auxiliary voltage supply)
Model A : Dual Powered (CT and Vx Auxiliary Voltage); Vx=24-60Vac/dc
Model A : Dual Powered (CT and Vx Auxiliary Voltage); Vx=60-240Vac/60-250Vdc
3
4
5
Type of binary inputs; Auxiliary voltage range for binary inputs
Model L : Without Binary Inputs
Model A : Binary Inputs: 24-240Vac or 24-250Vdc (standard)
Model A : DC Binary Inputs with settable switching thresholds: 110Vdc/129Vdc/220Vdc
Rear communication port / protocol
Model L : Without RS485
Model A : RS485 with settable switching between Modbus or IEC103 via HMI
Electro-magnetic flags on the front panel
Model L, A : Standard: A one TRIP flag indicator
Model A : Additional 4 electro-magnetic flags (total: 5 flags)
N
1
2
N
1
1
5
Language
Language: English/ German/ French/ Spanish/ Portuguese/ Russian/ Turkish/ Regional 1
Case (Mounting solution)
Basic flush mounting case
Basic flush mounting case with the cassette for withdraw-able solution
Basic flush mounting case with the cassette for withdraw-able solution and the front seal to prevent unauthorised access
Basic flush mounting case with the cassette for wall mounting solution
N
W
P
S
MiCOM P116 ordering variants available in SE International Distribution Center (IDC)
Type
P116A1N1N15115111N
P116A1N1N14115111N
P116A1N2N15115111N
P116A1N2N14115111N
P116A1N5N25115111N
P116A1N5N24115111N
Catalog No.
REL10200
REL10201
REL10202
REL10203
REL10204
REL10205
Type
P116A1N1N15115111W
P116A1N1N14115111W
P116A1N2N15115111W
P116A1N2N14115111W
P116A1N5N25115111W
P116A1N5N24115111W
Catalog No.
REL10210
REL10211
REL10212
REL10213
REL10214
REL10215
IT
IT
P116_EN_IT_A11 v2.7
(IT) 1-10
Introduction
MiCOM P116
Technical Data
MiCOM P116
P116_EN_TD_A11 v2.7
TD
TECHNICAL DATA
Date:
Hardware Suffix:
Software Version:
Connection Diagrams:
17 th
November 2013
A
1C
10P11602
TD
P116_EN_TD_A11 v2.7 Technical Data
MiCOM P116
Technical Data
MiCOM P116
CONTENT
Reference condition for technical data:
Nominal Frequency for Current Inputs
Minimum Level of Current Required for Relay Powering
Phase and Earth Current Transformers Consumption
Impulse Output for the Trip Coil
Impulse Output for Flag Indicator or Auxiliary Relay
DEVIATIONS OF THE PROTECTION ELEMENTS
DEVIATIONS OF AUTOMATION FUNCTIONS TIMERS
[49] Thermal Overload Protection
[50N/51N] Earth fault protection
Negative Sequence Overcurrent Protection
P116_EN_TD_A11 v2.7
(TD) 2-1
TD
TD
P116_EN_TD_A11 v2.7
(TD) 2-2
[46BC] Broken Conductor Protection
Multishot Autoreclose Function
Multishot auto-recloser Settings
Latch of the auxiliary Output Relays
Energy Output for external flag indicator
Trip Energy Output for sensitive tripping coil or striker
Optional Flag Indicators Configuration
Time-delay for Faulty CB External Signal
Unblock SOTF Time pulse after CB Close
Trip Circuit Supervision Setting Ranges
Circuit Breaker Control and Monitoring Setting Ranges
Instantaneous Recorder (available if P116 is powered from Vx only)
Triggers, Data, Setting Ranges
Technical Data
MiCOM P116
Technical Data
MiCOM P116
P116_EN_TD_A11 v2.7
(TD) 2-3
TD
TD
1.
1.1
P116_EN_TD_A11 v2.7
(TD) 2-4
Reference condition for technical data:
Quantity
Ambient temperature
Atmospheric pressure
Relative humidity
Frequency
Auxiliary supply
Reference condition
20°C
86kPa to 106kPa
45 to 75%
50 Hz or 60 Hz
Nominal range
Mechanical specification
Case
Design
Weight
-
-
Test tolerance
±2°C
±0.5%
±5%
Technical Data
MiCOM P116
Flush mounting case (wall optional) approx. 3.1 kg (with optional cassette: approx. 4.2 kg)
1.2 Terminals
AC Current Input Terminals
Located on heavy duty (black) terminal block:
Threaded M4 terminals, for ring lug connection.
CT inputs have integral safety shorting, upon removal of the terminal block.
General Input/Output Terminals
Flush mounting case (basic case or flush mounting cassette):
For power supply, binary inputs, contact output contacts and COM for rear communications.
Threaded M3 screw-type plug-in terminals (MSTB 2.5/xx-ST-5.08)
(i) 0.2 - 4 mm
2
single-core
(ii) 0.2 - 2.5 mm
2 finely stranded
Wall mounting cassette:
For power supply, binary inputs, contact output contacts and COM for rear communications.
Threaded M2.5 screw-type plug-in terminals (FRONT-MSTB 2.5/xx-STF-5.08), with wire protection for conductor cross-section
(i) 0.2 – 2.5 mm
2
single-core
(ii) 0.2 - 2.5 mm
2 finely stranded
Local communication
USB port
Cable Type: USB 2.0
Connectors:
PC: type A male
P116: type mini B 5-pin male
USB Cable: minimum 1P*28AWG/2C*24AWG, max : 2m
Rear Communications Port
EIA(RS)485 signal levels, two wire
Connections located on general purpose block (see above)
For screened twisted pair cable, distance to be bridged: multi-endpoint link: max. 100 m
Isolation to SELV level.
Technical Data
MiCOM P116
2. RATINGS
2.1 Power Supply
Nominal auxiliary voltage Vx
(ordering options)
Operating range
P116_EN_TD_A11 v2.7
(TD) 2-5
Tolerable AC ripple
24 – 60 Vdc/ 24 – 60 Vac (50/60 Hz)
60 – 250 Vdc/ 60 – 240 Vac (50/60 Hz)
19 – 72 V (dc), 19 – 66 V (ac)
48 – 300 V (dc), 48 – 264 V (ac)
Up to 12% for a dc supply, per IEC 60255-11: 2008
Nominal Burden Auxiliary Power Supply Vx
Note:
For AC max. approx.:
(i) Initial position: no output nor LED energized.
(ii) Active position: all outputs and LEDs energized.
Vx range
Vx S
VA
V
24
60
– 60 Vac
– 240 Vac
24
48
60
100/110
220/230
264
Initial position Active position
3.1
2.8
2.7
3.1
5.1
6.1
5.5
6.0
5.2
5.7
7.4
8.4
For dc Vx voltage max. approx:
Vx range
24
60
– 60 Vdc
– 240 Vdc
P
W
Initial position Active position
1.5
1.5
3.7
3.7
Auxiliary Power
Supply Voltage
Interruption
(without powering by CT)
IEC 60255-
11: 2008
EN 61000-4-
11: 1997
Power-up Time for Auxiliary
Supply Voltage only
(not includes charging of the energy outputs)
Within the auxiliary supply range:
- 48-250Vdc, the relay will withstand a 50 ms;
- 24-48Vdc, the relay will withstand a 20 ms;
Interruption of the DC auxiliary supply without deenergizing.
Within the auxiliary supply range:
- 48-250Vac, the relay will withstand a 50 ms;
- 24-48Vac, the relay will withstand a 20 ms;
Interruption of the AC auxiliary supply without deenergizing.
Time to power up via auxiliary supply only (not powered by CT): < 0.04 s
TD
TD
P116_EN_TD_A11 v2.7
(TD) 2-6
2.2 Nominal Frequency for Current Inputs
Nominal frequency 50 or 60 Hz (selectable in P116 menu)
2.3
Technical Data
MiCOM P116
Current Inputs
Phase current inputs:
Nominal current (
I n)
RMS measurement in range
Fundamental harmonic measurement in range
Operating range
Nominal Burden at
I n
(without tripping condition)
Rp at 30In (Impedance of relay phase current input at 30In and tripping condition)
Thermal withstand
Connection
Current transformer requirements
1 or 5 A (ordering option)
40 Hz – 1 kHz
40 Hz – 70 Hz
0.1 – 40
I n
< 2.3 VA
< 2.1 VA
(for
I n = 1 A)
(for
I n = 5 A)
0.240 Ohms @ 30 x In (for
I n = 1 A) (see point 2.5)
0.016 Ohms @ 30 x In (for
I n = 5 A) (see point 2.5)
1 s @ 100 x rated current (In)
2 s @ 40 x rated current (In)
10 s @ 30 x rated current (In) continuous @ 3 x rated current (In)
Refer to section 12 of P116 Installation chapter
(P116/EN IN)
Detailed information and CT requirements are given in the Application chapter (P116/EN AP)
Earth current inputs:
Nominal current (
I en):
Fundamental harmonic measurement in range
1 or 5 A (ordering option)
40 Hz – 70 Hz
Operating range
Nominal Burden at
I n
(without tripping condition)
Rn at 30In (Impedance of relay neutral current input at 30In and tripping condition)
Selected at order (Cortec)
< 2.3 VA
< 2.1 VA
(for
I en = 1 A)
(for
I en = 5 A)
0.240 Ohms @ 30 x In (for
I n = 1 A) (see point 2.5)
0.016 Ohms @ 30 x In (for
I n = 5 A) (see point 2.5)
Thermal withstand 1 s @ 100 x rated current (Ien)
2 s @ 40 x rated current (Ien)
10 s @ 30 x rated current (Ien) continuous @ 3 x rated current (Ien)
Connection
Current transformer requirements
Refer to section 12 of P116 Installation chapter
(P116/EN IN)
Detailed information and CT requirements are given in the Application chapter (P116/EN AP)
Technical Data
MiCOM P116
2.4 Minimum Level of Current Required for Relay Powering
P116_EN_TD_A11 v2.7
Phase current / Earth current range which gives reduced functionality:
Outputs relays: RL1 only,
Energy Outputs: Sensitive Tripping
Coil and External Flag Indicator
Flags: “Trip” flag only.
Note: LCD, RL2-RL6, WD, LEDs and
RS485, 2-5 Flags are inactive up to full functionality stage (see below) at least in a one phase or earth
1)
> 0.2
I n and
I
I
A
-
I
B
I + I
I
C
+
I
N
1)
I
≤ 0.65 I n
Full functionality of P116 powered at least in a one phase or earth
1)
> 0.65
I n from current only or
I
I
A
-
I
B
I + I
I
C
+
I
N
1)
I > 0.65
I n
(TD) 2-7
Note: 1. Depending on the terminal connections and configuration in menu, the earth fault input supplies the P116 (connection to terminals A7 and A8) or does not supply the
P116 (connection to terminals A9 and A10) (refer to chapter: P116/EN IN)
2. If the vector sum of the currents that power the P116 is below 0.65
I n (example: 2 phase: A-B where
I
A
= -
I
B
, the sum equal to 0.65
I n =
I
A
:0.325
I n -
I
B
: 0.325
I n), the
LED indications, Electromagnetic Flag indicators (Front Panel): 2 - 5, the display and the RS485 comms. are switched off and RL2, RL3, RL4, RL5 and RL6, WD are not energized. Depending on the setting, the earth current is included or not in the above sum (refer to Settings chapter: P116/EN ST).
1)
– Powering of P116 from earth input is selectable by using proper terminals (A7-8: with powering or A9-10: without powering) and additionally by configuration in P116 menu
(GLOBAL SETTINGS/CT RATIO/IN connection). Detailed information is given in the Setting chapter (P116/EN ST) and Installation chapter (P116/EN IN).
TD
TD
P116_EN_TD_A11 v2.7
(TD) 2-8
2.5 Phase and Earth Current Transformers Consumption
Technical Data
MiCOM P116
The P116's current input resistance depends on the value of the current. The table below shows the resistance for a single current input of the P116:
I n = 1 A / 5 A. If e/f input supply
P116, for phase-earth fault analysis it is necessary to take into account a double value of the resistance, as shown in Table below.
P116 current input resistance:
Current
In (Ien)
0.80
0.90
1.0
1.2
1.4
1.6
0.24
0.30
0.40
0.50
0.60
0.70
0.04
0.06
0.08
0.10
0.12
0.14
0.16
0.18
0.20
0.22
15
20
25
30
1.8
2
3
4
5
10
Imput resistance (Rp) for single current input in tripping condition
CT powering only
(no Vx auxiliary supply)
In (Ien) = 1 A
Rp
Ω
Vp
V
In (Ien) = 5 A
Rp
Ω
Vp
V
24.395
21.82
12.274
7.629
5.320
5.833
4.440
3.564
2.898
1.852
1.415
1.123 n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a
31.063
27.683
0.940
0.791
0.475
0.328
0.317
0.250
0.240
0.235
0.238
0.241
3.55
3.21
2.90
2.22
1.98
1.80
5.85
6.55
4.91
3.81
3.19
4.08 n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a
6.21
6.09
1.69
1,58
1.43
1.31
1.58
2.50
3.60
4.70
5.94
7.23
0.938
0.646
0.351
0.225
0.250
0.186
0.148
0.123
0.099
0.074
0.062
0.045 n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a
1.219
1.074
0.040
0.035
0.024
0.019
0.019
0.016
0.016
0.016
0.016
0.016
0.59
0.55
0.49
0.44
0.44
0.36
1.13
1.00
0.70
0.56
0.75
0.65 n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a
1.22
1.18
0.36
0.35
0.36
0.38
0.47
0.81
1.20
1.57
1.96
2.36
With auxiliary supply (Vx)
In (Ien) = 1 A
Rp
Ω
Vp
V
4.552
3.172
1.508
0.949
0.902
0.679
0.595
0.513
0.450
0.366
0.321
0.305
71.656
77.306
61.648
34.815
24.108
13.452
12.150
8.937
7.373
6.376
0.273
0.261
0.240
0.235
0.238
0.235
0.235
0.234
0.237
0.240
0.48
0.46
0.45
0.44
0.45
0.49
1.09
0.95
0.60
0.47
0.54
0.48
2.87
4.64
4.93
3.48
2.89
1.88
1.94
1,610
1.47
1.40
0.49
0.52
0.72
0.94
1.19
2.35
3.53
4.67
5.94
7.19
In (Ien) = 5 A
Rp
Ω
Vp
V
0.177
0.118
0.074
0.047
0.036
0.033
0.029
0.028
0.026
0.021
0.021
0.020
4.687
3.994
2.436
1.820
1.347
0.990
1.026
0.346
0.313
0.247
0.018
0.018
0.018
0.017
0.016
0.015
0.015
0.015
0.015
0.015
0.12
0.13
0.13
0.13
0.15
0.16
0.21
0.18
0.15
0.12
0.11
0.12
0.94
1.20
0.98
0.91
0.81
0.69
0.82
0.31
0.31
0.27
0.16
0.18
0.28
0.34
0.41
0.75
1.11
1.45
1.82
2.19
Detailed information and CT requirements are given in the Application chapter (P116/EN AP)
Technical Data
MiCOM P116
2.6 Binary Inputs
Binary inputs type: Independent optically isolated inputs
P116_EN_TD_A11 v2.7
(TD) 2-9
Ordering
Code
1
2
Setting in menu
Filtering time
Nominal
Voltage range
Voltage operating range
Binary Inputs
Minimum polarisation voltage
19.5 Vdc
Maximum polarisation current
35 mA dc ac
ENA
(ac/dc)
220 Vdc
129 Vdc
110 Vdc
5 ms 24 – 250 Vdc 19.5 – 300 Vdc
7.5 ms
(at 50 Hz)
6.25 ms
(at 60 Hz)
24 – 240 Vac 19.5 – 264 Vac
15 ms
(at 50 Hz)
12.5 ms
(at 60 Hz)
5 ms
24 – 250 Vdc
48 – 240 Vac
220 Vdc
19.5 – 300 Vdc
39.4 – 264 Vac
154 – 264 Vdc
5 ms
5 ms
129 Vdc
110 Vdc
105 – 145 Vdc
77 – 132 Vdc
19.5 Vac
19.5 Vdc
39.4 Vac
154 Vdc
105 Vdc
77 Vdc
35 mA
35 mA
Maximum holding current after 2 ms
2.3 mA
20 mA
(see table below) dc : 2.3 mA ac : 20 mA
(see table below)
3.5 mA (at 220 Vdc)
3.5 mA (at 129 Vdc)
3.5 mA (at 110 Vdc)
Maximum continuous withstand
300 Vdc
264 Vac
300 Vdc
264 Vac
264 Vdc
264 Vdc
264 Vdc
Binary input energy consumption (holding current)
Logic input burden for dc, ac, ENA
(ordering code 1)
Logic input burden for 220Vdc, 129Vdc, 110Vdc
(ordering code 2)
< 18 mA per input (at 24 Vac) RMS value
< 15 mA per input (at 48 Vac) RMS value
< 10 mA per input (at 110 Vac) RMS value
< 8 mA per input (at 127 Vac) RMS value
< 2.5 mA per input (at 230 Vac) RMS value
<2.3 mA per input (at 24-240 Vdc)
< 3.5 mA per input (at nominal voltage)
Logic input recognition time As filtering time + 5 ms
±
5 ms
An example of energy consumption calculation:
Ordering
Code
Setting in menu
1
2 dc ac
ENA (ac/dc)
110 Vdc
129 Vdc
220 Vdc
Nominal voltage
24 Vdc
220 Vdc
24 Vac
230 Vac
24 Vdc
220 Vdc
48 Vac
230 Vac
110 Vdc
129 Vdc
220 Vdc
Calculation
24 Vdc x 2.3 mA = 0.055 W
220 Vdc x 2.3 mA = 0.506 W
24 Vac x 18 mA = 0.372 VA
230 Vac x 2.5 mA = 0.489 VA
24 Vdc x 2.3 mA = 0.0552 W
220 Vdc x 2.3 mA = 0.506 W
48 Vac x 15 mA = 0.595 VA
230 Vac x 2.5 mA = 0.490 VA
110 Vdc x 3.5 mA = 0.385 W
129 Vdc x 3.5 mA = 0.4515 W
220 Vdc x 3.5 mA = 0.77 W
Burden per one input
< 0.055 W
< 0.51 W
< 0.4 VA
< 0.5 VA
< 0.06 W
< 0.51 W
< 0.6 VA
< 0.5 VA
<0.39 W
<0.45 W
<0.77 W
TD
TD
P116_EN_TD_A11 v2.7
(TD) 2-10
2.7 Output Relay Characteristics
Contact ratings
Contact relay
Carry capability
Rated Voltage
Dry contact, Ag Ni
5 A continuous
250 Vac
Breaking characteristics for RL1, RL2
Short-duration capacity
Making capacity
AC breaking capacity
25 A for 3 s
150 A for 30 ms
1250 VA resistive (cos
φ
= unity)
1250 VA inductive (cos
φ
= 0.7)
DC breaking capacity 250 Vdc;
50 W resistive
35 W inductive (L/R = 40 ms)
<10 ms Operation time
Durability
Loaded contact
Unloaded contact
10 000 operations minimum
100 000 operations minimum
Breaking characteristics for RL3, RL4
AC breaking capacity 1000 VA resistive (cos
φ
= unity)
1000 VA inductive (cos
φ
= 0.7)
Short-duration capacity
Making capacity
DC breaking capacity
10 A for 3 s
50 A for 30 ms
250 Vdc;
30 W resistive
15 W inductive (L/R = 40 ms)
< 10 ms Operation time
Durability
Loaded contact
Unloaded contact
10 000 operations minimum
100 000 operations minimum
Breaking characteristics for RL5, RL6, RL0 (WD)
AC breaking capacity 1250 VA resistive (cos
φ
= unity)
1250 VA inductive (cos
φ
= 0.7)
Short-duration capacity
Making capacity
DC breaking capacity
20 A for 3 s
100 A for 30 ms
250 Vdc;
50 W resistive
25 W inductive (L/R = 40 ms)
<10 ms Operation time
Durability
Loaded contact
Unloaded contact
10000 operations minimum
100000 operations minimum
Technical Data
MiCOM P116
Technical Data
MiCOM P116
2.8 Impulse Output for the Trip Coil
P116_EN_TD_A11 v2.7
Required parameters for sensitive tripping coil
Required nominal parameters of sensitive CB coils or strikers connected to Energy output
Nominal voltage 12 to 24 Vdc; E
≤
0.1 J or MiTOP
(TD) 2-11
2.9
Note: 1. The trip energy for the trip coil is stored by a capacitor built into the protection relay. The capacitors are charged by a current input or the auxiliary voltage. The duration of the trip pulse is 50 ms (if output is not burden). The pause between the individual pulses depends on the impedance of the trip coil and on the current level. The pulse lasts as long as the activation threshold is exceeded. During the trip pulse, the capacitor is unplugged from the charging source so the voltage level of the energy output depends on the discharging time.
2. The length of connecting wires between Impulse Output and low energy CB tripping coil/Striker/MiTOP must be less than 3m.
Impulse Output for Flag Indicator or Auxiliary Relay
Trip energy
Trip energy E
≥
0.01 J, 24 Vdc
Note: 1. The trip energy for the flag indicator is stored by a capacitor built into the protection relay. The capacitors are charged by a current input or the auxiliary voltage. The duration of the trip pulse is 50 ms (if output is not burden). The pause between the individual pulses depends on the impedance of the flag indicator and on the current level. The pulse lasts as long as the activation threshold is exceeded.
2. The length of connecting wires between Impulse Output and Flag
Indicator must be less than 3m.
TD
TD
P116_EN_TD_A11 v2.7
(TD) 2-12
3. INSULATION
Insulation resistance EN 60255-5: 2001
High Voltage
(Dielectric)
Withstand
Impulse Voltage
Withstand Test
EN 60255-27: 2005
EN 60255-27:2005
Creepage Distances and Clearances
EN 60255-27:2005
Technical Data
MiCOM P116
> 500 M
Ω
at 500 Vdc
(Using only electronic/brushless insulation tester).
2 kV rms AC, 1 minute:
Between all case terminals connected together and the case earth.
Between all terminals of independent circuits with terminals on each independent circuit connected together.
Front time: 1.2 µs, Time to half-value: 50 µs,
Peak value: 5 kV
Source Characteristics: 500 Ohm, 0.5 J.
Common and differential mode: power supply, terminal block (excluding RS485), binary inputs, relays
Pollution degree 2,
Overvoltage category III,
Impulse test voltage 5 kV.
4. EMC TESTS
1 MHz Oscillatory
Waves Immunity
Test
EN 60255-22-1: 2008
Electrostatic
Discharges Immunity
Test
Electrical Fast
Transient /Burst
Immunity Test
EN 60255-22-2: 2008
EN 60255-22-4: 2008
(For input and output ports, auxiliary power supply port)
Common mode test voltage: 2.5 kV;
Differential mode test voltage: 1.0 kV;
(For communication port)
Common mode test voltage: 1.0 kV;
(Additional parameters)
Frequency: 1MHz;
Tr time: 75ns;
Repetition frequency: 400Hz;
Source impedance: 200
Ω
;
(Class 3)
Air discharge 8kV
Contact discharge 6kV
( Class A)
(For input and output ports, auxiliary power supply port)
Peak voltage: 4kV;
(For communication port)
Peak voltage: 2kV;
(Additional parameters)
Tr/Th parameter: 5/50ns;
Repetition frequency: 5kHz;
Technical Data
MiCOM P116
Surge Immunity Test
P116_EN_TD_A11 v2.7
(TD) 2-13
High Frequency
Electromagnetic
Field Immunity Test
Immunity to
Conducted
Disturbances
Induced by Radio
Frequency Fields
Network Frequency
Electromagnetic
Fields Immunity Test
Power Frequency
Immunity Tests
EN 60255-22-5: 2002
(For input and output ports)
Line-to-line charge voltage: 2kV;
Line-to-earth charge voltage: 4kV;
Source impedance: 2
Ω
;
Coupling resistor: 40
Ω
;
Coupling capacitor: 0.5uF;
(For auxiliary power supply port)
Line-to-line charge voltage: 2kV;
Line-to-earth charge voltage: 4kV;
Source impedance: 2
Ω
;
Coupling resistor: 10
Ω
;
Coupling capacitor: 9uF;
(For communication port)
Line-to-earth charge voltage: 2kV;
Source impedance: 2
Ω
;
Coupling resistor: 40
Ω
;
Coupling capacitor: 0.5uF;
(Additional parameters)
Tr/Th parameter: 1.2/50us – for voltage;
Tr/Th parameter: 8/20us – for current;
EN 60255-22-3: 2008
EN 60255-22-6: 2004
EN 61000-4-8:2010
Frequency ranges: (80÷1000) and
(1400÷2700)MHz
10V/m unmodulated, rms;
Amplitude modulated: 80%, f=1kHz, sinus wave;
Frequency: 900MHz
10V/m unmodulated, rms;
Amplitude modulated: 100%, f=200Hz, square wave;
(Level 3)
Frequency range: (0.15÷80)MHz
10V/m unmodulated, rms;
Source impedance: 150
Ω
;
Amplitude modulated: 80%, f=1kHz, sinus wave;
(Level 3)
Spot frequencies: 27MHz and 68MHz;
10V/m unmodulated, rms;
Source impedance: 150
Ω
;
Amplitude modulated: 80%, f=1kHz, sinus wave;
(Level 5)
100A/m (continuous);
1000A/m (3s);
EN 60255-22-7: 2005 (Class A)
(For input ports)
Common mode test voltage: 300V rms;
Frequency 50Hz and 60Hz;
Coupling resistor: 220
Ω
;
Coupling capacitor: 470nF;
TD
TD
P116_EN_TD_A11 v2.7
(TD) 2-14
Radiated
Disturbance
Emission
EN 55022: 2010
Class A
Technical Data
MiCOM P116
Pulse Magnetic Field
Immunity Test
Dumped Oscillatory magnetic Field
Immunity Test
EN 61000-4-9: 2001 Tr/Th parameter: 6.4/16us;
Magnetic pulse: 1000A/m;
EN 61000-4-10: 2001
Conducted Emission EN 55022: 2010
Frequency: 0.1MHz and 1.0MHz;
Magnetic pulse: 100A/m;
Immunity to supply fading and dropping
EN 61000-4-11 2004
Class A
Criterion B
100% reduction, drop 5ms, 10ms, 20ms,
50ms, 100ms, 200ms.
5. ENVIRONMENT
Ambient
Temperature
Range
EN 60255-1: 2010 Operating temperature range: -20°C to +60°C
(–4°F to +140°F),
Temporarily permissible temperature (2/24 hours):
Storage and transit:
–40°C to +85°C
(–40°F to +185°F) with double errors
–25°C to +70°C
(–13°F to +158°F).
Ambient
Humidity
Range
EN 60068-2-78: 2001
EN 60068-2-30: 2005
56 days at 93% relative humidity and +40°C.
Damp heat cyclic, six (12 + 12) hour cycles,
93% RH, +25 to +55°C
Vibration Test
Shock and
Bump
EN 60255-21-1:1995 Response Class 1
Endurance Class 1
PN-EN 60255-21-2:2000 Shock response Class 1
Shock withstand Class 1
Bump Class 1
Seismic
Enclosure
Protection
EN 60255-21-3:1995 Class 2
EN 60529:1991/A1:2000 IP 40 Protection for relay housing
IP 20 Protection for terminals.
IP 54 Protection (front panel) against dust and dripping water for flash mounted case.
Technical Data
MiCOM P116
6. EU DIRECTIVE
6.1 EMC Compliance
6.2
2014/30/EU
Compliance with the European Commission's EMC Directive.
Product Specific Standards were used to establish conformity:
−
−
EN 60255-26: 2013
EN 60255-1: 2010
Product Safety
P116_EN_TD_A11 v2.7
(TD) 2-15
2014/35/EU
Compliance with the European Commission's Low Voltage Directive. Compliance is demonstrated by reference to generic safety standards:
−
EN60255-27:2014
TD
TD
P116_EN_TD_A11 v2.7
(TD) 2-16
7. DEVIATIONS OF THE PROTECTION ELEMENTS
Technical Data
MiCOM P116
Glossary
I
I s
I
2
I es
: Phase current
:
I
>,
I
>>,
I
>>>, SOTF,
I
<
:
I
2>
:
I
N_1 (IN>), IN_2 (
I
N>>), IN_3 (
I
N>>>)
DT : Definite time
IDMT : Inverse definite minimum time
TYPICAL OPERATION TIME
(protection time-delay set to 0 ms; the injection current is greater than two times the setting value)
The P116 is supplied from Vx or the current is above 0.2
I n (
I en).
Operation time: All types of faults
≤
40ms
TYPICAL OPERATION TIME
(protection time-delay set to 0 ms; the injection current is greater than two times the setting value)
The pre-fault current is below 0.2
I n (
I en) in all phases and that there is no Vx on the B1 - B2 terminals. The case: CB switch on to fault without auxiliary voltage supply. Typically:
≤
70ms.
Detailed calculation below:
Operation time calculation: I
A
−
I
B
+
K
I
C
+
I
N but not less than 50 ms
−
S
+
C ,
The trip coil and the flag indicator energy outputs are disabled.
K
=
7 ; S
=
0 .
1 ; C
=
60 ;
The flag indicator energy output is enabled. The trip coil energy output is disabled.
The trip coil energy outputs is enabled
Note: the flag indicator energy output
(disabling/enabling) has not significant
effect on the tripping time for this case
An example:
K
=
18 ; S
=
0 .
15 ; C
=
45 ;
K
=
55 ; S
=
0 .
14 ; C
=
25 ;
The trip coil and the flag indicator are enabled in the SETTING GROUP 1 (2) / OUTPUT
RELAYS CONFIGURATION G1 (G2) menu.
Three-phase fault with current value of 0.5
I n:
I
A
=
0 .
5 e j 0 deg
In ; I
B
=
0 .
5 e
− j 120 deg
In ; I
C
=
0 .
5 e j 120 deg
In ; I
N
=
0 .
0 e j 0 deg
Ien
Calculation:
I
A
−
I
B
=
(
0 .
5
⋅ cos( 0 deg)
−
0 .
5 cos(
−
120 deg)
) (
0 .
5
⋅ sin( 0 deg)
−
0 .
5 sin(
−
120 deg)
)
2 =
0 .
866 In
I
C
+
I
N
=
(
0 .
5
⋅ cos( 120 deg)
+
0 cos( 0 deg)
) (
0 .
5
⋅ sin( 120 deg)
+
0 sin( 0 deg)
)
2 =
0 .
5 In
Operation time:
I
A
−
I
B
+
55
I
C
+
I
N
−
0 .
14
+
25 ms
=
0 .
866
+
55
0 .
5
−
0 .
14
+
25 ms
=
70 ms
Operation time = 70 ms
Technical Data
MiCOM P116
PROTECTION ACCURACY
Element Range Deviation Trigger Reset
(
Phase overcurrent
SOTF)
Earth fault overcurrent elements
I elements
(
I
> &
I
>> &
I
>>> &
I
N_1 &
N_3)
I
N_2 &
0.1 to 40
I n
±
3%
±
0.01In DT:
0.002 to 1
0.01 to 8
0.1 to 40
I
I
I en en en
0.002 to 1
I en
0.01 to 8
I en
0.1 to 40
I en
±
±
±
3%
3%
3%
±
±
±
0.001
0.002
0.01
I
I
I en en en
±
3%
±
0.001
I en
±
3%
±
0.002
I en
±
3%
±
0.01
I en
I s
±
2%
±
0.01In
IDMT:
1.1
I s
±
2%
±
0.01In
DT:
±
±
±
±
±
±
3%
3%
3%
3%
I
3%
3%
±
±
±
± es
±
±
0.001
0.002
0.01
IDMT: 1.1
0.01
I
I
0.002
I
I
I
I en en en es
0.001
I en en en
0.95
I s
±
2%
±
0.01In
1.05
I s
±
2%
±
0.01In
0.95
I es
±
3%
±
0.001
I en
±
±
3%
3%
±
±
0.002
0.01
I
I en en
1.05
I es
±
3%
±
3%
±
0.001
I en
±
3%
±
0.002
I en
±
3%
±
0.01
I en
Negative sequence phase overcurrent elements
(
I
2>)
0.1 to 4
I n
±
3%
±
0.01In DT:
I
2s
±
3%
±
0.01In 0.95
I
2s
±
3%
±
0.00In
IDMT:
1.1
I
2s
±
3%
±
0.01In 1.05
I
2s
±
3%
±
0.01In
(
(
Phase undercurrent element (
I
<)
Broken conductor
I
2/
I
1).
Thermal overload
I therm
Trip)
,
θ
Alarm,
θ
0.1 to 2
I n
±
3%
±
0.01In DT:
2%
±
I
<
±
0.005A
20 to 100%
±
5%
±
0.01In DT:
I
2/
I
1
±
5%
±
0.01In
0.95
I
<
±
2%
±
0.01In
0.95
±
5%
±
I
2/
I
1
0.01In
0.10 to 3.0
I n
±
3%
±
0.01In
I therm
±
3%
±
0.01In 0.97
I therm
±
3%
±
0.01In
P116_EN_TD_A11 v2.7
(TD) 2-17
Time deviation
±
2% +20…50 ms
±
5% +20…50 ms
±
2% +20…50 ms
±
5% +20…50 ms
±
2% +20…50 ms
±
5% +20…50 ms
±
2% +20…50 ms
±
2% +20…50 ms
–5% +20…50 ms
(ref. IEC 60255-8)
Note: For e/f settings below 0.1In it is strongly recommend to use screened cable between e/f CT and P116 terminals. Without using screened cable the accuracy can be worse than given in the table above (additional errors caused by external disturbances should be taken into account).
TD
TD
P116_EN_TD_A11 v2.7
(TD) 2-18
8. DEVIATIONS OF AUTOMATION FUNCTIONS TIMERS
Function
Auto-reclose timers tDs, tR, t
I
CB fail & CB monitoring timers
Auxiliary timers tAUX1, tAUX2, tAUX3, tAUX4
Cold load pickup
SOTF
Technical Data
MiCOM P116
Deviation
±
2% +10…30 ms
±
2% +10…30 ms
±
2% +10…30 ms
±
2% +20…50 ms
±
2% +20…50 ms
9. DEVIATIONS OF MEASUREMENTS
Measurement
Phase current
Earth current
Range
0.1 to 40
I n
0.002 to 1
I en
0.01 to 8
I en
0.1 to 40
I en
Deviation
Typical
±
2% at
I n
Typical
±
2% at
I en
Typical
±
2% at
I en
Typical
±
2% at
I en
Technical Data
MiCOM P116
10. PROTECTION SETTING RANGES
P116_EN_TD_A11 v2.7
(TD) 2-19
10.1 [50/51] Phase Overcurrent
−
Phase current
Note:
Fundamental only
When
I
> or
I
>> is associated with an IDMT curve, the maximum recommended setting is 2
I n.
10.1.1 Protection Setting Ranges
[50/51] Phase OC
I
> ?
I
>
Delay type t
I
>
I
> TMS
I
> TD
I
> Reset Delay Type
DT
I
> tReset
K (R
I
)
I
>> ?
I
>>
Delay type t
I
>>
I
>> TMS
I
>> TD
I
>> Reset Delay Type
DT
I
>> tReset
K (R
I
)
I
>>> ?
I
>>> t
I
>>>
Setting Range
Min. Max. Step
Disabled, Trip, Alarm, Trip with Inrush blocking, Trip with Latching
0.1
I n 3
I n (
I
DMT)
40
I n (DMT)
0.01
I n
DT or IDMT (IEC_SI, IEC_VI, IEC_EI,
IEC_LTI, IEC_STI, C02_P20, C08,
IEEE_MI, IEEE_VI, IEEE_EI, RXIDG, BPN
EDF, RI, RECT, C02_P40 curve)
0.05 s 200 s 0.01 s
0.02 1.50 0.01
0.02 100 0.01
DT or IDMT (refer to Operation chapter)
0.00 s
0.1
600 s
10
0.01 s
0.1
Disabled, Trip, Alarm, Trip with Inrush blocking, Trip with Latching
0.1
I n 3
I n (
I
DMT)
40
I n (DMT)
0.01
I n
DT or IDMT (IEC_SI, IEC_VI, IEC_EI,
IEC_LTI, IEC_STI, C02_P20, C08,
IEEE_MI, IEEE_VI, IEEE_EI, RXIDG, BPN
EDF, RI, RECT, C02_P40 curve)
0.05 s 200 s 0.01 s
0.02 1.50 0.01
0.02 100 0.01
DT or IDMT (refer to Operation chapter)
0.00 s
0.1
600 s
10
0.01 s
0.01
Disabled, Trip, Alarm, Trip with Inrush blocking, Trip with Latching
1
I n 40
I n 0.01
I n
0 s 200 s 0.01 s
TD
TD
P116_EN_TD_A11 v2.7
(TD) 2-20
10.2 Switch on to fault (SOTF)
−
Phase current
10.2.1 Protection Setting Ranges
SOTF ?
[50/51] SOTF
Fundamental only
SOTF tSOTF
10.3 Undercurrent Protection
−
Undercurrent:
10.3.1 Protection Setting Ranges
Setting Range
Min. Max. Step
Disabled, Trip, Alarm, Trip with
Inrush blocking, Trip with Latching
1
I n 40
I n 0.01
I n
0 s 600 s 0.01 s
Fundamental only
[37] Under Current
I
< ?
10.4
I
< t
I
<
[49] Thermal Overload Protection
−
Phase Current:
10.4.1 Protection Setting Ranges
Setting ranges
Min Max Step
Disabled, Trip, Alarm, Trip with
Inrush blocking, Trip with Latching,
Trip with Inhibition on 52A, Alarm with Inhibition on 52A
0.1
I n 2
I n 0.01
I n
0.05 s 200 s 0.01 s
RMS
Setting ranges
Disabled, Enabled
0.1
I n 3.0
I n
1 mn 200 mn
1 mn
50%
999 mn
200%
20% 99%
Disabled, Enabled
20% 200%
0.01
1mn
1mn
1%
1%
1%
I n
[49] Therm. OL
Therm. OL ?
I therm
Te (heating)
Tr (cooling)
Theta Trip
Theta Reset Ratio
Theta Alarm ?
Theta Alarm
Technical Data
MiCOM P116
Technical Data
MiCOM P116
10.5 [50N/51N] Earth fault protection
−
−
Earth fault current Fundamental only
P116_EN_TD_A11 v2.7
(TD) 2-21
Earth fault current ranges
Note:
See following table
When
I
N> are associated to an IDMT curve, the maximum recommended setting is the highest in the range divided by 20.
10.5.1 Protection Setting Ranges t t
[50/51N] Earth OC
Setting Range
Min. Max. Step
High sensitivity current set Cortec code P116x1N 1 Nxxxxxxx1x (1 A) or
P116x1N 4 Nxxxxxxx1x (5 A)
IN_1 (IN>)
IN_2 (IN>>)
IN_3 (IN>>>)
0.002
I en
0.025
0.025
I
I en en
0.1
I en (
I
DMT)
1.0
I en (DMT)
1.0
I en
1.0
I en
0.001
0.001
0.001
I
I
I en en en
Med. sensitivity current set Cortec code P116x1N 2 Nxxxxxxx1x (1A) or
P116x1N 5 Nxxxxxxx1x (5A)
IN_1 (IN>)
IN_2 (IN>>)
IN_3 (IN>>>)
0.01
I en
0.2
0.2
I
I en en
0.4
I en (
I
DMT)
8
I en (DMT)
8
I en
8
I en
0.01
I en
0.01
I en
0.01
I en
Low sensitivity current set
IN_1 (IN>)
IN_2 (IN>>)
IN_3 (IN>>>)
I
N_1 stage ?
Cortec code P116x1N 3 Nxxxxxxx1x (1 A) or
P116x1N 6 Nxxxxxxx1x (5 A)
0.1
I en
1
1
I
I en en
3
I en (
I
DMT)
40
I en (DMT)
40
I en
40
I en
0.01
I en
0.01
0.01
I
I en en
Disabled, IN> Trip, IN> Alarm, IN> Trip with
Inrush blocking, IN> Trip with Latching
Delay type DT or IDMT (IEC_SI, IEC_VI, IEC_EI, IEC_LTI,
IEC_STI, C02_P20, C08, IEEE_MI, IEEE_VI,
IEEE_EI, RXIDG, BPN EDF, RI, RECT,
C02_P40 curve)) t
I
N_1
K (R
I
)
I
N_1 TMS
I
N_1 TD
I
N_1 Reset Delay Type
DT
I
N_1 tReset
I
N_2 stage ?
I
N>>
I
N_3 stage ?
0.05 s
0.1
0.02
0.02
DT or IDMT (refer to Operation chapter)
0.00 s
200 s
10
1.5
100
0.01 s
0.1
0.01
0.01
Disabled, IN>> Trip, IN>> Alarm, IN>> Trip with
Inrush blocking, IN>> Trip with Latching
0 s
600 s
200 s
0.01 s
0.01 s
I
N_3
Disabled, IN>>> Trip, IN>>> Alarm, IN>>> Trip with Inrush blocking, IN>>> Trip with Latching
0 s 200 0.01 s
TD
TD
P116_EN_TD_A11 v2.7
(TD) 2-22
10.6 Negative Sequence Overcurrent Protection
−
Technical Data
MiCOM P116
Phase current: Fundamental only
Note: When
I
2> is associated with an IDMT curve, the maximum recommended setting is 2
I n.
10.6.1 Protection Setting Ranges
[46] Neg.Seq. OC
I
I
2> ?
2>
Delay Type t
I
2>
I
2> TMS
I
2> Reset Delay Type
DT
I
2> tReset
Setting ranges
Min.
Max.
Step
Disabled, Trip, Alarm, Trip with Inrush blocking, Trip with Latching
0.1
I n 4
I n 0.01
I n
DT or IDMT (IEC_SI, IEC_VI, IEC_EI,
IEC_LTI, IEC_STI, C02_P20, C08, IEEE_MI,
IEEE_VI, IEEE_EI, RXIDG, BPN EDF, RI,
RECT, C02_P40 curve)
0.05 s
0.02
200s
1.5
0.01s
0.01
DT or IDMT (refer to Operation chapter)
0.00 s 600 s 0.01 s
10.7 [46BC] Broken Conductor Protection
Principle used:
I
2/
I
1
Functionality available for:
(
I
A or
I
B or
I
C) > (“GLOBAL SETTINGS/O/C ADVANCED / [46BC] Brkn.Cond I< Block.”)
(Factory setting: 0.1In)
10.7.1 Protection Setting Ranges
[46BC] Broken Conductor
Broken Cond. ?
Ratio
I
2/ tBCond
I
1
GLOBAL SETTINGS/ O/C
ADVANCED
[46BC] Brkn.Cond I< Block.
Setting ranges
Min.
Max.
Step
Disabled, Trip, Alarm, Trip with Inrush blocking, Trip with Latching
20% 100% 1%
0.01s 0.05 s
Setting ranges
600s
Min.
0.1 In
Max.
1.00 In
Step
0.01 Ien
Technical Data
MiCOM P116
10.8 [50BF] CB Fail Protection
−
Undercurrent:
10.8.1 Protection Setting Ranges
Fundamental only
[50BF] Under Current
Setting ranges
Min.
Max.
Step
CB Fail ? Disabled, Retrip, Alarm
CB Fail Time tBF
I
< CBF
High sensitivity current setting
I
N< CBF
0.1 s
0.1
I n
10 s
2
I n
0.01 s
0.01
I n
Cortec: P116x1N 1 Nxxxxxxx1x (1 A) or P116x1N 4 Nxxxxxxx1x (5 A)
0.01
I en 1.0
I en 0.001
I en
Medium sensitivity current setting
I
N< CBF
Cortec: P116x1N 2 Nxxxxxxx1x (1 A) or P116x1N 5 Nxxxxxxx1x (5 A)
0.05
I en 2
I en 0.01
I en
I
Low sensitivity current setting Cortec: P116x1N 3 Nxxxxxxx1x (1 A) or P116x1N 6 Nxxxxxxx1x (5 A)
N< CBF
Block
I
>?
Block
I
N>?
0.1
I en
No, Yes
No, Yes
2
I en 0.01
I en
P116_EN_TD_A11 v2.7
(TD) 2-23
TD
TD
P116_EN_TD_A11 v2.7
(TD) 2-24
10.9 Multishot Autoreclose Function
Technical Data
MiCOM P116
Main shots : 4 independent shots.
External Binary inputs : 6 inputs (CB Faulty External Signal, CB status 52A, CB status 52B, blocking Autoreclose).
Internal programmable trigger from phase and earth fault on all re-closing cycles.
External trigger from logic input (using AUX timer)
Programmable dead times and reclaim time setting.
10.9.1 Multishot auto-recloser Settings
[79] Autoreclose G1/G2
Autoreclose ?
Dead time tD1 tD2 tD3 tD4
Reclaim time
Reclaim Time tR
Phase O/C
Fast tripping shots
Fast O/C Trip (
I
>,
I
>>,
I
>>>)
Setting range
Min.
Max.
Disabled, Enabled
Step
0.01 s
0.01 s
0.1 s
0.1 s
0.02 s
600 s
600 s
600 s
600 s
600 s
0.01 s
0.01 s
0.1 s
0.1 s
0.01 s
5 4 3 2 1 Settings
0 0 0 0 0 0 – delay O/C protection element
1 – with Fast Trip delay
(see below)
Fast O/C Trip Delay setting
E/GND
Fast tripping shots
Fast E/Gnd Trip (
I
N_1,
I
N_2,
I
N_3)
0.00 s 9.99 s 10 ms
5 4 3 2 1 Settings
0 0 0 0 0 0 – Timeelay E/GND protection element
1 – with Fast Trip delay
10 ms Fast E/Gnd Trip Delay setting 0.00 s
Close Shot t
I
> t
I
>> t
I
>>> t
I
N_1 (tIN>) t
I
N_2 (t
I
N>>) t
I
N_3 (t
I
N>>>)
4 3 2 1
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 tAux1 tAux2
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
9.99 s
Settings
0 or 1
0 or 1
0 or 1
0 or 1
0 or 1
0 or 1
0 or 1
0 or 1
Technical Data
MiCOM P116
Setting range
[79] Autoreclose G1/G2
Min.
Inhibit Trip on [79] close shot 4 3 2 1
I nhibit Trip t
I
> Shot:
I nhibit Trip t
I
>> Shot:
I nhibit Trip t
I
>>> Shot:
I nhibit Trip t
I
N_1 (tIN>) Shot:
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
I nhibit Trip t
I
N_2 (t
I
N>>) Shot: 0 0 0 0
I nhibit Trip t
I
N_3 (t
I
N>>>) Shot: 0 0 0 0
I nhibit Trip tAux1 Shot: 0 0 0 0
I nhibit Trip tAux2 Shot: 0 0 0 0
Max.
Settings
0 or 1
0 or 1
0 or 1
0 or 1
0 or 1
0 or 1
0 or 1
0 or 1
Step
P116_EN_TD_A11 v2.7
(TD) 2-25
Cycles:
0 = no action on auto-recloser: definitive trip
1 = trip on protection element pick-up, followed by a reclose cycle
Inhibit Trip on Shot:
0 = no inhibit function
1 = auto-reclose without protection trip (trip command inhibited for protection element - no trip command from the auto-reclose function).
[79] Autoreclose Advanced
Settings
CB Faulty Monitor.?
Block via Input ?
Start Dead t on
Rolling demand ?
Maximum cycle No. Rol.
Demand
Time period Rol. Demand
Inhibit Time on Close tI
Signaling Reset
10.9.2 Further Time-delays
Setting range
Min.
Max.
Yes or No
2 100
Step
Yes or No
Yes or No
Protection Reset or CB trips
1
1 mn
0.0 s
24 h
600 s
No or Close via 79
1 mn
0.01 s
Timeout upon lack of CB opening signal after a trip: tOpen Pulse (*) + 0.1 s (not settable) tClose Pulse (*): from 0.1 to 10.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
(*) Setting available in the CIRCUIT BREAKER menu.
Timeout upon lack of CB closing signal after a close control and its associated dead time: tOpen Pulse (*) + 0.1 s (not settable) tClose Pulse (*): from 0.1 to 10.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
(*) Setting available in the CIRCUIT BREAKER menu.
TD
TD
P116_EN_TD_A11 v2.7
(TD) 2-26
11. AUTOMATION CONTROL FUNCTIONS
11.1
11.2
11.3
Technical Data
MiCOM P116
Trip Commands
The following protection elements may be set to 'Disabled' or 'Trip' or 'Alarm' or 'TRIP-Inrush
Bl' or 'TRIP- Latch'
I
>,
I
>>,
I
>>>,
I
N_1 (IN>), IN_2 (
I
N>>), IN_3 (
I
N>>>), SOTF,
I
2>,
I
<,
Brkn Cond, AUX1, AUX2, AUX3, AUX4.
−
−
The trip command is enabled with the following protection options:
−
TRIP
TRIP with Inrush Blocking
TRIP with Latch
Thermal Overload can be set to 'Enabled' (the trip command is enabled by the second stage if the thermal state is above 100% of thermal state) or 'Disabled'.
The first Thermal stage is for Alarm the second one is for trip.
CB Fail can be set to 'Disabled' or 'Retrip' (the trip command is enabled after ‘CB Fail Time tBF” delay) or 'Alarm'
Latch Functions
The following protection elements may be set to 'Disabled' or 'Trip' or 'Alarm' or 'TRIP-Inrush
Bl' or 'TRIP- Latch'
I
>,
I
>>,
I
>>>, IN_1 (
I
N>), IN_2 (
I
N>>), IN_3 (
I
N>>>), SOTF,
I
2>,
I
<,
Brkn Cond, AUX1, AUX2, AUX3, AUX4.
The latched trip command function is enabled with the following option:
−
TRIP- Latch
Thermal Overload can be latched using the Theta Reset threshold setting.
Blocking Logic
11.4
The following time-delayed stages may be blocked by using binary inputs (setting: SETTING
GROUP 1(2)/INPUT CONFIGURATION G1(G2) column of menu):
− t
I
>, t
I
>>, t
I
>>>, tSOTF, tIN_1, t
I
N_2, t
I
N_3, t
I
<, t
I
2>, tBrkn Cond, tAUX1, tAUX2, tAUX3, tCB Fail, [79] (Note: the high state of mapped to this function logic input blocks
(disables) the auto-reclose element with lockout is blocking occurs while it is running),
I therm (Note: the high state of mapped to this function logic input sets to zero the value at the thermal equivalent current used in the thermal algorithm).
Inrush blocking Logic
Inrush blocking is based on second harmonic criteria.
The following protection elements may be set to 'Disabled' or 'Trip' or 'Alarm' or 'TRIP-Inrush
Bl' or 'TRIP- Latch'
I
>,
I
>>,
I
>>>,
I
N_1 (IN>),
I
N_2 (IN>>),
I
N_3 (IN>>>), SOTF,
I
2>,
I
<,
Brkn Cond, AUX1, AUX2, AUX3, AUX4.
The trip command with Inrush Blocking function is enabled with the following option:
−
Trip-Inrush Bl
There are two methods available:
−
Permanent action based on a 2 nd
harmonic ratio threshold (Inrush Blocking? 1: Yes).
The "Inrush Reset Time" setting is available to this effect.
−
Activation 2 nd
harmonic after CB closing for defined time period (Inrush Blocking? 1:
Closing). The "Unblock Inrush Time" setting is available to this effect.
For more details please refer to the Application chapter of this manual.
Technical Data
MiCOM P116
P116_EN_TD_A11 v2.7
(TD) 2-27
Blocking Inrush
Blocking inrush
2 nd
Harmonic Ratio
Inrush Reset Time
Unblock Inrush Time
Setting range
Min.
Max.
No, Yes, Closing
10% 50%
0 s
0 s
200 s
200 s
Step
1%
10 ms
10 ms
11.5 Logic Selectivity
Logic selectivity 1 and logic selectivity 2: This function is used to assign a time-delay to the protection elements mapped to the “Log Sel” inputs.
Logic Selectivity G1/G2
Sel1? t Sel1
Setting range
Min.
Disabled or Enabled
0 s
Max.
600 s
Step
10 ms
Sel2? t Sel2
Disabled or Enabled
0 s 600 s 10 ms
The inputs can be mapped to the following protection elements:
I
>>,
I
>>>, IN_2 (
I
N>>),
IN_3 (
I
N>>>).
Output Relays 11.6
11.6.1 Output Relays Assignation
Assignable functions: Protection Trip, Protection Trip (pulse), Trip CB Order, Close CB
Order, Alarm, Start Phase A, Start Phase B, Start Phase C,
I
>,
I
>>,
I
>>>, SOTF,
I
N_1
(IN>),
I
N_2 (IN>>),
I
N_3 (IN>>>),
I
<,
I
2>, Start Broken Conductor, AUX1, AUX2, AUX3,
AUX4, AUX5, AUX6, t
I
>, t
I
>>, t
I
>>>, tSOTF, t
I
N_1 (tIN>),
I
N_2 (tIN>>), t
I
N_3 (tIN>>>), t
I
<, t
I
2>, tBrkn Cond, Thermal Trip, Thermal Alarm, CB Fail, tAUX1, tAUX2, tAUX3, tAUX4,
Communication Order 1, Communication Order 2, [79] in Progress, [79] Final Trip, [79]
Lockout, [79] Blocked, [79] Success., Trip Circuit Supervision (TCS 52 Fail), CB Alarm, Trip
Pulse tP, tCB Faulty Ext Signal, Active Setting Group 1(2).
11.6.2 Latch of the auxiliary Output Relays
These output relays can be latched: Output 1 to 6
11.6.3 Reverse Output Relay Logic
The logic of the output relays can be reversed: Output 1 to 6
Note: Reverse logic means that if a function assigned to outputs is disabled the contact is closed. If the function is enabled the contact is opened.
TD
TD
P116_EN_TD_A11 v2.7
(TD) 2-28
11.7 Energy Output for external flag indicator
Technical Data
MiCOM P116
Configuration is made in the same place of menu as for Output Relays (in P116 menu, the symbol for this output is called: ‘ F ’)
Assignable functions: Protection Trip, Trip CB Order, Alarm, t
I
>, t
I
>>, t
I
>>>, tSOTF, t
I
N_1
(tIN>),
I
N_2 (tIN>>), t
I
N_3 (tIN>>>), t
I
<, t
I
2>, tBrkn Cond, Thermal Trip, Thermal Alarm, CB
Fail, tAUX1, tAUX2, tAUX3, tAUX4, Communication Order 1, Communication Order 2, [79]
Final Trip, [79] Lockout, [79] Blocked, [79] Success., Trip Circuit Supervision (TCS 52 Fail),
CB Alarm, tCB Faulty Ext Signal.
11.8
Note: If flag indicator is set to reverse logic above assigning is ignored and on the output is permanently available voltage with trip energy.
Trip Energy Output for sensitive tripping coil or striker
Configuration is made in the same place of menu as for Output Relays (in P116 menu, the symbol for this output is called: ‘ T ’)
Assignable functions: Protection Trip, Trip CB Order, t
I
>, t
I
>>, t
I
>>>, tSOTF, t
I
N_1 (tIN>),
I
N_2 (tIN>>), t
I
N_3 (tIN>>>), t
I
<, t
I
2>, tBrkn Cond, Thermal Trip, tAUX1, tAUX2, tAUX3, tAUX4, Communication Order 1, Communication Order 2, [79] Final Trip.
Note: by default no any function is assigned to this trip energy output. If the energy output is used it must be configured to required to the function listed above. For typical application this output is assigned to ‘Protection Trip’ (if this output has to be energized by protection trip only) or additionally to ‘Trip CB Order’ (if this output has to be energized by manual trip too: via RS485, binary input or from P116 front panel. It will be executed if relay has any source of supplying only: Vx or enough energy from CTs )
11.9 Inputs
11.9.1 Input Assignation
A single function or multiple automation functions can be assigned to 6 logic inputs:
None, Maintenance Mode, Reset Latched Signaling, Reset Latched Outputs, Block t
I
>,
Block t
I
>>, Block t
I
>>>, Block tSOTF, Block t
I
N_1 (tIN>), Block t
I
N_2 (tIN>>), Block t
I
N_3
(tIN>>>), Block t
I
<, Block t
I
2>, Block tBrkn Cond, , Block
I therm, Block AUX1, Block AUX2,
Block AUX3, Block. CB Fail, Block [79], Sel1 t
I
>>, Sel1 t
I
>>>, Sel1 t
I
N_2 (tIN>>), Sel1 t
I
N_3 (tIN>>>), Sel2 t
I
>>, Sel2 t
I
>>>, Sel2 t
I
N_2 (tIN>>), Sel2 t
I
N_3 (tIN>>>), AUX1,
AUX2, AUX3, AUX4, AUX5, AUX6, Cold Load PU, Start tBF, CB status 52a, CB status 52b,
CB Faulty External Signal, Setting Group 2, Manual Close, Manual Trip, Trip Circuit
Supervision, Reset Theta Value, Start Disturbance Recorder, Local CTRL Mode, Time
Synchronization.
11.9.2 Reverse Input Logic
The logic of the inputs can be reversed: Output 1 to 6
Note: Reverse logic means that if an input is energized, the function assigned to this input is disabled. If the input is not energized, the function is enabled.
11.10 Optional Flag Indicators Configuration
Assignable functions: t
I
>, t
I
>>, t
I
>>>, tSOTF, t
I
N_1 (tIN>),
I
N_2 (tIN>>), t
I
N_3 (tIN>>>), t
I
<, t
I
2>, tBrkn Cond, Thermal Trip, CB Fail, tAUX1, tAUX2, tAUX3, tAUX4, [79] Final Trip,
[79] Lockout, [79] Success.
Technical Data
MiCOM P116
11.11 Auxiliary Timers
Auxiliary timers G1/G2
Aux1 ?
Time-delay tAux1
Aux2 ?
Time-delay tAux2
Aux3 ?
Time-delay tAux3
Aux4 ?
Setting range
Min. Max. Step
Disabled, Trip, Alarm, Trip with
Inrush blocking, Trip with Latching,
Load Shedding (LS), AR after LS Hi
(Hi state – activates), AR after LS Lo
(Lo state – activates)
0 600 s 10 ms
Disabled, Trip, Alarm, Trip with
Inrush blocking, Trip with Latching,
Load Shedding (LS), AR after LS Hi,
AR after LS Lo
0 600 s 10 ms
Disabled, Trip, Alarm, Trip with
Inrush blocking, Trip with Latching,
Load Shedding (LS), AR after LS Hi,
AR after LS Lo
0 600 s 10 ms
Disabled, Trip, Alarm, Trip with
Inrush blocking, Trip with Latching,
Load Shedding (LS), AR after LS Hi,
AR after LS Lo
0 600 s 10 ms Time-delay tAux4
11.12 Cold Load Pickup
Cold Load PU G1/G2
Cold Load PU ?
Cold load PU Level
Cold load PU tCL
CLPU
I
>
CLPU
I
>>
CLPU
I
>>>
CLPU
I
N_1 (IN>)
CLPU
I
N_2 (IN>>)
CLPU
I
N_3 (IN>>>)
CLPU Brkn Cond
CLPU
I therm
CLPU
I
2>
Setting range
Min.
Disabled or Current+Input or Input
20%
0s
Yes or No
Yes or No
Yes or No
Yes or No
Yes or No
Yes or No
Yes or No
Yes or No
Yes or No
Max.
999%
6000 s
Step
1%
100 ms
P116_EN_TD_A11 v2.7
(TD) 2-29
TD
TD
P116_EN_TD_A11 v2.7
(TD) 2-30
11.13 Circuit Breaker
11.13.1 CB Time Setting Ranges
CB Control Time tOpen Pulse min tClose Pulse
Time-delay for Close
Setting range
Min.
0.1 s
0.1 s
0.0 s tP pulse 1 mn
11.13.2 Time-delay for Faulty CB External Signal
Max.
10 s
10 s
200 s
Step
0.01 s
0.01 s
0.01 s
65000 mn 1 mn
CB Faulty External
Monitoring tCB FLT Ext. Sign.
11.13.3 Remote Control Mode
Setting range
Min. Max.
1 s 200 s
Step
1 s
Remote Control Mode Setting range
Remote CTRL Mode Remote only
Remote + Local
11.13.4 Unblock SOTF Time pulse after CB Close
Unblock SOTF Time
Setting range
Min. Max.
52 Unblock SOTF Time 0 s
11.13.5 Trip Circuit Supervision Setting Ranges
200 s
Step
0.01 s
TC Supervision
Setting range
Min. Max. Step
TC Supervision ? No or Yes or Yes-52A
TC Supervision tSUP 0.1 s 10 s
11.13.6 Circuit Breaker Control and Monitoring Setting Ranges
0.01 s
CB Supervision
CB Time Supervision?
Max CB Open time
Max CB Close time
CB Diagnostic ?
Max CB Open No.
Max Sum Amps^n
AMPS’s n=
Setting range
Min. Max.
Yes or No
0.01 s
0.01 s
10 s
10 s
Yes or No
1 50000
0 MA
1
655.34
MA^n
2
Step
0.01 s
0.01 s
1
0.1MA^n
1
Technical Data
MiCOM P116
Technical Data
MiCOM P116
11.14 Communication Orders
Command via RS485.
Output contacts can be configured to tCOM1 or tCOM2
Communication Orders
Pulse Time tCOM1
Pulse Time tCOM2
COM2 Order Conf.
Setting range
Min.
0
Max.
200s
Step
10ms
0 200s 10ms
RS485 or RS485+Button_C or
Button_C
This configuration allows adding to
Comm.Order 2: pressing of the ‘C’ clear key located on the front panel of
P116.
Setting option: RS485+Button_C means that if command tCOM2
(Communication Order 2) via RS485 is executed or ‘C’ Clear key on the front panel is pressed, the output contact assigned to Comm.Order 2 will be energized via set pulse time
P116_EN_TD_A11 v2.7
(TD) 2-31
TD
P116_EN_TD_A11 v2.7
(TD) 2-32
12. RECORDING FUNCTIONS
12.1 Event Records
Capacity
Time-tag
Triggers
200 events
1 millisecond
Any selected protection alarm and threshold
Logic input change of state
Logic output change of state
Self test events
TD
12.2 Fault Records
Capacity
Time-tag
Triggers
Data
20 faults
1 millisecond
Any selected protection which trip CB
Fault date
Fault time
Protection thresholds
Active Setting Group
Fault Origin (faulty phase/earth)
Fault measurements
12.3
12.4
Technical Data
MiCOM P116
Instantaneous Recorder (available if P116 is powered from Vx only)
Capacity
Time-tag
Triggers
Data
5 starting information (instantaneous)
1 millisecond
Any selected protection which trip CB
Date, hour origin (any protection)
Alarm Recorder
Capacity
Time-tag
Triggers
Data
5 alarm information
1 millisecond
Any selected protection which is selected for signalling only (set to
Alarm)
Date, hour origin (any protection alarm)
Technical Data
MiCOM P116
P116_EN_TD_A11 v2.7
(TD) 2-33
12.5 Disturbance Records
12.5.1 Triggers, Data, Setting Ranges
Disturbance Records Total record: up to 6s, but not more than 5 records
Triggers
Data
Pre-fault Time
Post-fault Time
Max Record time
Disturb rec Trig
Trigger
13. COMMUNICATION
Any selected protection alarm and threshold, logic input, remote command
AC input channels digital input and output states frequency value
Default value
0.1
0.1
3 on Inst
Min.
0.1
0.1
0.1
6
1
Setting range
Max.
6.0 on Trip or on Inst.
Step
0.01
0.01
0.01
Protection selected for tripping, Logic input assigned to ‘Start
Distur.R.’
Type
Port
Physical
Link
Connectors Data Rate Comms. mode Protocol
RS485 Screened twisted pair
Screws or snap-on
USB USB2.0 PC: type A male
P116: type mini B male
4.8 or 9.6 or 19.2 or
38.4 or 57.6 or
115.2 kbits/s
(default:19.2 kbit/s)
Data Bit: 8
Stop bit: 1 or 2
Parity: ‘No parity’ or ‘Odd parity’ or ‘Even parity’
(default: No parity)
Address: 1 to 254
(default: 254)
Modbus RTU or
IEC60870-5-103
(selectable in menu)
(default: IEC103)
115.2 kbits/s
(fixed)
Data Bit:8
Stop bit: 1
Parity: None
Adress: 1
Modbus RTU
TD
TD
P116_EN_TD_A11 v2.7
(TD) 2-34
14. CURVES
14.1
Technical Data
MiCOM P116
General
Although the curves tend towards infinite when the current approaches
I s (general threshold), the minimum guaranteed value of the operating current for all the curves with the inverse time characteristic is 1.1
G s (with a tolerance of ± 0.05
G s). In menu of P116 it is possible to select if the curve has no limitation for greater current value, is blocked via DMT stages or is cut (the same time delay as for 20 x Gs point for current above 20 x Gs, where
Gs - current setting). Setting parameter: GLOBAL SETTINGS/ O/C ADVANCED / IDMT
interlock by DMT. Above setting is common for all IDMT stages.
14.1.1 Inverse Time Curves
The first phase (or earth) overcurrent stage can be selected with an inverse definite minimum time (IDMT) characteristic. The time-delay is calculated using a mathematical formula.
In all, there are eleven IDMT characteristics available.
The mathematical formula applicable to the first ten curves is: t
=
TMS
×
G
Gs k
α
−
P
+ c
Where: t Operation time k, c,
α
, P
G
G s
Constant (see table)
Value of measured current
Value of the programmed threshold (pick-up value)
TMS Time multiplier setting (for IEC: TMS; IEEE: TD)
Type of curve
(according to IEC60255-
151 std definition)
Standard
IEC Standard inverse (SI) IEC/A
IEC Very inverse (VI) IEC/B
IEC Extremely inverse (EI) IEC/C
Long time inverse (LTI) IEC
FR Short time inverse (STI) FR
US Short time inverse
US Short time inverse
C02 P20
C02 P40 k c
0.14
13.5
80
0
0
0
0.02
1
2
120
0.05
0
0
1
0.04
0.02394 0.01694 0.02
0.16758 0.11858 0.02
Long time inverse
Moderately Inverse
Very inverse
Extremely inverse
UK Rectifier protection
C08
RECT
5.95
IEEE (IEC/D) 0.0515
IEEE (IEC/E) 19.61
IEEE (IEC/F) 28.2
45900
0.18
0.114
0.491
0.1217
0
BNP (EDF)
RI
EDF 1000
-4.2373
0.655
0
2
-1
Note: For RI curve the equation is valid for the range: 1.1
≤ G
/
G s
≤
20
2
0.02
2
2
5.6
α
P
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.43644
Technical Data
MiCOM P116
RXIDG Curves
P116_EN_TD_A11 v2.7
(TD) 2-35
RXIDG curves can be selected on P116 with medium earth current sensitivity (corresponding to Cortec model number P116xxx2xxxxxxxxxx)
The first earth thresholds can be selected with dedicated RXIDG curves.
The curves available follow the formula: t = 5.8 – 1.35 * ln ( 1/ (k * Gs/G))
Where: t = tripping time k = coefficient (from 0.3 to 1, by steps of 0.01)
Gs = value of the programmed threshold (Pick-up value)
G = value of measured current
In order to be compliant with the Netmanagement specifications the relay must be used with:
•
An earth current range 0.01 Ion to 8 Ion
•
A rated current wiring 1A
•
A core balanced CT with a ratio 25/1.
14.1.2 Reset Timer
The first phase and earth overcurrent stages and the second phase overcurrent stage are provided with a timer hold facility: "t Reset".
The value that is set for this reset timer corresponds to the minimum time during which the current value needs to be lower than 95% of the phase (or earth) threshold before the corresponding phase (or earth) time-delay is reset.
Note: There is an exception to this rule when the protection triggers. In fact, in that case, the time-delays (t
I
> and t
I e>) are immediately reset.
The value of the Reset Timer depends on the type of timer associated with the pick-up of the first phase (or earth) stage.
Type of timer associated with the first & second phase O/C stages and the first earth fault stage
Reset Timer
DMT Reset characteristic
DMT, Rectifier, LTI, STI,
Rectifier, BNP EDF, RXIDG
IDMT IEC or RI
IDMT characteristic
Settable from 0 to 600 ms Not available. If IDMT is selected: reset timer is set to
0s (see table below: K=0)
Settable from 0 to 600 ms Based on RTMS value
(refer to Operation chapter)
IDMT IEEE or CO Settable from 0 to 600 ms Based on RTD value
(refer to Operation chapter)
Reset timer:
The first phase, earth and negative sequence overcurrent stages are provided with a timer hold facility: "t Reset".
TD
TD
P116_EN_TD_A11 v2.7 Technical Data
(TD) 2-36 MiCOM P116
It may be set to a definite time value or to an inverse definite minimum time characteristic
(IEC/IEEE/ANSI curves only). This may be useful in certain applications, for example when grading with upstream electromechanical overcurrent relays that have inherent reset timedelays.
The second and third earth fault stages have only a definite time reset.
A possible situation where the reset timer may be used is to reduce fault clearance times where intermittent faults occur.
An example may occur in a cable with plastic insulation. In this application it is possible that the fault energy melts the cable insulation, which then reseals after clearance, thereby eliminating the cause for the fault. This process repeats itself to give a succession of fault current pulses, each of increasing duration with reducing intervals between the pulses, until the fault becomes permanent.
When the reset time of the overcurrent relay is set to its minimum, the relay will be repeatedly reset and will not be able to trip until the fault becomes permanent. By using the reset timer hold function the relay will integrate the fault current pulses, thereby reducing the fault clearance time.
The mathematical formula applicable to the five curves is: t
=
RT
×
1
− tr
G
Gs p
Where: t Reset time tr, p Constant (see table)
G
Value of the measured current
G s Value of the programmed threshold (pick-up value)
RT Reset time multiplier (RTMS for IEC or RTD for IEEE/US) setting between 0.025 and
1.5.
Type of curve
US Short time inverse
US Short time inverse
Long time inverse
IEEE Moderately inverse (MI)
IEEE Very inverse (VI)
IEEE Extremely Inverse (EI)
IEC Standard Inverse Time (SI)
IEC Very Inverse Time (VI)
IEC Extremely Inverse Time (EI)
IEC Long Time Inverse (LTI)
FR Short Time Inverse (STI)
UK Rectifier (Rect)
BNP EDF
RXIDG
RI
Standard
C02_P40
C02_P20
C08
IEEE
ANSI/IEEE
ANSI/IEEE
IEC/A
IEC/B
IEC/C
IEC
FR
UK
BNP EDF
RXIDG
RI
0
0
0
0
50.92
44.1
40.62
0 tr
2.261
0.323
5.950
4.850
21.600
29.100
8.2
2
2
2
2
2.4
3.03
0.4
2
2
2 p
2
2
2
2
6.45
Technical Data
MiCOM P116
14.2 Thermal Overload Curves
The thermal time characteristic is given by: e
τ t
=
(
I ²
−
( 1 .
(
I ²
05
−
⋅
I p
I
² therm
)
)²
)
P116_EN_TD_A11 v2.7
(TD) 2-37
Where: t
τ
I
I therm
= Tripping time, following application of the overload current, I
= Heating and cooling time constant of the protected plant
= Highest phase current
= Setting value of thermal model.
I t is the full load current rating (
I
FLC
) multiplied by a safety factor (for example 1.05, which allows continuous operation up to <
1.05
I
FLC
)
I
P
= Steady state pre-loading current before application of the overload
The tripping time varies depending on the load current carried before application of the overload, i.e. whether the overload was applied from "hot" or "cold".
The thermal overload time characteristic curves are given in the Technical Data chapter.
If the current in any phase is above 0.1 x
I therm
setting value the mathematical formula is following: t Trip
=
Te In
K² -
θ p
K ²
− θ t rip
Where: t Trip = Tripping time (in seconds)
T e
= Thermal time constant of the protected plant (in seconds)
K = Thermal overload equal to
1 .
05
I eq
⋅
I therm
I eq
I
P
I therm
= Equivalent current corresponding to the RMS value of the highest phase current
θ
P
= Steady state pre-loading thermal state before application of the overload
θ alarm
= Initial thermal state. If the initial thermal state = 30% then
θ
=0.3
θ trip
= Steady state pre-loading current before application of the overload
= Setting value.
I t is the full load current rating
= Trip thermal state. If the trip thermal state is set at 100%, then
θ trip = 1
The settings of these parameters are available in the various menus. The calculation of the thermal state is given by the following formula:
Θ
τ +
1
=
1 .
05
I eq
⋅
I therm
²
1
− e t
Te
+ Θ
τ e
− t
Te
θ
is calculated every 10 ms.
TD
TD
P116_EN_TD_A11 v2.7 Technical Data
(TD) 2-38 MiCOM P116
If all the phase currents are above 0.1 x
I therm
the value of Tr (time constant for cooling) is used instead of Te (time constant for heating).
In a typical application (transformer, cable, ...) Tr should be equal to Te. Different setting values of Te and Tr are only used in motor applications.
Getting Started
MiCOM P116
P116_EN_GS_A11 v2.7
(GS) 3-1
GS
GETTING STARTED
Date:
Hardware Suffix:
Software Version:
Connection Diagrams:
17 th
November 2013
A
1C
10P11602
GS
P116_EN_GS_A11 v2.7
(GS) 3-2
Getting Started
MiCOM P116
Getting Started
MiCOM P116
CONTENTS
Auxiliary Power Supply Connections (Model A)
Powering up from the measured currents only
USER INTERFACES AND MENU STRUCTURE
Special symbols on the LCD display
Auxiliary Supply Voltage (Vx) connection (Model A)
Flag indicator output (Model A)
Introduction to the user interfaces and setting options
Changing parameters via the front panel user interface (HMI)
SETTTING GROUP columns (model A)
Automatic installation via an Internet connection (no setup files needed)
USB Driver and virtual COM software installation from the setup file
USB Driver and virtual COM software installation
Products plugged into the same panel
MiCOM S1 and MiCOM S1 Studio relay communications basics
P116_EN_GS_A11 v2.7
(GS) 3-3
GS
GS
P116_EN_GS_A11 v2.7
(GS) 3-4
“Quick Connection” to the relay using MiCOM S1 Studio
Open communication link with relay
Troubleshooting USB connection
Presentation and analysis of disturbances
FIGURES
Figure 2: Terminals View of the P116 (Model A)
Figure 3: Column headers (Model A)
Figure 4: ALARM column (Model A)
Figure 5: RECORDS column (Model A)
Figure 6: SETTING GROUP 1 columns (Model A)
Figure 7: GLOBAL SETTINGS column (Model A)
Figure 8: COMMISSIONING column (model A)
Figure 9: SETTING CHANGE MODE column
Figure 10: P116 Model A Menu Map 1 (Firmware: 1C)
Figure 11: P116 Model A Menu Map 2 (Firmware: 1C)
Figure 12: P116 Model A Menu Map 3 (Firmware: 1C)
Figure 13: P116 Model A Menu Map 4 (Firmware: 1C)
Figure 14: P116 Model A Menu Map 5 (Firmware: 1C)
Figure 15: P116 Model A Menu Map 6 (Firmware: 1C)
Figure 16: P116 Model A Menu Map 7 (Firmware: 1C)
Figure 17: P116 Model A Menu Map 8 (Firmware: 1C)
Getting Started
MiCOM P116
Getting Started
MiCOM P116
Figure 18: P116 Model A Menu Map 9 (Firmware: 1C)
Figure 19: P116 Model A Menu Map 10 (Firmware: 1C)
Figure 20: P116 Model A Menu Map 11 (Firmware: 1C)
Figure 21: P116 Model A Menu Map 12 (Firmware: 1C)
Figure 22: P116 Model L Menu Map 1 (Firmware: 1C)
Figure 23: P116 Model L Menu Map 2 (Firmware: 1C)
Figure 24: P116 Model L Menu Map 3 (Firmware: 1C)
P116_EN_GS_A11 v2.7
(GS) 3-5
GS
GS
P116_EN_GS_A11 v2.7
(GS) 3-6
Getting Started
MiCOM P116
BEFORE CARRYING OUT ANY WORK ON THE EQUIPMENT, THE
USER SHOULD BE FAMILIAR WITH THE CONTENTS OF THE SAFETY
GUIDE SFTY/4L M/E11 OR LATER ISSUE, OR THE SAFETY AND
TECHNICAL DATA SECTION OF THE TECHNICAL MANUAL AND ALSO
THE RATINGS ON THE EQUIPMENT RATING LABEL.
For safety reasons, no work must be carried out on the P116 until all power sources to the unit have been disconnected.
Getting Started
MiCOM P116
1.
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
P116_EN_GS_A11 v2.7
(GS) 3-7
RELAY POWER UP
Follow the following instructions carefully in order to correctly power up the relay.
System Connections
Check the wiring scheme of your installation.
Check that the output relay contacts are included in your trip circuit.
Auxiliary Power Supply Connections (Model A)
Connect a DC or AC (according to nominal supply rating V
AUX
) voltage power supply.
Positive V
AUX
to terminal B1
Negative V
AUX
to terminal B2
DO NOT FORGET TO CONNECT THE EARTH REFERENCE WIRE TO
THE SCREW TERMINAL (SEE FIGURE 2)!
Turn on the auxiliary power supply and set to approximately the rated voltage as shown on the relay's front panel.
The display should show:
1.00 A 1.00 A
1.00 A 1.00 A
Displays:
- first line: phases A and B currents,
- second line: phase C current and earth current, taking into account the phase CT ratio (GLOBAL
SETTINGS/CT RATIO submenu).
The LEDs should be configured as follows:
−
The green LED "Healthy" (watchdog) is illuminated
The configuration of the remaining LEDs depends on the relay's history before powering
(if the LEDs are configured as latching their state is stored in memory, therefore after repowering they are illuminated again until they are manually reset).
Powering up from the USB port
Only some of the relay's electronic circuits, for the HMI communications, are supplied from the USB port.
Note: Since the I/O boards are not supplied from the USB port the inputs' status is set to default value.
Additionally, output contacts are not operational therefore it is impossible to execute any commands.
Powering up from the measured currents only
Phase current / Earth current range which gives reduced functionality: at least in a one phase or earth and
Outputs relays: RL1 only,
Energy Outputs: Sensitive Tripping
I
Coil and External Flag Indicator
I
A
-
I
B
I + I
I
C
+
I
N
1)
I
≤ 0.65 I n
1)
> 0.2
I n
Flags: “Trip” flag only.
Note: LCD display, RL2-RL6, WD, LEDs and
RS485, 2-5 Flags are inactive up to full functionality stage (see below)
1) Powering of P116 from earth input is selectable by using proper terminals (A7-8: with powering or A9-10: without powering) and additionally by configuration in P116 menu (GLOBAL
SETTINGS/CT RATIO/IN connection). Refer to the Settings
(P116/EN ST) and the Installation chapter (P116/EN IN).
Full functionality of P116 powered from current only at least in a one phase or earth
1)
> 0.65
I n or
I
I
A
-
I
B
I + I
I
C
+
I
N
1)
I > 0.65
I n
GS
GS
P116_EN_GS_A11 v2.7
(GS) 3-8
2.
2.1
2.1.1
Getting Started
MiCOM P116
USER INTERFACES AND MENU STRUCTURE
The settings and functions of the MiCOM protection relay can be accessed both from the front panel keypad and LCD, and via the front and rear communication ports. Information on each of these methods is given in this section to describe how to start using the relay.
Introduction to the relay
2.1.2
Front panel
The front panel of the relay is shown in Figure 1.
−
−
The front panel of the relay includes:
− a 16-character by 2-line alphanumeric liquid crystal display (LCD)
− a 9-key keypad comprising 4 arrow keys (
,
,
,
), an OK key, a clear key
(
), a read key (
), a trip command key (
) and a close command key (
).
8 LEDs a USB port for local communications
Special symbols on the LCD display
The following special symbols may appear on the LCD display:
- It is possible to move up by pressing the
key.
- It is possible to move left by pressing the
key.
- It is possible to move down by pressing the
key.
- It is possible to move right by pressing the
key.
- The last menu cell in the column. If the
key is pressed here the cursor will reach the first cell in the column.
- It is possible to edit the displayed values.
<0.1 40> - Setting range: from 0.1 to 40.
0.01 - Setting value step: 0.01.
- On the last line: Setting group 1 is displayed.
- On the last line: Setting group 2 is displayed.
- Edition of values on the display password-protected
- Edition of setting value is possible (the level correct password has been entered)
Getting Started
MiCOM P116
2.1.3
P116_EN_GS_A11 v2.7
(GS) 3-9
Indications
Fixed Function LEDS:
Healthy – Powering of microprocessor and no hardware problems detected (green LED)
Trip – Any trip caused by protection criteria
And 6 programmable LEDS for the following functions (OR logic):
Protect.Trip
–
Alarm –
General Start –
Start Phase A –
Start Phase B –
Trip by protection elements
Alarm signal
Start of protection elements set to trip the CB
Start of the phase overcurrent element (set to trip) in phase A
Start of the phase overcurrent element (set to trip) in phase B
Start of the phase overcurrent element (set to trip) in phase C Start Phase C –
Start
I
> –
Start
I
>> –
Start
I
>>> –
Start SOTF –
Start
I
N_1 –
Start
I
N_2 –
Start
I
N_3 –
AUX1 –
AUX2 –
AUX3 –
AUX4 –
AUX5 –
AUX6 – t
I
> – t
I
>> – t
I
>>> – tSOTF – t
I
N_1 – t
I
N_2 – t
I
N_3 – t
I
< –
Start of the first phase overcurrent stage
Start of the second phase overcurrent stage
Start of the third phase overcurrent stage
Start of the Switch On To Fault overcurrent element
Start of the first earth fault overcurrent stage
Start of the second earth fault overcurrent stage
Start of the third earth fault overcurrent stage
Trigger of AUX1 timer (via a binary input) (Model A)
Trigger of AUX2 timer (via a binary input) (Model A)
Trigger of AUX3 timer (via a binary input) (Model A)
Trigger of AUX4 timer (via a binary input)
(Model A)
(Model A)
Trigger of AUX5 function (via a binary input) (Model A)
Trigger of AUX6 function (via a binary input) (Model A)
The first phase o/c stage time-delay is elapsed (if flashing: start)
The second phase o/c stage time-delay is elapsed (if flashing: start)
The third phase o/c stage time-delay is elapsed (if flashing: start)
SOTF element time-delay is elapsed (if flashing: start) (Model A)
The first earth fault o/c stage time-delay is elapsed (if flashing: start)
The second earth fault o/c stage time is elapsed (if flashing: start)
The third earth fault o/c stage time-delay is elapsed (if flashing: start)
Trip by the undercurrent element time is elapsed (if flashing: start)
(Model A) t
I
2> – t Brkn Cond –
Thermal Trip –
The negative sequence o/c element time is elapsed (if flashing: start)
(Model A)
Trip by Broken Conductor protection time is elapsed (if flashing: start)
(Model A)
Trip by Thermal Overload protection (if flashing: alarm)
Thermal Alarm – Thermal Overload protection alarm
CB Fail – Circuit Breaker Failure protection time-delay elapsed tAUX1 – tAUX1 time-delay elapsed (if flashing: start) (Model A)
GS
GS
P116_EN_GS_A11 v2.7
(GS) 3-10 tAUX2 – tAUX3 – tAUX4 – tAUX2 time-delay elapsed (if flashing: start) (Model A) tAUX3 time-delay elapsed (if flashing: start) (Model A) tAUX4 time-delay elapsed (if flashing: start) (Model A)
[79] in Progress – The auto-reclose function is running (Model A)
Getting Started
MiCOM P116
[79] F. Trip –
[79] Lockout –
Auto-reclose not successful: Final trip (Model A)
Lockout of the auto-reclose function (Model A)
[79] Blocked – The auto-reclose function is blocked (Model A)
[79] Success.
– The auto-reclose operation is successful (the CB remains closed)
(Model A)
Local CTRL Mode – Local Mode for CB control (Model A)
CB Alarm –
Mainten. Mode –
Circuit Breaker condition alarm signal (CB Open NB, Sum Amps(n),
TCS 52 Fail, CB Open Time and CB Close Time) (Model A)
Maintenance Mode (outputs are disconnected from all functions) tCB FLT Ext.Sign
. – An input mapped to this function detects CB problems that may influence control possibilities (for example spring problem, insufficient pressure, etc.). Signaling is active during a settable time ( GLOBAL
SETTINGS/ CIRCUIT BREAKER/ tCB FLT Ext.Sign.
) (Model A)
Setting Group n – Setting Group n active (n= 1, 2) (Model A)
Every LED can be configured to be latched or self-resetting ( SETTING GROUP 1/ LEDS
CONFIGURATION G1/ Latched LEDs ).
Note: Model L has only one setting group
If a LED is configured as latching, the manner in which it will be reset is selectable:
Resetting of LEDs via manual reset ( GLOBAL SETTINGS/LOC/LEDs Reset 0: Manual only )
Resetting of LEDs via any protection start (set for CB tripping) or via manual reset
( GLOBAL SETTINGS/LOC/LEDs Reset 1: Start protect.)
Resetting of LEDs via manual close command (RS485, HMI or Input) or via manual reset
( GLOBAL SETTINGS/LOC/LEDs Reset 2: Close Command) (Model A)
External fault indication can be provided via an external Flag Indicator which should be connected to terminals C3-C4 (Model A) .
The energy (24 V / 0.01 J) necessary to trip the Flag Indicator is taken from a capacitor charged via the CT currents and the auxiliary voltage. The Flag Indicator output is programmable (special symbol” “F” in first line SETTING GROUP 1(2)OUTPUT RELAY
CONFIGURATION G1(2 ) column) (Model A) :
Protection Trip – Trip by protection elements set to trip the CB
Trip CB Order – Manual trip via a Binary Input, the Front Panel user interface or a
Close Command via RS485 communications
Alarm – Alarm signal (protection stage set to signal alarms, CB alarm , CB FLT
Ext.Sign.
, TCS 52 Fail , Thermal Alarm ) t
I
> – t
I
>> – t
I
>>> –
Trip by the first phase overcurrent stage (if flashing: start)
Trip by the second phase overcurrent stage (if flashing: start)
Trip by the third phase overcurrent stage (if flashing: start)
Getting Started
MiCOM P116
P116_EN_GS_A11 v2.7
(GS) 3-11 tSOTF – t
I
N_1 – t
I
N_2 – t t t
I
I
I
N_3
<
–
–
2> – t Brkn Cond –
Therm Trip –
Therm Alarm –
CB Fail – tAUX1 –
Trip by SOTF element (if flashing: start)
Trip by the first earth fault overcurrent stage (if flashing: start)
Trip by the second earth fault overcurrent stage (if flashing: start)
Trip by the third earth fault overcurrent stage (if flashing: start)
Trip by the undercurrent element (if flashing: start) (Model A)
Trip by the negative sequence overcurrent element (if flashing: start)
(Model A)
Trip by Broken Conductor protection (if flashing: start)
Trip by Thermal Overload protection (if flashing: alarm)
Thermal Overload protection alarm
Circuit Breaker Failure protection time-delay elapsed tAUX1 time-delay elapsed (if flashing: start)
(Model A) tAUX2 – tAUX3 – tAUX4 – tAUX2 time-delay elapsed (if flashing: start) (Model A) tAUX3 time-delay elapsed (if flashing: start) (Model A) tAUX4 time-delay elapsed (if flashing: start)
(Model A)
Comm.Order 1 – Order received via RS485 communications (Model A)
Comm.Order 2 - Order received via RS485 communications (Model A)
[79] F.Trip
–
[79] Lockout –
Auto-reclose not successful: Final trip
Lockout of the auto-reclose function
(Model A)
(Model A)
(Model A)
[79] Success.
–
[79] Blocked –
TCS 52 Fail –
The auto-reclose operation is successful (the CB remains closed)
(Model A)
The auto-reclose function is blocked (Model A)
Trip Circuit Supervision has detected a fault in the CB's circuit (Model A)
CB Alarm – Circuit Breaker Alarm function signal ( Max CB Open No ., Max Sum
Amps^n , TCS 52 Fail , Max CB Open Time and Max CB Close Time )
(Model A) tCB FLT Ext.Sign.
– An input mapped to this function detects CB problems that may influence control possibilities (for example spring problem, insufficient pressure, etc.). Signaling is active after settable time-delay ( GLOBAL
SETTINGS/CIRCUIT BREAKER/ tCB FLT ext ) (Model A)
There are up to five (Model A) or one (model L) electromagnetic flag indicators on the front panel
(one as standard; the additional four as an ordering option). Flag indicators can be reset using the key on the front panel or a signaling command (via RS485 communications, a binary input or the USB port) depends on the configuration:
Resetting of LEDs via manual reset ( GLOBAL SETTINGS/LOC/LEDs Reset 0: Manual only )
Resetting of LEDs via any protection start (set for CB tripping) or via manual reset
( GLOBAL SETTINGS/LOC/LEDs Reset 1: Start protect.)
Resetting of LEDs via manual close command (RS485, HMI or Input) or via manual reset
( GLOBAL SETTINGS/LOC/LEDs Reset 2: Close Command) .
Note:
GS
GS
P116_EN_GS_A11 v2.7
(GS) 3-12
Getting Started
MiCOM P116
•
In Model A it is impossible to reset the electromagnetic flag indicators without powering (Vx or CTs) of P116. Therefore if such a function is required an external flag indicator must be used instead of the electromagnetic flag indicators.
•
In Model A it is not possible to reset the electromagnetic flag indicators if P116 is powered from USB only
•
In Model L it is possible to reset the electromagnetic flag indicators if P116 is powered from CTs or USB.
In Model A, the electromagnetic Optional Flag Indicators are programmable ( GLOBAL
SETTINGS/OPTIONAL FLAG INDICATORS CONF.) :
Flag Ind. t
I
> –
Flag Ind. t
I
>> –
Trip by the first phase overcurrent stage (if flashing: start)
Trip by the second phase overcurrent stage (if flashing: start)
Flag Ind. t
I
>>> – Trip by the third phase overcurrent stage (if flashing: start)
Flag Ind. tSOTF - Trip by SOTF element (if flashing: start)
Flag Ind. t
I
N_1 –
Flag Ind. t
I
N_2 –
Flag Ind. t
I
N_3 –
Flag Ind. t
I
< -
Flag Ind. t
I
2> –
Trip by the first earth fault overcurrent stage (if flashing: start)
Trip by the second earth fault overcurrent stage (if flashing: start)
Trip by the third earth fault overcurrent stage (if flashing: start)
Trip by the undercurrent element (if flashing: start)
Trip by the negative sequence overcurrent element (if flashing: start)
Flag Ind. t Brkn Cond -Trip by the Broken Conductor protection (if flashing: start)
Flag Ind. Therm Trip -Trip by Thermal Overload protection (if flashing: alarm)
Flag Ind. CB Fail – Circuit Breaker Failure protection time-delay elapsed
Flag Ind. tAUX1 – Time delay tAUX1 elapsed (if flashing: start)
Flag Ind. tAUX2 – Time delay tAUX2 elapsed (if flashing: start)
Flag Ind. tAUX3 – Time delay tAUX3 elapsed (if flashing: start)
Flag Ind. tAUX4 – Time delay tAUX4 elapsed (if flashing: start)
Flag Ind. [79] F. Trip – Auto-reclose not successful: Final trip.
Flag Ind. [79] Lockout – Lockout of the auto-reclose function.
Flag Ind. [79] Success.
- The auto-reclose operation is successful (the CB remains closed)
Getting Started
MiCOM P116
1
2
3
4
12
5
6
8
7
10
11
P116_EN_GS_A11 v2.7
(GS) 3-13
9
GS
1 – Green “Healthy” LED: Watchdog
2 – Red “Trip” LED: Protection trip
3 – Yellow “Alarm” LED: Alarm signaling
4 – Five red programmable LEDs
5 – 16-character by 2-line alphanumeric liquid crystal display (LCD)
6 – Clear key
7 – Read key (jump to RECORDS column)
8 – 4 arrow keys, an enter key
9 – Electromechanical flag indicators (Model L has one only)
10 – CB Close key
11 – CB Open key (model A)
12– USB port for local connection
Figure 1: P116 Front Panel (max hardware version)
GS
P116_EN_GS_A11 v2.7
(GS) 3-14
Getting Started
MiCOM P116
Basic Flush Mounting Case Model A
A B D
PE C E
A – Current ring terminal block A: Current analogue inputs (phases and earth)
B – Terminal block B: Model A - Auxiliary voltage Vaux and contact outputs
C – Terminal block C: Energy outputs (sensitive trip coil, Model A- Flag indicator) and Model A - RS485
D – Terminal block D: Binary inputs (Model A)
E – Terminal block E: Contact outputs (Model A)
PE – PCT Protective (Earth) Conductor terminal
P116 + Flush mounting Cassette: P116+Wall mounting Cassette:
Figure 2: Terminals View of the P116 (Model A)
Getting Started
MiCOM P116
2.2
2.2.1
P116_EN_GS_A11 v2.7
(GS) 3-15
Relay connection and power-up
The relay can be powered from the following sources:
Current input phase A
Current input phase B
Current input phase C
E/F Current input (N) (depends on terminal connections and configuration in P116 menu)
Auxiliary voltage Vaux (terminals B1-B2) (Model A)
USB port (only some electronic boards: to ensure HMI and USB communications)
Auxiliary Supply Voltage (Vx) connection (Model A)
Before applying the auxiliary supply voltage to the relay, check that the rated nominal ac or dc voltage is appropriate for the application and that it will be connected to the correct terminals (B1&B2). The relay's serial number, current rating, and power rating information can be viewed on the upper side of the case. The ac or dc supply voltage must be within the corresponding nominal range of the device, as indicated in the table below, for the appropriate nominal rating of the equipment:
2.2.2
2.2.3
Nominal ranges of auxiliary voltage Vx
24 to 60 Vac/dc
60 to 250 Vdc and
60 to 240 Vac
Operative dc range
19 to 72 Vdc
48 to 300 Vdc
Operative ac range
19 to 66 Vac
48 to 265 Vac
Once the ratings have been verified for the application, connect the equipment to an external power source capable of delivering the requirements specified on the label, to perform the relay familiarization procedures. Please refer to the wiring diagrams in the Installation section for complete installation details, ensuring that the correct polarities are observed in the case of dc supply.
Note: The label specifies the auxiliary voltage for the P116 supply input and binary inputs (dependent on ordering options).
Current inputs
The measuring current inputs of the P116 should be connected to the secondary wires of the power system CTs as shown in the connection diagrams in section 8 of P116 Installation chapter P116/EN IN.
The parameters of the CTs that can be connected to the P116’s current input terminals are detailed in section 3 of chapter P116/EN AP – CT REQUIREMENTS .
Trip coil energy output
Terminals C1 and C2 (terminal block C) are used for connection to the CB's sensitive/very sensitive trip coil/striker with nominal parameters:
Nominal voltage of the tripping coil or striker : from 12Vdc to 24 Vdc
Required trip energy
≤
0.1 J or MITOP (Schneider Electric CBs) trip coil.
The trip energy is provided by capacitors built into the P116. The trip command is a 50 ms pulse and its repetition depends on the trip coil's impedance and on the current value.
Repetition continues until the tripping current criteria are reset.
The tripping voltage on terminals C1 and C2 depends on the tripping coil parameters.
The value of voltage is changed during trip execution.
Note: Be sure of polarity on the P116 and MITOP terminals. C1 must be connected to “+” and C2 to “-“.
GS
GS
P116_EN_GS_A11 v2.7
(GS) 3-16
Getting Started
MiCOM P116
Functions may be assigned to the trip coil output in the SETTING GROUP x/OUTPUT
CONFIGURATION column of menu (special symbol” “T” in first line SETTING GROUP
1(2)OUTPUT RELAY CONFIGURATION G1(2 ) column)
2.2.4 Flag indicator output (Model A)
Terminals C3 and C4 (terminal block C) are used for connection to an external flag indicator.
2.2.5
The flag indicator can be used for trip signaling. The flag indicator output is supplied from a built-in capacitor separate from the trip coil output (terminals C3 and C4).
The trip command is a 50 ms pulse; its repetition depends on the external relay's impedance
(flag indicator coil) and on the current value. Repetition continues until the tripping current criteria are reset.
The voltage on terminals C3 and C4 is greater than 24 Vdc. The trip energy is greater than
0.01 J.
Functions may be assigned to the Flag Indicator output in the SETTING GROUP x/OUTPUT
CONFIGURATION column of menu (special symbol” “F” in first line SETTING GROUP
1(2)OUTPUT RELAY CONFIGURATION G1(2 ) column) .
Earthing
2.2.6
2.2.7
Screw terminal is the Protective (Earth) Conductor Terminal which must be permanently connected for safety reasons (refer to Figure 2).
Output contacts
P116 Model A has 6 output contacts + 1 configurable WD (watchdog).
P116 Model L has 1 output contacts + 1 WD (watchdog).
P116 is delivered with the following default factory settings for the outputs:
Output RL1 (N/O: B3-B4, N/C: B4-B5) is not configured.
Output RL2 (N/O: B6-B7, N/C: B7-B8) is not configured (Model A)
Output RL3 (N/O: B9-B10) is not configured. (Model A)
Output RL4 (N/O: B11-B12) is not configured. (Model A)
Output RL5 (N/O: E2-E4, N/C: E3-E4) is not configured. (Model A)
Output RL6 (N/O: E5-E7, N/C: E6-E7) is not configured. (Model A)
Output WD
•
Model A: (N/O: E8-E10, N/C: E9-E10) is configured to GLOBAL
SETTINGS/LOC/Out. WD Hard.Sign.: 0: Opened (after powering remains open. In case of any P116 internal fault will be closed).
•
Model L: (N/O: B6-B7, N/C: B7-B8) is not configured
To modify the outputs' configuration, refer to section 2.2 and 3.1 of chapter P116/EN ST -
Settings.
The output connection diagram is shown in section 9 of chapter P116/EN IN - Installation.
Binary inputs (Model A)
The P116 has 6 binary inputs (terminal block D):
Input L1: D1-D2 terminals
Input L2: D3-D4 terminals
Input L3: D5-D6 terminals
Input L4: D7-D8 terminals
Getting Started
MiCOM P116
P116_EN_GS_A11 v2.7
(GS) 3-17
Input L5: D9-D10 terminals
Input L6: D11-D12 terminals
There are two types of inputs (ordering option):
Standard Binary Inputs : 24-240 Vac or 24-250 Vdc (standard)
(Cortec Order Ref. P116xxxxxxx1xxxxxx)
DC Binary Inputs with settable switching thresholds: 110 Vdc / 129 Vdc / 220 Vdc
(Cortec Order Ref. P116xxxxxxx2xxxxxx)
Standard Binary Inputs can operate with an AC or DC auxiliary voltage supply but the voltage type (AC or DC) must be selected for each input in the menu ( GLOBAL
SETTINGS/GENERAL INPUTS CONFIGURATION ):
Input 1 (2 ... 6) Filtering : 0: dc/ac
Input 1 (2 ... 6) Filtering : 1: ac
Input 1 (2 ... 6) Filtering : 2: dc dc/ac option: Binary Input operates with both AC (48Vac-240Vac) or DC (24Vdc-250Vdc) auxiliary voltage from 39Vac or 19Vdc but in order to switch its state from low to high the input needs a current above 35 mA for about 0.5 ms. This feature protects the
Binary Input (with very low voltage stage: 19 Vdc or 39Vac) against disturbances on wire connections. After about 2 ms the consumption of current is reduced to about
2.3 mA for dc and 2.5mA -20mA for ac (depends on the auxiliary voltage level – see
Technical Data chapter). Higher current levels (35mA) do not depend on the auxiliary voltage value.
The dc/ac option has a 15 ms filtering time. ac option: AC filtering is applied to reduce the DC component in the auxiliary voltage. The filtering time is about 7.5 ms. dc option: DC filtering is applied to reduce the AC component in the auxiliary voltage. The filtering time is about 5 ms.
The P116 is delivered with the following default factory settings for Input filtering: dc/ac
(universal AC or DC auxiliary voltage) and no inputs (L1-L6) are mapped to any functions.
To modify the inputs' configuration, refer to section 2.3 and 3.9 of chapter P116/EN ST -
Settings.
The input connection diagram is shown in section 8 of chapter P116/EN IN - Installation.
DC Binary Inputs with settable switching thresholds can be used with DC auxiliary voltage only with nominal voltages:
110 Vdc
129 Vdc
220 Vdc
The nominal auxiliary voltage is set in the GLOBAL SETTINGS/GENERAL INPUTS
CONFIGURATION column of menu.
Note: DC Binary Inputs cannot see the AC component so make sure that
DC auxiliary voltage is connected to the input terminals.
The P116 is delivered with the following default factory settings for Input filtering: 110 Vdc and no inputs (L1-L6) are mapped to any functions.
To modify the inputs' configuration, refer to section 2.3 and 3.9 of chapter P116/EN ST -
Settings.
The input connection diagram is shown in section 8 of chapter P116/EN IN - Installation.
GS
GS
P116_EN_GS_A11 v2.7
(GS) 3-18
2.3 Introduction to the user interfaces and setting options
Getting Started
MiCOM P116
The relay has a USB user interface for use with MiCOM S1 and S1 Studio setting software.
With this interface it is possible to download the setting values, latest faults and events as well as disturbance records and fully configure the P116.
Note: After connection to the USB port the Healthy LED is lit. If the LED is not lit refer to chapter P116/EN TS - Troubleshooting.
The USB port integrates electronic boards only to allow communications with the P116 via the HMI /USB interfaces.
2.4 Changing parameters via the front panel user interface (HMI)
Changing of all parameters is password-protected.
After restart or powering up, the P116 is in Protection Mode . This means that all settings are the same as in the relay's operation system and are available on the front panel user interface.
To change any parameters, it is necessary to switch the P116 to the SETTING CHANGE
MODE .
The SETTING CHANGE MODE , for entered password level which changes setting parameters, is indicated by the sequential flashing of the programmable LEDs (from 4 up to
8 LEDs) on the front panel.
Until it is switched back from the SETTING CHANGE MODE to the PROTECTION MODE , or restarted by disconnecting then reconnecting the power supply, the P116 uses the setting parameters that were active before the SETTING CHANGE MODE was entered (previous settings).
Press the OK navigation key, after changing a chosen parameter (confirmation of change).
The new value is saved in FRAM memory but the P116 still uses the setting value that was active before the SETTING CHANGE MODE was entered (previous settings). The new value will be available in the operation system only after the firmware has been reset. When the firmware is reset, all the settings are loaded into the P116 system.
When switching from the SETTING CHANGE MODE to the PROTECTION MODE , a warm reset is applied.
The P116 therefore applies the new parameters to the relay's operation system.
Afterwards, the settings available on the front panel and those used by the operation system are consistent.
Note: 1. While the LEDs are flashing ( SETTING CHANGE MODE by entering
Administrator or Protection setting password) there can be a mismatch between the settings displayed on the front panel and those used by the operating system.
2. When “ Control only ” rights password is entered there is no any LED signaling like for Administrator or Protection setting password. Additionally all changes are executed and recorded immediately. After any control action made in the menu or after 10 minutes, P116 switches back automatically from the SETTING
CHANGE MODE to the PROTECTION MODE .
The password protection of the relay comprises three levels:
−
Administrator ( Without limits )
−
Protection setting ( Protection only )
−
Control only ( Test control ) – this level is used for tests and/or control execution only (no changing of setting parameters) so signaling of SETTING CHANGE MODE differs from above. On this password level there is no the sequential flashing of the programmable
LEDs (from 3 up to 8 LEDs). On the control windows is the special sign: which informs that control is allowed.
Administrator rights: all the menu settings may be changed (violet color on Fig.10-21).
Getting Started
MiCOM P116
P116_EN_GS_A11 v2.7
(GS) 3-19
Protection setting rights: it is possible to change settings in the PROTECTION column;
CTRL Default Windows (CB status CTRL, L/R status CTRL, [79] CTRL ) and
COMMISSIONING/Maintenance Mode windows are also possible (green color on Fig.10-
21).
Control rights: CTRL Default Windows (CB status CTRL, L/R status CTRL, [79] CTRL ) and COMMISSIONING/Maintenance Mode windows from the front panel only (yellow color on Fig.10-21).
For each level the password consists of 4 digits ( 0 to 9 )
NOTE:
1. The default password is 0000 for every password protection level.
2. For communication via Setting Software (MiCOM S1 Studio or MiCOM S1) the administrator password must be entered – the same as was entered in the relay.
3. S1 recognizes password as characters. If the password is 0001 (in the password window of P116’s menu, 4 digits are displayed) it is necessary to enter 0001 in S1
(all four digits have to be put). For above case: 1 or 01 or 001 will be rejected. 0001 will be accepted only.
4. After 10 minutes without pushing navigation keys P116 returns to Public rights.
It is recommended to change default password from 0000 to unique value for every password level.
If the first password is different, this means that the Administrator password has been changed.
The Protection setting password is still 0000 . Therefore, to protect settings against unauthorized access it is necessary to change the Protection setting password by first entering 0000 then a new value.
The Control password is still 0000 . Therefore, if it is necessary to change it, first enter 0000 then the new value ( Control right) of the password.
Notes: 1. If the Protection setting rights have not been changed, or if it has been set to the default value ( 0000 ), it is possible to change all the settings in the
PROTECTION column, reset the counters and control the CB without entering a password, simply by pressing the OK navigation key. This makes it possible to change a chosen parameter by automatically switching the P116 to the
SETTING CHANGE MODE (the programmable LEDs are flashing).
This means that even after changing only one parameter it is necessary to switch the P116 back to PROTECTION MODE in order to activate the new settings (warm restart).
2. If the Control rights password has not been changed or if it has been set to the default value (0000) it is possible to control the CB in menu without password protection.
3. If the Control rights password is entered if control command is applied via menu, execution of this control command will return to Public rights (exit from Control to Public rights).
4. Maintenance Mode can be reached by entering at least Control password.
Control password is valid up to exit from Maintenance Mode, after 10 minutes counted from entrance or after execution of any control command via menu..
Control rights are not indicated via flashing of programmable LEDs, so to avoid confusing it is recommended to assign ALARM LED to Maintenance Mode function (see LED configuration)
GS
GS
P116_EN_GS_A11 v2.7
(GS) 3-20
2.4.1 SETTING CHANGE MODE
Getting Started
MiCOM P116
The SETTING CHANGE MODE should be used to change settings.
Using the SETTING CHANGE MODE ensures that all changed parameters will be applied simultaneously so as to avoid any problems caused by possible setting inconsistencies.
The SETTING CHANGE MODE makes it possible to change settings while the relay is active without any risk (the P116 continues to use the previous settings).
After exiting the SETTING CHANGE MODE a warm restart of firmware is applied so that all the protection counters are reset.
Note: Latched LEDs and outputs are not reset (stored values are not cleared during a P116 reset)
To switch the P116 to the SETTING CHANGE MODE navigate to the SETTING CHANGE
MODE main header (see Figure 9), then press the
key:
Edit settings?
Enter PSWD
Press the OK navigation key.
Edit settings?
Enter PSWD 0000
The 0 digit furthest to the right is flashing.
Enter the password:
1. If the digit is flashing, change the digit to the required value by pressing the
key or the
key.
2. Change the flashing digit by pressing the
key or
key.
3. Continue as above to set the whole password (4 digits)
4. If the correct password is set, press the OK navigation key
The LCD displays 'OK' during approximately 1 second, then the new SETTING CHANGE cell is displayed:
If the password entered is for:
- Administrator rights:
Setting change:
Without limits
To indicate that the P116 is in SETTING CHANGE MODE on the level: “Without limits” the programmable LEDs are flashing
- Protection settings:
Setting change:
Protection only
To indicate that the P116 is in SETTING CHANGE MODE on the level: “Protection only” the programmable LEDs are flashing
- Control only:
Setting change:
Test control
Getting Started
MiCOM P116
P116_EN_GS_A11 v2.7
(GS) 3-21
There is no any indication that this level is entered. SETTING CHANGE MODE is active by
10 minutes only. Exit from this mode is after applying any control from the front panel protected by “Test control” password.
The screen displays the scope of the current modification rights..
At this time it is possible to start changing the setting parameters.
Note: The parallel pressing:
and
key it makes jump from any place to:
Edit settings?
Enter PSWD the menu cell in which the password can be entered (hot key).
If all settings are changed, it is necessary to return to PROTECTION MODE to apply a warm reset.
Press the
and
keys simultaneously to jump to the following cell:
Edit settings?
Exit:press ENTER
Press the OK navigation key to apply a warm reset and display the following cell:
Setting change:
Protected
The programmable LEDs do not flash sequentially. The P116 is in PROTECTION MODE
Note: In SETTING CHANGE MODE all functions use the previously stored settings (before the SETTING CHANGE MODE was entered).
Changing of a single setting parameter
Go to the required setting cell (see section 2.5.8).
Press the HMI OK key.
Edit settings?
Enter PSWD 0000
Using the
,
,
,
keys, enter the password.
Press OK navigation key to confirm the password and switch to SETTING CHANGE MODE .
Press OK navigation key to enter the chosen setting parameter.
Using the
,
,
,
keys, set the required value.
Confirm the change by pressing the OK navigation key.
Switch from SETTING CHANGE MODE to PROTECTION MODE .
For example, press the
and
keys simultaneously to display the following cell:
Edit settings?
Exit:press ENTER
Press the OK navigation key to switch from SETTING CHANGE MODE to PROTECTION
MODE .
GS
GS
P116_EN_GS_A11 v2.7
(GS) 3-22
The following cell should be displayed:
Setting change:
Protected
Getting Started
MiCOM P116
The above cell confirms that settings are password-protected, and that the P116 is in
PROTECTION MODE .
Additionally the programmable LEDs do not flash sequentially.
Changing the password
To change the password, first enter the existing password to obtain the appropriate password protection rights.
Press the
key to display the following cell:
Change Password
Press the OK navigation key, to display:
Change Password
0000
Using the
,
,
,
keys, enter the new password.
Press OK navigation key to confirm the new password and jump to the cell displaying information on protection rights
For example:
Setting change:
Without limits
To exit the SETTING CHANGE MODE (apply a warm reset) press the
and
keys simultaneously to display the following cell:
Edit settings?
Exit:press ENTER
Press the OK navigation key to confirm switching from SETTING CHANGE MODE to
PROTECTION MODE .
The following cell should be displayed:
Setting change:
Protected
The above cell confirms that the settings are password-protected and that the P116 is in
PROTECTION MODE . Additionally the programmable LEDs do not flash sequentially.
Lost password
If the password is lost please contact with Schneider Electric organization in the country or use the link below: http://www.schneider-electric.com/sites/corporate/en/support/contact/customer-carecontact.page
For contact it is necessary to know MiCOM P116 serial number which can be read from the nominal plate on the case (for example: SN00036046) or in the main: “OP Parameters” column of the menu
For details – see chapter: “Troubleshooting” ( TS ).
Getting Started
MiCOM P116
2.5
2.5.1
P116 Menu description
Headers
The main headers are shown in Figure 3.
LR Status: L+R
[79]:Ready
CTRL: no operat.
CB status:Opened
CTRL: no operat.
000.0A 000.0A
000.0A 000.0A
MEASUREMENTS 00.00In 00.00In
00.00In 00.00Ien
ALARM STATUS
P116_EN_GS_A11 v2.7
(GS) 3-23
RECORDS SETTING GROUP 1 GS
2.5.2
OP PARAMETERS SETTING CHANGE
MODE
COMMISSIONING GLOBAL SETTINGS SETTING GROUP 2
P0913ENb
Figure 3: Column headers (Model A)
ALARM STATUS column (Model A)
ALARM STATUS (see Figure 4) information is available if the cause of alarm has been triggered. Therefore, if after pressing the
key no the new cell is displayed, it means that no alarms have been detected.
Depending on the P116's configuration an alarm signal is self-resetting (no cause of alarm – no alarm signal; GLOBAL SETTINGS/LOC/Alarm Display 0: Self-reset ) or manually resettable (alarm signal latched; GLOBAL SETTINGS/LOC/Alarm Display 1: Latching ).
Default setting: 0: Self-Reset .
This means that if an alarm signal has disappeared no information is available in the ALARM STATUS column.
If set to Latching , this means that if an alarm signal has disappeared information is still available in the ALARM STATUS column until it is reset in the ALARM STATUS/ Alarm
Reset window.
Alarm information is always available in the event recorder. However, the programmable
LEDs can be used to store causes of alarm if required.
Figure 4 shows all causes of alarms (if alarms have been enabled in the main configuration column of the protection function).
P116_EN_GS_A11 v2.7
(GS) 3-24
ALARM STATUS
Getting Started
MiCOM P116
GS
Alarm tI>
Alarm tI>>
Alarm tI>>>
Alarm tSOTF
Alarm tIN_1
Alarm tIN_2
Alarm tIN_3
Alarm tI<
Alarm tI2>
Alarm tBrkn Cond.
Alarm
CB Fail
Alarm
Thermal Overload
Alarm tAUX1
Alarm tAUX2
Alarm tAUX3
Alarm tAUX4
Alarm
CB FLT Ext.Sig.
Alarm
TC Supervision
Alarm
CB Time Monitor.
Alarm
CB Curr. Diagn.
Alarm
CB Nb Diagn.
Alarm
[79] Lockout
Alarm
Hardw. Warning
Alarm
State of CB
Alarm
[79] Roll.Demand
Reset Pres.ENTER
No operation
P0914ENb
Figure 4: ALARM column (Model A)
2.5.3 RECORDS column
Twenty fault records are available in the P116.
Changing a record in the menu is possible in the Record Number menu cell, by pressing the
OK navigation key then the
or
key. Once the required record is selected, press the
HMI OK key to confirm the change. If the Control rights password has been set to the default value (0000), this operation does not require entering a password; otherwise it is necessary to enter the Control rights password.
Records in the Fault Recorder can be reset using the MiCOM S1 communication software or additionally (Model A) - via the RS485 link.
Getting Started
MiCOM P116
P116_EN_GS_A11 v2.7
(GS) 3-25
GS
Figure 5: RECORDS column (Model A)
GS
P116_EN_GS_A11 v2.7
(GS) 3-26
Getting Started
MiCOM P116
Counters can be reset in the Counter Reset cell of the menu, by pressing the OK key then the
or
key. Once the required record is selected, press the OK key to confirm the change. This operation requires entering a Administrator password ( Without limits ).
2.5.4
In addition, counters can be reset using the MiCOM S1 communication software or via the
RS485 link.
SETTTING GROUP columns (model A)
The P116 has two setting groups. The relay is delivered with one setting group active only
(factory default setting).
If two setting groups are to be used, the second setting group must be activated in the menu cell:
GLOBAL SETTINGS/SETTING GROUP SELECT/Setting Group Select :
Nb of Groups
0: One Group by changing its setting from 0: One Group to 1: Two Groups
Each setting group includes:
Protection settings
Output relay configuration
Binary input configuration
Programmable LED configuration
Switching between setting groups is possible via:
Configured binary inputs
Menu ( GLOBAL SETTINGS/SETTING GROUP SELECT/Setting Group Select cell)
MiCOM S1 setting software
Remotely via RS485
SETTING GROUP 1
PROTECTION G1 OUTPUT RELAYS
CONFIGURATION G1
Latched 654321 outputs 000000
Reverse 654321 outp.log. 000000
Protect. 654321
Trip 000000 pulse 000000
INPUTS
CONFIGURATION G1
Reverse 654321
Inp.Logic 000000
Mainten. 654321
Mode 000000
Reset 654321
Ltch Sign 000000
Reset 654321
Ltchd Out 000000
LEDS
CONFIGURATION G1
Latched 876543
LEDs 000000
Protect. 876543
Trip 000000
876543
Alarm 000000
General 876543
Start 000000
PHASE O/C G1
[50/51]
SOTF G1
[50/51]
E/GND FAULT G1
[50/51N]
UNDERCURRENT G1 NEGATIVE SEQ.O/C
[46] G1
P0916ENb
Figure 6: SETTING GROUP 1 columns (Model A)
Getting Started
MiCOM P116
P116_EN_GS_A11 v2.7
(GS) 3-27
Information about the active setting group is available in menu: OP PARAMETERS/
Active Set Group cell.
Information about the active setting group can be displayed via the programmable LEDs by configuring them to that function and via a special symbol on the LCD display.
Notes: 1. If setting groups are to be switched using a binary input, this binary input must be configured to setting group switch both in Setting Group
1 and Setting Group 2.
2. It is possible to copy all the parameters from Setting Group 1 to
Setting Group 2 or vice versa ( GLOBAL SETTINGS/SETTING
GROUP SELECT/Copy Settings cell). It will then only be necessary to change the parameters' values.
3. After changing of setting group all latched LEDs and output contacts are reset.
2.5.5 GLOBAL SETTINGS column
Global Settings include all general settings, such as:
Localization ( LOC )
Setting Group operation ( SETTING GROUP SELECT ) (Model A)
Current transformer parameters ( CT RATIO )
Settings related to Circuit Breaker control or monitoring ( CIRCUIT BREAKER )
Advanced settings for the inrush blocking ( INRUSH BLOCKING)
Advanced settings for the over-current protection elements ( O/C ADVANCED)
Advanced settings for the Auto-reclose function ( [ 79] ADVANCED SETTINGS ) (Model
A)
Advanced settings for the communication orders via RS485 ( COMMUNICATION
ORDERS )(Model A)
Configurationon of the optional flag indicators ( OPTIONAL FLAG INDICATORS CONF.
)
(Model A)
Configuration of the inputs, depending on the hardware option: voltage type (dc or ac filtering) or voltage stage for input energizing ( GENERAL INPUT CONFIGURATION )
(Model A)
RS485 communication parameters ( COMMUNICATION ) (Model A)
Definition of the time window for maximum and average recordings ( MAX & AVERAGE I
CONFIGURATION )
Settings for the disturbance recorder ( DISTURBANCE RECORDER)
GS
P116_EN_GS_A11 v2.7
(GS) 3-28
GLOBAL SETTINGS
Getting Started
MiCOM P116
LOC
Language
0: English
Default Display
0: Meas. In
SETTING GROUP
SELECT
CT RATIO CIRCUIT BREAKER INRUSH BLOCKING
Number of Groups Line CT primary
1A
Setting Group
0: Group 1 t Change Setting
Line CT Sec
In=1A
E/Gnd CT Primary
1A tOpen pulse min
0.10s
tClose Pulse
Time Delay for
Close
0.10s
000.00s
Inrush Blocking
2nd Harmonic
Ratio 20%
Inrush Reset
Time 0.00s
GS
2.5.6
P0917ENb
Figure 7: GLOBAL SETTINGS column (Model A)
In Model A, it is possible to Copy all parameters from Setting Group 1 to Setting Group 2 and inversely in the Copy settings cell by pressing the OK navigation key. Choose the required operation by pressing the
or
key ( Copy G1 G2 or Copy G2 G1 ). Confirm the change by pressing the OK navigation key.
Note: The setting group change's time-delay, from Setting Group 1 to Setting Group 2
( t Change Setting cell), applies to changes effected via a binary input only.
COMMISIONING column
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
The settings available in the the COMISSIONING column are:
−
Opto I/P status – which binary inputs are active (logic status) (Model A),
Relay O/P status – which binary outputs are active (logic status),
Maintenance mode – allows the user to check the operation of the protection functions without actually sending any external command (tripping or signaling),
Test Pattern
Contact Test Time
Test outputs
– allows the user to set outputs contacts for tests,
– defines the output's pulse length during the tests,
– if set to test of the outputs,
1: apply test , pressing the OK navigation key will execute the
Functional Test – allows the user to set the protection criteria to be tested,
Functional Test End
(Model A)
– defines the end of the functional test: CB opened or Time
Functional Test Time
Functional Test
– defines the pulse length during the functional test,
– if set to execute the functional test.
CTRL: Operate , pressing the OK navigation key will
It is possible to set following Maintenance mode options :
•
“ No ” - Maintenance mode is disabled. All window cells below are hidden
( Maintenance mode is the latest cell in COMMISIONING column)
•
“ Yes,outp.trips
” - Maintenance mode is enabled. In this mode all test cells in
COMMISIONING column are available (see Fig.8 below). During tests outputs are energized.
•
“ Yes,outp.block
” - Maintenance mode is enabled and all test cells in
COMMISIONING column are available (see Fig.8 below). In this mode, the high state of output functions are ignored (control of outputs are blocked).
Getting Started
MiCOM P116
P116_EN_GS_A11 v2.7
(GS) 3-29
This operation requires entering a Control rights password ( Test control ).
It is possible to set additional programmable LED for Maintenance Mode.
Note:
1. The Maintenance Mode is active up to 10 minutes only. After this time P116 automatically sets - Maintenance mode: “ No ”. It protects user against leaving the P116 in this mode after tests.
2. During Functional Test the rest protection stages are active, so in case of fault during test of a one protection element, the rest protection elements are ready to trip, if the fault current is above stage of protection element and the time delay is counted. The selected
3. If Functional Test is applied for the protection element which is disabled, there will be no any action, even if Functional Test is executed.
COMMISSIONING
GS
Relay O/P 654321
Status 000000
Maintenance Mode
0:Yes,outp.trips
Contact Test
Time 0.00s
Test outputs
0: no operation
Functional Test
0:I>
Functional Test
End 0: CB Trip
Functional Test
Time 0.00s
Functional test
CTRL: No operat.
Figure 8: COMMISSIONING column (model A)
P0918ENb
GS
P116_EN_GS_A11 v2.7
(GS) 3-30
2.5.7 SETTING CHANGE MODE column
Getting Started
The SETTING CHANGE MODE column is used to:
Allow changing of all parameters in the menu ( SETTING CHANGE MODE).
Set a new password or change the existing password (Change Password)
MiCOM P116
Public rights:
SETTING CHANGE
MODE
Administrator password entered:
SETTING CHANGE
MODE
Edit settings?
Enter PSWD
Edit settings?
Exit: press ENTER
Setting change:
Protected
Setting change:
Without limits
Change Password
P0863ENb
Figure 9: SETTING CHANGE MODE column
Getting Started
MiCOM P116
2.5.8 Menu Map
P116_EN_GS_A11 v2.7
(GS) 3-31
GS
Figure 10: P116 Model A Menu Map 1 (Firmware: 1C)
GS
P116_EN_GS_A11 v2.7
(GS) 3-32
Getting Started
MiCOM P116
Figure 11: P116 Model A Menu Map 2 (Firmware: 1C)
Getting Started
MiCOM P116
P116_EN_GS_A11 v2.7
(GS) 3-33
GS
Figure 12: P116 Model A Menu Map 3 (Firmware: 1C)
P116_EN_GS_A11 v2.7
(GS) 3-34
Getting Started
MiCOM P116
GS
Figure 13: P116 Model A Menu Map 4 (Firmware: 1C)
Getting Started
MiCOM P116
P116_EN_GS_A11 v2.7
(GS) 3-35
GS
Figure 14: P116 Model A Menu Map 5 (Firmware: 1C)
P116_EN_GS_A11 v2.7
(GS) 3-36
Getting Started
MiCOM P116
GS
Figure 15: P116 Model A Menu Map 6 (Firmware: 1C)
Getting Started
MiCOM P116
P116_EN_GS_A11 v2.7
(GS) 3-37
GS
Figure 16: P116 Model A Menu Map 7 (Firmware: 1C)
GS
P116_EN_GS_A11 v2.7
(GS) 3-38
Getting Started
MiCOM P116
Figure 17: P116 Model A Menu Map 8 (Firmware: 1C)
Getting Started
MiCOM P116
P116_EN_GS_A11 v2.7
(GS) 3-39
GS
Figure 18: P116 Model A Menu Map 9 (Firmware: 1C)
P116_EN_GS_A11 v2.7
(GS) 3-40
Getting Started
MiCOM P116
GS
Figure 19: P116 Model A Menu Map 10 (Firmware: 1C)
Getting Started
MiCOM P116
P116_EN_GS_A11 v2.7
(GS) 3-41
GS
Figure 20: P116 Model A Menu Map 11 (Firmware: 1C)
GS
P116_EN_GS_A11 v2.7
(GS) 3-42
Getting Started
MiCOM P116
Figure 21: P116 Model A Menu Map 12 (Firmware: 1C)
Getting Started
MiCOM P116
P116_EN_GS_A11 v2.7
(GS) 3-43
GS
Figure 22: P116 Model L Menu Map 1 (Firmware: 1C)
GS
P116_EN_GS_A11 v2.7
(GS) 3-44
Getting Started
MiCOM P116
Figure 23: P116 Model L Menu Map 2 (Firmware: 1C)
Getting Started
MiCOM P116
P116_EN_GS_A11 v2.7
(GS) 3-45
GS
Figure 24: P116 Model L Menu Map 3 (Firmware: 1C)
P116_EN_GS_A11 v2.7
(GS) 3-46
3.
3.1
LOCAL CONNECTION TO A PC
Configuration
Getting Started
MiCOM P116
GS
3.2
Local connection between a PC and the relay is made through a USB cable.
Note: 1. Max current necessary to supply P116 from USB port is 450mA. USB standard offers 500mA for a one PC’s USB controller, so it is not recommended to connect any additional devices to the same PC’s USB controller. If the total power consumption from a one PC’s USB controller is greater than 500mA, P116 can be in permanent rest (P116 display and the green Healthy LED will be flashing)
2. Before connection cable to USB socket it is necessary discharge static electricity from the body by touching a metal grounded object (such as an unpainted metal surface) to prevent against ESD damage
Before communications can be established between a PC and a device fitted with a USB port, the device's Windows driver must first be installed and a virtual COM port created.
The latest MiCOM S1 STUDIO software has a built-in USB driver and virtual COM software, but if an older version of S1 STUDIO or MiCOM S1 are used it will be necessary to install the above in order to have communication facilities.
If the PC is connected both to the Internet and to the device, the USB driver and virtual COM software can be downloaded via Windows automatically from the web. Depending on firewall configuration, this may however not always be possible.
In such a case it is necessary to install the P11x USB driver and virtual COM software manually.
USB Driver and virtual COM software installation
Two installation methods are available:
−
Automatic installation using an Internet connection (installation files are not needed in this case),
−
Setup file ("Setup P11x USB driver CDM 2.xx.xx.exe") which can be delivered via an
Schneider Electric contact or downloaded from Schneider Electric website.
Note: The latest S1 STUDIO software includes all drivers therefore no action is needed.
Getting Started
MiCOM P116
3.2.1
P116_EN_GS_A11 v2.7
(GS) 3-47
Automatic installation via an Internet connection (no setup files needed)
1. Connect the PC to the Internet.
2. Plug the USB cable into PC and the MiCOM P116. Windows automatically starts searching for drivers.
3. Select Yes, this time only then press Next > .
4. Select Install the software automatically (Recommended) then press Next > .
MiCOM P116
5. Wait until the wizard finishes searching of drivers on the Internet.
MiCOM P116
GS
P116_EN_GS_A11 v2.7
(GS) 3-48
6. Press Finish (to complete the USB driver's installation).
Getting Started
MiCOM P116
GS
7. Select Yes, this time only then press Next > (to start the Virtual COM software installation).
8. Select Install the software automatically (Recommended) then press Next > .
Getting Started
MiCOM P116
9. Press Finish then run the MiCOM S1 or S1 STUDIO setting software.
P116_EN_GS_A11 v2.7
(GS) 3-49
3.2.2 USB Driver and virtual COM software installation from the setup file
1. Obtain the Setup P11x USB driver CDM 2.xx.xx.exe
file from your Schneider Electric support contact or CDMxxxxx.exe (for example: CDM20814_Setup.exe) from: http://www.ftdichip.com/Drivers/VCP.htm
(for FT2232H, FT4232H, FT232R, FT245R,
FT2232, FT232B, FT245B, FT8U232AM, FT8U245AM devices):
GS
1
2. Run Setup P11x USB driver CDM 2xxxx.exe
(from the web) or the latest available
(from the web).
3. The following window will appear for a few seconds and then close automatically.
4. The USB port is ready for connection via MiCOM S1.
5. Run the MiCOM S1 setting software for connection with the P11x.
P116_EN_GS_A11 v2.7
(GS) 3-50
3.2.3 Remote connection
3.3
Getting Started
MiCOM P116
The figure shows the recommended way to connect an RS485 cable to the relay in order to build a local network.
Products plugged into the same panel
GS
3.4 MiCOM S1 and MiCOM S1 Studio relay communications basics
MiCOM S1 and Mi COM S1 Studio are the universal MiCOM IED Support Software packages which provide users with a direct and convenie nt access to all data stored in any MiCOM IED using the
USB front communication port.
MiCOM S1 and MiCOM S1 Studio provide full access to :
−
MiCOM Px10 Px20, Px20, Px30, Px40 relays
−
MiCOM Mx20 measurements units
The following sections give the main procedures to connect to and to use MiCOM S1 and
MiCOM S1 Studio.
Before starting, check that the USB serial cable is properly connected to the USB port on the
front panel of the relay. Please follow the instructions given in section 3.1 in order to ensure
proper connection between the PC and the relay before attempting to communicate with the relay.
This section is intended as a quick start guide to using MiCOM S1 and MiCOM S1 Studio, and assumes that you have a copy of MiCOM S1 or MiCOM S1 Studio installed on your PC.
Please refer to the MiCOM S1 or MiCOM S1 Studio User Manual for more detailed information .
Getting Started
MiCOM P116
3.5
3.5.1
MiCOM S1 Studio
P116_EN_GS_A11 v2.7
(GS) 3-51
MiCOM S1 Studio downloading
The MiCOM S1 Studio can be downloaded from WEB site : http://www.schneiderelectric.com/products/ww/en/2300-ied-user-software/2310-micom-user-software/61035micom-s1-studio/
Or found on the WEB site: www.schneider-electric.com
During typing “MiCOM S1 Studio Installer” an advice will appear as above (type slowly), so select “MiCOM S1 Studio Installer” than click:
GS
The new window will appear (see below):
Click on “MiCOM S1 Studio”:
P116_EN_GS_A11 v2.7
(GS) 3-52
The new window will appear (see below):
Getting Started
MiCOM P116
GS
Click on MiCOM S1 Studio Installer
The new window will appear (see below). Click on MiCOM-S1-Studio-Vx.x.x-Installer.exe
The new window will appear (see below). Click “Save” than run exe file for starting of installation
Getting Started
MiCOM P116
P116_EN_GS_A11 v2.7
(GS) 3-53
1
3.5.2 Data Model Management
The settings and parameters of the protection relay can be extracted from the relay or loaded using the Data Model manager. The Data Model Manager can load any model from a local file, a CD ROM or an Internet server (if connected).
The Data Model Manager is used to add and remove data models, as well as to export and import data model files.
It is necessary to close MiCOM S1 Studio prior to launching the Data Model Manager.
To open the Data Model Manager, click on the icon: then "Data Model Manager" in the "Programs" menu.
. Select " MiCOM S1 Studio"
GS
P116_EN_GS_A11 v2.7
(GS) 3-54
The following window is displayed:
Getting Started
MiCOM P116
1
GS
2
Select the Add option to add the new data model then click on Next .
The next window is used to select the data model's source (CD ROM, local folder or
Schneider Electric FTP server). Select the data model's source then click on Next .
1
2
Note: The procedure below assumes connection to Schneider Electric FTP server.
The Data Model Manager loads the data models' details then automatically displays the language selection panel. Select the menu language then click on Next .
Getting Started
MiCOM P116
P116_EN_GS_A11 v2.7
(GS) 3-55
1
2
The data models panel is displayed. Select the data model relevant to your product (for instance, to download P10x data models, expand the Px10/Px20/Px20C/M/Modulex submenu (click on + then select the data model relevant to your product). Once the data models are selected, the Data Model Manager window displays the file size of the download.
GS
1
2
3
Click on Install . The data model files are downloaded and updated in your system.
P116_EN_GS_A11 v2.7
(GS) 3-56
Getting Started
MiCOM P116
GS
3.5.3
Once installation is complete, close the Data Model Manager. The downloaded Data Model will be used by MiCOM S1 Studio when a system file is opened or created. For more
information on how to open this default setting file, refer to § 3.5.9.
“Quick Connection” to the relay using MiCOM S1 Studio
To start MiCOM S1 Studio, click on the icon:
In the Programs menu, select Schneider Electric then MiCOM S1 Studio .
Getting Started
MiCOM P116
The MiCOM S1 Studio launcher screen is displayed:
Toolbar
P116_EN_GS_A11 v2.7
(GS) 3-57
Studio Explorer
& properties views
Start page
−
Click on the Quick Connect button at the top left of the application's window.
GS
−
Select Px10 Series from the presented options.
1
P116_EN_GS_A11 v2.7
(GS) 3-58
−
Select Front USB port .
1
Getting Started
MiCOM P116
GS
−
Enter Password: administrator level (without limits) - the same as in the P116 which is connected via USB port. If the administrator password is not entered in the P116 – leave it as default. Note: the password could be unique for every P116 so if the password is forgotten – contact with SE service for help.
NOTE:
1. The default password is 0000 for every password protection level.
2. For communication via Setting Software (MiCOM S1 Studio or MiCOM S1) the administrator password must be entered – the same as it was entered in the relay.
3. S1 recognizes the password as characters. If the password is 0001 (in the password window of P116’s menu, 4 digits always are displayed) it is necessary to enter 0001 in S1 (all four digits have to be entered). For above case: 1 or 01 or 001 will be rejected. Only 0001 will be accepted.
Select virtual COM (VCP) which was created by USB driver.
1
2
3
Getting Started
MiCOM P116
The virtual COM can be read in WINDOWS’s “Device Manager” like below:
P116_EN_GS_A11 v2.7
(GS) 3-59
1
NOTE: If P116 is connected but no any USB Serial port is shown, it means that USB drivers are not installed or VCP (Virtual COM Port) option of USB Serial Converter is not selected. Check VCP option as below:
GS
1
Right-click to open the contextual menu: Properties and Advanced:
1
2
Unplug USB cable and plug in again. Restart S1 Studio and repeat the procedure.
P116_EN_GS_A11 v2.7
(GS) 3-60
−
Select Language . Enter Name and Comment .
Getting Started
MiCOM P116
GS
2
1
3
NOTE: If in Data Model (opened setting file) the language is English, even another language was selected, click left pushbutton of the mouse on the setting file (as below 000) and click right pushbutton of the mouse, select “Open in Other Language” then click left pushbutton of the mouse to see selection “Language” window as below. In “Language” window select required language version. Before above operation the setting file has to be closed.
−
The new Device is created:
1
Getting Started
MiCOM P116
−
P116_EN_GS_A11 v2.7
Select Settings. Right-click to open the contextual menu: Extract Settings :
(GS) 3-61
1
2
−
Wait for the end of the process:
GS
−
P116 settings were saved on PC. The name of SET file is 000.set:
1
P116_EN_GS_A11 v2.7 Getting Started
(GS) 3-62 MiCOM P116
−
Double Click on 000.set
SET file to see settings on the right window of MiCOM S1
Studio
1
GS
−
Change settings. Save changes.
Note: If the changed settings are not Saved on hard disk of PC, MiCOM S1 Studio send setting file before changing. Be sure that Save icon was pressed.
2
1
−
Click on the name of Device and right-click to open the contextual menu: Send :
1 2
Getting Started
MiCOM P116
−
Select setting ( 000.set
) file for sending. Press Send .
P116_EN_GS_A11 v2.7
(GS) 3-63
1
−
If 000.set
file was saved on the PC disc, press Yes .
1
−
Wait for the end of operation. Press Close .
2
GS
1
3.5.4
Settings were set to P116.
Create a system
In MiCOM S1 Studio, a System provides a root node in the Studio Explorer panel from which all subsequent nodes are created.
Add substations, bays, voltage levels and devices to the system.
If a system is no longer needed, delete it using the delete command.
The use of Quick Connect will automatically create a default system, if one does not already exist. Systems are not opened automatically, unless Reopen last System at start-up is checked in the Preferences menu.
P116_EN_GS_A11 v2.7
(GS) 3-64
To create a new system:
Getting Started
MiCOM P116
−
By default, the window displays the message “create new or open existing system”: click on "New" to create a new system.
−
If a system is loaded in the “ Studio Explorer window, right-click on the panel's background and select "New System" or the corresponding icon on Studio Explorer's toolbar.
1
GS
−
The following window is displayed: Enter the name of the system, and the path to save the system file. Click OK .
1
2
3
The new System is displayed in the Studio Explorer panel:
1
Note: If an item is selected in the Studio Explorer panel, its properties are displayed in the Properties panel.
Getting Started
MiCOM P116
P116_EN_GS_A11 v2.7
(GS) 3-65
3.5.5 Create a new substation
Select the system: the menu bar is updated with the New device , New substation , Close ,
Delete , Paste , Properties and Options icons.
GS
1
2
Click on the New substation icon (or right-click to open the contextual menu). The following window is displayed:
1
2
1
P116_EN_GS_A11 v2.7
(GS) 3-66
Getting Started
MiCOM P116
The new substation is displayed and the menu bar is updated when a substation is selected:
1
GS
3.5.6
Click on the Import SCL button to import a Substation Configuration File.
To create a substation configuration, click on the New voltage level button.
Create a new voltage level
Select the substation and click on the New station level button (or right-click to open the contextual menu).
In the Create a new voltage level , enter the voltage level of the station.
The New voltage level is displayed and the New bay icon is displayed.
1
Getting Started
MiCOM P116
3.5.7
P116_EN_GS_A11 v2.7
(GS) 3-67
Create a new bay
Select the substation and click on the New bay button (or right-click to open the contextual menu).
In the Create new bay… window, enter the bay indication,
The new bay is displayed.
1
GS
3.5.8 Create a new device
Click on the New device button (or right-click to open the contextual menu).
Select the device type.
1
P116_EN_GS_A11 v2.7
(GS) 3-68
Select the device type then click on Next .
Select the model then click on Next .
Getting Started
MiCOM P116
GS
1
1
2
Enter the name and add a description to the device:
1
2
3
2
Getting Started
MiCOM P116
The new device is created and displayed.
P116_EN_GS_A11 v2.7
(GS) 3-69
1
3.5.9 Open a Settings File
To open an existing file:
−
If the file is saved or if the relay is not connected: Click on the Settings and right-click to open the contextual menu: Add Existing file
1
1
GS
P116_EN_GS_A11 v2.7 Getting Started
(GS) 3-70 MiCOM P116
−
If the relay is connected, extract its settings: Click on the Settings and right-click to open the contextual menu: Extract Settings
GS
1
To open default settings:
−
Click on the Settings and right-click to open the contextual menu: New File
1
−
The new setting file 000.set is created:
1
Getting Started
MiCOM P116
P116_EN_GS_A11 v2.7
(GS) 3-71
−
Start working with MiCOM P116 relay.
NOTE:
1. The default password is 0000 for every password protection level.
2. For communication via Setting Software (MiCOM S1 Studio or MiCOM S1) the administrator password must be entered – the same as was entered in the relay.
3. S1 recognizes password as characters. If the password is 0001 (in the password window of P116’s menu, 4 digits are displayed) it is necessary to enter 0001 in S1
(all four digits have to be put). For above case: 1 or 01 or 001 will be rejected. 0001 will be accepted only.
GS
P116_EN_GS_A11 v2.7
(GS) 3-72
3.6 MiCOM S1
3.6.1 Starting MiCOM S1
Getting Started
MiCOM P116
To start MiCOM S1 Studio, click on the icon:
In the Programs menu, select MiCOM S1 then PX20, Px20C, M, Modulex Series Tools then S&R-Modbus
GS
WARNING: Clicking on "Uninstall MiCOM S1", will uninstall MiCOM S1, as well as all data and records used in MiCOM S1.
S&R-Modbus screen is displayed:
3.6.2 Open communication link with relay
To open the communications link from S1 to the relay, follow the following procedure:
First, if necessary, the communication setup must be adjusted. In the Device menu, select
Communications Setup…
This brings up the following screen:
Getting Started
MiCOM P116
P116_EN_GS_A11 v2.7
(GS) 3-73
COMMUNICATION SET-UP SCREEN
When the communications setup is correct the link with the relay can be initialized. In the
"Device" menu, select "Open Connection…" GS
This brings up a prompt for the address of the relay to be polled.
When this has been entered a prompt for the password appears.
Enter Password: administrator level (without limits) - the same as in the P116 which is connected via USB port. If the administrator password is not entered in the P116 – leave it as default. Note: the password could be unique for every P116 so if the password is forgotten – contact with SE service for help.
NOTE:
1. The default password is 0000 for every password protection level.
2. For communication via Setting Software (MiCOM S1) the administrator password must be entered – the same as it was entered in the relay.
3. S1 recognizes the password as characters. If the password is 0001 (in the password window of P116’s menu, 4 digits always are displayed) it is necessary to enter 0001 in S1 (all four digits have to be entered). For above case: 1 or 01 or 001 will be rejected. Only 0001 will be accepted.
P116_EN_GS_A11 v2.7
(GS) 3-74
Getting Started
MiCOM P116
When these have been entered satisfactorily the relay is then able to communicate with
MiCOM S1. When a communication link has been established between the PC and a
MiCOM IED, both are said to be online. Data and information can be directly transferred to and from the IED using the menu available under the DEVICE menu.
GS
For further instruction on how to extract, download and modify settings files, please refer to the MiCOM S1 User Manual.
Select the main function in the right hand side window.
To modify a setting value, double click the corresponding line in the left hand side window.
This opens a setting window.
A red star (
∗
) indicates that a setting value has been modified.
3.6.3 Off-line use of MiCOM S1
Getting Started
MiCOM P116
P116_EN_GS_A11 v2.7
(GS) 3-75
As well as being used for the on-line editing of settings, MiCOM S1 can also be used as an off-line tool to prepare settings without access to the relay. In order to open a default setting file for modification, select New and then Settings File… in the File menu.
This brings up a prompt for the relay model type where you can select the correct relay for your application:
GS
3.6.4
Clicking on OK will open the default file and you can start to edit settings. For further instruction on how to extract, download and modify settings files, please refer to the MiCOM
S1 User Manual.
MiCOM monitoring
The monitoring module allows connection to the relay's front port so as to retrieve and monitor its measurements.
In the Programs menu, select MiCOM S1 then PX20, Px20C, M, Modulex Series Tools then Measurement Viewer
The monitoring module is displayed.
P116_EN_GS_A11 v2.7
(GS) 3-76
Use the Device menu to configure the communications and
Getting Started
MiCOM P116
GS
3.7
The Communications setup… menu is used to select or set-up the communication settings.
The Open Connection… menu is used to retrieve data from the connected device.
Troubleshooting USB connection
The virtual COM can be read in WINDOWS’s “Device Manager” like below:
1
NOTE: If P116 is connected but no any USB Serial port is shown, it means that: a) USB drivers are not installed or b) VCP (Virtual COM Port) option of USB Serial Converter is not selected.
USB drivers:
1
If you can’t see “USB Serial Converter” it means that USB divers are not installed.
Refer section “3.2 USB Driver and virtual COM software installation”
Getting Started
MiCOM P116
VCP (Virtual COM Port)
On the window as below:
P116_EN_GS_A11 v2.7
(GS) 3-77
1
Check VCP option by right-click to open the contextual menu: Properties and Advanced:
GS
1
2
Unplug USB cable and plug in again. Restart S1 Studio and repeat the procedure.
P116_EN_GS_A11 v2.7
(GS) 3-78
3.8 Presentation and analysis of disturbances
Getting Started
MiCOM P116
Reading and analysis of disturbance records is done using Wavewin.
To open Wavewin with MiCOM S1:
In the Programs menu, select MiCOM S1 then PX20, Px20C, M, Modulex Series Tools then WaveWin
GS
Using MiCOM S1 Studio, open Wavewin using the Tools menu.
1
The Wavewin File Manager is displayed (refer to the Wavewin User’s guide to operate
Wavewin).
Getting Started
MiCOM P116
4.
P116_EN_GS_A11 v2.7
(GS) 3-79
COMPANY CONTACT INFORMATION
If you need information pertaining to the operation of the MiCOM product that you have purchased, please contact your local Schneider Electric agent or the After Sales Service
Department of Schneider Electric. Do not forget to give the serial number and reference of the MiCOM product.
The MiCOM product reference and serial numbers are documented under the upper hinged cover on the front of the relay. For more precise information, refer to the section "Relay
Identification" in this chapter.
PLEASE PROVIDE THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION WHEN CONTACTING
SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC:
−
CORTEC code of the MiCOM relay
−
Serial number of the MiCOM relay
−
Schneider Electric order reference
−
Schneider Electric operator reference
Schneider Electric Worldwide Contact Centre:
−
Website: http://www.schneider-electric.com/CCC
GS
GS
P116_EN_GS_A11 v2.7
(GS) 3-80
Getting Started
MiCOM P116
Settings
MiCOM P116
P116_EN_ST_A11 v2.7
ST
Date:
Hardware Suffix:
Software Version:
Connection Diagrams:
SETTINGS
17 th
November 2013
A
1C
10P11602
Settings
MiCOM P116
CONTENTS
SOTF (Switch On To Fault function) (Model A)
[46] Negative Sequence O/C (Model A)
Setting Group Select (Model A)
[79] Advanced Settings (Model A)
Communication Orders (Model A)
Optional Flag Indicators Configuration (Model A)
General Input Configuration (Model A)
P116_EN_ST_A11 v2.7
(ST) 4-1
ST
ST
P116_EN_ST_A11 v2.7
(ST) 4-2
Settings
MiCOM P116
Settings
MiCOM P116
1. GENERAL INFORMATION
P116_EN_ST_A11 v2.7
(ST) 4-3
The P116 must be configured to the system and application by means of the appropriate settings. This section gives instructions for determining the settings, which are located in the folder entitled, SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC ENERGY in the menu tree. The order in which the settings are listed and described in this chapter is: the protection settings control and configuration settings (see section P116/EN GS for the detailed relay menu map). The relay is supplied with a factory-set configuration of default settings
All current settings refer to nominal current (ordering option: 1 A or 5 A). The nominal current can be defined separately for phase (
I n) and earth (
I en) currents in the ordering process (ordering hardware option).
MiCOM S1 can be used to download and upload protection and configuration setting values via the relay's USB port.
−
−
The protection and I/O settings include all the following items that become active once enabled in the configuration column of the relay menu database:
−
−
Protection element settings.
Output settings
Input settings (Model A)
LED settings
In Model A, there are two groups of protection and I/O settings, with each group containing the same setting cells. One group of protection and I/O settings is selected as the active group, and is used by the protection elements. The settings for group 1 are shown. The settings are discussed in the same order in which they are displayed in the menu.
The menu structure is as follows:
- DEFAULT WINDOW (Currents in multiples of
I n, currents in Amps, CB Control window,
Local/remote control window, au to-reclose window)
- ALARM STATUS
- RECORDS
-
-
FAULT RECORDS
ALARM RECORDS (Model A)
- INSTANTANEOUS RECORDS (Model A)
- COUNTERS
-
-
CONTROL COUNTER
FAULT COUNTER
(Model A)
- AUTORECLOSE COUNTER (Model A)
- CB MONITORING COUNTER (Model A)
- MAX&AVERAGE VALUES
- SETTING GROUP 1
- PROTECTION G1
- PHASE O/C G1 [50/51]
- SOTF G1 [50/51] (Model A)
- E/GND FAULT G1 [50N/51N]
- UNDERCURRENT [37] (Model A)
- NEGATIVE SEQUENCE O/C G1 [46] (Model A)
ST
ST
P116_EN_ST_A11 v2.7
(ST) 4-4
- BROKEN CONDUCTOR G1 [46BC] (Model A)
- THERMAL OVERLOAD G1 [49]
- CB FAIL G1 [50BF]
- AUX TIMERS G1 (Model A)
- LOGIC SELECTIVITY G1 (Model A)
- COLD LOAD PICK UP G1 (Model A)
- AUTORECLOSE G1 [79] (Model A)
- OUTPUT RELAY CONFIGURATION G1
- INPUTS CONFIGURATION G1 (Model A)
- LEDS CONFIGURATION G1
- SETTING GROUP 2 (Model A)
- PROTECTION G2
- PHASE O/C G2 [50/51]
- SOTF [50/51] G2
- E/GND FAULT G2 [50N/51N]
- UNDERCURRENT G2 [37]
- NEGATIVE SEQUENCE O/C G2 [46]
- BROKEN CONDUCTOR G2 )
- THERMAL OVERLOAD G2 [49]
- CB FAIL G2 [50BF]
- AUX TIMERS G2
- LOGIC SELECTIVITY G2
- COLD LOAD PICK UP G2
- AUTORECLOSE G2 [79]
- OUTPUT RELAY CONFIGURATION G2
- INPUTS CONFIGURATION G2
- LEDS CONFIGURATION G2
- GLOBAL SETTINGS
- LOC
-
-
SETTING GROUP SELECT
CT RATIO
(Model A)
- CIRCUIT BREAKER
- INRUSH BLOCKING
- O/C ADVANCED
- [79] ADVANCED SETTINGS ( Model A)
- COMMUNICATION ORDERS (Model A)
- OPTIONAL FLAG INDICATORS CONFIGURATION (Model A)
- GENERAL INPUT CONFIGURATION (Model A)
Settings
MiCOM P116
Settings
MiCOM P116
- COMMUNICATION (Model A)
- MAX & AVERAGE
I
CONFIGURATION
- DISTURBANCE RECORDER
- COMMISSIONING
- SETTING CHANGE MODE
- OP PARAMETERS
- MEASUREMENTS
P116_EN_ST_A11 v2.7
(ST) 4-5
ST
ST
P116_EN_ST_A11 v2.7
(ST) 4-6
2. SETTINGS
2.1
2.1.1
Protection Settings
[50/51] Phase O/C
Settings
MiCOM P116
The overcurrent protection included in the P116 relay provides non-directional three-phase overcurrent protection with independent time-delay characteristics. All overcurrent settings apply to all of the three phases but are independent for each of the three stages.
The first two overcurrent stages have time-delayed characteristics which are selectable between inverse definite minimum time (IDMT) and definite time (DMT). The third stage has definite time characteristics (DMT) only.
Menu Text Default Setting
Setting Range
Min. Max.
Step Size
I
> ? Disabled
Disabled, Trip, Alarm, Trip-Inrush Bl,
Trip-Latch
Setting to disable or enable the protection element.
The protection element can be set to trip the CB (Enable Trip ), only issue an Alarm signal
(Enable Alarm ), trip the CB with Inrush Blocking logic ( Trip-Inrush Bl ) or trip the CB with latching until LEDs / signaling reset ( Trip-Latch ).
If the protection element is set to 'Trip' or 'Trip-Inrush Bl' or 'Trip-Latch' it means that it is linked to the Protection trip (see LED and Output configuration) and Trip Command (see
Output configuration) functions. Additionally this protection element will trigger fault recording, disturbance recording, as well as the Trip LED and the Flag indicator on the front panel.
If the protection element is set to 'Alarm' it means that it is linked to the Alarm function
(see LED and Output configuration) and 'ALARM STATUS' indication.
I
> Threshold 1.2 x
I n 0.1 x
I n 40.0 x
I n 0.01 x
I n
I
Pick-up setting for the first stage of the overcurrent element.
If IDMT is used the recommended value is up to 3 x
I n because of the 20-times dependency of IDMT characteristics (the dynamic measuring range is up to 60 x
I n).
> Delay Type IEC SI
DMT, IEC SI, IEC VI, IEC EI, UK LTI,
UK STI, UK RC, RI, IEEE MI, IEEE VI,
IEEE EI, US CO2-P20, US CO8, RXIDG,
BNP EDF, CO2-P40
Setting for the tripping characteristic for the first stage overcurrent element. t
I
> 1 s 0.05 s 200 s 0.01 s
Setting for the time-delay for the definite time setting if selected for first stage element.
I
> TMS 1 0.02 1.6 0.01
Setting for the time multiplier setting to adjust the operating time of the IEC, UK, and RI
IDMT characteristics.
I
> Time Dial 1 0.02 200 0.01
Setting for the time multiplier setting to adjust the operating time of the IEEE/US IDMT curves.
Reset Delay Type
I
> DMT DMT or IDMT N/A
Setting to determine the type of reset/release characteristic of the IEEE/US curves.
DMT tReset
I
> 0 s 0 s 200 s 0.01 s
Setting that determines the reset/release time for definite time reset characteristics.
RTD/RTMS Reset I> 0.02 s 0.02 s 1.6 s 0.01 s
Setting that determines the reset/release time for IDMT time reset characteristics.
Settings
MiCOM P116
P116_EN_ST_A11 v2.7
(ST) 4-7
Menu Text Default Setting
Setting Range
Min. Max.
Step Size
I
>> ? Disabled
Disabled, Trip, Alarm, Trip-Inrush Bl,
Trip-Latch
I
See
I
>?
>> Threshold 1.4 x
I n 0.1 x
I n 40.0 x
I n 0.01 x
I n
Pick-up setting for the second stage of the overcurrent element.
If IDMT is used the recommended value is up to 3 x
I n because of the 20-times dependency of IDMT characteristics (the dynamic measuring range is up to 60 x
I n).
Delay Type
I
>> IEC SI
DMT, IEC SI, IEC VI, IEC EI, UK LTI,
UK STI, UK RC, RI, IEEE MI, IEEE VI,
IEEE EI, US CO2-P20, US CO8, RXIDG,
BNP EDF, US CO2-P40
Setting for the tripping characteristic for this stage overcurrent element. t
I
>> 1 0.05 200 0.01
Setting for the time-delay for the definite time setting if selected for this stage element.
I
>> TMS 1 0.02 1.6 0.01
Setting for the time multiplier setting to adjust the operating time of the IEC, UK, and RI
IDMT characteristics.
I
>> Time Dial 1 0.02 200 0.01
Setting for the time multiplier setting to adjust the operating time of the IEEE/US IDMT curves.
Reset Delay Type
I
>>
DMT DMT or IDMT N/A
Setting to determine the type of reset/release characteristic of the IEEE/US curves.
DMT tReset
I
>> 0 s 0 s 600 s 0.01 s
Setting that determines the reset/release time for definite time reset characteristics.
RTD/RTMS Reset
I>>
0.02 s 0.02 s 1.6 s 0.01 s
Setting that determines the reset/release time for IDMT time reset characteristics
I
>>> ? Disabled
Disabled, Trip, Alarm, Trip-Inrush Bl,
Trip-Latch
See
I
>?
I
>>> Threshold 4 x
I n 1 x
I n 40.0 x
I n
Pick-up setting for the third stage of the overcurrent element. t
I
>>> 0.1 s 0 s 200 s
0.01 x
0.01 s
I n
Setting for the time-delay for the definite time setting if selected for this stage element.
IDMT tripping can be blocked if any DMT stage is started, settings: IDMT interlock by DMT
( GLOBAL SETTINGS/O/C ADVANCED column). This settings is common for E/Gnd Fault
[50N/51N] and Phase O/C [50/51] and [46] Negative Sequence (see point:
Menu Text Default Setting Setting Range Step Size
IDMT interlock by
DMT
No No, Yes, 20Is n/a
ST
ST
P116_EN_ST_A11 v2.7
(ST) 4-8
2.1.2 SOTF (Switch On To Fault function) (Model A)
Settings
MiCOM P116
With the Switch On To Fault (SOTF) submenu, it is possible to shorten the time to trip when for example the relay has detected a fault that is still present on a feeder after energizing.
The SOTF overcurrent element is activated after Manual Close command (communication port, binary input, front panel) up to 52 Unblock SOTF Time (GLOBAL
SETTINGS/CIRCUIT BREAKER) . SOTF is blocked when the auto-recloser close CB.
SOTF? Disabled
Disabled, Trip, Alarm, Trip-Inrush Bl,
Trip-Latch
Setting to disable or enable the protection element.
The protection element can be set to trip the CB (Enable Trip ), only issue an Alarm signal
(Enable Alarm ), trip the CB with Inrush Blocking logic ( Trip-Inrush Bl ) or trip the CB with latching until LEDs / signaling reset ( Trip-Latch ).
If the protection element is set to 'Trip' or 'Trip-Inrush Bl' or 'Trip-Latch' it means that it is linked to the Protection trip (see LED and Output configuration) and Trip Command (see
Output configuration) functions. Additionally this protection element will trigger fault recording, disturbance recording, as well as the Trip LED and the Flag indicator on the front panel.
If the protection element is set to 'Alarm' it means that it is linked to the Alarm function
(see LED and Output configuration) and 'ALARM STATUS' indication.
SOTF Threshold 4 x
I n 1 x
I n 40.0 x
I n 0.01 x
I n
Pick-up setting for the third stage of the overcurrent element. tSOTF 0.1 s 0 s 600 s 0.01 s
Setting for the time-delay for the definite time setting if selected for this stage element.
Settings
MiCOM P116
2.1.3 [50N/51N] E/Gnd Fault
P116_EN_ST_A11 v2.7
(ST) 4-9
The earth fault element operates from earth fault current that is measured directly from the system; either by means of a separate CT located in a power system earth connection or via a residual connection of the three line CTs.
All overcurrent settings are independent for each of the two stages.
The first stage of e/f non-directional overcurrent protection has time-delayed characteristics which are selectable between inverse definite minimum time (IDMT) and definite time (DMT).
The second stage has definite time characteristics only.
Menu Text Default Setting
Setting Range
Min. Max.
Step Size
I
N_1 stage? Disabled
Disabled, IN>Trip, IN> Alarm, IN> Trip-
Inrush Bl, IN> Trip-Latch
Setting to disable or enable the protection element.
The protection element can be set to trip the CB (Enable Trip ), only issue an Alarm signal
(Enable Alarm ), trip the CB with Inrush Blocking logic ( Trip-Inrush Bl ) or trip the CB with latching until LEDs / signaling reset ( Trip-Latch ).
If the protection element is set to 'Trip' or 'Trip-Inrush Bl' or 'Trip-Latch' it means that it is linked to the Protection trip (see LED and Output configuration) and Trip Command (see
Output configuration) functions. Additionally this protection element will trigger fault recording, disturbance recording, as well as the Trip LED and the Flag indicator on the front panel.
If the protection element is set to 'Alarm' it means that it is linked to the Alarm function
(see LED and Output configuration) and 'ALARM STATUS' indication.
I
N_1 Threshold 0.2 x
I en 0.002 x
I en 1 x
I en 0.001 x
I en
Pick-up setting for the first stage e/f overcurrent element.
If IDMT is used, the recommended value is up to 0.05 x
I en because of the 20-times dependency of IDMT characteristics (the dynamic measuring range is up to 1 x
I en).
For dynamic range (ordering option): 0.002-1
I en, where
I en: nominal current for e/f input
I
N_1 Threshold 0.2 x
I en 0.01 x
I en 8 x
I en 0.01 x
I en
Pick-up setting for first stage overcurrent element.
If IDMT is used, the recommended value is up to 0.5 x
I n because of 20-times dependency of IDMT characteristics (the dynamic measuring range is up to 10 x
I en).
For dynamic range (ordering option): 0.01-8
I en, where
I en: nominal current for e/f input
I
N_1 Threshold 0.2 x Ien 0.1 x
I en 40 x
I en 0.01 x
I en
Pick-up setting for the first stage e/f overcurrent element.
If IDMT is used, the recommended value is up to 3.0 x
I n because of 20 times dependence of IDMT characteristics (the dynamic measuring range is up to 60 x
I en).
For dynamic range (ordering option): 0.1-40
I en, where
I en: nominal current for e/f input
Delay Type
I
N_1 IEC SI
DMT, IEC SI, IEC VI, IEC EI, UK LTI,
UK STI, UK RC, RI, IEEE MI, IEEE VI,
IEEE EI, US CO2-P20, US CO8, RXIDG,
BNP EDF, US CO2-P40
Setting for the tripping characteristic for the first stage e/f overcurrent element. t
I
N_1 1 s 0.05 s 200 s 0.01 s
Setting for the time-delay for the definite time setting if selected for first e/f stage element.
I
N_1 TMS 1 0.02 1.6 0.01
Setting for the time multiplier setting to adjust the operating time of the IEC, UK, and RI
IDMT characteristics.
ST
ST
P116_EN_ST_A11 v2.7
(ST) 4-10
Settings
MiCOM P116
Setting Range
Menu Text Default Setting Step Size
Min. Max.
I
N_1 Time Dial 1 0.02 200 0.01
Setting for the time multiplier setting to adjust the operating time of the IEEE/US IDMT curves.
Reset Delay Type
I
N_1
DMT DMT or IDMT N/A
Setting to determine the type of reset/release characteristic of the IEEE/US curves.
RTD/RTMS Reset
I
N>
0.02 0.02 1.6 0.01
Setting that determines the reset/release time for IDMT time reset characteristics.
DMT tReset
I
N> 0 s 0 s 200 s 0.01 s
Setting that determines the reset/release time for definite time reset characteristics.
I
N_2 ? Disabled
Disabled, IN>> Trip, IN>> Alarm, IN>>
Trip-Inrush Bl, IN>> Trip-Latch
See
I
N_1 stage?
I
N_2 Threshold 0.05 x
I en 0.025 x
I en 1.0 x
I en 0.001 x
I en
Pick-up setting for the second stage of the e/f overcurrent element.
For dynamic range (ordering option): 0.002-1
I en, where
I en: nominal current for e/f input
I
N_2 Threshold 0.4 x
I en 0.2 x
I en 8.0 x
I en 0.01 x
I en
Pick-up setting for the second stage of the overcurrent element.
For dynamic range (ordering option): 0.01-10
I en, where
I en: nominal current for e/f input
I
N_2 Threshold 2.0 x
I en 1 x
I en 40.0 x
I en 0.1 x
I en
Pick-up setting for the second stage of the e/f overcurrent element.
For dynamic range (ordering option): 0.1-40
I en, where
I en: nominal current for e/f input t
I
N_2 0.2 s 0 s 200 s 0.01 s
Setting for the time-delay for the definite time setting if selected for this stage.
I
N_3 stage? Disabled
Disabled, IN>>> Trip, IN>>> Alarm, IN>>>
Trip-Inrush Bl, IN>>> Trip-Latch
See
I
N_1 stage?
I
N_3 Threshold 0.2 x
I en 0.025 x
I en 1.0 x
I en 0.001 x
I en
Pick-up setting for the second stage of the e/f overcurrent element.
For dynamic range (ordering option): 0.002-1
I en, where
I en: nominal current for e/f input
I
N_3 Threshold 0.2 x
I en 0.1 x
I en 8.0 x
I en 0.01 x
I en
Pick-up setting for second stage of the overcurrent element.
For dynamic range (ordering option): 0.01-8
I en, where
I en: nominal current for e/f input
I
N_3 Threshold 0.2 x
I en 1 x
I en 40.0 x
I en 0.1 x
I en
Pick-up setting for the second stage of the e/f overcurrent element.
For dynamic range (ordering option): 0.1-40
I en, where
I en: nominal current for e/f input t
I
N_3 0.05 s 0 s 200 s 0.01 s
Setting for the time-delay for the definite time setting if selected for this stage.
Settings P116_EN_ST_A11 v2.7
MiCOM P116 (ST) 4-11
IDMT tripping can be blocked if any DMT stage is started, settings: IDMT interlock by DMT
( GLOBAL SETTINGS/O/C ADVANCED column). This settings is common for E/Gnd Fault
[50N/51N] and Phase O/C [50/51] and [46] Negative Sequence
Menu Text Default Setting Setting Range Step Size
No No, Yes, 20Is n/a IDMT interlock by DMT
ST
ST
P116_EN_ST_A11 v2.7
(ST) 4-12
2.1.4 [37] Undercurrent (Model A)
Settings
MiCOM P116
I
< ? Disabled
Disabled, Trip, Alarm, Trip-Inrush Bl, Trip-
Latch, Trip-Inhib 52A, Alarm-Inhib 52
Setting to disable or enable the protection element.
The protection element can be set to trip the CB (Enable Trip ), only issue an Alarm signal
(Enable Alarm ), trip the CB with Inrush Blocking logic ( Trip-Inrush Bl ), trip the CB with latching until LEDs / signaling reset ( Trip-Latch ), trip the CB with blocking of
I
< if the CB is not closed ( Trip-Inhib 52A ) or only issue an Alarm signal with blocking of
I
< if the CB is not closed ( Alarm-Inhib 52A ).
If the protection element is set to 'Trip' or 'Trip-Inrush Bl' or 'Trip-Latch' it means that it is linked to the Protection trip (see LED and Output configuration) and Trip Command (see
Output configuration) functions. Additionally this protection element will trigger fault recording, disturbance recording, as well as the Trip LED and the Flag indicator on the front panel.
If the protection element is set to 'Alarm' it means that it is linked to the Alarm function
(see LED and Output configuration) and 'ALARM STATUS' indication.
I
< Threshold 2 x
I n 0.1 x
I n 2.0 x
I n 0.01 x
I n
Pick-up setting for third stage of the overcurrent element. t
I
< 0.1 s 0.05 s 200 s 0.01 s
Setting for the time-delay for the definite time setting if selected for this element.
Settings
MiCOM P116
2.1.5 [46] Negative Sequence O/C (Model A)
P116_EN_ST_A11 v2.7
(ST) 4-13
Menu Text Default Setting
Setting Range
Min. Max.
Step Size
I
I
2> ?
2> Delay Type
Disabled
IEC SI
Disabled, Trip, Alarm, Trip-Inrush Bl,
Trip-Latch
Setting to disable or enable the protection element.
The protection element can be set to trip the CB (Enable Trip ), only issue an Alarm signal
(Enable Alarm ), trip the CB with Inrush Blocking logic ( Trip-Inrush Bl ) or trip the CB with latching until LEDs / signaling reset ( Trip-Latch ).
If the protection element is set to 'Trip' or 'Trip-Inrush Bl' or 'Trip-Latch' it means that it is linked to the Protection trip (see LED and Output configuration) and Trip Command (see
Output configuration) functions. Additionally this protection element will trigger fault recording, disturbance recording, as well as the Trip LED and the Flag indicator on the front panel.
If the protection element is set to 'Alarm' it means that it is linked to the Alarm function
(see LED and Output configuration) and 'ALARM STATUS' indication.
I
2> Threshold 1.0x
I n 0.1 x
I n 4.0 x
I n 0.01 x
I n
Pick-up setting for the first stage of the overcurrent element.
If IDMT is used recommended value is up to 3xIn because of 20 time dependence of IDMT characteristics. (dynamic measuring range is up to 60xIn)
DMT, IEC SI, IEC VI, IEC EI, UK LTI,
UK STI, UK RC, RI, IEEE MI, IEEE VI,
IEEE EI, US CO2-P20, US CO8, RXIDG,
BNP EDF, US CO2-P40
Setting for the tripping characteristic for the first stage overcurrent element. t
I
2> 1 s 0.05 s 200 s 0.01 s
Setting for the time-delay for the definite time setting if selected for first stage element.
I
2> TMS 1 0.02 1.6 0.01
Setting for the time multiplier setting to adjust the operating time of the IEC, UK, and RI
IDMT characteristic
I
2> Time Dial 1 0.02 200 0.01
Setting for the time multiplier setting to adjust the operating time of the IEEE/US IDMT curves.
Reset Delay Type
I
2>
DMT DMT or IDMT N/A
Setting to determine the type of reset/release characteristic of the IEEE/US curves.
DMT tReset
I
2> 0 s 0 s 600 s 0.01 s
Setting that determines the reset/release time for definite time reset characteristics.
RTD/RTMS Reset
I
2>
0.02 0.02 1.6 0.01
Setting that determines the reset/release time for IDMT time reset characteristics.
IDMT tripping can be blocked if any DMT stage is started, settings: IDMT interlock by DMT
( GLOBAL SETTINGS/O/C ADVANCED column). This settings is common for E/Gnd Fault
[50N/51N] and Phase O/C [50/51] and [46] Negative Sequence O/C
Menu Text Default Setting Setting Range Step Size
IDMT interlock by DMT No No, Yes, 20Is n/a
ST
ST
P116_EN_ST_A11 v2.7
(ST) 4-14
2.1.6 [46BC] Broken Conductor
Settings
MiCOM P116
Menu Text
Broken Cond.?
Default Setting
Disabled
Setting Range Step Size
Disabled, Trip, Alarm, Trip-Inrush Bl,
Trip-Latch
Setting to disable or enable the protection element.
The protection element can be set to trip the CB (Enable Trip ), only issue an Alarm signal
(Enable Alarm ), trip the CB with Inrush Blocking logic ( Trip-Inrush Bl ) or trip the CB with latching until LEDs / signaling reset ( Trip-Latch ).
If the protection element is set to 'Trip' or 'Trip-Inrush Bl' or 'Trip-Latch' it means that it is linked to the Protection trip (see LED and Output configuration) and Trip Command (see
Output configuration) functions. Additionally this protection element will trigger fault recording, disturbance recording, as well as the Trip LED and the Flag indicator on the front panel.
If the protection element is set to 'Alarm' it means that it is linked to the Alarm function
(see LED and Output configuration) and 'ALARM STATUS' indication.
Ratio I2/I1 20% 20%
Pick-up setting for the third stage of the overcurrent element.
100% 1% tBCond 100 s 0.05 s 600 s 0.01 s
Setting for the time-delay for the definite time setting if selected for this stage element.
Broken Conductor [46BC] is disabled if the current: A and B and C is below the stage: [46BC]
Brkn.Cond I< Block ( GLOBAL SETTINGS/O/C ADVANCED column)
Menu Text Default Setting Setting Range Step Size
[46BC] Brkn.Cond
I< Block
0.10In 0.10In 1.00In 0.01In
Settings
MiCOM P116
2.1.7 [49] Thermal Overload
P116_EN_ST_A11 v2.7
(ST) 4-15
Menu Text
Therm OL?
Default Setting
Disabled
Setting Range
Disabled, Enabled
Step Size
Setting to disable or enable the protection element.
I therm 1.0 x
I n 0.1 x
I n 3 x
I n 0.01 x
I n
Base current for Thermal Replica. Typically the value should be set to:
I therm =
I
FLC
, In protection algorithm the base current is increased by k: safety factor then it is used for thermal replica calculation; If the safety factor should have greater value than 1.05, the setting value of base current or Theta Trip setting can be additionally increased.
I
FLC
: full load current (maximum permissible current which can flow without risk of reducing the protected object's life).
Te (heating) 40 mn 1 mn 200 mn 1 mn
Heating Time Constant of the protected object (see Application chapter of this Manual).
Tr (cooling) 40 mn 1 mn 999 mn 1 mn
Cooling Time Constant of the protected object (see Application chapter of this Manual).
Typically for protected objects with no moving parts (such as motors) this value should be equal to the Heating Time Constant (Tr = Te)
Theta Trip 100% 50% 200% 1%
Thermal stage for tripping. If the injected current has value is equal: k*
I therm (where k=1.05) this value is set to 100%,
Theta Trip/Reset
Ratio:
90% 20% 99%
Setting for Theta Trip Reset stage.
The reset stage is equal to: ( Theta Trip ) * ( Theta Trip/Reset Ratio ).
1%
Alarm OL? Disabled Disabled, Enabled
Setting for Disabling or Enabling the alarm signaling stage of the Thermal Replica.
20% 200% 1% Theta Alarm 100%
Thermal stage for signaling ( Alarm ).
ST
ST
P116_EN_ST_A11 v2.7
(ST) 4-16
2.1.8 [50BF] CB Fail
This function consists of a circuit breaker fail function that can be initiated by:
Current based protection elements
Settings
MiCOM P116
External protection element: Strt tBF function ( SETTING GROUP x/INPUTS
CONFIGURATION Gx/ column).
For current-based protection, the reset condition is based on undercurrent operation to determine whether the CB has opened.
It is common practice to use low set undercurrent elements in protection relays to indicate that circuit breaker poles have interrupted the fault or load current, as required.
If an external protection is set to trigger the CB Fail element, the trip input must also be mapped to the Strt tBF function . The resetting of the tBF timer is based on the
I
<
Threshold CBF and
I
N< Threshold CBF criteria only. Therefore if an external protection issues a latched trip signal but currents fall below the undercurrent thresholds, CB Fail will not issue the CB Fail signal.
Menu Text Default Setting
Setting Range
Min. Max.
Step Size
CB Fail ? Disabled Disabled, Retrip, Alarm
Setting to enable or disable the circuit breaker supervision function.
Retrip setting – the CBF function trips the local CB upon expiry of the tBF time-delay
Alarm setting – the Alarm signal is issued upon expiry of the tBF time-delay
CB Fail Time tBF 0.1 s 0.1 s 10 s 0.01 s
Setting for the circuit breaker fail timer stage for which the initiating condition must be valid.
I
< Threshold CBF 0.1 x
I n 0.1 x
I n 2 x
I n 0.01 x
I n
Setting that determines the circuit breaker fail timer reset current for overcurrent based protection circuit breaker fail initiation.
I
N< Threshold CBF 0.1 x
I en 0.01 x
I en 1 x
I en 0.01 x
I en
Setting that determines the circuit breaker fail timer reset current for earth fault current based protection circuit breaker fail initiation.
For dynamic range (ordering option): 0.002-1
I en, where
I en: nominal current for e/f input
I
N< Threshold CBF 0.1 x
I en 0.1 x
I en 2 x
I en 0.01 x
I en
Setting that determines the circuit breaker fail timer reset current for earth fault current based protection circuit breaker fail initiation.
For dynamic range (ordering option): 0.01-8
I en, where
I en: nominal current for e/f input
I
N< Threshold CBF 0.1 x
I en 0.1 x
I en 2 x
I en 0.01 x
I en
Setting that determines the circuit breaker fail timer reset current for earth fault current based protection circuit breaker fail initiation.
For dynamic range (ordering option): 0.1-40
I en, where
I en: nominal current for e/f input
Block
I
> ? No No or Yes
Select the possibility to block the instantaneous signal Phase O/C [50/51] stage in case of circuit breaker failure detection.
Block
I
N> ? No No or Yes
Select the possibility to block the instantaneous signal of any E/Gnd Fault [50N/51N] stage in case of circuit breaker failure detection.
Settings
MiCOM P116
2.1.9 Auxiliary Timers (Model A)
P116_EN_ST_A11 v2.7
(ST) 4-17
Menu Text
AUX2 ?
Same as AUX1
Default Setting
Setting Range
Min. Max.
Step Size
AUX1 ? tAUX1
0: Disabled
10
0: Disabled,
1: Trip,
2: Alarm,
3: Trip-Inrush Bl,
4: Trip-Latch,
5: Load Shedding,
6: AR after LS Hi,
7: AR after LS Lo
0 s
Setting for the operating time-delay of the AUX1 function.
N/A
Setting to disable or enable the AUX element.
The element can be set to:
trip the CB (Enable Trip ),
signal only ( Alarm ),
trip the CB with Inrush Blocking logic ( Trip-Inrush Bl )
trip the CB with latching until reset ( Trip-Latch )
trip the CB when a binary input receives the information that the frequency of power system is too low (Load Shedding). This information is saved as long as the
CB remains open or until the power system's frequency returns to its nominal value. The above information is based on the status of the binary input mapped to
AUX ( SETTING GROUP x/INPUT CONFIGURATION Gx/AUX ) with AUX set to
AR after LS Hi or to AR after LS Lo (tripping occurs upon expiry of the tAUX time-delay). The trip command is sent via the Trip CB order output ( SETTING
GROUP x/OUTPUT RELAYS CONFIGURATION Gx/Trip CB order ).
reclose after Load Shedding triggered by a high state of the AUX function ( AR after LS Hi ). Load shedding information is based on the status of the binary input mapped to AUX ( SETTING GROUP x/INPUT CONFIGURATION Gx/AUX ) with
AUX set to Load Shedding . If the P116 has saved Load Shedding information and AUX indicates that the power system frequency has returned to its nominal value, the tAUX time-delay is started. At the end of tAUX the close command is issued. The close command is issued via the Close CB order output ( SETTING
GROUP x/OUTPUT RELAYS CONFIGURATION Gx/Close CB order ).
reclose after Load Shedding triggered via a low state of the AUX function ( AR after LS Lo ). Load shedding information is based on the status of the binary input mapped to AUX ( SETTING GROUP x/INPUT CONFIGURATION Gx/AUX ) with
AUX set to Load Shedding . If the P116 has saved load shedding information and
AUX indicates that the power system frequency has returned to its nominal value, the tAUX time-delay is started. At the end of tAUX the close command is issued.
The close command is issued via the Close CB order output ( SETTING GROUP x/OUTPUT RELAYS CONFIGURATION Gx/Close CB order ).
If the protection element is set to 'Trip' or 'Trip-Inrush Bl' or 'Trip-Latch' it means that it is linked to the Protection trip (see LED and Output configuration) and Trip
Command (see Output configuration) functions. Additionally this protection element will trigger fault recording, disturbance recording, as well as the Trip LED and the Flag indicator on the front panel.
If the protection element is set to 'Alarm' it means that it is linked to the Alarm function (see LED and Output configuration) and 'ALARM STATUS' indication.
Refer to P116 Operation chapter.
600 s 0.01 s
0: Disabled See AUX1? N/A
ST
ST
P116_EN_ST_A11 v2.7
(ST) 4-18
Menu Text tAUX2
Default Setting
10 s 0 s
Setting Range
Min. Max.
600 s
Setting for the operating time-delay of the AUX2 function.
AUX3 ?
Same as AUX1
AUX4 ?
Same as AUX1
0: Disabled See AUX1? tAUX3 10 s 0 s
Setting for the operating time-delay of the AUX3 function.
0: Disabled See AUX1? tAUX4 10 s 0 s
Setting for the operating time-delay of the AUX4 function.
600 s
600 s
Settings
MiCOM P116
Step Size
0.01 s
N/A
0.01 s
N/A
0.01 s
Settings
MiCOM P116
2.1.10 Logic Selectivity (Model A)
P116_EN_ST_A11 v2.7
(ST) 4-19
With Logic Select. 1 or Logic Select. 2, the user can assign each time-delay threshold to the
Log Sel input (refer SETTING GROUP x/INPUTS CONFIGURATION/ ) in the Inputs menu).
Menu Text Default Setting
Setting Range
Min. Max.
Step Size
Sel1? tSel1
0: Disabled
0.4s
Disabled, Enabled
0 s
Setting for the operating time-delay of the Sel1 function.
N/A
Setting to Disable or Enable the Selective Logic 1 element.
This function changes the time-delay setting of the protection elements: tI>> , tI>>> , tIN_2 or tIN_3 to the tSEL1 setting value. The time-delay's setting value is changed without resetting the timer.
In the SETTING GROUP x/INPUT CONFIGURATION Gx/ submenu it is possible to choose which protection element is linked to the Selective Logic 1 function:
Sel1 tI>> or/and Sel1 tI>>> or/and Sel1 tIN_2 or/and Sel1 tIN_3 .
600 s 0.01 s
Sel2?
Same as Sel1?
Disabled Disabled, Enabled tSel2 0.4 s 0 s
Setting for the operating time-delay of the Sel2 function.
600 s
N/A
0.01 s
ST
ST
P116_EN_ST_A11 v2.7
(ST) 4-20
2.1.11 Cold Load Pick Up (Model A)
Settings
MiCOM P116
The Cold Load PU (CLP) submenu allows the user to enable the cold load pick-up function.
Selected threshold values can be raised temporarily.
Menu Text Default Setting
Setting Range
Min. Max.
Step Size
Cold Load PU ? Disabled
Disabled, Current+Input,
Input only
N/A
Setting to Disable or Current+Input or Input only the Cold Load PU element.
This function increases or decreases the thresholds for Cold Load PU level via tCL pulse time.
Input only: tCL is started by a binary input assigned to the Cold PU function.
For example: Typically increasing of the threshold is applied when the CB changes position from 52b to 52a (closing CB), therefore the input mapped to CB status 52a should be assigned to the Cold PU function too.
Current+Input: tCL is started by a binary input assigned to the Cold PU function (as above) or based on the current stages: 5%In and 10%In. If the current in all phases are below 5%In by over 10s, after increasing of current above 10%In at least in a one phase tCL is started (refer Operation chapter of this manual). If the Cold Load PU logic has to be triggered by current criteria only, Cold Load PU Input function must not be configured to any digital input. If this function is configured to selected input, both criteria will work in parallel way.
Cold Load PU Level 100% 20% 999% 1%
Displays the scaling value, in percentage, of the cold load pick up assigned to the selected thresholds. This value is the amount by which the selected threshold is increased or decreased.
Cold Load PU tCL 1 s 0.0 s 6000 s 0.01 s
Displays the delay timer setting ( tCL ) for the Cold Load Pick-up function.
The timer tCL controls the time during which the protection elements are altered. When tCL has elapsed, the settings revert back to their original values. tCL is initiated thanks to a dedicated input signal (refer to the SETTING GROUP x/INPUT
CONFIGURATION Gx menu), generated by connecting an auxiliary contact from the CB
(52a or 52b) or starting device to the relevant logic input.
Cold Load PU I> No No, Yes N/A
The Cold Load PU function increases or decreases the
I
> threshold: No or Yes
Cold Load PU I>> No No, Yes N/A
The Cold Load PU function increases or decreases the
I
>> threshold: No or Yes
Cold Load PU I>>> No No, Yes N/A
The Cold Load PU function increases or decreases the
I
>>> threshold: No or Yes
Cold Load PU IN_1 No No, Yes N/A
The Cold Load PU function increases or decreases the
I
N> threshold: No or Yes
Cold Load PU IN_2 No No, Yes N/A
The Cold Load PU function increases or decreases the
I
N>> threshold: No or Yes
Cold Load PU IN_3 No No, Yes N/A
The Cold Load PU function increases or decreases the
I
N>>> threshold: No or Yes
Cold Load PU
Brkn.Cond
No No, Yes N/A
The Cold Load PU function increases or decreases the
I s2/
I s1 threshold: No or Yes
Settings
MiCOM P116
P116_EN_ST_A11 v2.7
(ST) 4-21
Menu Text Default Setting
Setting Range
Min. Max.
Step Size
Cold Load PU Itherm No No, Yes N/A
The Cold Load PU function increases or decreases the
I therm threshold: No or Yes
Cold Load PU I2> No No, Yes N/A
The Cold Load PU function increases or decreases the
I
2> threshold: No or Yes
ST
ST
P116_EN_ST_A11 v2.7
(ST) 4-22
2.1.12 [79] Auto-reclose (Model A)
Settings
MiCOM P116
The auto-reclose function provides the ability to automatically control the recloser, with one, two, three, or four shot cycles. Each cycle implements a dead time and a reclaim time.
During the auto-reclosing cycle, if the relay receives a command to switch setting groups, this command is kept in memory, and will be executed only after the timer elapses.
The auto-reclose function is available if:
•
• a logical input is assigned to the 52a state (if the CB trips option is set in submenu:
GLOBAL SETTINGS/[79] ADVANCED SETTINGS/Start Dead t on ), and the trip output relay is not latched to the earth and/or phase protection element.
In addition to these settings, the user can fully link the auto-reclose function to the protection function using the menus PROTECTION G1 / Phase OC and PROTECTION G1/ E/Gnd .
Menu Text Default Setting
Setting Range
Min. Max.
Auto-reclose ? Disabled Disabled, Enabled
Setting to Disable or Enable the Auto-reclose element.
Step Size
N/A
Dead Time tD1
Dead Time tD2
0.2 s
20 s
0.0 s
0 s
Sets the value for the Dead Time of the second shot (tD2).
600 s 0.01 s
Sets the value for the Dead Time of the first shot (tD1). The Dead Time starts at the CB trip, when GLOBAL SETTINGS/[79] ADVANCED SETTINGS/ :
Start Dead t on: CB Trips is set: the 52a input is no longer energised.
Start Dead t on: Protect.Reset
is set: none of the protection criteria (which trip) are started.
600 s 0.01 s
600 s 0.01 s Dead Time tD3 1 s 0 s
Sets the value for the Dead Time of the third shot (tD3).
Dead Time tD4 20 s 0 s
Sets the value for the Dead Time of the fourth shot (tD4).
600 s 0.01 s
Reclaim Time tR 2 s 0.0 s 600 s 0.01 s
After the reclaim time has elapsed, if the circuit breaker does not trip again, the autoreclose function resets; otherwise, the relay either advances to the next shot that is programmed in the auto-reclose cycle, or, if all the programmed reclose attempts have been accomplished, it locks out.
If the protection element operates during the reclaim time following the final reclose attempt, the relay will lockout and the auto-reclose function is disabled until the lockout condition resets.
Settings
MiCOM P116
P116_EN_ST_A11 v2.7
(ST) 4-23
Menu Text
Menu Text
Default Setting
54321 trip shot
Setting Range
Min. Max.
5,4,3,2,1 trip shot
Step Size
Step size
Fast O/C Trip
Fast O/C Trip Delay 0 s
00000
0 s
0-1
Sets the value for the phase overcurrent Fast Trip time-delay
1
This function allows faster tripping by phase overcurrent criteria when the auto-recloser is running.
The Fast Trip function increases the number of successful auto-reclosures.
The best result is obtained with fast tripping set to 0 s (instantaneous trip), but because of transient currents it is sometimes necessary to set a value greater than 0 s in order to avoid maloperation.
If bit “1” is set, the value for Fast O/C Trip Delay is used instead of the protection element's time-delay
Note: If the protection element's time-delay is shorter than the Fast Trip's time-delay, tripping occurs upon expiry of the protection element's time-delay (the shortest timer is used).
For example:
I
> is configured for 4 shots auto-reclose ( SETTING GROUP x/PROTECTION Gx/
AUTORECLOSE [79] G1/
I
> Close Shot? 1111 ) t
I
> is set for 1 s ( SETTING GROUP x/PROTECTION Gx/PHASE O/C [50/51]
G1/t
I
>=1.00 s )
Delay for Ph O/C Fast Trip: 0.1 s ( SETTING GROUP x/PROTECTION Gx/
AUTORECLOSE [79] G1/ Fast O/C Trip Delay 0.1 s )
For a permanent fault, the setting "00011" means that:
1. "1": the first trip occurs after the time-delay: 0.1 s (Fast Trip time-delay)
2. "1": the second trip occurs after the time-delay: 0.1 s (Fast Trip time-delay)
3. "0": the third trip occurs after the time-delay: 1 s (t
I
> time-delay)
4. "0": the fourth trip occurs after the time-delay: 1 s (t
I
> time-delay)
5. "0": the fifth trip occurs after the time-delay: 1 s (t
I
> time-delay)
9.99s 0.01 s
Menu Text
54321 trip shot
5,4,3,2,1 trip shot
Step size
Fast E/Gnd Trip 00000 0-1 1
This function allows faster tripping by earth fault overcurrent criteria when the autorecloser is running.
The Fast Trip function increases the number of successful auto-reclosures.
If bit “1” is set, the value for Fast E/Gnd Trip Delay is used instead of the protection element's time-delay
Note: If the protection element's time-delay is shorter than the Fast Trip's time-delay, tripping occurs upon expiry of the protection element's DMT time-delay (the shortest timer is used).
ST
ST
P116_EN_ST_A11 v2.7
(ST) 4-24
Menu Text Default Setting
Setting Range
Min. Max.
Fast E/Gnd Trip
Delay
0 s 0 s
Sets the value for the phase overcurrent Fast Trip time-delay
9.99s
Menu Text
4321 reclosing shot
4,3,2,1 reclosing shot
Settings
MiCOM P116
Step Size
0.01 s
Step size
Close Shot? t
I
>
0000 0-1 1
4321 are the cycles associated with the close command of the Auto-reclose function after t
I
> trip.
"0011" are the actions (closing) to be executed after a t
I
> trip:
0 - no action by auto-recloser: final trip (the auto-recloser will switch to locked state),
1 - after t
I
> trip and dead time (fault clearance) the reclosing command will be executed.
Menu Text
4321 reclosing shot
4,3,2,1 reclosing shot
Step size
Inhib.Trip t
I
>: Shot
0000 0-1 1
4321 are the cycles associated with the t
I
> trip
1101 are the actions to be executed after a reclosing shot and the t
I
> time-delay has elapsed:
0 = no inhibit
1 = no t
I
> trip: and this whatever the setting in the “SETTING GROUP x/PROTECTION
Gx/PHASE O/C [50/51] Gx/I>? ” menu.
Close Shot? t
I
>>
See Close Shot? t
I
>
Inhib.Trip t
I
>>: Shot
See Close Shot? t
I
>
Close Shot? t
I
>>>
See Close Shot? t
I
>
Inhib.Trip t
I
>>>: Shot
See Close Shot? t
I
>
Close Shot? t
I
N_1
See Close Shot? t
I
>
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0-1
0-1
0-1
0-1
0-1
1
1
1
1
1
Settings
MiCOM P116
P116_EN_ST_A11 v2.7
(ST) 4-25
Menu Text
Menu Text
Default Setting
4321
Close Shot
Setting Range
Min. Max.
4,3,2,1 reclosing shot
Step Size
Step size
Inhib.Trip t
I
N_1: Shot
See Close Shot? t
I
>
Close Shot? t
I
N_2
See Close Shot? t
I
>
Inhib.Trip t
I
N_2: Shot
See Close Shot? t
I
>
Close Shot? t
I
N_3
See Close Shot? t
I
>
Inhib.Trip t
I
N_3: Shot
See Close Shot? t
I
>
Close Shot? tAUX1
See Close Shot? t
I
>
Inhib.Trip tAUX1: Shot
See Close Shot? t
I
>
Close Shot? tAUX2
See Close Shot? t
I
>
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0-1
0-1
0-1
0-1
0-1
0-1
0-1
0-1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Menu Text
4321
Close Shot
4,3,2,1 reclosing shot
Step size
Inhib.Trip tAUX2: Shot
See Close Shot? t
I
>
0000 0-1 1
Auto-reclose settings, common for Group 1 and Group 2, are available in column: GLOBAL
SETTINGS / [79] Advanced Settings (see 3.6 [79] ADVANCED SETTINGS ).
ST
ST
P116_EN_ST_A11 v2.7
(ST) 4-26
2.2 Output Relay Configuration
Output settings define which signals are mapped to the P116's outputs.
Matrix configuration allows free mapping of any one function to each output.
Settings
MiCOM P116
Menu Text Default Setting Setting Range Step Size
Description of bits: Model A, RL: 6,5,4,3,2,1 Setting range:
Latched Outputs 000000 0-1 1
Each output can be configured with or without latching.
Default Setting: “00000” means that:
RL6: “0” – output RL6 is not latched. The high state of the function mapped to the output determines the high state of RL6. The low state of this function determines the low state of RL6.
RL5: “0” – see RL6
RL4: “0” – see RL6
RL3: “0” – see RL6
RL2: “0” – see RL6
RL1: “0” – see RL6
The high state of the function mapped to the output determines the high state of the output relay. The low state of this function does not change the state of the output relay. For the low state of output relay, it is necessary to activate the
Reset of Latched Output function (via a binary input, from the front panel or via a communication port)
Description of bits: Model A, RL: F,6,5,4,3,2,1 Setting range:
Reverse outp.log. 0000000 0-1 1
Reverse output logic gives more application flexibility. If reverse logic is chosen for the output, after the P116 is powered (current, auxiliary voltage) the output contacts close.
Any high state function connected with this output will open the contacts of the output relay.
Default Setting: “0000” means that:
F: This setting is used for specific purpose only (typically should be “0”)
“0” – means that energy output works as the energy trip pulse output for external flag indicator, triggered via function assigned to this output.
“1” – means that energy on this output is permanently connected to terminals C3-C4 after powering of P116: CT – above 0.2In/Ien - or auxiliary voltage connected to
B1-B2 terminals. It can be used to trigger P116 binary input (standard input board only), when the auxiliary voltage is not available
Note:
1. It’s additional burden for P116 powering, only a one binary input can be connected to this output
2 .Additional burden can increase self-powering threshold and P116 tripping time. Influence on above parameters should be confirmed by commissioning tests after all settings done. CT self - powering stage and tripping time (switch on to fault w/o Vx) have to be measured and accepted by responsible person..
Maximum length of wires connected to the output must be lower than 3m.
3.
Any function assigned to this energy output has no influence on the action of the energy output.
RL6: “0” – output RL6 is without reverse logic.
The state of the output is in line with the state of the function.
RL5, RL4, RL3, RL2,RL1: “0” – see RL6
Settings
MiCOM P116
P116_EN_ST_A11 v2.7
(ST) 4-27
Menu Text Default Setting Setting Range Step Size
Description of bits:
Mod.A: T,F,RL6,5,4,3,2,1
Model L: T,1
Setting range:
Protection Trip 000000 00 0-1 1
Protection Trip is high if any protection element configured to Trip is high (current-based protection elements and external protection elements: AUX1, AUX2, AUX3, AUX4, CBF re-trip).
Default Setting: “110000” means that:
T: “0” – the Low Energy Trip Coil output is assigned to the Protection trip function
F: “0” – the Flag Indicator output is assigned to the Protection trip function
RL6: “0” – output RL6 is not assigned to the Protection trip function
RL5, RL4, RL3, RL2,RL1: “0” – see RL6
Note: For typical application with the low energy tripping coil/striker, this function is used for tripping (“1xxxxxxx”)
Description of bits:
Model A: 6,5,4,3,2,1
Model L: 1
Setting range:
Prot.Trip pulse 00000 0 0-1 1
Protection Trip pulse is energized via Protection Trip (see above). This command has a pulse duration not less than tOpen time set at GLOBAL SETTINGS/CIRCUIT
BREAKER/tOpen pulse min .
Default Setting: “0000” means that:
RL6: “0” – output RL6 is not assigned to Any Trip .
RL5, RL4, RL3, RL2,RL1: “0” – see RL6
Note: The Low Energy Trip Coil output and Flag Indicator output are not connected to this function. The above functions have to be assigned to the Protection Trip function.
Description of bits:
Mod.A: T,F,6,5,4,3,2,1
Model L: T,1
Setting range:
Trip CB Order 000000 00 0-1 1
The Trip CB Order function is high during the set time if the manual trip command is executed (communication port, front panel, binary inputs)
(the trip pulse is set at GLOBAL SETTINGS/CIRCUIT BREAKER/ tOpen pulse min )
Description of bits:
Model A: 6,5,4,3,2,1
Model L: 1
Setting range:
Close CB Order 00000 0 0-1 1
The Close CB Order function is high during the set time if the manual close command or
Auto-reclose function are executed (Communication port, binary input, front panel). The close pulse is set at GLOBAL SETTINGS/CIRCUIT BREAKER/ tClose Pulse .
Description of bits:
Alarm
Model A: F,6,5,4,3,2,1
Model L: 1
000000 0
Setting range:
0-1 1
The Alarm function is high if any protection element configured to Alarm is high (currentbased protection element and external protection elements: AUX1 , AUX2 , AUX3 , AUX4, ).
Default Setting: “00000” means that:
F: “0” – output for Flag Indicator is not assigned to the Alarm function
RL6: “0” – output RL6 is not assigned to the Alarm function
RL5, RL4, RL3, RL2,RL1: “0” – see RL6
Description of bits:
Model A: 6,5,4,3,2,1
Model L: 1
Setting range:
Start Phase A 00000 0 0-1 1
Start Phase A is high if the phase overcurrent stage (set to trip) in phase A has started
(phase A current above the phase current thresholds).
ST
ST
P116_EN_ST_A11 v2.7
(ST) 4-28
Menu Text
Settings
MiCOM P116
Default Setting Setting Range Step Size
Description of bits:
Model A: 6,5,4,3,2,1
Model L: 1
00000 0
Setting range:
Start Phase B 0-1 1
Start Phase B is high if the phase overcurrent stage (set to trip) in phase B has started
(phase B current above the phase current thresholds).
Description of bits:
Model A: 6,5,4,3,2,1
Model L: 1
Setting range:
Start Phase C 00000 0 0-1 1
Start Phase C is high if the phase overcurrent stage (set to trip) in phase C has started
(phase C current above the phase current thresholds).
Description of bits:
Model A: 6,5,4,3,2,1
Model L: 1
Setting range:
Start I> 00000 0 0-1
Start
I
> is high if the I> protection element has started (current above the set
I
>> threshold).
Description of bits:
Model A: 6,5,4,3,2,1
Model L: 1
Setting range:
Start I>> 00000 0 0-1
1
1
Start
I
>> is high if the
I
>> protection element has started (current above the set
I
>> threshold).
Description of bits:
Model A: 6,5,4,3,2,1
Model L: 1
Setting range:
Start I>>> 00000 0 0-1 1
Start
I
>>> is high if the
I
>>> protection element has started (current above the set
I
>>> threshold).
Description of bits: Model A: 6,5,4,3,2,1 Setting range:
Start SOTF 000000 0-1 1
Start SOTF is high if the SOTF protection element has started (e/f current above the set
SOTF threshold).
Description of bits:
Model A: 6,5,4,3,2,1
Model L: 1
Setting range:
Start
I
N_1 00000 0 0-1 1
Start
I
N_1 is high if the
I
N_1 protection element (the first stage) has started (e/f current is above the set
I
N_1 threshold).
Description of bits:
Model A: 6,5,4,3,2,1
Model L: 1
Setting range:
Start
I
N>_2 00000 0 0-1 1
Start
I
N_2 is high if the
I
N_2 protection element (the second stage) has started (e/f current above the set
I
N_2 threshold).
Description of bits:
Model A: 6,5,4,3,2,1
Model L: 1
Setting range:
Start
I
N_3 00000 0 0-1 1
Start
I
N_3 is high if the
I
N_3 protection element (the third stage) has started (e/f current above the set
I
N_3 threshold).
Description of bits: Model A: 6,5,4,3,2,1 Setting range:
Start I< 000000 0-1
Start
I
< is high if the
I
< protection element has started (current below the set
I
< threshold).
1
Settings
MiCOM P116
P116_EN_ST_A11 v2.7
(ST) 4-29
Menu Text Default Setting Setting Range Step Size
Description of bits:
Description of bits:
Model A: 6,5,4,3,2,1
Model A: 6,5,4,3,2,1
Setting range:
Setting range:
Start I2> 000000 0-1 1
Start
I
2> is high if the
I
2> protection element has started (current below the set
I
2> threshold).
Start Brkn Cond 000000 0-1 1
Start Brkn Cond is high if the Broken Conductor protection element has started (
I s2/
I s1 above the set ratio threshold).
Description of bits: Model A: 6,5,4,3,2,1 Setting range:
1 AUX1 000000
AUX 1 is high if the input assigned to AUX1 is set high.
Description of bits: Model A: 6,5,4,3,2,1
0-1
Setting range:
1 AUX2 000000
AUX2 is high if the input assigned to AUX2 is set high.
Description of bits: Model A: 6,5,4,3,2,1
0-1
Setting range:
AUX3 000000
AUX3 is high if the input assigned to AUX3 is set high.
Description of bits: Model A: 6,5,4,3,2,1
0-1
Setting range:
AUX4 000000
AUX4 is high if the input assigned to AUX4 is set high.
Description of bits: Model A: 6,5,4,3,2,1
0-1
Setting range:
AUX5 000000
AUX5 is high if the input assigned to AUX5 is set high.
0-1
1
1
1
Description of bits: Model A: 6,5,4,3,2,1 Setting range:
AUX6 000000
AUX6 is high if the input assigned to AUX6 is set high.
0-1
Description of bits:
Mod.A: T,F,6,5,4,3,2,1
Model L: T,1
Setting range: t
I
> 000000 00 0-1 t
I
> is high if the set time-delay for the
I
> element has elapsed
Description of bits:
Mod.A: T,F,6,5,4,3,2,1
Model L: T,1
Setting range: t
I
>> 000000 00 0-1 t
I
>> is high if the set time-delay for the
I
>> element has elapsed
Description of bits:
Mod.A: T,F,6,5,4,3,2,1
Model L: T,1
Setting range: t
I
>>> 000000 00 0-1
1
1
1
1
ST
ST
P116_EN_ST_A11 v2.7
(ST) 4-30
Menu Text Default Setting Setting Range t
I
>>> is high if the set time-delay for the
I
>>> element has elapsed
Description of bits: Model A:T,F,6,5,4,3,2,1 Setting range:
Settings
MiCOM P116
Step Size tSOTF 00000000 0-1 tSOTF is high if the set time-delay for the SOTF element has elapsed
1
Description of bits:
Mod.A: T,F,6,5,4,3,2,1
Model L: T,1
Setting range: t
I
N_1 000000 00 0-1 1 t
I
N_1 is high if the set time-delay for the
I
N_1 element (the first stage) has elapsed
Description of bits:
Mod.A: T,F,6,5,4,3,2,1
Model L: T,1
Setting range: t
I
N_2 000000 00 0-1 1 t
I
N_2 is high if the set time-delay for the
I
N_2 (the second stage) element has elapsed
Description of bits:
Mod.A: T,F,6,5,4,3,2,1
Model L: T,1
Setting range: t
I
N_3 000000 00 0-1 1 t
I
N_3 is high if the set time-delay for the
I
N_3 element (the third stage) has elapsed
Description of bits: Model A:T,F,6,5,4,3,2,1 Setting range: t
I
< 00000000 0-1 t
I
< is high if the set time-delay for the
I
< element has elapsed
1
Description of bits: Model A:T,F,6,5,4,3,2,1 Setting range: t
I
2> 00000000 0-1 t
I
2> is high if the set time-delay for the
I s2> element has elapsed
Description of bits: Model A:T,F,6,5,4,3,2,1 Setting range:
1 tBrkn Cond. 00000000 0-1 tBrknCond . is high if the set time-delay for the
I s2/
I s1 element has elapsed
Description of bits:
Mod.A: T,F,6,5,4,3,2,1
Model L: T,1
Setting range:
Thermal Trip 000000 00 0-1
Thermal Trip is high if the trip thermal stage is greater than the set value
Description of bits:
Model A: F,6,5,4,3,2,1
Model L: 1
Setting range:
Thermal Alarm 000000 0 0-1
Thermal Alarm is high if the alarm thermal stage is greater than the set value
Description of bits:
Mod.A: T,F,6,5,4,3,2,1
Model L: T,1
Setting range:
1
1
1
Settings
MiCOM P116
P116_EN_ST_A11 v2.7
(ST) 4-31
Menu Text Default Setting Setting Range
CB Fail 000000 00 0-1
CB Fail is high if the set time-delay for the CBF protection function is elapsed
Step Size
1
Description of bits: Model A:T,F,6,5,4,3,2,1 Setting range: tAUX1 00000000 0-1 tAUX1 is high if the set time-delay for the AUX1 element has elapsed
Description of bits: Model A:T,F,6,5,4,3,2,1 Setting range:
1 tAUX2 00000000 0-1 tAUX2 is high if the set time-delay for the AUX2 element has elapsed
Description of bits: Model A:T,F,6,5,4,3,2,1 Setting range:
1 tAUX3 00000000 0-1 tAUX3 is high if the set time-delay for the AUX3 element has elapsed
Description of bits: Model A:T,F,6,5,4,3,2,1 Setting range:
1 tAUX4 00000000 0-1 tAUX4 is high if the set time-delay for the AUX4 element has elapsed
Description of bits: Model A:T,F,6,5,4,3,2,1 Setting range:
1
Comm. Order 1 00000000 0-1 1
Comm.Order 1 is used for control of outputs via an RS485 command. The pulse duration is set at GLOBAL SETTING/COMMUNICATION ORDER/Pulse Time tCOM1
Description of bits: Model A:T,F,6,5,4,3,2,1 Setting range:
Comm. Order 2 00000000 0-1 1
Comm.Order 2 is used for control of outputs via an RS485 command (if in GLOBAL
SETTINGS/COMMUNICATION ORDERS/COM2 order Conf.
“ 0:RS485 ” or
“ 1:RS485+Button_C ” is set) or via pressing “C” clear key on the front panel (if in
GLOBAL SETTINGS/COMMUNICATION ORDERS/COM2 order Conf.
“ 2: Button_C ” or
“ 1:RS485+Button_C ” is set)
The pulse duration set in GLOBAL SETTING/COMMUNICATION ORDER/Pulse Time tCOM2
Description of bits:
Description of bits:
Model A: 6,5,4,3,2,1
Model A:T,F,6,5,4,3,2,1
Setting range:
Setting range:
[79] in Progress 000000 0-1 1
[79] in Progress indicates that an auto-reclose cycle is running. The signal is present during the complete reclosing cycle from protection initiation to the end of the reclaim time or lockout
[79] F.Trip 00000000 0-1 1
ST
ST
P116_EN_ST_A11 v2.7
(ST) 4-32
Menu Text
Settings
MiCOM P116
Default Setting Setting Range Step Size
[79] F.Trip (Final Trip) indicates that the auto-recloser has issued a final trip (after the last reclosing shot the line is still faulty)
This alarm can be reset using one of these resetting methods: assigned input ( Reset
Latchd Sign ), front panel ( C clear key), reset command ( Reset Latchd Sign) via RS485
Even if this output is configured as not latched output, the alarm signal is reset upon the next CB trip or from one of these resetting methods: nput assigned to Reset Latchd
Sign ,function, front panel C clear key), remote LED reset ( Reset Latchd Sign) command via RS485 or remote LED and output reset command via RS485.
If this successful auto-reclose signal was not reset before the next Autoreclose, [79] in
Progress will reset this signal, when Autoreclose is started again.
Note: If in I/O configuration this output is set to be latched, it is necessary to apply reset of output as additional action (if the reset of the successful auto-reclose signal was without reset of latched outputs – for example made via remote LED reset ( Reset Latchd Sign) command via RS485 or assigned input to Reset Latchd Sign ).
Settings
MiCOM P116
Description of bits:
P116_EN_ST_A11 v2.7
(ST) 4-33
Description of bits:
Model A: F 6,5,4,3,2,1
Model A: F,6,5,4,3,2,1
Setting range:
Setting range:
[79] Lockout 0000000 0-1 1
[79] Lockout indicates that the relay is in a lockout state and that no further reclose attempts will be made:
the Reclaim time has elapsed but CB is still open
the Dead time has elapsed but CB remained open after the reclosing shot
the CB has failed to close
the protection element not assigned to the auto-reclose function is tripped.
Close or Trip command is executed in A/R time (when A/R is running)
a number of A/R rolling demand valid
A/R conflict
the CB is faulty - information based on an external Signal, assigned to an input is in high logic state longer than set in tCB FLT Ext.Sign (GLOBAL
SETTINGS/CIRCUIT BREAKER)
This alarm can be reset using one of these resetting methods: assigned input ( Reset
Latchd Sign ), front panel ( C clear key), reset command ( Reset Latchd Sign) via RS485
Even if this output is configured as not latched output, the alarm signal is reset upon the next CB trip or from one of these resetting methods: nput assigned to Reset Latchd
Sign ,function, front panel C clear key), remote LED reset ( Reset Latchd Sign) command via RS485 or remote LED and output reset command via RS485.
The lockout auto-reclose condition can reset by a manual closing after the Inhib Time t
I
.
Note: If in I/O configuration this output is set to be latched, it is necessary to apply reset of output as additional action (if the reset of the successful auto-reclose signal was without reset of latched outputs – for example made via remote LED reset ( Reset Latchd Sign) command via RS485 or assigned input to Reset Latchd Sign ).
ST
[79] Blocked 0000000 0-1 1
[79] Blocked indicates that the auto-recloser is inhibited (blocked) due to one of the following reasons:
-
-
-
- blocking from the front panel (blocking via Menu) the auto-recloser is disabled by setting (disabled) a binary input is assigned to the blocking function (blocking via Input) remote blocking via RS485 (blocking via RS485)
- Time Inhibit tI on Close ( GLOBAL SETTINGS/[79] ADVANCED SETTINGS ) is
counted (after Close command execution. A/R close command is excluded from
this logic)
Information about the reason of blocking is available in menu default window.
ST
P116_EN_ST_A11 v2.7
(ST) 4-34
Description of bits:
Settings
MiCOM P116
Description of bits:
Model A: F,6,5,4,3,2,1
Model A: F,6,5,4,3,2,1
Setting range:
Setting range:
[79] Success. 0000000 0-1 1
[79] Success.
Indicates that an auto-reclose cycle has been successfully completed. A successful auto-reclose signal is given after the CB was tripped by a protection function and re-closed whereupon the fault was cleared and the reclaim time expired thus resetting the auto-reclose cycle.
Even if this output is configured as not latched output, the successful auto-reclose signal is reset upon the next CB trip or from one of these resetting methods: input assigned to
Reset Latchd Sign ,function, front panel C clear key), remote LED reset ( Reset Latchd
Sign) command via RS485 or remote LED and output reset command via RS485.
If this successful auto-reclose signal was not reset before the next Autoreclose, [79] in
Progress will reset this signal, when Autoreclose is started again.
Note: If in I/O configuration this output is set to be latched, it is necessary to apply reset of output as additional action (if the reset of the successful auto-reclose signal was without reset of latched outputs – for example made via remote LED reset ( Reset Latchd Sign) command via RS485 or assigned input to Reset Latchd Sign ).
TCS 52 Fail 0000000 0-1
TCS 52 Fail : Trip circuit supervision (TCS) failure function signal.
1
Description of bits: Model A: F,6,5,4,3,2,1 Setting range:
CB Alarm 0000000 0-1 1
CB Alarm : Circuit Breaker Alarm function signal ( CB Open No.
, Sum Amps(n) , TCS 52
Fail , CB Open Time and CB Close Time, State of CB )
Description of bits:
Trip pulse tP
Model A: 6,5,4,3,2,1
000000
Setting range:
0-1 1
Any trip is high if Protection Trip is high when the tP time-delay elapses ( tP : trip pulse duration is set at GLOBAL SETTINGS/CIRCUIT BREAKER/tP pulse )
Description of bits: Model A: F 6,5,4,3,2,1 Setting range: tCB FLT Ext.Sign 0000000 0-1 1 tCB FLT Ext.Sign
is high if the tCB FLT ext.
time-delay has elapsed.
The counter is started if the function CB FLT Ext.Sign
assigned to binary input is high.
Binary input is used to indicate that there is sufficient energy in the CB operating mechanism to close and trip the CB.
The tCB FLT ext. time-delay is set at GLOBAL SETTINGS/CIRCUIT BREAKER/ tCB
FLT ext .
The binary input is set at SETTING GROUP x/INPUTS CONFIGURATION Gx/ CB FLT
Ext.Sign.
Description of bits: Model A: 6,5,4,3,2,1 Setting range:
Setting Group 1 000000 0-1 1
Setting Group 1 is active (switched via a binary input, the front panel, RS485 comms).
Settings
MiCOM P116
2.3 Input Configuration (Model A)
P116_EN_ST_A11 v2.7
(ST) 4-35
Binary Input settings define which signals are mapped to the P116’s opto-isolated inputs.
Matrix configuration allows free mapping of any one function to each input.
Menu Text Default Setting Setting Range
Step
Size
Description of bits: L: 6,5,4,3,2,1 Setting range:
Setting range:
Reverse Inp. Logic 000000 0-1 1
Reverse logic provides extra flexibility to the application. Reverse Input Logic means that the high state of a binary input causes the corresponding logic signal to be in low state.
Default Setting: “000000” means that:
L6: “0” – input L6 is without reverse logic. The state of L6 logic input is in line with the
state of L6 binary input
L5: “0” – see Input 6
L4: “0” – see Input 6
L3: “0” – see Input 6
L2: “0” – see Input 6
L1: “0” – see Input 6
Description of bits: L: 6,5,4,3,2,1
Mainten. Mode 000000 0-1 1
Maintenance Mode ON/OFF change.
The selection of the maintenance mode is possible via a logic input, using a control command (rear or front port), or from the front panel interface. All reasons of triggering works with OR logic for activation of the maintenance mode.
If the function triggered via binary input is high, P116 is in maintenance mode up to low state of this function (there is no any time termination like it does in maintenance mode activated via menu in Commissioning column).
In menu ( Commissioning column) it is possible to activate maintenance mode to different options:
Yes,outp.trips
. This mode allows the user to verify the operation of the protection functions with trip signal on the outputs. It is specific option for activation of this function in menu only
Yes,outp.block. If this option is selected, all the output contacts and energy outputs are blocked, and no command can be issued to these outputs, even if a protection threshold associated with one of these outputs has been crossed
Maintenance Mode triggered via binary input or remote command (RS485) enable
Yes,outp.block.
option of maintenance mode. So all outputs (contacts and energy outputs) are blocked (are not energized) if Maintenance Mode function triggered via binary input or remote command (RS485).
Reset Latchd Sign 000000 0-1
The high state of this logic input resets all latched LEDs, Alarm and Trip Information.
1
Reset Latchd Out 000000 0-1 1
The high state of this logic input resets all latched contact outputs
Block. t
I
> 000000 0-1
The high state of this logic input enables the blocking logic function of the
I
> protection element (resets its associated time-delay).
1
Block. t
I
>> 000000 0-1 1
ST
ST
P116_EN_ST_A11 v2.7
(ST) 4-36
Settings
MiCOM P116
Menu Text Default Setting Setting Range
Step
Size
The high state of this logic input enables the blocking logic function of the
I
>> protection element (resets its associated time-delay)
Block. t
I
>>> 000000 0-1 1
The high state of this logic input enables the blocking logic function of the
I
>>> protection element (resets its associated time-delay)
Block. tSOTF 000000 0-1 1
The high state of this logic input enables the blocking logic function of the SOTF element
(resets its associated time-delay)
Block.
t
I
N_1 000000 0-1 1
The high state of this logic input enables the blocking logic function of the
I
N_1 protection element (resets its associated time-delay)
Block. t
I
N_2 000000 0-1 1
The high state of this logic input enables the blocking logic function of the
I
N_2 protection element (resets its associated time-delay)
Block. t
I
N_3 000000 0-1 1
The high state of this logic input enables the blocking logic function of the
I
N_3 protection element (resets its associated time-delay)
Block. t
I<
000000 0-1
The high state of this logic input enables the blocking logic function of the
I
< protection element (resets its associated time-delay)
1
Block. t
I
2> 000000 0-1
The high state of this logic input enables the blocking logic function of the
I
2> element
(resets its associated time-delay)
1
Block. tBrkn Cond 000000 0-1 1
The high state of this logic input enables the blocking logic function of the Broken
Conductor element (resets its associated time–delay)
Block.
I therm. 000000 0-1 1
The high state of this logic input sets to zero the value at the thermal equivalent current used in the thermal algorithm. It means that for the low state of the input the thermal state does not increase the thermal value and the cooling time constant is applied. This function can be useful for emergency closing.
Block. AUX1 000000 0-1 1
The high state of this logic input enables the blocking logic function of the AUX1 protection element (resets its associated time-delay and disables the AUX1 start logic signal)
Block. AUX2 000000 0-1 1
The high state of this logic input enables the blocking logic function of the AUX2 protection element (resets its associated time-delay and disables the AUX2 start logic signal)
Block. AUX3 000000 0-1 1
The high state of this logic input enables the blocking logic function of the AUX3 protection element (resets its associated time–delay and disables the AUX3 start logic signal)
Block. tCB Fail 000000 0-1 1
The high state of this logic input enables the blocking logic function of the CB Fail protection function (resets its associated time–delay)
Block. [79] 000000 0-1 1
Settings
MiCOM P116
P116_EN_ST_A11 v2.7
(ST) 4-37
Menu Text Default Setting Setting Range
Step
Size
The high state of this logic input blocks (disables) the auto-reclose element with lockout if blocking occurs while it is running.
SEL1 t
I
>> 000000 0-1 1
The high state of this logic input changes the time-delay of the
I
>> protection element from t
I
>> (set in the SETT
I
NG GROUP x/PROTECT
I
ON Gx/Phase O/C [50/51] menu column) to the tSEL1 value ( SETT
I
NG GROUP x/PROTECT
I
ON Gx/LOG
I
C SELECT. Gx/tSEL1).
The change is performed without resetting the elapsed time-delay.
Typically the tSEL1 value is greater than t
I
>> to ensure selectivity of the incomer (P116) when the relay on the outgoing line detects a fault (the setting for t
I
>> is the same on the incoming feeder and the outgoing line).
SEL1 t
I
>>> 000000 0-1
See the description of the SEL1 t
I
>> function.
The action is applied for the
I
>>> protection element and the tSEL1 time-delay
SEL1 t
I
N_2
SEL1 t
I
N_3
000000
See the description of the SEL1 t
I
>> function.
The action is applied for the
I
N_2 protection element and the tSEL1 time-delay
000000
0-1
0-1
See the description of the SEL1 t
I
>> function.
The action is applied for the
I
N_3 protection element
SEL2 t
I
>> 000000 0-1
See the description of the SEL1 t
I
>> function.
The action is applied for the
I
>>> protection element and the tSEL2 time-delay
SEL2 t
I
>>> 000000 0-1
See the description of the SEL1 t
I
>>> function.
The action is applied for the
I
>>> protection element and the tSEL2 time-delay
SEL2 t
I
N_2 000000 0-1
See the description of the SEL1 t
I
N_2 function.
The action is applied for the
I
N_2 protection element and the tSEL2 time-delay
SEL2 t
I
N_3 000000 0-1
See the description of the SEL1 t
I
N_3 function.
The action is applied for the
IN
_3 protection element and the tSEL2 time-delay
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
AUX1 000000 0-1 1
This logic input energizes the AUX1 function
AUX2 000000 0-1 1
This logic input energizes the AUX2 function
AUX3 000000
This logic input energizes the AUX3 function
AUX4 000000
This logic input energizes the AUX4 function
0-1
0-1
1
1
ST
ST
P116_EN_ST_A11 v2.7
(ST) 4-38
Settings
MiCOM P116
Menu Text Default Setting Setting Range
Step
Size
AUX5 000000 0-1 1
This logic input energizes the AUX5 function.
Note:
1. AUX5 has no timer therefore it is not included in the SETTING GROUP x/PROTECTION Gx/AUX TIMERS submenu.
2. AUX5 cannot be assigned directly to Protection Trip or Alarm functions.
3. AUX5 is used as a simple bridge between an input and the LEDs or an input and the outputs without any signaling (Alarm or Trip).
AUX6 000000 0-1 1
This logic input energizes the AUX6 function.
Note:
1. AUX5 has no timer therefore it is not included in the SETTING GROUP x/PROTECTION Gx/AUX TIMERS submenu.
2. AUX5 cannot be assigned directly to Protection Trip or Alarm functions.
3. AUX5 is used as a simple bridge between an input and the LEDs or an input and the outputs without any signaling (Alarm or Trip).
Cold Load PU 000000 0-1 1
This function assigns chosen inputs to the cold load pick up logic. The protection elements connected to this logic are viewed and set in the SETTING GROUP x/PROTECTION
Gx/COLD LOAD PU submenu.
The Cold Load PU function is used to increase the current threshold (% Level) for a period of time (tCL) after CB closing.
Start tBF 000000 0-1 1
This logic input launches the tBF Fail timer ( SETTING GROUP x/PROTECTION Gx/CB
Fail [50BF]/CB Fail Time tBF submenu)
CB Status 52A 000000 0-1 1
This logic input provides the P116 with information about the closed state of the CB. This information is used by the communication system, the auto-recloser and CB diagnostic function.
Note:
1. If inputs are assigned to both: CB Status 52A and CB Status 52B , the P116 uses a two-bit CB status logic.
2. If inputs are assigned to either CB Status 52A or CB Status 52B only, the P116 uses a one-bit CB status logic
Settings
MiCOM P116
P116_EN_ST_A11 v2.7
(ST) 4-39
Menu Text Default Setting Setting Range
Step
Size
CB Status 52B 000000 0-1 1
This logic input provides the P116 with information about the open state of the CB. This information is used by the communication system, the auto-recloser and the CB diagnostic function.
Note: see above.
CB FLT Ext.Sign 000000 0-1 1
After switching the logic input’s state from low to high this function initiates the “tCB FLT ext” time-delay and blocks a close command. When this time-delay has elapsed the Alarm signal is issued.
The binary Input is used to indicate that there is sufficient energy in the CB operating mechanism to close and trip the CB.
The tCB FLT ext. time-delay is set at GLOBAL SETTINGS/CIRCUIT BREAKER/ tCB FLT ext .
The Alarm signal can be additionally assigned to output contacts using the CB FLT
Ext.Sign
output ( SETTING GROUP x/OUTPUTRELAYS CONFIGURATION Gx/ CB FLT
Ext.Sign
). Depends on the configuration, this alarm can blocks auto-reclose function
( GLOBAL SETTINGS/[79] ADVANCED SETTINGS/CB FLT Monitor?
, the setting: Yes )
Setting group 2 000000 0-1 1
The high state of this logic input switches the active setting group to Setting Group 2.
Setting Group 1 is active from the low state of Logic Input.
Note: If two setting groups are switched via binary input, this input must be assigned to this function in both setting groups: Setting Group 1 and Setting Group 2. If it is not done there will be not changing of setting group via this input.
Manual Close 000000 0-1 1
Mapping of a control close function to the input. When activated, it is possible to control the output relays assigned to the Close CB function. This input will trigger the SOTF feature.
Note: Manual Close command is blocked if:
1. The front panel LEDs are lit (LED resetting is required)
2. An input is assigned to the CB FLT Ext.Sign
function and the state of this function is high
Manual Trip 000000 0-1 1
Mapping of a control trip function to the input. When activated, it is possible to control the output relay(s) assigned to the Trip CB function
Trip Circ Supervis. 000000 0-1 1
Mapping of a TC Supervision function.
The P116 continuously checks the trip circuit’s continuity whether the CB status is CB open or CB closed. The function TC Supervision ( GLOBAL SETTINGS/CIRCUIT
BREAKER/ submenu) is enabled when the trip outputs ( Trip Command and Trip CB ) are not activated. When activated, it is possible to control the output relay(s) assigned to the
CB ALARM function.
Note:
1. The TC Supervision function has to be activated and the tSUP time-delay for ALARM signal should be set in the GLOBAL SETTINGS/CIRCUIT BREAKER/ submenu.
Reset Theta val. 000000 0-1 1
This logic input sets to zero the thermal state of the thermal replica. The zero thermal state value is written instead of the low value of this function.
ST
ST
P116_EN_ST_A11 v2.7
(ST) 4-40
Settings
MiCOM P116
Menu Text Default Setting Setting Range
Step
Size
Start Distur. R. 000000
This logic input triggers the Disturbance Recorder.
0-1 1
Local CTRL Mode 000000 0-1
Local mode condition (if enabled, any remote command is forbidden, except: Remote
CTR Mode and Comm. Order command via RS485 ).
1
Time Synchr. 000000 0-1
Assigning of a time 40synchronization input (see Application chapter).
1
2.4 LED Configuration
LED configuration settings define which signals are mapped to the P116’s LEDs.
Matrix configuration allows free mapping of any one function to each LED.
Menu Text Default Setting Setting Range
Step
Size
Description of bits:
Model A: LED 8,7,6,5,4,3
Model L: LED 8,7,6,5,4,3
Setting range:
Latched LEDs 000000 0-1
Each LED can be configured with or without latching.
Default Setting: “000000” means that:
LED8: “0” – LED 8 is latched until the LEDs are reset (Binary Input, Front panel, communication system)
LED7: “0” – see LED8
LED6: “0” – see LED8
LED5: “0” – see LED8
LED4: “0” – see LED8
LED3: “0” – see LED8
Protect. Trip 000000 0-1
1
1
This LED is lit if any protection element is configured: “Trip” is high (current-based protection elements and external protection elements: AUX1, AUX2, AUX3, AUX4, CBF re-trip).
Default Setting: “000000” means that:
LED8: “0” – LED 8 is not assigned to a Protection trip function
LED7, LED6, LED5, LED4, LED3: “1” – see LED8
Alarm 000000 0–1 1
This LED is lit if any protection element set to “Alarm” is high (current-based protection elements, Thermal Alarm and external protection elements: AUX1, AUX2, AUX3, AUX4,
TC Supervision, CB FLT ext, CB Time Supervision, CB Current Diagnostic, CB Number
Diagnostic, [79] Lockout, HW Warning function).
Default Setting: “000001” means that:
LED8: “0” – LED 8 is not assigned to an Alarm
LED7, LED6, LED5, LED4, LED3: “1” – see LED8
General Start 000000 0–1 1
This LED is lit if for any current-based protection element set to Trip, the current exceeds the set threshold (phase or e/f).
Start Phase A 000000 0–1 1
Settings
MiCOM P116
P116_EN_ST_A11 v2.7
(ST) 4-41
Menu Text Default Setting Setting Range
Step
Size
This LED is lit if the phase overcurrent stage (set to trip) in phase A has started (phase A current above the phase current thresholds).
Start Phase B 000000 0–1 1
This LED is lit if the phase overcurrent stage (set to trip) in phase B has started (phase B current above the phase current thresholds).
Start Phase C 000000 0–1 1
This LED is lit if the phase overcurrent stage (set to trip) in phase C has started (phase C current above the phase current thresholds).
Start
I
> 000000
This LED is lit if the phase current exceeds the
I
> stage.
Start
I
>> 000000
This LED is lit if the phase current exceeds the
I
>> stage.
Start
I
>>> 000000
This LED is lit if the phase current exceeds the
I
>>> stage.
0–1
0–1
0–1
1
1
1
Start SOTF 000000 0–1 1
This LED is lit if the phase current exceeds the SOTF stage.
Start
I
N_1 000000
This LED is lit if the ground current exceeds the
I
N_1 stage.
Start
I
N_2 000000
This LED is lit if the ground current exceeds the
I
N_2 stage.
0–1
0–1
Start IN_3 000000
This LED is lit if the unbalance current exceeds the
I
N_3 stage.
0–1
AUX1 000000 0–1
1
1
1
1
This LED is lit if the input assigned to AUX1 sets this function to its high state.
AUX3 000000 0–1
This LED is lit if the input assigned to AUX3 sets this function to its high state.
AUX4 000000 0–1
1
1
This LED is lit if the input assigned to AUX4 sets this function to its high state.
AUX5 000000 0–1
This LED is lit if the input assigned to AUX5 sets this function to its high state.
AUX6 000000 0–1
This LED is lit if the input assigned to AUX6 sets this function to its high state. t
I
> 000000 0–1
This LED is lit if the set time-delay for the
I
> element has elapsed. t
I
>> 000000 0–1
This LED is lit if the set time-delay for the
I
>> element has elapsed. t
I
>>> 000000 0–1
This LED is lit if the set time-delay for the
I
>>> element has elapsed. tSOTF 000000 0–1
1
1
1
1
1
1
ST
ST
P116_EN_ST_A11 v2.7
(ST) 4-42
Settings
MiCOM P116
Menu Text Default Setting Setting Range
Step
Size
This LED is lit if the set time-delay for the SOTF element has elapsed. t
I
N_1 000000 0–1
This LED is lit if the set time-delay for the
I
N_1 element has elapsed. t
I
N_2 000000 0–1
This LED is lit if the set time-delay for the
I
N_2 element has elapsed. t
I
N_3 000000 0–1
This LED is lit if the set time-delay for the
I
N_3 element has elapsed. t
I
< 000000 0–1
This LED is lit if the set time-delay for the
I<
element has elapsed. t
I
2> 000000 0–1
This LED is lit if the set time-delay for the
I
2> element has elapsed. tBrkn Cond. 000000 0–1
1
1
1
1
1
1
This LED is lit if the set time-delay for the Broken Conductor element has elapsed.
Thermal Trip 000000 0–1 1
This LED is lit if the set time-delay for the Thermal state is above the Thermal Trip threshold, and after tripping it is above the Thermal Trip threshold multiplied by the Theta
Trip/Reset Ratio.
Thermal Alarm 000000 0–1 1
This LED is lit if the set time-delay for the Thermal state is above the Thermal Alarm threshold.
1 CB Fail 000000 0–1
This LED is lit if the set time-delay for the CBF protection function has elapsed. tAUX1 000000 0–1
This LED is lit if the set time-delay for the AUX1 element has elapsed.
1 tAUX2 000000 0–1
This LED is lit if the set time-delay for the AUX2 element has elapsed. tAUX3 000000 0–1
This LED is lit if the set time-delay for the AUX3 element has elapsed.
1
1 tAUX4 000000 0–1
This LED is lit if the set time-delay for the AUX4 element has elapsed.
1
[79] in Progress 000000 0–1 1
This LED is lit if auto-reclosing is in progress. [ 79] in Progress indicates that an autoreclose cycle is running. The signal is present during the complete reclosing cycle from protection initiation to the end of the reclaim time or lockout.
[79] F.Trip 000000 0–1 1
Settings
MiCOM P116
P116_EN_ST_A11 v2.7
(ST) 4-43
Menu Text Default Setting Setting Range
Step
Size
This LED is lit if the auto-recloser has issued the final trip signal. [ 79] Final Trip indicates that the auto-recloser has issued a final trip (after the last reclosing shot the line is still faulty).
The final trip signal is reset upon the next CB trip or from one of these resetting methods: assigned input ( Reset Latchd Sign ), front panel C clear key), remote LED reset ( Reset
Latchd Sign) command via RS485 or remote LED and output reset command via RS485.
If the final trip signal was not reset before the next Autoreclose, [79] in Progress will reset
this signal, when Autoreclose is started again.
[79] Lockout 000000 0–1 1
This LED is lit if the auto-recloser is locked-out.
[79] Lockout indicates that the relay is in a lockout state and that no further reclose attempts will be made:
the Reclaim time has elapsed but CB is still open
the Dead time has elapsed but CB remained open after the reclosing shot
the CB has failed to close
the protection element not assigned to the auto-reclose function is tripped.
a number of A/R rolling demand valid
A/R conflict
the CB is faulty - information based on an external Signal, assigned to an input is in high logic state longer than set in tCB FLT Ext.Sign (GLOBAL
SETTINGS/CIRCUIT BREAKER)
This alarm can be reset using one of these resetting methods: assigned input ( Reset
Latchd Sign ), front panel ( C clear key), reset command ( Reset Latchd Sign) via RS485 assigned input ( Reset Latchd Sign ), front panel C clear key), remote LED reset ( Reset
Latchd Sign) command via RS485 or remote LED and output reset command via RS485.
The lockout auto-reclose condition can reset by a manual closing after the Inhib Time t
I
.
[79] Blocked 000000 0–1 1
This LED is lit if the auto-recloser is blocked (disabled).
[79] Blocked indicates that the auto-recloser is inhibited (blocked) due to one of the following reasons:
-
-
- blocking from the front panel (blocking via Menu) the auto-recloser is disabled by setting (disabled) a binary input is assigned to the blocking function (blocking via Input)
-
- remote blocking via RS485 (blocking via RS485)
Close or Trip command is executed in A/R time (when A/R is running)
- the CB is faulty – information based on an external Signal
assigned to an input is in high logic state longer than set in tCB FLT Ext.Sign
(GLOBAL SETTINGS/CIRCUIT BREAKER)
- Time Inhibit tI on Close ( GLOBAL SETTINGS/[79] ADVANCED SETTINGS ) is
counted (after Close command execution. A/R close command is excluded from
this logic)
Information about the reason of blocking is available in menu default window.
[79] Success. 000000 0–1 1
ST
ST
P116_EN_ST_A11 v2.7
(ST) 4-44
Settings
MiCOM P116
Menu Text
Local CRTL Mode
Default Setting
000000
This LED is lit if CB control is in Local Mode.
Setting Range
Step
Size
This LED is lit if the auto-recloser closes the CB and that no faults occur during the
Reclaim Time (tR).
[79] Success.
Indicates that an auto-reclose cycle has been successfully completed. A successful auto-reclose signal is given after the CB was tripped by a protection function and re-closed whereupon the fault was cleared and the reclaim time expired thus resetting the auto-reclose cycle.
The successful auto-reclose output is reset upon the next CB trip or from one of these resetting methods: assigned input ( Reset Latchd Sign ), front panel C clear key), remote
LED reset ( Reset Latchd Sign) command via RS485 or remote LED and output reset command via RS485.
If this successful auto-reclose signal was not reset before the next Autoreclose, [79] in
Progress will reset this signal, when Autoreclose is started again.
0–1 1
CB Alarm 000000 0–1 1
This LED is lit if a CB Alarm is detected.
CB Alarm: Circuit Breaker Alarm function signal (CB Open No., Sum Amps(n) , TCS 52
Fail , CB Open Time and CB Close Time )
Maintenance Mode 000000 0–1 1
This LED is lit if the P116 is in Maintenance Mode .
If Maintenance Mode function is used, it is strongly recommended to assign it to LED3
(Alarm) or to any programmable LEDs to see when maintenance mode is active. tCB FLT Ext.Sign 000000 0-1,0-1,0-1, 0-1 1
This LED is lit if the CB is not ready for CB control after the set time-delay.
The counter is started if the function CB FLT Ext.Sign
assigned to a binary input is high.
The binary input is used to indicate that there is sufficient energy in the CB operating mechanism to close and trip the CB.
The tCB FLT ext. time-delay is set at GLOBAL SETTINGS/CIRCUIT BREAKER/ tCB FLT ext .
The binary input is set at SETTING GROUP x/INPUTS CONFIGURATION Gx/ CB FLT
Ext.Sign
.
0–1 1 Setting Group 1 000000
This LED is lit if the P116 is using the first setting group.
Settings
MiCOM P116
3. GLOBAL SETTINGS
3.1 LOC
P116_EN_ST_A11 v2.7
(ST) 4-45
Menu Text Default Setting Available Settings
Language English
English
German
French
Spanish
Portugal
Russian
Turkey
Regional
This cell is used to change the language of the menu.
Default Display
LEDs Reset
Meas. In
Manual only
Meas. In
Meas.A
CB Control (Model A)
[79] CTRL (Model A)
Control Mode (Model A)
This cell is used to change the default display window:
0: Measurements referred to
I n
1: Measurements in Amps
2: CB control window for CB control (close and trip command)
3: Auto-reclose control window for blocking of auto-recloser and readout of auto-reclose status information
4: Control Mode window for changing the CB control mode: Local/Remote and for presenting Control Mode state information
Manual only
Protect.Start
Close command (Model A)
This cell is used to change the resetting method of latched LEDs (LEDs configured to be latched) in the menu.
0:Manual only – Resetting of latched LEDs via manual reset only ( C clear key, input,
USB,RS485)
1:Protect.Start
– Resetting of latched LEDs upon any protection start (set for CB tripping) or via manual reset
2: Close command - Resetting of latched LEDs upon any manual close command (input,
HMI, RS485)
Note: It is also possible to configure the auto-recloser to reset the LEDs via [79] Close
Command (see: GLOBAL SETTINGS/[79] Signaling Reset)
Trip Info Reset Manual only
Manual only
Protect.Start
Close command (Model A)
This cell is used to change the resetting (jump to default window) method of Trip information on the front panel LCD in the menu.
0:Manual only – Resetting of Trip info via manual reset only ( C clear key, input,
USB,RS485)
1:Protect.Start
– Resetting of Trip info upon any protection start (set for CB tripping) or via manual reset
2: Close command - Resetting of Trip info upon any manual close command (input, HMI,
RS485)
Note: It is also possible to configure the auto-recloser to reset the LEDs via [79] Close
Command (see: GLOBAL SETTINGS/[79] Signaling Reset)
ST
ST
P116_EN_ST_A11 v2.7
(ST) 4-46
Menu Text
Settings
MiCOM P116
Default Setting Available Settings
Ltchd Outp. Reset
(Model A)
Alarm Info
(Model A)
Manual only
Self-Reset
Manual only
Protect.Start
Close command
This cell is used to change the resetting method of latched outputs (outputs configured to be latched).
0:Manual only – Resetting of latched outputs via manual reset only ( C clear key, input,
USB, RS485)
1:Protect.Start
– Resetting of latched outputs upon any protection start (set for CB tripping) or via manual reset
2: Close command - Resetting of latched outputs upon any manual close command
(input, HMI, RS485)
Self-Reset
Manual Reset
This cell is used to change the resetting method of Alarm indication windows (ALARM
STATUS/)
0: Self-Reset – This option means that if an alarm signal has disappeared no information is available in the ALARM STATUS column
1:Manual Reset – this option means that if an alarm signal has disappeared information is still available in the ALARM STATUS column until it is reset in the ALARM STATUS/
Alarm Reset cell.
Nominal Frequency 50Hz
50Hz
60Hz
This cell is used to set the nominal frequency of the power system.
Out.WD Hardware
Sign
(Model A)
Control Keys
Confirm
Opened
Opened
Closed
This cell is used to configure the logic of WD contact:
Opened: after powering remains open. In case of any P116 internal fault will be closed
Closed: after powering is closed. In case of any P116 internal fault will be opened
No
No
Yes
This cell is used to select the way of close/trip command execution from the front panel
(CB Close key/CB Open key).
No: after pressing CB Close key or CB Open key the command is executed instantaneously
Yes: after pressing CB Close key or CB Open key the new window will be appeared to confirm or cancel the control command (Close or Trip). After pressing OK key the control command is executed or after pressing C clear key the control command is cancelled.
Settings
MiCOM P116
3.2 Setting Group Select (Model A)
P116_EN_ST_A11 v2.7
(ST) 4-47
Menu Text Default Setting Available Settings
Number of Groups
Setting Group
Two Groups
Group 1
One Group
Two Groups
This cell is used to choose the number of setting groups available in the P116.
By choosing One Group all settings related to Group 2 are hidden in the menu.
Group 1
Group 2
This cell is used to change the current setting group.
T Change Settings
G1 G2
0.00 s 0.00 to 200 s, step 0.01 s
This cell is used to set the time-delay changing between the setting Group 1 and Group 2.
Copy Settings No Operation
No Operation
Copy G1 G2
Copy G2 G1
When:
the G1
G2 command is issued, G1 will be copied to the G2 group,
the G2 G1 command is issued, G2 will be copied to the G1 group.
ST
ST
P116_EN_ST_A11 v2.7
(ST) 4-48
3.3 CT Ratio
Settings
MiCOM P116
Menu Text Default Setting
Setting Range
Min. Max.
Step Size
Line CT Primary 1.000 A 1 30k
I n = 1 A: Sets the phase current transformer input’s primary current rating.
Line CT Primary 5.000 A 5 30k
I n = 5 A: Sets the phase current transformer input’s primary current rating.
1
1
Line CT Sec 1.000 A N/A N/A
I n = 1 A: Sets the phase current transformer input’s secondary current rating.
N/A
Line CT Sec 5.000 A N/A N/A
I n = 5 A: Sets the phase current transformer input’s secondary current rating.
N/A
E/Gnd CT Primary 1.000 A 1 30k 1
I en = 1 A: Sets the earth fault current transformer input’s primary current rating.
E/Gnd CT Primary 5.000 A 5 30k 1
I en = 5 A: Sets the earth fault current transformer input’s primary current rating.
E/Gnd CT Sec 1.000 A N/A N/A N/A
I en = 1 A: Sets the earth fault current transformer input’s secondary current rating.
E/Gnd CT Sec 5.000 A N/A N/A N/A
I en = 5 A: Sets the earth fault current transformer input’s secondary current rating.
I
N connection terminals: A7-8 terminals: A7-8 terminals: A9-10
This cell is used to inform the P116 about the
I
N connection: with or without powering of the P116.
The above information is used by the P116 to create an energy-saving stage for lower currents if Vx is not connected to the B1-B2 terminals.
Reduction of energy consumption by the P116 allows it to lower its burden on the primary
MV CT.
At the start, the P116’s CT powering is above 0.2
I n but if the CT’s energy is low, P116 switches the LCD display, the LEDs and RS485 off in the non-settable energy saving stage. Only one output relay remains active: RL1 (RL2-6 are switched off to save energy).
Input states, event records, fault records, counters and LEDs’ latches are saved.
The value compared with the above energy stage is calculated as a sum of the currents that supply the P116.
If the vector sum of the currents is above 0.65
I n (for example for A-B fault the vector sum: 0.65
I n =
I a: 0.3
I n +
I b: 0.3
I n +
I c: 0
I n +
I
N: 0
I en) the LCD display, the LEDs and the RS485 communications are switched on.
Depending on the setting for
I
N connection : the earth current is included in the above sum ( 0: terminals A7-A8 ) or not ( 1: terminals A9-A10 ).
Note: If the energy threshold is below 0.65
I n, RL2, RL3, RL4, RL5, RL6 and WD are not energized either, but if they are set to be latched and the P116 is powered again, latched
RL2, RL3, RL4, RL5, RL6 will be energized until they are reset. The same will happen with latched LEDs.
Settings
MiCOM P116
3.4 Circuit Breaker
P116_EN_ST_A11 v2.7
(ST) 4-49
Menu Text Default Setting
Setting Range
Min. Max.
Step Size tOpen Pulse min 0.5 s 0.1 s 10 s 0.01 s
Defines the duration of the trip pulse used by Protection Trip (pulse) and Trip CB Order outputs. tClose Pulse
(Model A)
0.5 s 0.1 s 10 s
Defines the duration of the close pulse used by the Close CB Order output.
Time Delay for Close
Model A)
0 s 0 s 200 s
Defines the time-delay for Manual or Remote CB close commands. tP pulse
(Model A)
5760 mn (4 days) 1 mn 65000 mn
0.01 s
0.01 s
1 mn
Defines the duration of the trip pulse. This pulse can be used for longer signaling of trips.
Note: For instance, if RL4 is assigned to this function it can be used to switch on an auxiliary voltage supply after tripping, for a fixed period (for example four days). Thus ensuring communication and signaling facilities. After the fixed period Auxiliary Voltage can be disconnected from the P116’s terminals automatically to save a substation battery. tCB FLT Ext.Sign.
(Model A)
16 s 1 s 200 s 1 s
A settable time-delay is included for manual closure with this circuit breaker check. If the circuit breaker does not indicate a healthy condition in this time period following a close command, then the relay will lockout and set off an alarm.
ST
ST
P116_EN_ST_A11 v2.7
(ST) 4-50
Remote CTRL Mode
(Model A)
Settings
MiCOM P116
0: Remote only
Remote only
Remote+LOC
This cell is used for definition of P116 “ Remote ” mode.
Note : P116 can be in two modes: “ Remote ” or “ Local ”.
Meaning of “ Local ” mode is clear. The control is possible locally only. Remote commands via RS485 are rejected by P116 (except Comm. Order command and Remote CTRL Mode commands via RS485).
The meaning of “ Remote ” mode can differ depends on the custom of users or application.
There are two possible definition:
“ Remote ” mode means that remote or local control are possible
“ Remote ” mode means that remote control is possible only (local control is rejected by P116)
Customization of “ Remote ” mode definition is applied by selection of proper setting:
0: Remote only – If P116 is in “ Remote ” mode, it is possible to apply: a close and a trip command via RS485 only.
Note : It is possible to see actual status of “ Local ”/” Remote ” mode on the default window of
P116 (see below)
LR Status:Remote
CTRL: Remote
In the line “ LR Status ” it is given information that remote control is possible only (see
“ Remote ”)
In “ CTRL ” line of this default menu window, it is possible to change control mode from
“ Remote ” to “ Local ” and opposite.
If above change is executed, “ LR Status ” will be changed from “ Remote ” to “ Local ” and opposite.
1: Remote+LOC – If P116 is in “ Remote ” mode, it is possible to close and trip CB via
RS485 or locally via: default window of menu, front panel keys, binary input configured to
“ Manual close ” or “ Manual open ” function.
Note : If this option is selected, in “ Remote ” mode of P116, the actual right (“ LR Status ”) on the default window of P116 is presented as below:
LR Status:L+R
CTRL: Remote
In the line “ LR Status ” is shown information that “ L+R ” - both way of control: local and remote are possible.
In “ CTRL ” line of default window of P116 menu, it is possible to change control mode from “ Remote ” to “ Local ” mode and opposite. If the change is executed, “ LR Status ” will be changed from “ R+L ” to “ Local ” and opposite.
Note : The changing to “ Local ” mode can be done via properly configured (set to “ Local
Mode ” function) binary input too. Input has greater priority than the selection from the default window.
If the logical status of the binary input is high, “ LR Status ” is always “ Local ”.
If the logical status of the binary input is low, “ LR Status ” can by changed from “ Local ” to
“ Remote ” mode via using “ CTRL ” line in default window of P116 menu.
52 Unblock SOTF
Time
(Model A)
1 s 0 s 200 s 0.01 s
A settable pulse time is used to unblock SOTF with starting from a CB close command state up to end of pulse time.
Settings
MiCOM P116
P116_EN_ST_A11 v2.7
(ST) 4-51
TC Supervision?
(Model A)
No
No
Yes
Yes-52
Selection of the trip circuit supervision function.
Yes – the monitoring is active all time
Yes-52 – the monitoring is active if CB is the close state only.
If Yes or Yes-52 is selected, the TC Supervision menu is displayed ( ALARM signaling).
TC Supervision tSUP
(Model A)
0.5 s 0.1 s
Displays the time-delay setting (tSUP) for TC supervision.
10 s 0.01 s
CB Supervision?
( Model A)
No
Yes
No
Selection of the time monitoring function of CB open and close operations.
If Yes is selected, the CB Open Time and CB Close Time menu are displayed. ( ALARM signaling)
Max.CB Open Time
(Model A)
0.5 s 0.1 s
Displays the Alarm time threshold for a CB open operation.
Max.CB Close Time
(Model A)
0.5 s 0.1 s
Displays the Alarm time threshold for a CB close operation.
10 s
10 s
0.01 s
0.01 s
CB Diagnostic?
(Model A)
No
Yes
No
Selection of the CB monitoring function.
If Yes is selected, the Max.CB Open No.
and Sum AMPS^n menus are displayed. ( ALARM signaling).
Max.CB Open Nb
(Model A)
0 0
Displays the alarm threshold for the CB open count.
50000 1
Max Sum AMPS^n
(Model A)
1 MA^n 0 MA^n 6553.5MA^n 0.1MA^n
Displays the alarm threshold for the summation of the current (in Amps or square Amps) interrupted by the CB.
AMPS’s n=
(Model A)
1 1
Displays the exponent for the current summation:
I
or
I
².
2 1
3.5 Inrush Blocking
The 2 nd
Harmonic Blocking detects high inrush current flows that occur when transformers or machines are connected. The function will then block the following functions: o PHASE O/C [50/51] o SOTF [50/51] (Model A) o E/GND FAULT [50/51N] o UNDERCURRENT [37] (Model A) o NEGATIVE SEQ. O/C [46] (Model A) o BROKEN CONDUCTOR (Model A) o AUX TIMERS (Model A)
ST
ST
P116_EN_ST_A11 v2.7 Settings
(ST) 4-52 MiCOM P116
Blocking of a protection function is enabled if the main configuration of protection criteria is set to “Trip-Inrush Bl” (for example: “ SETTING GROUP x/PROTECTION Gx/PHASE O/C
[50/51] Gx/I>? Trip-Inrush Bl” submenu)
The 2 nd
Harmonic Blocking function identifies an inrush current by evaluating the ratio of the second harmonic current components to the fundamental wave. If this ratio exceeds the set thresholds, then the inrush stabilization function operates.
The minimum fundamental current value required for operation of the Inrush Blocking function is 0.2
I n, and there is no upper limit to disable this feature.
2 nd
Harmonic Blocking operates across all phases.
Settings
MiCOM P116
P116_EN_ST_A11 v2.7
(ST) 4-53
Menu Text Default Setting
Setting Range
Min. Max.
Step Size
Inrush Blocking? 0: No
0: No
1: Yes
2: Closing (Model A)
Setting to Disable or Enable the Inrush Blocking element.
Setting choice No : The crossing of the 2 nd
Harmonic ratio threshold does not activate the Inrush
Blocking logic function.
Setting choice Yes : The crossing of the 2 nd
Harmonic ratio threshold on any phase activates the
Inrush Blocking Logic function instantaneously.
Setting choice Closing : The crossing of the 2 nd
Harmonic ratio threshold on any phase activates the Inrush Blocking Logic function after CB closing (Close CB order) when Unblock Inrush Time elapses.
2 nd
Harmonic Ratio 20% 10% 50% 1%
Sets the value for the 2 nd
harmonic threshold ratio calculated as a percentage of the fundamental component from 10 to 50% (step 0.1%).
Inrush Reset Time 0.0 s 0.0 s 200 s 0.01 s
Sets the value for the Inrush tReset time. This provides a reset delay of the Inrush Blocking signal (logic state=1) once the 2 nd
harmonic level falls below the set threshold.
Note:
Typically the Reset Time should be set to 0 ms, because second harmonic blocking can cause an additional tripping delay. If unwanted tripping can be caused by the inrush phenomena this value can be increased.
This setting is available when Inrush Blocking? Is set to Yes or Closing
Unblock Inrush Time
(Model A)
1 s 0.0 s 200 s 0.01 s
A settable pulse time is used to enable Inrush Blocking from the moment the CB close command via P116 is issued until the end of the pulse time.
This setting is available when Inrush Blocking? Is set to Closing .
3.6 [79] Advanced Settings (Model A)
Menu Text Default Setting
Setting Range
Min. Max.
Step Size
CB FLT Montor.? No
No
Yes
Allows the use of a dedicated input ( CB FLT Ext.Sign.
) to inform the auto-reclose function of the state of the CB (failed or operational). This signal has to be mapped to a digital input in the Automatic Control inputs submenu
0: No : CB FLT Montor.
Function not activated.
1: Yes : The CB will be declared faulty and the auto-recloser will switch to locked-out state when the tCB FLT ext time ( GLOBAL SETTINGS/CIRCUIT BREAKER/ submenu) has elapsed and tCB FLT Ext.Sign.
remains active.
Block.via Input?
Start Dead t on
No
CB trips
No
Yes
Allows the use of a dedicated input ( Block 79 ) to block the auto-reclose function.
If you set this item to Yes, in order to render it active you have to map the function Block
[79] ( INPUTS CONFIGURATION submenu) to a digital input . With the Block 79 function active, the auto-recloser will switch to locked-out state after a protection trip involved in the sequences matrix of the AR.
Protect.Reset
CB trips
ST
ST
P116_EN_ST_A11 v2.7
(ST) 4-54
Settings
MiCOM P116
Menu Text Default Setting
Setting Range
Min. Max.
Step Size
Setting that determines whether the dead time is started when the circuit breaker trips (CB is closed) or when the protection trip resets.
Note: If no binary inputs are assigned to CB status the auto-reclose function uses the
0: Protect.Reset
option, even if it is set to 1: CB trips .
Rolling Demand? No
No
Yes
1: Yes : activates the trip activity supervision. When the first trip command is generated, the relay starts a time-delay during which, if the number of current-based trips reaches the programmed maximum trip number, the relay stops the current auto-reclose cycle (final trip).
Max cycles No.
Rol.Demand
10 2 100 1
Sets the programmed maximum [79] reclosing shot number to protect the CB against intermittent faults.
Time period Rol.
Demmand
10mn 1mn 1410 mn 1mn
Sets the time-delay for trip activity supervision.
Inhibit Time t
I
on
Close
1 s 0 s 600 s 0.01 s
Set the value for the Inhibit Time (tI). The Inhib Time t
I
timer is used to block the autorecloser from being initiated after the CB is manually closed onto a fault.
The lockout condition can reset by a manual closing after the Inhib Time t
I
.
Signaling Reset No
No
Close via 79
This cell is used to change the General resetting way of signaling (LEDs and Trip information).
0: No – Closing of the CB by the auto-recloser does not reset LED and electromagnetic flags signaling.
1: Close via 79 – Reset of signaling (LEDs, flags, trip info) via an auto-reclose close command.
3.7 Communication Orders (Model A)
Menu Text Default Setting
Setting Range
Min. Max.
Step Size
Pulse Time tCOM1
Pulse Time tCOM2
1 s
1 s
0 s
0 s
200 s
200 s
Defines the duration of the trip pulse used by the Comm.Order 2 output
0.01 s
Defines the duration of the trip pulse used by the Comm.Order 1 output.
Note: Comm.Order 1 is not blocked if P116 is in Local Mode , so can be used for remote trip if Local Mode should block remote tripping command.
0.01 s
COM2 Order Conf. RS485
RS485
RS485+Button_C
Button_C this configuration allows adding to Comm.Order 2 : pressing of the ‘C’ clear key located on the front panel of P116
Setting option: RS485+Button_C means that if command tCOM2 (Communication Order 2) via RS485 is executed or ‘C’ Clear key on the front panel is pressed, the output contact assigned to Comm.Order 2 will be energized via set tCOM2 pulse time.
Settings
MiCOM P116
3.8 Optional Flag Indicators Configuration (Model A)
P116_EN_ST_A11 v2.7
(ST) 4-55
Optional Flag Indicator configuration settings define which signal is mapped to the P116
Flags.
Matrix configuration allows free mapping of any one function to each Optional Flag.
Menu Text Default Setting Setting Range
Step
Size
Description of bits: Flag: 5,4,3,2 Setting range:
Flag Ind. t
I
> 0000 0–1
This Flag is active if the set time-delay for the
I
> element has elapsed.
After the set time-delay, the Flag is latched until it is reset (Binary Input, Front panel, communication system)
Default Setting: “0000” means that:
Flag 5: 0 – Flag 5 is not assigned to the t
I
> function
Flag 4: 0 – see Flag 5
Flag 3: 0 – see Flag 5
Flag 2: 0 – see Flag 5
Note: Flag 1 is fixed to Protection Trip function (not configurable)
Flag
I nd. t
I
>> 0000 0–1
This Flag is latched if the set time-delay for the
I
>> element has elapsed
Flag
I nd. t
I
>>> 0000 0–1
This Flag is latched if the set time-delay for the
I
>>> element has elapsed
Flag Ind. tSOTF 0000 0–1
1
1
1
1
This Flag is latched if the set time-delay for the SOTF element has elapsed
Flag Ind. t
I
N_1 0000 0–1
This Flag is latched if the set time-delay for the
I
N_1 element has elapsed
Flag Ind. t
I
N_2 0000 0–1
This Flag is latched if the set time-delay for the
I
N_2 element has elapsed
Flag Ind. t
I
N_3 0000 0–1
This Flag is latched if the set time-delay for the
I
N_3 element has elapsed
Flag Ind. t
I
< 0000 0–1
This Flag is latched if the set time-delay for the
I<
element has elapsed
Flag Ind. t
I
2> 0000 0–1
This Flag is latched if the set time-delay for the
I s2> element has elapsed
Flag Ind. tBrkn Cond. 0000 0–1
1
1
1
1
1
1
This Flag is latched if the set time-delay for the Broken Conductor element has elapsed
Flag Ind. Thermal
Trip
Flag Ind. CB Fail
0000
0000
0–1
0–1
This Flag is latched if the set time-delay of the CBF protection function has elapsed
1
This Flag is latched if the set time-delay for the Thermal state is above the Thermal Trip threshold, and after tripping it is above the Thermal Trip threshold multiplied by the Theta
Trip/Reset Ratio.
1
Flag Ind. tAUX1 0000 0–1 1
ST
ST
P116_EN_ST_A11 v2.7
(ST) 4-56
Settings
MiCOM P116
Menu Text Default Setting Setting Range
Step
Size
This Flag is latched if the set time-delay for the AUX1 element has elapsed
Flag Ind. tAUX2 0000 0–1
This Flag is latched if the set time-delay for the AUX2 element has elapsed
Flag Ind. tAUX3 0000 0–1
1
1
This Flag is latched if the set time-delay for the AUX3 element has elapsed
Flag Ind. tAUX4 0000 0–1 1
This Flag is latched if the set time-delay for the AUX4 element has elapsed
[79] F.Trip 0000 0–1 1
This Flag is latched if the auto-recloser have issued the final trip signal. [ 79] Final Trip indicates the auto-recloser has issued a final trip (after the last reclosing shot the line is still faulty). The successful auto-reclose output is reset upon the next CB trip or from one of these resetting methods: assigned input ( Reset Latchd Sign ), front panel ( C clear key), reset command ( Reset Latchd Sign) via RS485 or remote LED and output reset command via RS485.
If this Flag ( [79] F.Trip
) was not reset before the next Autoreclose, [79] in Progress will reset this Flag, when Autoreclose is started again.
[79] Lockout 0000 0–1 1
This Flag is latched if the auto-recloser is locked-out (internally blocked).
79 Lockout alarm indicates that the relay is in a lockout state and that no further reclose attempts will be made:
the Reclaim time has elapsed but CB is still open
the Dead time has elapsed but CB remained open after the reclosing shot
the CB has failed to close
the protection element not assigned to the auto-reclose function is tripped.
a number of A/R rolling demand valid
A/R conflict
This alarm can be reset using one of these resetting methods: assigned input ( Reset
Latchd Sign ), front panel ( C clear key), reset command ( Reset Latchd Sign) via RS485 or remote LED and output reset command via RS485.
The lockout auto-reclose condition can reset by a manual closing after the Inhib Time t
I
.
79 Success. 0000 0–1 1
This Flag is latched if the auto-recloser closes the CB and that no faults occur during the
Reclaim Time (tR).
79 Success.
indicates that an auto-reclose cycle has been successfully completed. A successful auto-reclose signal is given after the CB was tripped by a protection function and re-closed whereupon the fault was cleared and the reclaim time expired thus resetting the auto-reclose cycle. The successful auto-reclose output is reset upon the next CB trip or from one of these resetting methods: assigned input ( Reset Latchd Sign ), front panel
C clear key), remote LED reset ( Reset Latchd Sign) command via RS485 or remote LED and output reset command via RS485.
If this Flag ( 79 Success.
) was not reset before the next Autoreclose, [79] in Progress will reset this Flag, when Autoreclose is started again.
Settings
MiCOM P116
3.9 General Input Configuration (Model A)
P116_EN_ST_A11 v2.7
(ST) 4-57
Menu Text Default Setting
Setting Range
Min. Max.
Step Size
Standard Inputs card (24-250Vac/dc)
Inp.1 Filtering? dc/ac ENA dc/ac ENA ac dc
This menu is hidden if the P116 is fitted with DC special binary inputs (ordering option).
Allows setting of the type of filtering for the voltage signal connected to binary input L1 (the type of auxiliary voltage):
0: dc/ac ENA – the binary input is energized by AC or DC auxiliary voltage.
1: ac – the binary input is energized by the DC component only. This setting should be applied if DC auxiliary voltage is used.
2: ac – the binary input is energized by the AC component only. This setting should be applied if AC auxiliary voltage is used.
For details refer to Technical Data chapter.
Inp.2 Filtering?
Inp.3 Filtering? dc/ac ENA dc/ac ENA dc/ac ENA ac dc
This menu is hidden if the P116 is fitted with DC special binary inputs (ordering option).
Allows setting of the type of filtering for the voltage signal connected to binary input L2 (the type of auxiliary voltage):
See Inp.1 Filtering dc/ac ENA ac dc
This menu is hidden if the P116 is fitted with DC special binary inputs (ordering option).
Allows setting of the type of filtering for the voltage signal connected to binary input L3 (the type of auxiliary voltage):
See Inp.1 Filtering
Inp.4 Filtering? dc/ac ENA dc/ac ENA ac dc
This menu is hidden if the P116 is fitted with DC special binary inputs (ordering option).
Allows setting of the type of filtering for the voltage signal connected to binary input L4 (the type of auxiliary voltage):
See Inp.1 Filtering
Inp.5 Filtering? dc/ac ENA dc/ac ENA ac dc
This menu is hidden if the P116 is fitted with DC special binary inputs (ordering option).
Allows setting of the type of filtering for the voltage signal connected to binary input L5 (the type of auxiliary voltage):
See Inp.1 Filtering
ST
ST
P116_EN_ST_A11 v2.7
(ST) 4-58
Settings
MiCOM P116
Menu Text Default Setting
Setting Range
Min. Max.
Step Size
Inp.6 Filtering? dc/ac ENA
This menu is hidden if the P116 is fitted with DC special binary inputs (ordering option).
Allows setting of the type of filtering for the voltage signal connected to binary input L6 (the type of auxiliary voltage):
See Inp.1 Filtering
DC Input card (110-220Vdc) dc/ac ENA ac dc
Global nominal V 110Vdc
220Vdc
129Vdc
110Vdc
This menu is available if the P116 is fitted with DC special binary inputs (ordering option).
This menu is hidden if the P116 is fitted with standard ac/dc binary inputs (ordering option).
Allows setting of the nominal voltage for all binary inputs:
0: 220Vdc – Nominal voltage for all binary inputs: 220 Vdc
1: 129Vdc – Nominal voltage for all binary inputs: 129 Vdc
2:110Vdc – Nominal voltage for all binary inputs: 110 Vdc
For details refer to Technical Data chapter.
Settings
MiCOM P116
3.10 O/C Advanced
P116_EN_ST_A11 v2.7
(ST) 4-59
This column includes advanced settings for O/C protection elements: [50/51] O/C, [50N/51N]
E/, [46] Negative Sequence, [46BC] Broken Conductor.
If it is not caused by specific application, the settings below can remain as default.
Menu Text Default Setting
Setting Range
Min. Max.
Step Size
I< Stage
Broken Conductor
(Model A)
0.1In 0.1In 1In 0,01In
This cell sets the blocking threshold for Broken Conductor protection element.
If the 3 phase current (AND) is below set current threshold Broken Conductor protection element is blocked (deactivated).
Note: Broken Conductor criteria is based on % value, so settable blocking threshold is suitable for situation when the natural asymmetry of small current load can be detected by
Broken Conductor element as fault condition.
Increasing of this threshold allows to protect against maloperation, when increased value of natural asymmetry can happen in protected power system network.
IDMT interlock by
DMT
No
No
Yes
20Is n/a
No : no function
Yes : IDMT tripping can be blocked if any DMT stage is started.
This settings is common for all stages in E/Gnd Fault [50N/51N] , Phase O/C [50/51]
Negative Sequence [46] O/C columns.
The function allows for better time coordination between IDMT and DMT tripping characteristics.
If Yes is selected and the current is above DMT current stage, tripping via IDMT characteristic is blocked to allow reach of DMT time delay (trip via DMT stage only).
It is important for application when the IDMT time delay for current above DMT current stage is shorter that set DMT time delay.
20Is: In this option there is no blocking of IDMT stage via any DMT protection element, but the IDMT characteristic is cut above 20 times of IDMT current setting value (Is).
It means that if the measured current is above 20 x Is, the time delay is the same as calculated according to IDMT formula for point 20xIs.
In this way, above 20 times IDMT current setting value, IDMT characteristic becomes
DMT characteristic with fixed time delay counted for 20xIs.
This option is useful when P20 relays are installed in the network, because
IDMT characteristics in P20 relays (for example P123, etc) have such functionality as standard.
This settings is common for all stages in E/Gnd Fault [50N/51N] , Phase O/C [50/51]
Negative Sequence [46] O/C columns.
ST
ST
P116_EN_ST_A11 v2.7
(ST) 4-60
3.11 Communication (Model A)
Settings
MiCOM P116
Menu Text
Protocol
Default Setting
IEC103
Setting Range
Min. Max.
Modbus
IEC103
Step Size
This cell sets the type of protocol for RS485 only:
0: Modbus RTU protocol
1:IEC103 protocol
This setting parameter is applied for RS485 port only.
Note: USB port has fixed protocol: Modbus.
Relay Address
RS485
Baud Rate
254
19200 bits/s
1 254 1
This cell sets the unique address for the relay so that only one relay is accessed by the master station's software. This address is applied for RS485 port only.
Note: USB port has fixed address: 1.
4800 bits/s , 9600 bits/s, 19200 bits/s,
38400 bits/s, 5760 bits/s
This cell controls the communication speed between relay and master station. It is important that both the relay and the master station have the same speed setting.
This setting parameter is applied for RS485 port only.
Note: USB port has fixed Baud Rate: 115.2 kbits/s.
Parity No parity No parity, Odd parity, Even parity
This cell controls the parity format used in the data frames. It is important that both the relay and the master station have the same parity setting.
This setting parameter is applied for RS485 port only.
Note: USB port has fixed Parity: No parity.
Stop bits 1 stop bit 1 stop bit, 2 stop bits
This cell controls the stop bit format used in the data frames. It is important that both the relay and the master station have the same stop bits setting.
This setting parameter is applied for RS485 port only.
Note: USB port has fixed Stop bits: 1 stop bit.
Note: The above parameters are relevant to the RS485 port only.
The USB port has the non-settable following parameters:
- Protocol: Modbus RTU
- Address: 1
- Baud Rate : 115.2 kbits/s
- Comms. Mode:
Data Bit: 8
Stop bit: 1
Parity: none
Settings
MiCOM P116
3.12 MAX & Average I Configuration
P116_EN_ST_A11 v2.7
(ST) 4-61
The Max & Average
I
Configuration submenu makes it possible to set the parameters associated with this function. (Peak and Average values are displayed in the Measurements menu)
Menu Text Default Setting
Setting Range
Min. Max.
Step Size
Time Window 900 s 0 s 3600 s 1 s
Set the value for the time window during which peak and average values are stored.
3.13 Disturbance Recorder
The Disturb Record submenu makes it possible to set and read out disturbance records. Up to 6 second's duration but not more than 5 disturbance records can be stored.
Total number of records available in disturbance recorder is: o One - for set Max Record Time from in range: 3.01s - 6s o Two – for set Max Record Time from in range: 2.01s - 3s o Three – for set Max Record Time from in range: 1.51s - 2s o Four – for set Max Record Time from in range: 1.21s – 1.5s o Five - for set Max Record Time from in range: 0.10s – 1.2s
The beginning of the record can be adjusted with a selected pre-fault time. It is possible to limit the duration of a record.
Menu Text Default Setting
Setting Range
Min. Max.
Step Size
Pre-Time 0.1 s 0.1 s 6s 0.01 s
Setting for the disturbance record pre-fault time. The pre-fault time sets the beginning of the disturbance record. In this example, the record starts 100 ms before the disturbance. Its length can be limited by setting.
Post-Time 0.1 s 0.1 s 1 s 0.01 s
Setting for the disturbance record post-fault time. The total disturbance recording time is: pre-fault time + high state of triggering criteria (Start or Trip time)+ post-fault time.
The above total recording time is limited by setting.
Disturbance Rec.Trig. on Inst. on Inst. on Trip
Setting for the trigger criteria:
0: on Inst . – the trigger is the disturbance indicated by the starting of a protection element set to trip the CB. If this option is chosen the total recording time is: pre-fault time + duration of protection start + post-fault time, but no longer than the value of Max Record Time .
1: on Trip . – the trigger is the disturbance indicated by a protection element trip. If this option is chosen the total recording time is: pre-fault time + duration of protection trip+ postfault time, but no longer than the value of Max Record Time .
Max Record Time 3 s 0.1 s 6 s 0.01 s
Setting for the maximum total recording time. If default value is kept (3 s) it means that
2 records will be recorded.
ST
ST
P116_EN_ST_A11 v2.7
(ST) 4-62
4. COMMISSIONING
Settings
MiCOM P116
This column contains menu cells which allow the status of the opto-isolated inputs, output relay contacts to be monitored. Additionally there are cells to test the operation of the output contacts, user-programmable LEDs.
Menu Text Default Setting Available Settings
Description of bits: L: 6,5,4,3,2,1
Opto I/P Status
(Model A)
000000
This menu cell displays the status of the relay’s opto-isolated inputs as a binary string, a
‘1’ indicating an energized opto-isolated input and a ‘0’ a de-energized one. This menu window shows the presence of voltage on the binary input terminals, it means that applying of the reverse logic has no influence of the presented values
Description of bits:
Model A: 6,5,4,3,2,1
Model L: 1
Relay O/P Status
This menu cell displays the status of the digital signals used to energize the output relays as a binary string, a ‘1’ indicating an operated state and ‘0’ a non-operated state.
This menu window shows the logical state of the outputs – not physical state on the terminals.
(Logical state of the output means: before Reverse Logic. So Logical state of the output can differ from Physical state - terminals if Reverse Logic for this output is set)
Maintenance Mode
00000 0
No
No
Yes,outp.trips
Yes,outp.block
Choose whether you want to activate the MAINTENANCE MODE of the relay.
MAINTENANCE MODE allows to test outputs (contacts and energy outputs) and functional tests.
It is recommended to assign this function to “Alarm” LED (LED3) or any programmable
LED to see when the Maintenance Mode is active.
For changing this value Control password have to be entered.
If “ No ” is selected, all menu cells below are hidden.
If “ Yes,outp.trips
” or “ Yes,outp.block
” is set ALARM LED is lit (if it is assigned to
Maintenance Mode ) and 10 minutes timer is started for returning to “ No ” option. In this time P16 is in SETTING MODE . Changing of test values and execution of command are allowed.
If “ Yes,outp.block
” is selected, outputs (relays and energy outputs) are disconnected from the protection and automation functions.
Note: Remote command (via RS485) or Binary input enable “ Yes,outp.block
” option .
So “ Yes,outp.trips
” option can be enabled via P116 menu only.
Description of bits:
Test Pattern
Model A: T,F,6,5,4,3,2,1
Model L: T,1
000000 00
Settings
MiCOM P116
P116_EN_ST_A11 v2.7
(ST) 4-63
Menu Text Default Setting Available Settings
This menu cell is used to set outputs for the test. The digit: 1 set in this cell means that this output will be energized after the test command is applied.
If the test is applied ( COMMISSIONING/Test outputs cell ) outputs set in this cell will be energized for the duration of Contact Test Time .
Contact Test Time 0.1 s 0 s
Set the time pulse of contact closing during the tests.
200 s 0.01 s
Test outputs no operation no operation
Apply test
This menu cell is used to apply a test to the outputs set in the Test Pattern cell.
To apply the output test: Press OK , change a setting option from 0 to 1 (1: Apply test), confirm this action by pressing the OK key. After this, outputs (set in Test Pattern cell) are energized for the duration of Contact Test Time .
Note: If the Test control password is not equal to 0 before changing of option (from 0 to 1) at least Test control password should be entered (as for every other P116 setting).
Functional Test
I
>
I
>
I
>>
I
>>>
SOTF
(Model A)
I
N_1
I
N_2
I
N_3
I
< (Model A)
I
2> (Model A)
Brkn Cond (Model A)
Therm Trip
CBF
This menu cell is used to set a protection element for Functional tests.
Functional Test End
(Model A)
CB Trip
CB trip
Time
This menu cell is used to choose the method of ending the test procedure.
0: CB trip – the test is applied until Trip signal
1: Time – the test is ended after the Functional Test Time set value.
Note: in model L the test is ended after Functional Test Time only
Functional Test Time 0.1 s 0.1 s 200 s
Setting for the time pulse of contact closing during Functional tests.
0.01 s
Functional Test
CTRL no operat. no operat.
Operate
This menu cell is used to apply test of outputs which were set in Functional Test pattern cell.
To apply output test: Press enter, change a setting option from no operat.
to Operate , confirm this action by pressing OK key. After that outputs (set in Functional Test pattern cell) are energized via Functional Test Time .
Note: if Test control password is not equal 0 before changing of option (from no operat.
to
Operat ) at least Test control password should be entered (like for every P116 setting).
ST
ST
P116_EN_ST_A11 v2.7
(ST) 4-64
5. SETTING CHANGE MODE
Settings
MiCOM P116
This column contains menu cells which allow the settings and configuration to be changed.
Before any change to the settings it is necessary to set a P116's Edit Setting Mode to
Without limits or Protection only . If changing of parameters is allowed, the LEDs light up one by one until the Setting Change status cell is in the Protected state.
In the Without limits state, it is possible to change all of the settings.
In the Protection only state, it is only possible to change protection settings ( PROTECTION columns)
In the Control state, it is possible to control the CB in the default window and apply
MAINTENANCE MODE for outputs and functional tests . If the password is set to 0000, no password is necessary to control the CB.
In the Protected state, settings are password-protected.
Menu Text Default Setting Available Settings
Edit Settings? Enter PSWD 0000 – 9999
This cell is used to switch the P116 to Edit Settings in order to allow changing the settings.
Setting Change Protected
Protected/Without limits/Protection only/Test Control
This cell displays the level of rights to change settings.
Change Password 0000 – 9999
This cell is displayed if the password is entered. To change the password it is necessary to press the OK key and enter the new password. After that it is necessary to press enter to save the new password.
To access the Edit Setting Menu window faster, press the left and up keys at the same time.
This action makes the menu jump to the Edit Setting cell.
Then press the OK key, a password will be requested.
Enter the password (the default factory password is “0000” for every password level)
In the Without limits or the Protection only state, all the LEDs will then light up, in rapid sequence. This indicates that the P116 is operating in Edit Mode: the parameters can be changed in this state.
In the Control state there is no any LED signaling (no lighting up in rapid sequence as above).
After having set all the required parameters, press simultaneously the
and
keys, then press the OK key once
Settings
MiCOM P116
6. OP PARAMETERS
P116_EN_ST_A11 v2.7
(ST) 4-65
This column contains menu cells to show some of the P116's parameters.
Menu Text Default Setting
Description P116
This cell is used to show the type of relay.
Serial Nb 000000
This cell is used to show the serial number of the relay.
Reference SE MiCOM
This cell is used to show the relay's manufacturer.
Software Version 1.B.00
This cell is used to show the software version (firmware)
Hardware Version 00
This cell is used to show the hardware version ordered
Active Set Group
(Model A)
Group 1
This cell is used to show the active setting group
Available Settings
Read only
Read only
Read only
Read only
Read only
Read only
Date
(Model A)
01/01/08 00/00/00 – 99/99/99
This cell is used to set the date of the internal clock
Time
(Model A)
00:00:00 00:00:00 – 23/59/59
This cell is used to set the time of the internal clock
Note:
1. A back-up clock capacitor is charged from an auxiliary voltage supply (terminals B1-B2) only. The capacitor's energy allows storage of real time information for up to 2 days. When the back-up capacitor is completely discharged, it takes less than 10 minutes to recharge it completely
2. If the clock has no real time information (the back-up capacitor is recharged) and the current exceeds the minimum current required for operation, the real time is set to
01/01/2008 00:00:00. Therefore events are dated with reference to this start time value.
Nominal Frequency: 50Hz or 60Hz
This cell is used to show the nominal frequency setting.
Read only
ST
ST
P116_EN_ST_A11 v2.7
(ST) 4-66
Settings
MiCOM P116
Operation
MiCOM P116
P116_EN_OP_A11 v2.7
OP
Date:
Hardware Suffix:
Software Version:
Connection Diagrams:
OPERATION
17 th
November 2013
A
1C
10P11602
OP
P116_EN_OP_A11 v2.7 Operation
MiCOM P116
Operation
MiCOM P116
CONTENTS
OPERATION OF INDIVIDUAL PROTECTION FUNCTIONS
Negative Sequence Overcurrent Protection
Circuit Breaker Failure Function (CB Fail)
Auto-reclose Output Information
Auto-reclose Logic Description
Auto-reclose Inhibit after Manual Closing
Setting Group Change when the auto-reclose is in progress
Signalling Reset after Close via 79
External Trip via a Binary Input
Blocking Logic Function and Blocked Overcurrent Scheme Logic
OPERATION OF NON PROTECTION FUNCTIONS
P116_EN_OP_A11 v2.7
(OP) 5-1
OP
OP
P116_EN_OP_A11 v2.7
(OP) 5-2
Circuit Breaker State Monitoring
Circuit Breaker Condition Monitoring
Trip Circuit Supervision Mechanism
Real Time Clock Synchronization via Opto-Inputs
Resetting of Latched LEDs and Outputs
Operation
MiCOM P116
Operation
MiCOM P116
FIGURES
P116_EN_OP_A11 v2.7
(OP) 5-3
Figure 1: Overcurrent protection logic diagram
Figure 2: Switch on to fault logic diagram
Figure 3: Earth Fault protection logic diagram for
N>>, the logic diagram is the same but without the IDMT characteristics
Figure 4: Undercurrent protection logic
Figure 5: Negative sequence overcurrent protection logic
Figure 6: Broken conductor protection logic
Figure 7: Thermal overload protection logic
Figure 8: Circuit Breaker Failure protection logic
Figure 10: Selective Logic scheme for the
Figure 11: Cold Load Pick Up scheme for the
Figure 12: Blocking logic function diagram for the
Figure 13: Second harmonic blocking diagram for the
Figure 14: Trip Circuit Supervision Principle
Figure 15: Remote Control of Circuit Breaker
Figure 16: Energizing of binary inputs (P116xxxxxxx1xxxxxx)
OP
OP
P116_EN_OP_A11 v2.7
(OP) 5-4
Operation
MiCOM P116
Operation
MiCOM P116
1. HARDWARE OPERATION
P116_EN_OP_A11 v2.7
(OP) 5-5
P116 have two models: model A and Model L. The I/O difference between two models are shown on external connection diagrams available in INSTALATION Section P116/EN IN.
The P116 model A is supplied from the power system's CTs or/and from the auxiliary voltage supply (terminals: B1-B2). In case of auxiliary voltage loss on the B1-B2 terminals, the P116 requires a minimum current flowing in one of the three phase inputs or the earth fault input
(A7-A8 terminals) in order to function. The minimum current required for operation is 20% of the nominal current of the relay (Technical Data Section P116/EN TD)
The P116 model L is supplied from the power system's CTs only. The P116 requires a minimum current flowing in one of the three phase inputs or the earth fault input (A7-A8 terminals) in order to function. The minimum current required for operation is 20% of the nominal current of the relay (Technical Data Section P116/EN TD)
The energy taken from the current and/or from auxiliary voltage supply is used to charge up the integrated capacitors: trip outputs and relay outputs (flag indicator). If any protection function trips, the energy is provided to the C1-C2 (CB coil output) and C3-C4 (flag indicator output available in Model A only) terminals. The output signal is a pulse, the repetition of which is dependent on the trip coil's impedance and on the current level.
If the current in one of the three phases or at the earth fault input (A7-A8 terminals) is above
0.2
I n (
I en), the following functions:
- output contact: RL1,
- all inputs (L1 – L6), but they have to be supplied from another auxiliary voltage which can light inputs (Model A only) ,
- event recording (Model A only) ,
- fault recording,
- disturbance recording,
- storage of latched LEDs and outputs information,
- storage of counter information
- energy outputs for sensitive tripping coil and external flag indicator (Model A only) are operational, even if there is no auxiliary voltage on the B1-B2 terminals (model A only) .
If the sum of the vector current values ( I
I
A
-
I
B
I + I
I
C
+
I
N
1)
I) that supply the P116 is below
0.65
I n (for example the sum for A-B fault:
0.65
I n =
I a: 0.325
I n +
I b: 0.325
I n +
I c: 0.00
I n +
I
N
: 0.00
I en), the following functions are no longer available in case of auxiliary voltage supply loss (P116 Model L has no powering from auxiliary suppy):
- in model A: the RS485 communication port is switched off (no communication with the system via RS485),
- the LCD display is switched off,
- the LEDs are switched off. If after a switch-on-to-fault operation, the P116 is supplied again (currents above 0.65
I n or auxiliary power or USB), the stored LED information will be displayed until it is reset.
- Neither outputs RL2 to RL6 (Model A) nor the WD contact are energized. If after a switch-on-to-fault operation, the P116 is supplied again (currents above 0.65
I n or auxiliary power or USB), the stored output relay information (latched outputs) will be active until it is reset.
If the sum of the vector current values ( I
I
A
-
I
B
I + I
I
C
+
I
N
1)
I) that supply the P116 is above
0.65
I n all functions are active (full functionality of P116).
1)
– Powering of P116 from earth input is selectable by using proper terminals (A7-8: with powering or A9-10: without powering) and additionally by configuration in P116 menu
OP
OP
P116_EN_OP_A11 v2.7 Operation
(OP) 5-6 MiCOM P116
(GLOBAL SETTINGS/CT RATIO/IN connection). Detailed information is given in the Setting chapter (P116/EN ST) and Installation chapter (P116/EN IN).
Depending on the setting for GLOBAL SETTINGS/CT RATIO/IN connection the earth current is included in the above sum ( 0: terminals:A7-8 ) or not ( 1: terminals A9-10 ).
Note: 1. In Model A a back-up clock capacitor is charged from an auxiliary voltage supply (terminals B1-B2) and current inputs. The capacitor's energy allows storage of real time information for up to 2 days. When the back-up capacitor is completely discharged, it takes less than 10 minutes to recharge it completely.
2. In Model A: if the clock has no real time information (the back-up capacitor is recharged) and the current exceeds the minimum current required for operation, the real time is set to 01/01/2008 00:00:00.
Therefore events are dated with reference to this start time value.
3. In Model A: if RS485 communications are required, it is recommended to supply P116 from the auxiliary voltage in order to ensure that real time information is used in the event and fault recorders.
4. The FRAM memory (settings, events - Model A, fault records, latched LEDs and outputs information) is a non-volatile memory.
5. The USB port integrates electronic boards only to allow communications with the P116 via the user interface (HMI) or the setting software. Therefore the status of inputs and outputs is not read via the P116 system. The status information available on the menu is set to its default value. Healthy information available on the Healthy
LED refers to the electronic part supplied via the USB port.
6. If there are any hardware problems the “Healthy LED” is blinking. If the “Healthy LED” is not lit, this means that no source of supply is available or that P116 is not healthy. For CT powered relays it is not possible to differentiate between the above conditions. Output contacts can also be assigned to the “Healthy” function (Setting
Section P116/EN ST).
Operation
MiCOM P116
2. OPERATION OF INDIVIDUAL PROTECTION FUNCTIONS
P116_EN_OP_A11 v2.7
(OP) 5-7
2.1
The following sections detail the individual protection functions.
P116 have two models: model A and Model L. Operation chapter shows maximum software/hardware option. To see which functions are available in which model – refer to
INTRODUCTION (P116/EN IT), GETTING STARTED (P116/EN GS) and SETTINGS
(P116/EN ST) chapters.
Overcurrent Protection
The overcurrent protection included in the P116 relays provides three-stage non-directional three-phase overcurrent protection with independent time-delay characteristics. All overcurrent settings apply to all three phases but are independent for each of the three stages.
Each protection stage can be selected to Trip the CB or to issue a signal (Alarm) only.
If an overcurrent protection stage (
I
>?
,
I
>>?
or
I
>>>?
menu) is set to Trip , Trip-Inrush Bl or Trip-Latch , it means that that stage is linked to the Protect.Trip
and Prot.Trip pulse functions (see LED and Output configuration).
If an overcurrent protection stage (
I
>?
,
I
>>?
or
I
>>>?
menu) is set to Alarm , it means that that stage is linked to the Alarm function (see LED and Output configuration).
If Trip-Inrush Bl is selected, the overcurrent stage is blocked via the Inrush Blocking function (refer to Inrush Blocking section).
If Trip-Latch is selected, the overcurrent stage will remain high after a trip, until it is reset via a binary input, the HMI or a remote RESET command.
OP
Inrush detection (I2h/I1h)
I>? 3: Trip-Inrush Bl
Block.tI> Input
[79] Inhib.Trip tI>
&
&
I>? 2: Alarm
T
TIMER
0 tI> Time Delay
DMT/IDMT with DMT or IDMT
RESET
SETTING GROUP 1(2)
/PROTECTION/
[50/51N] E/GND FAULT G1
&
Alarm
Alarm Recorder tI>
I>? 0: disabled
Start I>A Threshold
Start I>B Threshold
Start I>C Threshold
CBF: Block I>
OR
&
&
Start I>
&
INSTANTENOUS
Recorder
RESET LEDs OR
&
I>? 4: Trip-Latch
I>? 1: Trip
I>? 3: Trip-Inrush Bl
OR
&
Protect. Trip
Protect. Trip pulse
Fault Recorder
P0920ENb
Figure 1: Overcurrent protection logic diagram
OP
P116_EN_OP_A11 v2.7
(OP) 5-8
2.1.1 Operation Time-Delay
Operation
MiCOM P116
The first (
I
>) and second (
I
>>) stages of overcurrent protection have time-delayed characteristics which are selectable between inverse definite minimum time (IDMT) and definite time (DMT). The third (
I
>>>) stage has a definite time characteristic only.
Various methods are available to achieve correct relay co-ordination on a system; by means of time alone, current alone or a combination of both time and current. Grading by means of current is only possible where there is an appreciable difference in fault level between the two relay locations. Grading by time is used by some utilities but can often lead to excessive fault clearance times at or near source substations where the fault level is highest. For these reasons the most commonly applied characteristic in coordinating overcurrent relays is the
IDMT type.
The inverse time-delayed characteristics indicated above comply with the following formulae:
IEC/UK/FR curves: t
=
TMS
⋅ k
(
G
(
Gs
)
α −
P
+ c ) ;
IEEE/US curves: t
=
TD
⋅ k
(
G
(
Gs
)
α −
P
+ c ) ; where: t = Operating time in [s] k, P, c = Constant
G = Measured current in [A]
TMS = Time multiplier setting for IEC curves
TD = Time dial setting for IEEE curves
Gs
α
= Current threshold setting [A]
= Constant
Type of Curve according to IEC60255-151 std definition
IEC Standard Inverse Time (SI)
IEC Very Inverse Time (VI)
IEC Extremely Inverse Time (EI)
IEC Long Time Inverse (LTI)
FR Short Time Inverse (STI)
UK Rectifier (Rect)
IEEE Moderately Inverse Time (MI)
IEEE Very Inverse Time (VI)
IEEE Extremely Inverse Time (EI)
US Time Inverse (CO8)
US Short Time Inverse (CO2 P20)
US Short Time Inverse (CO2 P40)
Standard
IEC/A
IEC/B
IEC/C
IEC
FR
UK
IEEE
(IEC/D)
IEEE
(IEC/E)
IEEE
(IEC/F)
US
US
US k
0.14
13.5
80
120
0.05
45900
0.0515
19.61
28.2 c
0
0
0
0
0
0
0.114
0.491
0.1217
5.95 0.18
0.02394 0.01694
0.16758 0.11858
α
0.02
1
2
1
0.04
5.6
0.02
2
2
2
0.02
0.02
P
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Operation
MiCOM P116
BNP (EDF)
RI
EDF 1000
-4.2373
0.655
0
P116_EN_OP_A11 v2.7
2
-1
(OP) 5-9
1
1.43644
A time multiplier setting TMS is used to adjust the operating time of IEC & UK IDMT curves.
A time multiplier setting TD is used to adjust the operating time of IEEE or US IDMT curves.
Note:
1. For (CO2 P20), TD is defined like in MiCOM P20 series
2. For (CO2 P40), TD is defined like in MiCOM P40 series
The difference between above two characteristics is in definition of TD setting value only.
Standard Inverse IEC Very Inverse IEC
100 100
OP
10
10
1
A
B
C
1
0.1
D
E
0.1
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Multiples of pickup setting: I/Is
E
E: TMS=0.05
B: TMS=1
D: TMS=0.2
A: TMS=2
C: TMS=0.5
0.01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Multiples of pickup setting: I/Is
E: TMS=0.05
B: TMS=1
D: TMS=0.2
A: TMS=2
C: TMS=0.5
A
B
C
D
OP
P116_EN_OP_A11 v2.7
(OP) 5-10
Extremely Inverse IEC
100
100
RI Inverse Time
Operation
MiCOM P116
10
10
1
0.1
0.01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
E
Multiples of pickup setting: I/Is
E: TMS=0.05
B: TMS=1
D: TMS=0.2
A: TMS=2
C: TMS=0.5
Long Time Inverse UK
1000
A
B
C
D
1
D
0.1
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Multiples of pickup setting: I/Is
E
E: TMS=0.05
B: TMS=1
D: TMS=0.2
A: TMS=2
C: TMS=0.5
Short Time Inverse
100
A
B
C
10
100
A
B
C
D
1
10
1
0.1
A
B
C
D
0.1
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Multiples of pickup setting: I/Is
E: TMS=0.05
B: TMS=1
D: TMS=0.2
A: TMS=2
C: TMS=0.5
E
0.01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Multiples of pickup setting: I/Is
E: TMS=0.05
B: TMS=1
D: TMS=0.2
A: TMS=2
C: TMS=0.5
E
Operation
MiCOM P116
100
Rectifier
100
P116_EN_OP_A11 v2.7
(OP) 5-11
Moderately Inverse IEEE
10
10
1
0.1
1
0.1
E D C B A
0.01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Multiples of pickup setting: I/Is
E: TMS=0.05
B: TMS=1
D: TMS=0.2
A: TMS=2
C: TMS=0.5
Very Inverse IEEE
100
0.01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Multiples of pickup setting: I/Is
E: TD=0.05
B: TD=1
D: TD=0.2
A: TD=2
C: TD=0.5
Extremely Inverse IEEE
100
A
B
C
D
E
OP
10
10
1
0.1
E
0.01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Multiples of pickup setting: I/Is
E: TD=0.05
B: TD=1
D: TD=0.2
A: TD=2
C: TD=0.5
A
B
C
D
1
0.1
0.01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011121314151617181920
E
Multiples of pickup setting: I/Is
E: TD=0.05
B: TD=1
D: TD=0.2
A: TD=2
C: TD=0.5
A
B
C
D
P116_EN_OP_A11 v2.7
(OP) 5-12
Short Time Inverse (CO2) US
100
100
Inverse (CO8) US
Operation
MiCOM P116
OP
10
10
1
A
B
C
D
1
0.1
A
B
C
D
0.1
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Multiples of pickup setting: I/Is
E: TD=0.05
B: TD=1
D: TD=0.2
A: TD=2
C: TD=0.5
E 0.01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
E
Multiples of pickup setting: I/Is
E: TD=0.05
B: TD=1
D: TD=0.2
A: TD=2
C: TD=0.5
RXIDG Curves
RXIDG curves can be selected on P116 with medium earth current sensitivity (corresponding to Cortec model number P116xxx2xxxxxxxxxx)
The first earth thresholds can be selected with dedicated RXIDG curves.
The curves available follow the formula: t = 5.8 – 1.35 * ln ( 1/ (k * Gs/G))
Where: t = tripping time k = coefficient (from 0.3 to 1, by steps of 0.01)
Gs = value of the programmed threshold (Pick-up value)
G = value of measured current
In order to be compliant with the Netmanagement specifications the relay must be used with:
•
An earth current range 0.01 Ion to 8 Ion
•
A rated current wiring 1A
•
A core balanced CT with a ratio 25/1.
Operation
MiCOM P116
2.1.2 Timer Hold Facility
P116_EN_OP_A11 v2.7
(OP) 5-13
The first two stages of overcurrent protection in the P116 relay are provided with a timer hold facility, which may either be set to zero or to a definite time value. Setting of the timer to zero means that the overcurrent timer for that stage will reset instantaneously once the current falls below 95% of the current setting. Setting of the hold timer to a value other than zero, delays the resetting of the protection element timers for this period. When the reset time of the overcurrent relay is instantaneous, the relay will be repeatedly reset and not be able to trip until the fault becomes permanent. By using the Timer Hold facility the relay will integrate the fault current pulses, thereby reducing fault clearance time.
The timer hold facility can be found for the first and second overcurrent stages as settings
Ι
>
DMT tRESET" and "
Ι
>> DMT tRESET ", respectively. Note that this cell is not visible for the
IEC/IEEE/US curves if an inverse time reset characteristic has been selected ( SETTING
GROUP x/PROTECTION Gx/ PHASE O/C G1(G2)/
I
> (
I
>>) Reset Delay Type 1:IDMT setting), as the reset time is then determined by the programmed time dial setting.
Reset IDMT Characteristic
IEEE/US/IEC
The IEEE/US/IEC curves may have an inverse time reset characteristic (
I
> (
I
>>) Reset
Delay Type 1: IDMT setting) or instantaneous reset (
I
> (
I
>>) Reset Delay Type 0:DMT setting). If IDMT reset is selected (
I
> (
I
>>) Reset Delay Type 1: IDMT setting) then the following menu will be available:
Ι
> (
I
>>) RTD/RTMS RESET . The following equation can be used to calculate the inverse reset time for IEEE/US/IEC curves:
IEC and UK and FR: reset time
=
RTMS
⋅
1
− tr
G
(
Gs
) p
IEEE and US: reset time
=
RTD
⋅ tr
1
−
G
(
Gs
) p where:
RTD = Time dial setting for IEEE/US curves
RTMS = A time multiplier setting for IEC curves tr
α
=
M =
Constant (see table below)
= Constant (see table below)
Ι
/
Ι s
Note: To be in line with IEEE/US/IEC the RTMS (RTD) value should be equal to the TMS (TD) value. The setting for RTMS or RTD is given to adjust the reset characteristic to specific applications. Typically RTMS
= TMS and RTD = TD.
Type of Curve
IEC Standard Inverse Time (SI)
IEC Very Inverse Time (VI)
IEC Extremely Inverse Time (EI)
IEC Long Time Inverse (LTI)
FR Short Time Inverse (STI)
UK Rectifier (Rect)
IEEE Moderately Inverse Time (MI)
Standard
IEC/A
IEC/B
IEC/C
IEC
FR
UK
IEEE (IEC/D) tr
8.2
50.92
44.1
40.62
0
0
4.850 p
6.45
2.4
3.03
0.4
0
0
2
OP
OP
P116_EN_OP_A11 v2.7
(OP) 5-14
IEEE Very Inverse Time (VI)
IEEE Extremely Inverse Time (EI)
Time Inverse (CO8)
Short Time Inverse (CO2_P20)
Short Time Inverse (CO2_P40)
BNP EDF
RXIDG
IEEE (IEC/E)
IEEE (IEC/F)
US
US
US
BNP EDF
RXIDG
Note:
1. For CO2_P20, RTD is defined like in MiCOM P20 series
2. For CO2_P40, RTD is defined like in MiCOM P40 series
2.2
2.2.1
21.600
29.100
5.950
0.323
2.261
0
0
Operation
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
MiCOM P116
The difference between above two characteristics is in definition of TD setting value only.
SOTF: Switch On To Fault (Model A)
General
In some feeder applications, fast tripping may be required if a fault is still present on the feeder after the reclosure of the circuit breaker (Close on to fault).
In the case of a CB being manually closed, a switch on to an existing fault may occur. This situation is particularly critical because the overcurrent protection element would not clear the fault until the set time-delay has elapsed. It is then desirable to clear the fault as fast as possible.
Enabling and setting the SOTF (Switch On To Fault) function can be done under the
SETTING GROUP x/PROTECTION Gx/SOTF?
submenu.
Crossing the SOTF Threshold will initiate the SOTF function. The tSOTF time-delay will then be started.
If the SOTF element is set to Trip , Trip-Inrush Bl or Trip-Latch , it means that it is linked to the Protect.Trip
and Prot.Trip pulse functions (see LED and Output configuration).
If the SOTF element is set to Alarm , it means that it is linked to the Alarm function (see LED and Output configuration).
If Trip-Inrush Bl is selected, the SOTF element is blocked via the Inrush Blocking function
(refer to Inrush Blocking section).
2.2.2
If Trip-Latch is selected, the SOTF element will remain high after a trip, until it is reset via a binary input, the HMI or a remote RESET command.
SOTF Description
The following signals can activate the SOTF function:
manual closing ordered using the HMI (menu or function Close key)
command generated by a digital input labelled Manual Close ,
front communication Closing command,
rear communication Closing command,
The diagram below illustrates this functionality.
Operation
MiCOM P116
Inrush detection (I2h/I1h)
SOTF? 3: Trip-Inrush Bl
Block.tSOTF Input
&
Rear Com order
Close key order
HMI order
Manual Close Input
SOTF? 0: disabled
Start SOTF Threshold
OR
52 Unblock.
SOTF Time
Pulse
(0-200s)
GLOBAL SETTINGS/
CIRCUIT BREAKER/
&
&
SOTF? 2: Alarm
T
TIMER
0 tSOTF>
Time Delay
(0-200s)
SETTING GROUP 1(2)
/PROTECTION/
[50/51] SOTF G1(G2)
P116_EN_OP_A11 v2.7
(OP) 5-15
&
Alarm
Alarm Recorder tSOTF
Start SOTF
&
INSTANTENOUS
Recorder
RESET LEDs
&
OR
SOTF? 4: Trip-Latch
SOTF? 1: Trip
SOTF? 3: Trip-Inrush Bl
OR
&
Protect. Trip
Protect. Trip pulse
Fault Recorder
P0921ENb
Figure 2: Switch on to fault logic diagram
When at least one of the signals listed above has been detected, a timer starts and lasts until
52 Unblock.SOTF Time (GLOBAL SETTINGS/CIRCUIT BREAKER submenu) elapses.
Once the above timer has elapsed and the SOTF thresholds have been crossed, the tSOTF settable time-delay starts. This settable time-delay is particularly useful in applications where fault selectivity is required.
This time-delay is also useful in cases where serious transients may be present, where the three poles of the CB do not all close at the same time and in cases where the CB may not close instantaneously.
“tSOTF” can also be considered as a trip time-delay that substitutes itself to the trip timedelay associated with the crossed threshold so that the tripping time is accelerated.
If the SOTF stage is reset before the settable time-delay tSOTF elapses, the SOTF function is reset.
OP
OP
P116_EN_OP_A11 v2.7
(OP) 5-16
2.3 Earth Fault Protection
Operation
MiCOM P116
The Earth fault element operates from a measured earth fault current quantity (A7-A8 or
A9-A10).
The first earth fault stage has time-delayed characteristics which are selectable between inverse definite minimum time (IDMT) and definite time (DMT). The second stage has a definite time characteristic only.
If an earth fault stage (
I
N_1 stage?
,
I
N_2 stage?
or
I
N_3 stage?
menu) is set to Trip ,
Trip-Inrush Bl or Trip-Latch it means that that stage is linked to the Protect.Trip
and
Prot.Trip pulse functions (see LED and Output configuration).
If an earth fault stage (
I
N_1 stage?
,
I
N_2 stage?
or
I
N_3 stage?
menu) is set to Alarm , it means that that stage is linked to the Alarm function (see LED and Output configuration).
If Trip-Inrush Bl is selected, the earth fault stage is blocked via the Inrush Blocking function (refer to Inrush Blocking chapter).
If Trip-Latch is selected, the earth fault stage will remain after a trip, until it is reset via a binary input, the HMI or a remote RESET command.
Inrush detection (I2h/I1h)
IN_1 stage ?
3: Trip-Inrush Bl
Block.tIN_1 Input
&
IN_1 stage? 2: Alarm
&
Alarm
&
[79] Inhib.Trip tIN_1
T
TIMER
0 tIN_1 Time Delay
DMT/IDMT with DMT or IDMT
RESET
SETTING GROUP 1(2)
/PROTECTION/
[50/51N] E/GND FAULT G1
Alarm Recorder tIN_1
IN_1 stage? 0: disabled
Start IN_1 Threshold
CBF: Block IN>
&
&
Start IN_1
&
INSTANTENOUS
Recorder
RESET LEDs
IN_1 stage? 4: Trip-Latch
IN_1 stage? 1: Trip
IN_1 stage? 3: Trip-Inrush Bl
&
OR
OR
&
Protect. Trip
Protect. Trip pulse
Fault Recorder
-
-
-
-
P0922ENb
Figure 3: Earth Fault protection logic diagram for
I
N_1. For
I
N_2, the logic diagram is the same but without the IDMT characteristics
The types of characteristics are the same as for phase protection elements:
-
-
IEC Standard Inverse Time (SI)
IEC Very Inverse Time (VI)
IEC Extremely Inverse Time (EI)
IEC Long Time Inverse (LTI)
FR Short Time Inverse (STI)
UK Rectifier (Rect)
Operation
MiCOM P116
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
P116_EN_OP_A11 v2.7
RI: Electromechanical Inverse
IEEE Moderately Inverse Time (MI)
IEEE Very Inverse Time (VI)
IEEE Extremely Inverse Time (EI)
US Short Time Inverse; TD setting in line with MiCOM P20 (CO2_P20)
US Short Time Inverse; TD setting in line with MiCOM P40 (CO2_P40)
US CO8: Time Inverse
(OP) 5-17
-
-
BNP EDF
RXIDG
The mathematical formulae and curves for the twelve Inverse Time characteristics available with the P116 are presented in section 2.1 of this chapter .
The IEEE/US/IEC curves may have an inverse time reset characteristic, DMT delayed or instantaneous reset (refer to section 2.1 of this chapter)
Depending on the connection of the e/f CT to the current terminals, the e/f current can supply the P116 (terminals A7 and A8) or not supply the P116 (terminals A9 and A10) (refer to section 8 of the Installation chapter of this manual).
OP
OP
P116_EN_OP_A11 v2.7
(OP) 5-18
2.4 Undercurrent Protection (Model A)
Operation
MiCOM P116
In motor applications undercurrent thresholds must sometimes be set below the no load current level (for example: pump application).
Undercurrent stage
I
< can be set to Alarm , Trip , Trip-Inrush Bl , Trip-Latch , Alarm inhib
52 or Trip inhib 52 .
If the
I
< protection element is set to Trip , Trip-Inrush Bl , Trip-Latch or Trip inhib 52 , it means that that element is linked to the Protect.Trip
and Prot.Trip pulse functions (see
LED and Output configuration).
If the
I
< protection element is set to Alarm , it means that that element is linked to the Alarm function (see LED and Output configuration).
If Trip-Inrush Bl is selected, the undercurrent element is blocked via the Inrush Blocking function (refer to Inrush Blocking section).
If Trip-Latch is selected, the undercurrent element will remain high after a trip, until it is reset via a binary input, the HMI or a remote RESET command.
The undercurrent element can be blocked via the CB open status ( CB status 52B logic input) if
I
< is set to Alarm inhib 52 or Trip Inhib 52 .
I<? 6: Alarm-Inhib 52A
I<? 2: Alarm
OR
Inrush detection (I2h/I1h)
I<? 3: Trip-Inrush Bl
Block.tI< Input
I<? 6: Alarm-Inhib 52A
I<? 5: Trip-Inhib 52A
52A Input
OR
&
&
&
T
TIMER
0 tI< Time Delay
DMT
SETTING GROUP 1(2)
/PROTECTION/
[37] UNDERCURRENT G1
&
Alarm
Alarm Recorder tI<
I<? 0: disabled
Start I< Threshold
&
Start I<
&
INSTANTENOUS
Recorder
RESET LEDs OR
&
I<? 4: Trip-Latch
I<? 1: Trip
I<? 3: Trip-Inrush Bl
I<? 5: Trip-Inhib 52A
OR
&
Protect. Trip
Protect. Trip pulse
Fault Recorder
P0923ENb
Figure 4: Undercurrent protection logic
Operation
MiCOM P116
2.5 Negative Sequence Overcurrent Protection (Model A)
P116_EN_OP_A11 v2.7
(OP) 5-19
In traditional phase overcurrent protection schemes, overcurrent thresholds must be set above the maximum load current levels. This limits the sensitivity of the relay. Most protection schemes also use an earth fault element based on residual current, which improves sensitivity for earth faults. However, it can happen that some faults occur and stay undetected by such schemes.
Any unbalanced fault condition will produce negative sequence current. Thus, a negative phase sequence overcurrent element can detect both phase-to-phase and phase-to-earth faults.
The negative phase sequence overcurrent element included in the P116 relays provides one stage non-directional overcurrent protection with independent time-delay characteristics.
These characteristics are selectable between inverse definite minimum time (IDMT) and definite time (DT). The inverse time-delayed characteristics support both IEC and IEEE curves. Please refer to section 2.1 for a detailed description.
If the
I
2> protection element is set to Trip , Trip-Inrush Bl or Trip-Latch , it means that that element is linked to the Protect.Trip
and Prot.Trip pulse functions (see LED and Output configuration).
If the
I
2> protection element is set to Alarm , it means that that element is linked to the
Alarm function (see LED and Output configuration).
If Trip-Inrush Bl is selected, the negative sequence overcurrent element is blocked via the
Inrush Blocking function (refer to Inrush Blocking section).
If Trip-Latch is selected, the negative sequence overcurrent element will remain high after a trip, until it is reset via a binary input, the HMI or a remote RESET command.
OP
Alarm
Is2>? 2: Alarm
&
Inrush detection (I2h/I1h)
Is2>? 3: Trip-Inrush Bl
Block.tIs2> Input
Is2>? 0: disabled
Start Is2> Threshold
&
&
&
T
TIMER
0 tIs2> Time Delay
DMT/IDMT with DMT or IDMT
RESET
SETTING GROUP 1(2)
/PROTECTION/
[46] NEGATIVE SEQ.O/C G1(2)
Alarm Recorder tIs2>
Start Is2>
&
INSTANTENOUS
Recorder
RESET LEDs
&
OR
Is2>? 4: Trip-Latch
Is2>? 1: Trip
Is2>? 3: Trip-Inrush Bl
OR
Figure 5: Negative sequence overcurrent protection logic
&
Protect. Trip
Protect. Trip pulse
Fault Recorder
P0924ENb
OP
P116_EN_OP_A11 v2.7
(OP) 5-20
2.6 Broken Conductor Detection (Model A)
Operation
MiCOM P116
The relay incorporates an element that measures the ratio of negative to positive phase sequence current (
I
2
/
I
1
). This will be affected to a lesser extent than the measurement of negative sequence current alone, since the ratio is approximately constant with variations in load current. Hence, a more sensitive setting may be achieved. The logic diagram is as shown below. The ratio of
I
2
/
I
1
is calculated and compared with the Ratio
I
2/
I
1 threshold. If it exceeds the threshold then the time-delay tBCond is initiated. The Brkn Cond I< block signal is used to disable Broken Conductor function if the max current value from three phases is too low. The Brkn Cond I< block undercurrent threshold is settable ( GLOBAL
SETTINGS/O/C ADVANCED/[46BC] Brkn.Cond I< Block.
). Factory setting value is 0.1
I n.
Broken Cond.? 2: Alarm
Inrush detection (I2h/I1h)
Broken Cond.? 3: Trip-Inrush Bl
Block.t Brkn Cond Input
(IA & IB & IC) < (Brkn Cond I< Block)
Broken Cond.? 0: disabled
Start Ratio Is2/Is2 Threshold
&
&
&
T
TIMER
0 tBCond> Time Delay
DMT
SETTING GROUP 1(2)
/PROTECTION/
[BROKEN CONDUCTOR G1(2)
&
Alarm
Alarm Recorder tBrkn Cond.
Start Brkn Cond
&
INSTANTENOUS
Recorder
RESET LEDs OR
Broken Cond.? 4: Trip-Latch
Broken Cond.? 1: Trip
Broken Cond.? 3: Trip-Inrush Bl
&
OR
&
Protect. Trip
Protect. Trip pulse
Fault Recorder
P0925ENb
Figure 6: Broken conductor protection logic
The Broken Conductor function can be set to: Trip , Trip-Inrush Bl , Trip-Latch or Alarm .
If the Broken Conductor element is set to Trip , Trip-Inrush Bl or Trip-Latch , it means that it is linked to the Protect.Trip
and Prot.Trip pulse functions (see LED and Output configuration).
If the Broken Conductor element is set to Alarm , it means that it is linked to the Alarm function (see LED and Output configuration).
If Trip-Inrush Bl is selected, the
I
2/
I
1 threshold is blocked via the Inrush Blocking function
(refer to Inrush Blocking section).
If Trip-Latch is selected, the Broken Conductor element will remain high after a trip, until it is reset via a binary input, the HMI or a remote RESET command.
Operation
MiCOM P116
2.7 Thermal Overload Protection
P116_EN_OP_A11 v2.7
(OP) 5-21
The relay incorporates a current-based thermal replica, using r.m.s. load current to model heating and cooling of the protected plant. The element can be set with both alarm and trip stages.
The heat generated within an item of plant, such as a cable or a transformer, is the resistive loss (
I 2
R x t). Thus, heating is directly proportional to current squared. The thermal time characteristic used in the relay is therefore based on current squared, integrated over time.
The relay automatically uses the largest phase current for input to the thermal model.
The equipment is designed to operate continuously at a temperature corresponding to its full load rating, where the generated heat is balanced by heat dissipated through radiation, etc.
Over-temperature conditions therefore occur when currents in excess of the rating are allowed to flow for a period of time. It can be shown that temperatures during heating follow exponential time constants and a similar exponential decrease of temperature occurs during cooling.
This characteristic is used to protect cables, dry type transformers (e.g. type AN), and capacitor banks.
The thermal time characteristic is given by: t Trip
=
Te In
K² -
θ p
K ²
− θ t rip
Where: t Trip = Tripping time (in seconds)
T e
= Thermal time constant of the equipment to be protected (in seconds)
K = Thermal overload equal to
I eq
1 .
05
⋅
I therm
I eq
I
P
I therm
θ
P
θ alarm
θ trip
= Equivalent current corresponding to the R.M.S. value of the largest phase
current
= Steady state pre-loading current before application of the overload
= Setting value. It is full load current rating
= Steady state pre-loading thermal state before application of the overload
= Initial thermal state. If the initial thermal state = 30% then
= Trip thermal state. If the trip thermal state is set at 100%, then
θ trip = 1
θ
=0.3
The tripping time varies according to the load current carried before application of the overload, i.e. whether the overload was applied from ' hot ” or “ cold ”.
The parameter settings are available in the various menus. The calculation of the thermal state is given by the following formula:
Θ
τ +
1
=
1 .
05
⋅
I eq
I therm
²
1
− e Te t
+ Θ
τ e Te t
θ
is calculated every 10 ms.
θ
is memorized with time stamp every 500 ms. After recovering of P116 power supply, actual
θ
is recalculated based on
θ
memorized value, time stamp and actual time. For recalculation time constant for cooling (Tr ) is used.
OP
OP
P116_EN_OP_A11 v2.7 Operation
(OP) 5-22 MiCOM P116
If all the phase currents are above 0.1 x
I therm
the value of Tr (time constant for cooling) is used instead of Te (time constant for heating):
Θ
τ +
1
=
1 .
05
I
⋅ eq
I therm
²
1
− e
Tr t
+ Θ
τ e
Tr t
In a typical application (transformer, cable, ...) Tr should be equal to Te. Different setting values of Te and Tr are only used in motor applications.
Where θ is the thermal state and is θp the pre-fault thermal state.
Note: A current of 105%
Ι s (k
Ι
FLC
) has to be applied for several time constants to cause a thermal state measurement of 100%.
HMI Reset Theta val.
OR
Reset Theta val. Input
Alarm
IA
IB
IC
Block. Itherm Input
MAX
Thermal Characteristic
SETTING GROUP 1(2)
/PROTECTION/
[49] THERM OVERLOAD G1(2)
Theta Trip
Threshold
Alarm Recorder
Therm OL? 1: enabled
Theta
Alarm
Threshold
Protect. Trip
Theta Trip/Reset
Ratio
&
OR
Protect. Trip pulse
Fault Recorder
P0926ENb
Figure 7: Thermal overload protection logic
The functional block diagram for the thermal overload protection is shown in Figure 7
The magnitudes of the three phase currents are compared and the largest magnitude selected as the input to the thermal overload function. If this current exceeds the thermal trip threshold setting a start condition is asserted.
The Thermal Trip signal remains high until the thermal state drops below the thermal reset threshold.
The thermal reset threshold is settable using the Theta Trip/Reset Ratio value.
The Thermal Reset Ratio is calculated:
Thermal Reset Threshold = Theta Trip/Reset Ratio x Theta Trip
For Theta Trip/Reset Ratio = 90% (0.9) and Theta Trip =120%:
Thermal Reset Threshold = 0.9 x 120%=108%
If the Thermal State is above the Theta Trip threshold and then drops, the Thermal Trip signal will reset when the Thermal State drops below the Thermal Reset Threshold (see above).
If Blocking Ithermal Input is in high state, for calculation Thermal Characteristic uses current value 0xIn instead of measured value.
Thermal protection also provides an indication of the thermal state in the MEASUREMENTS column of the relay. The thermal state can be reset by either an opto-input (if assigned to this function using the programmable scheme logic) or the relay menu.
Operation P116_EN_OP_A11 v2.7
MiCOM P116 (OP) 5-23
The reset function in the menu is also found in the MEASUREMENTS column with the thermal state menu.
2.8 Circuit Breaker Failure Function (CB Fail)
The circuit breaker failure protection function incorporates one timer allowing configuration for the following scenario: upon any protection trip, CB Fail Timer tBF is started, and normally reset when the circuit breaker opens to isolate the fault. If breaker opening is not detected, CB Fail Timer tBF times out and closes an output contact assigned to tCBF . This contact is used to backtrip upstream switchgear, generally tripping all infeeds connected to the same busbar section.
The complete breaker fail logic is illustrated in Figure 8.
CBF? 0: Disabled
Block.tCB Fail Input
50/51, 46, 46BC,
49 Trip
50N/51N Trip
&
& Alarm
Start A I< Threshold
Start B I< Threshold
Start C I< Threshold
Start IN< Threshold
&
&
&
OR
&
CBF? 2: Alarm
T
TIMER
0
CB Fail Time tBF DMT
SETTING GROUP
1(2)
/PROTECTION/
[50BF] CB Fail G1(2)
&
Alarm Recorder
CB Fail
&
Block I>
&
AUX n Trip
Strt tBF Input
CBF: Block I>? Yes
CBF: Block IN>? Yes
CBF? 1: Retrip
&
&
Block IN>
Protect. Trip
Protect. Trip pulse
Fault Recorder
P0927ENb
Figure 8: Circuit Breaker Failure protection logic
The CBF element CB Fail Timer tBF operates for trips triggered by protection elements within the relay or via an external protection device (binary input). The latter is achieved by assigning one of the relay opto-isolated inputs to AUX n set for tripping or Strt tBF (depends on the application).
When CBF is triggered by a current-based protection element included in the P116, it is reset by an undercurrent element (
I
<Threshold CBF or
I
N< Threshold CBF ) only.
When it is triggered via the AUX n input, CBF is reset by an undercurrent element.
When it is triggered via the Strt tBF input, CBF is reset by the low state of this input only.
The Block
I
>?
and Block
I
N>?
settings are used to cancel starts issued by the overcurrent and earth fault elements, respectively, following a breaker fail time out. The start is cancelled when the cell is set to Yes.
If the Retrip option is selected for the CB Fail function, it means that it is linked to the
Protect.Trip
and Prot.Trip pulse functions (see LED and Output configuration).
If CB Fail is set to Alarm , any outputs and LEDs assigned to the Alarm or tCBF function are energized.
If CB Fail is not set to Disabled , any outputs and LEDs assigned to the tCBF function are energized.
OP
OP
P116_EN_OP_A11 v2.7
(OP) 5-24
2.9 Auxiliary Timers (Model A)
Operation
MiCOM P116
Four auxiliary timers, tAux1, tAux2, tAux3 and tAux4, are available and associated with logic inputs Aux1, Aux2, Aux3 and Aux4 (refer to the SETTING GROUP x/INPUTS
CONFIGURATION menu). When these inputs are energized, the associated timers start and, when the set time has elapsed, the associated LEDs ( SETTING GROUP 1(2)/LEDs
CONFIGURATION menu) are lit or/and the associated output relays close (refer to the
SETTING GROUP 1(2)/OUTPUT RELAYS CONFIGURATION menu). Time-delays can be independently set from 0 ms to 600 s.
Each auxiliary timer can be set independently to:
Alarm: Alarm signal
Trip : Protection Trip signal
Trip-Inrush Bl : Protection Trip signal with inrush blocking
Trip-Latch: Protection Trip signal latched until it is reset via a binary input ( Reset Ltch
Sign ), the HMI or a remote reset command
Load Shedding : The high state of an AUX logic input starts the corresponding tAUX timer at the expiry of which it is associated with the Trip CB Order and tAUX outputs
(refer to the SETTING GROUP 1(2)/OUTPUT RELAYS CONFIGURATION menu).
Additionally this state ( Load Shedding state ) is stored in memory. The stored value is reset by any protection trip, a close signal or the CB closed status ( CB status 52A logic input) (refer to chapter P116/EN AP – Application).
AR after LS Hi: If the Load Shedding state is stored, the high state of the logic input triggers the tAUX timer. When the set value has elapsed the close command is executed
(Close CB order output) (refer to chapter P116/EN AP – Application).
AR after LS Lo: If the Load Shedding state is stored, the low state of the logic input triggers the tAUX timer. When the set value has elapsed the close command is executed
(Close CB order output) (refer to chapter P116/EN AP – Application).
In the SETTING GROUP x/INPUTS CONFIGURATION menu AUX5 and/or AUX6 can be mapped to inputs. These input functions have no timers (instantaneous action). They can be used as bridges between inputs and LEDs or inputs and outputs. It is not possible to link this input function to a Trip or Alarm signal. n= 1, 2, 3, 4
AUXn? 2: Alarm
Inrush detection (I2h/I1h)
AUXn? 3: Trip-Inrush Bl
Block.AUXn Input
&
&
T
TIMER
0 tAUXn Time Delay
DMT
SETTING GROUP 1(2)
/PROTECTION/
AUX TIMERS G1(2)
&
Alarm
Alarm Recorder tAUXn
AUXn? 0: disabled
&
AUXn Input
AUXn
&
INSTANTENOUS
Recorder
RESET LEDs &
OR
&
Protect. Trip
Protect. Trip pulse
Fault Recorder
AUXn? 4: Trip-Latch
AUXn? 1: Trip
AUXn? 3: Trip-Inrush Bl
OR
P0928ENb
Figure 9: AUX Timer Logic (AUX1-AUX4) (for Alarm, Trip, Trip-Inrush BL, Trip-Latch options)
Operation
MiCOM P116
2.10 Logic Selectivity (Model A)
P116_EN_OP_A11 v2.7
(OP) 5-25
Section 2.10 describes the use of non-cascade protection schemes that make use of start contacts from downstream relays connected to block operation of upstream relays. In the case of Logic Selectivity (Sel), the start contacts are used to raise the time-delays of upstream relays, instead of blocking them. This provides an alternative approach to achieving non-cascade types of overcurrent scheme. This may be more familiar to some utilities than the blocked overcurrent arrangement. The Logic Selectivity function provides the ability to temporarily increase the time-delay settings of the second and third stages of phase overcurrent and measured earth fault protection elements.
Two independent Logic Selectivity functions are available: Sel1 and/or Sel2 .
This logic is initiated by energization of the appropriate binary input assigned to Sel1 (Sel2)
To allow time for a start contact to initiate a change of setting, the time settings of the second and third stages should include a nominal delay.
This function acts upon the following protection functions:
- Phase overcurrent (2 nd
and/or 3 rd
stages)
- E arth fault (2 nd
and/or 3 rd
stages)
The logic diagram for the selective overcurrent function is shown for phase A of the third overcurrent stage. The principle of operation is identical for the 3-phase phase overcurrent element, stages 2 and 3, and the earth fault element, stages 2 and 3. When the selective logic function is enabled, the action of the blocking input is as follows:
1. No block applied
In the event of a fault condition that continuously asserts the start output, the function will assert a trip signal after the normal time-delay t
I
>>> has elapsed.
2. Logic input block applied
In the event of a fault condition that continuously asserts the start output, the function will assert a trip signal after the selective logic time-delay tSelx has elapsed.
OP
I>>>
Start I>>> Threshold
TIMER tI>>> Time Delay
DMT
SETTING GROUP 1(2)
/PROTECTION/
{50/51] PHASE O/C G1(2)
TIMER tSel1 Time Delay
DMT
SETTING GROUP 1(2)
/PROTECTION/
LOGIC SELECT. G1(2)
&
&
tI>>>
Trip signal
SEL1 tI>>> Input
Sel1? 1: enabled
&
P0929ENb
Figure 10: Selective Logic scheme for the
I
>>> protection element
OP
P116_EN_OP_A11 v2.7
(OP) 5-26
2.11 Cold Load Pick Up (Model A)
Operation
MiCOM P116
The Cold Load Pick-up feature allows selected settings of MiCOM P116 relays to be changed to react to temporary overload conditions that may occur during cold starts. This condition may happen by switching on large heating loads after a sufficient cooling period, or loads that draw high initial starting currents.
When a feeder is energized, the current levels that flow for a period of time following energizing may differ greatly from the normal load levels. Consequently, overcurrent settings that have been applied to give short circuit protection may not be suitable during this period.
This function acts upon the following protection functions:
-
Phase overcurrent (1 st
, 2 nd
and 3 rd
stages)
-
-
Earth fault (1 st
, 2 nd
Broken Conductor
and 3
I
2/
I rd
stages)
1 element
-
Thermal Overload
I therm
setting
- Negative sequence overcurrent
The Cold Load Pick-up (CLP) logic raises (x Level%) the settings of selected stages for a set duration (tCL). This allows the protection settings to be set closer to the load profile. Cold load pick-up cannot restart until the end of tCL duration. The CLP logic provides stability, without compromising protection performance during starting.
The CLP can be started by a digital logic Input Cold Load PU ( Cold Load PU? 1: Cur+Input or Cold Load PU? 2: Input ) which can be assigned to 52a CB status or by current stages logic ( Cold Load PU? 1: Cur+Input ). If the Cold Load PU logic has to be triggered by current criteria only, Cold Load PU Input function must not be configured to any digital input. If this function is configured to selected input, both criteria will work in parallel way.
But the current criteria reset will be blocked if the Cold Load PU Input will be in the high state. So if Cold Load PU Input is in the high state (CB is closed) even if the current is below 10% In tCL timer will counts pulse time (P116 works on the Cold Load PU values).
Typically Cold Load PU Binary Input is wired to 52A CB status ( Cold Load PU? 2: Input )
MAX
IA, IB, IC
& &
I> setting value
SETTING GROUP 1(2)
/PROTECTION/
[50/51] PHASE O/C G1(2)
Cold Load PU Input
Cold Load PU? 2:Input
Cold Load PU? 1:Cur.+Input
OR
& tCL Reset via Input tCL
Pulse
SETTING GROUP
1(2)
/PROTECTION/
COLD LOAD PU G1
&
(I> setting value {see above}) x
(Cold Load PU Level {
SETTING GROUP
1(2)/PROTECTION / COLD LOAD PU G1(2))}
&
T
TIMER
0
Current detection of CLPU
I< 5% In
10s
Time Delay
I> 10% In
&
OR
&
&
Start I> Threshold
P0930ENc
Figure 11: Cold Load Pick Up scheme for the
I
> protection element
Operation
MiCOM P116
2.12 Auto-reclose (Model A)
P116_EN_OP_A11 v2.7
(OP) 5-27
2.12.1 Auto-reclose Enabling
Note: If the auxiliary supply is lost during an auto-reclose cycle, the autoreclose function is totally disabled.
The auto-reclose function is enabled in the SETTING GROUP x/PROTECTION Gx/[79]
AUTORECLOSE Gx menu. The current state of the auto-reclose function is shown in the default Autoreclose cell of the menu:
[79]: Ready
CTRL: no operation
The first line informs about the current state of the auto-reclose function. The following can be displayed:
[79] Ready – The auto-reclose function is unblocked and ready to operate.
[79] In progress – An auto-reclose cycle is in progress.
[79] Tempor.Block
. – The auto-reclose function is temporary blocked after Closing of
CB (from RS485, Front Panel or via configured Binary Input) during Inhibit Time tI on
Close ( GLOBAL SETTINGS/[79] ADVANCED SETTINGS/Inhibit Time tI on Close )
[79]: Lockout – The auto-reclose function is internally blocked up to reset signalling
(Input assigned to Reset Latched Signals , C clear key on the front panel, Reset
Latched Signals via RS485, closing of CB command via P116 or Unlockout command in CTRL line).
[79] Block:CTRL . – The auto-reclose function is blocked via the communication port or from P116 menu via the Auto-reclose default cell (CTRL line)
[79] Block:Input – The auto-reclose function is blocked via a binary input assigned to this effect.
[79] Disabled – The auto-reclose function is disabled in the SETTING GROUP x/PROTECTION Gx/[79] AUTORECLOSE Gx submenu
There are two menu columns in which the Auto-reclose function can be configured:
SETTING GROUP x/PROTECTION Gx/[79] AUTORECLOSE G1(2 ) – separate settings for each setting group,
GLOBAL SETTINGS/ [79] ADVANCED SETTING – common settings for all setting groups.
The Auto-reclose function of the MiCOM P116 is available only if the following conditions are verified:
•
The auxiliary contact of the CB status, 52a or 52b, must be connected to the relay.
Refer to the SETTING GROUP x/PROTECTION Gx/INPUT CONFIGURATION menu.
•
The auto-recloser is ready for operation (not disabled nor blocked). The Autoreclose default cell should display: [79]: Ready .
•
The trip output relay must be set to Prot.Trip pulse (recommended if an output contact is used) or/and Protect Trip (if an energy trip output is used) and not latched in the protection element's settings (for example
I
>? Trip-Latch ). The trip output must not be latched either.
•
The Close CB Order command must be assigned to the close CB output. The close contact output must not be latched.
•
In the SETTING GROUP x/PROTECTION Gx/[79] AUTORECLOSE Gx settings are properly configured.
menu all
OP
OP
P116_EN_OP_A11 v2.7 Operation
(OP) 5-28 MiCOM P116
In addition to [79] AUTORECLOSE Gx settings, the user will be able to fully link the autoreclose function to the protection function using the menus:
SETTING GROUPS x/PROTECTION Gx/[50/51] PHASE O/C G1 ,
SETTING GROUPS x/PROTECTION Gx/[50/51N] E/GND FAULT G1,
SETTING GROUPS x/PROTECTION Gx/AUX TIMERS Gx.
2.12.2 Logic Inputs
The auto-reclose function has four inputs that can be assigned to the auto-reclose logic.
These inputs can be mapped to opto-isolated inputs in the SETTING GROUP x/PROTECTION Gx/INPUT CONFIGURATION menu. External contacts can then be wired to these inputs and influence the auto-recloser scheme. These four logic inputs are:
one external CB FLT Ext Sign . – external information that CB is not ready to close
(a spring not charged, too low level of CB gas, etc),
AUX 1 or AUX 2 assigned to trip and [79] shots - the external starting commands,
Block [79] – the external blocking command (for example: an external switch).
The following table gives the “SETTING GROUP 1(2)/INPUT CONFIGURATION 1(2)” menu assigned to the auto-reclose logic input.
External CB Fail
External starting commands
External starting commands
INPUT
CONFIGURATION
Gx submenu:
CB FLT Ext.Sign.
AUX1
(Note: AUX1 timer should be set to
Trip )
AUX2
(Note: AUX2 timer should be set to
Trip )
AUTORECLOSE Gx submenu with: enabled
Close Shot ? 4321
tAUX
(‘1’ – means enabled)
1111
Close Shot ? 4321
tAUX2 1111
(‘1’ – means enabled)
[79] ADVANCED
SETTING submenu enabled with:
CB FLT Monitor.?
1:Yes
Block.via Input?
1: Yes
External blocking command
Block [79]
2.12.2.1 External CB faulty signal
Most circuit breakers provide one trip-close-trip cycle. A time-delay is necessary for the CB to return to its nominal state (for example, the spring that allows the circuit breaker to close should be fully charged). The state of the CB can be checked using an input assigned to the
CB FLT Ext.Sign.
function. If the CB FLT Ext.Sign. signal is detected during Closing time, the Auto-reclose Close Command is interrupted and blocked and the CB remains open. In this case the Autorecloser will be Lockout by not successful close command monitored by
Auto-reclose CB Supervision logic (it’s separate function to CB Supervision in GLOBAL
SETTINGS/CIRCUIT BREAKER column). If, on completion of the tCB FLT ext time
( GLOBAL SETTINGS/CIRCUIT BREAKER submenu), the CB FLT ext (Alarm) indicates a failed state of the CB, a lockout occurs and the CB remains open.
Operation
MiCOM P116
2.12.2.2 External Starting Commands
P116_EN_OP_A11 v2.7
(OP) 5-29
Two independent and programmable inputs (AUX1 and AUX2) can be used to initiate the auto-reclose function from an external device (such as an existing overcurrent relay). These logic inputs may be used both independently and in parallel with the overcurrent elements.
Note:
1. The input must be assigned to an AUXx function ( SETTING GROUPx/INPUT
CONFIGURATION Gx ),
2. AUXx must be set to Trip ( SETTING GROUP x/PROTECTION Gx/AUX TIMERS
Gx/AUXx?
) and time-delay tAUXx must be configured (instantaneous: tAUXx set to
0 s),
3. The tAUXx Close Shot cell must be set for every cycle (Close shot).
2.12.2.3 Internal and External Blocking Commands
The auto-recloser can be blocked by an internal or an external control. It can be used when protection is needed without requiring the use of the auto-reclose function.
The external block is executed by the Block [79] input, Blocking via RS485, [79] default cell in CTRL line, or temporary blocked after a close command made by an operator until Time
Inhibit tI on Close set in GLOBAL SETTINGS/ [79] ADVANCED SETTINGS column.
The internal block can be executed by a final trip, a number of valid A/R rolling demands or an A/R conflict.
A typical example is on a transformer feeder, where the auto-recloser may be initiated from the feeder protection device but needs to be blocked on the transformer protection side.
2.12.3 Auto-reclose Output Information
The following output signals can be mapped to an LED (see SETTING GROUP x /LEDS
CONFIGURATION Gx menu) or to output relays (see SETTING GROUP x/OUTPUT
RELAYS CONFIGURATION Gx menu) in order to provide information about the status of the auto-reclose cycle:
Auto-reclose cycle in progress
Final Trip
Internal block
External block
Auto-reclose successful
The following table gives the SETTING GROUP x /LEDS CONFIGURATION Gx and the
SETTING GROUP x/OUTPUT RELAYS CONFIGURATION Gx menus used to assign the auto-reclose output signal.
Auto-reclose in progress
Final Trip
Internal block
External block
Auto-reclose successful
2.12.3.1 Auto-reclose in Progress
LEDs menu
[79] in Progress
[79] Trip Final
[79] Lockout
[79] Blocked
[79] Success.
Output relays menu
[79] in Progress
[79] F.Trip Final
[79] Lockout
[79] Blocked
[79] Success.
The “Auto-reclose in progress” signal is present during the complete reclosing cycles from protection initiation to the end of the reclaim time or lockout.
OP
OP
P116_EN_OP_A11 v2.7
(OP) 5-30
2.12.3.2 Final Trip
Operation
MiCOM P116
The "Final trip" signal indicates that a complete auto-reclose cycle has been performed and that the fault has not been cleared.
After appearance this signal is latched up to reset.
The "Final trip" signal can be reset after a manual closing of the CB after the settable Inhibit
Time t
I
on Close ( GLOBAL SETTINGS/ [79] ADVANCED SETTING ) time-delay or reset via a Reset Command (input assigned to Reset Latchd Sign function, RS485 Reset
Latched LED/Signalling command , C clear key).
If this successful auto-reclose signal was not reset before the next Autoreclose, [79] in
Progress will reset this signal, when Autoreclose is started again.
2.12.4 Auto-reclose Logic Description
The auto-reclose function makes it possible to automatically control the the CB's reclosing cycles (two, three or four shot cycle, settable using the Close Shot ? parameter – separate for each protection element ( SETTING GROUP x/PROTECTION Gx/[79] AUTORECLOSE
G1(2) menu).
Dead times for all the shots (reclose attempts) can be independently adjusted.
The number of shots is directly related to the types of fault likely to occur on the system and the voltage level of the system (for instance medium voltage networks).
The Dead Time (tD1, tD2, tD3 and tD4) and the minimum drop-off time start when the CB has tripped (when the 52a input has dropped off – Start Dead t on 1: CB trips or the protection element has reset - Start Dead t on 0: Protect.Reset
configuration option). The
Dead Time is set to initiate the auto-recloser when the circuit breaker is opened.
At the end of the relevant dead time the close command ( Close CB Order ) is executed and the CB supervision timer is started. The length of this timer is equal to: tClose Pulse
( GLOBAL SETTINGS/CIRCUIT BREAKER ) + 150 ms ( Auto-reclose CB Supervision logic). If the CB is not closed after this time-delay, the auto-recloser is locked out ( [79]
Lockout ) and the Alarm is issued ( Alarm CB Time Monitor ).
The reclaim time ( Reclaim Time tR ) starts when the CB has closed. If the circuit breaker does not trip again, the auto-reclose function resets at the end of the reclaim time.
If a protection element operates during the reclaim time, the relay either advances to the next shot programmed in the auto-reclose cycle, or it locks out (see Inhib.Trip
function description).
The total number of reclosures is displayed in the RECORDS /COUNTERS/
AUTORECLOSE COUNTER menu cell.
2.12.5 Auto-reclose Inhibit Trip
Freely settable the inhibit of the trip after closing command issued via the [79], set separately for each protection element: tI>, tI>>, tI>>>, tIN_1, tIN_2, tIN_3, tAUX1, tAUX2
The trip inhibit is used for following cases:
e/f protection in neutral-insulated or compensated systems. The [79] can clear a non-permanent fault in the first cycles. If it will be permanent fault, there will be no the final trip up to reset of the protection trip.
For 4-cycle [79]: Inhibit Trip 1000 setting. In the first three cycles ( 000 ) the trip is executed to allow fault clearance, but the last one (1) is with inhibition, so no trip is executed in case of permanent fault).
application where for example the setting for the I> stage covers more than the protected zone, so that the [79] can clear faults downstream too, but the final trip will be executed by the downstream relay or a fuse, therefore in the upstream relay, tI> should be inhibited – waiting for tI>> trip of the downstream
Operation
MiCOM P116
P116_EN_OP_A11 v2.7
(OP) 5-31 relay).
Note: for this case Fast Trip O/C function can be used too (see below).
Inhibit Trip setting:
0 : means that after close via the [79], the protection element trip will be not inhibited (function is disabled).
1 : means that after close via the [79], the protection element trip will be inhibited.
It is recommended to set another protection stage with setting for Alarm only, to inform that this fault was not cleared by autorecloser so it’s still present (tripping from this protection element is inhibited). For above case when the auto-reclose is successful, the reset of inhibition is applied after reset of protection stage (current below the stage value).
For another case when during inhibition of protection element, another protection element
(set to run [79]) makes a trip after going to the next cycle (the next [79] close command is executed) the inhibition is reset and the further action depends on the configuration: if in the next cycle this protection element is still set with inhibition, the protection element is still inhibited if in the next cycle this protection element is not set with inhibition, but the fault is still not cleared, this protection element will trip CB (If another protection element moves autoreclose to the next cycle, the inhibition is removed automatically and [79] logic checks configuration for the next [79] shot).
2.12.6 Auto-reclose Fast Trip
On circuits using time-graded protection, the auto-recloser allows the use of instantaneous
(fast) protection ( Fast O/C Trip function in SETTING GROUP x/PROTECTION Gx/[79]
AUTORECLOSE Gx menu) to issue a high speed first trip. With fast tripping, the duration of the power arc resulting from an overhead line fault is reduced to a minimum, thus lessening the chance of damage and of the transient fault developing into a permanent fault. To avoid maloperation because of transients, it is possible to assign a short time-delay to the fast trip:
Fast O/C Trip Delay setting ( SETTING GROUP x/PROTECTION Gx/[79] AUTORECLOSE
Gx menu column) above the typical transient time value. The fast trip can be associated with phase-to-phase faults ( Fast O/C Trip ) and/or earth faults ( Fast E/Gnd Trip ), separately for every shot in the auto-reclose sequence. If in Fast O/C Trip configuration the setting for chosen trip shot is ' 0 ', the trip is executed after the time-delay of the protection element. If it is set to ' 1 ', the time-delay set in the Fast O/C Trip Delay menu cell is applied. In some regions the typical setting of the fast trip for a 2-shot AR is set:
Fast O/C Trip (trip shots): 00011 (The first and second trips with Fast O/C
Trip Delay to reduce to minimum the resulting power arc; The third – final – trip after the time-delay of the protection element to ensure the grading in the power system – trip selectivity)
Fast E/GND Trip (trip shots): 00000 (alls trips re executed after the timedelays of the protection elements).
Fast O/C Trip – refers to all O/C stages in the PHASE O/C menu column: I>, I>>, I>>>.
Fast E/GND Trip – refers to all E/GND stages in the PHASE E/GND menu column: IN_1 ,
IN_2 , IN_3 .
Fast O/C (E/GND) Trip Delay is associated with a DMT characteristic even if the protection element is set to an IDMT characteristic. For the fast trip the reset time-delay of the protection element is not applied.
2.12.7 Auto-reclose Inhibit after Manual Closing
The Inhibit Time t
I
on Close timer ( GLOBAL SETTINGS/ [79] ADVANCED SETTING) can be used to block the auto-reclose cycle being initiated after the CB has been manually closed onto a fault. The auto-recloser is blocked for the duration of Inhibit Time t
I
on Close after a manual CB Closure.
OP
OP
P116_EN_OP_A11 v2.7
(OP) 5-32
2.12.8 Recloser Lockout
Operation
MiCOM P116
If a protection element operates during the reclaim time, following the final reclose attempt, the relay will lockout and the auto-reclose function will be disabled until the lockout condition is reset.
The lockout condition is reset by a manual closing after the Inhibit Time tI on Close timer elapses.
Additionally the lockout condition is reset by a reset signalling command (via input assigned to Reset Latchd Sign function, HMI
key, Remote LED/Signalling Reset command).
The auto-recloser can also be locked out using a CB FLT Ext.Sign.
input. This information can be issued from the "not charged" or "Low gas pressure" indications of CB springs.
•
•
•
•
Note that the auto-recloser can also be locked out by:
•
The fact that the CB does not open after the tBF delay (CB Fail) elapses,
An operating time longer than the set thresholds,
Local or remote manual Close or Open command when the auto-reclose is in progress,
The Rolling Demand function detects too many auto-reclose shots.
CB monitoring logic detects abnormal CB position (opened and closed, or not opened and not closed) for longer than set: Max CB Close or Max CB Open time.
In the lockout condition the ALARM with the cause: ALARM [79] Lockout is displayed up to reset of the lockout condition.
2.12.9 Setting Group Change when the auto-reclose is in progress
During the auto-reclose cycle, if the relay receives a command to switch setting groups, it is executed after the end of auto-reclose action (if auto-reclose is not in progress).
2.12.10 Rolling Demand
This specific counter avoids frequent operations of a CB in case of intermittent faults. The numbers of shots can be set from 2 to 100 in the cell Max cycles No. Rol.Demand
, settable over a time period ( GLOBAL SETTINGS/ [79] ADVANCED SETTING /Time period
Rol.Demand
) from 1 min to 24 hours.
The rolling demand is used when a defined number of successful recloses are performed over a defined time. If it is happened auto-reclose function is Lockout and he ALARM with the cause: ALARM [79] Roll.Demand is displayed up to reset the lockout condition.
If after Alarm [79] Rolling Demand signaling, the lockout condition reset is applied, the recorded number of rolling demand shots are cleared.
2.12.11 Signalling Reset after Close via 79
In the GLOBAL SETTINGS/ [79] ADVANCED SETTING menu it is possible to set the signalling reset after a close command executed by the auto-recloser. If Signalling Reset is set to 1: Close via 79 , after the auto-recloser's close shot (confirmed by the 52a CB status), signalling (LEDs, display) of the last trip before the close shot is reset:
Latched LEDs
Trip information on the P116's front panel
Electromagnetic Flag Indicators on the Front Panel
Latched outputs
This function signals the final trip only and clears signalling if the CB remains closed (Autoreclose is successful). This function is recommended if the P116 is integrated into a SCADA system or if the substation is rarely supervised by maintenance personnel. In this case it is not necessary to clear signalling if the fault has disappeared and the line is healthy.
Operation P116_EN_OP_A11 v2.7
MiCOM P116 (OP) 5-33
Note: Reset of signalling and of latched outputs can be done using the General resetting function.
This configuration can be set in the GLOBAL SETTINGS/LOC submenu:
LEDs Reset:
0: Manual only (via Inputs, HMI
key, Remote Reset command)
1: Start protect.
(Start of the protection element set to Trip)
Ltchd Outp. Reset:
0: Manual only (via Inputs, HMI
key, Remote Reset command)
1: Start protect.
(Start of the protection element set to Trip)
The Manual only option prevents a close command from being issued without readout of the cause of trip by maintenance personnel. It reduces the risk to switch on to fault.
The Start protect option allows signalling of the latest trip only.
2.13 External Trip via a Binary Input
For some applications it is necessary to issue a CB trip via a binary input. Any input assigned to AUXn (n = 1-4) can be used to that effect. The AUX function must be set to
Trip .
Tripping is executed after a set time-delay: tAUXn (n = 1-4).
Auxiliary voltage connected to such a configured Input energizes output relays assigned to
Protect.Trip
, Prot.Trip pulse or tAUX AUXn (n = 1-4).
The Low Energy Trip Coil output and/or Flag Indicator output are activated if they are assigned to Protect.Trip
or tAUX AUXn (n = 1-4) (refer to Figure 9 - AUX timers logic)
OP
OP
P116_EN_OP_A11 v2.7
(OP) 5-34
2.14 Blocking Logic Function and Blocked Overcurrent Scheme Logic
Operation
MiCOM P116
Each stage of the phase protection element can be blocked via an appropriately configured binary input. Binary inputs can be assigned to the following functions ( SETTING
GROUPx/INPUT CONFIGURATION Gx ):
Block.t
I
>
Block.t
I
>>
Block.t
I
>>>
Block.tSOTF
Block.t
I
N_1
Block.t
I
N_2
Block.t
I
N_3
Block.t
I
<
Block.t
I
2>
Block.tBrkn Cond
Block.
I therm
Block.AUX1
Block.AUX2
Block.AUX3
Block.tCB Fail
Block. [79]
Such a configured input can be used by the blocking logic function or by a protection element disabling function (Auto-reclose, CB Fail or AUX).
The blocking logic function can be applied to radial feeder circuits where there is little or no back feed. For parallel feeders, ring circuits or where there can be a back feed from generators, directional relays should be considered.
The blocking logic function allows the upstream IDMT relay to be blocked by the start output of a downstream relay that has detected the presence of a fault current above its threshold.
Thus both upstream and downstream relays can have the same current and time settings, and the blocking feature will automatically provide grading.
If in SETTING GROUPS x/PROTECTION Gx/[[50BF] CB Fail the function: Block I> (IN>)? is set to 0: Yes and the Circuit Breaker Fail protection is enabled, the blocking command on the upstream relay will be removed if the downstream circuit breaker fails to trip.
[79] Inhib.Trip tI>
Block.tI> Input
I>? 0: disabled
Start I> Threshold
CBF: Block I>
&
&
&
T
TIMER
0 tI> Time Delay
DMT/IDMT with DMT or IDMT
RESET
SETTING GROUP 1(2)
/PROTECTION/
[50/51] PHASE O/C G1 tI>
Start I>
P0931ENb
Figure 12: Blocking logic function diagram for the
I
> protection element
Operation
MiCOM P116
2.15 Inrush Blocking
P116_EN_OP_A11 v2.7
(OP) 5-35
The Inrush Blocking function measures the ratio of second to fundamental harmonic currents. It can be used as a “blocking logic” of
I
>,
I
>>,
I
>>>,
I
N_1,
I
N_2,
I
N_3,
I
2 >,SOTF,
I
<, Broken Cond, CB Fail, and AUXn in cases where the 2nd harmonic ratio is higher than the settable threshold. Indeed, inrush blocking functions will reset the selected protection function starts.
Blocked by the second harmonic ratio of a protection element is set in the main setting cell for that element (for example :
I
>? 3: Trip-Inrush Bl ). Each protection element set to 3: Trip-
Inrush Bl will be blocked by the Inrush current function.
The minimum duration of an overcurrent threshold inhibition (tReset) can be also set. This value depends on the transformer power transient inrush duration: between 0.1 second (for a
100 kVA transformer) to 1.0 second (for a large unit). It is used to avoid any maloperation during a fixed time period in case of too sensitive a setting.
2.15.1 Operation
For each of the three phases currents (
I
A,
I
B,
I
C), the harmonic restraint function compares the ratio of 2nd harmonic to the fundamental with the set ratio (Harmonic 2 / Fundamental settable from 10 % up to 50 % in steps of 1%).
The minimum fundamental current value required for operation of the Inrush Blocking function is 0.2
I n, and there is no upper limit to disable this feature. However, in transformer protection, the high set overcurrent stage shall not be controlled by this Inrush Blocking feature; this enables detection of all high current faults without inrush blocking.
It is possible to set two options for Inrush Current logic in the GLOBAL SETTINGS/INRUSH
BLOCKING/Inrush Blocking?
menu:
1: Yes – monitoring is permanent. The Inrush Blocking function will block the selected protection stages every time inrush conditions are present on the line (Ratio of 2nd
Harmonics measured greater than Inrush H2 set ratio), and will be active at least for the duration of Inrush Reset Time . This timer defines the minimum duration of overcurrent threshold inhibition (0-200 s, settable). This timer starts as soon as operating inrush current threshold picks up:
•
If the inrush condition lasts less than the set value for Inrush Reset Time , the selected overcurrent function will be inhibited for the duration of Inrush Reset
Time .
•
If the inrush condition lasts longer than the set value for Inrush Reset Time , the selected overcurrent function will remain inhibited as long as the inrush condition is present.
2: Closing (Model A) – monitoring is based on the Close CB order output. The Inrush
Blocking function will block the selected protection stages every time a close command is executed and the Ratio of measured 2nd Harmonics is greater than the set Inrush h2 ratio, and will be active at least for the duration of Unblock Inrush Time .
Note: Inrush Blocking in P116 relays is not phase-selective. If an inrush condition occurs on any phase, the selected protection stages will be blocked in all 3 phases.
OP
OP
P116_EN_OP_A11 v2.7
(OP) 5-36
Inrush Blocking? 1:Yes
Calculation for curents above
0.2In: IA2h, IB2h, IC2h
If IA<0.2In then IA2h=0%
If IB<0.2In then IB2h=0%
If IC<0.2In then IC2h=0%
MAX
{IA2h,
IB2h,
IC2h}
Inrush Blocking? 2:Yes,
Closing
HMI Close CB Order
2nd Harmonic
Ratio setting
GLOBAL SETTINGS
/INRUSH BLOCKING
&
RS485 Close CB Order
Front key Close CB Order OR
Unblock
Inrush Time
Pulse setting
GLOBAL SETTINGS
/INRUSH BLOCKING
Manual Close Input
&
Inrush
Reset Time
Pulse setting
GLOBAL SETTINGS
/INRUSH BLOCKING
OR
&
[79] Close CB Order
Start I> Threshold
IA, IB, IC
I> setting value
SETTING GROUP 1(2)
/PROTECTION/
{50/51] PHASE O/C G1(2)
Inrush detection (I2h/I1h)
&
Operation
MiCOM P116
T
TIMER
0 tI> Time Delay
DMT/IDMT with DMT or IDMT
RESET
SETTING GROUP 1(2)
/PROTECTION/
[50/51N] E/GND FAULT G1
P0932ENb
Figure 13: Second harmonic blocking diagram for the
I
> protection element
Operation
MiCOM P116
3. OPERATION OF NON PROTECTION FUNCTIONS
3.1
P116_EN_OP_A11 v2.7
(OP) 5-37
Circuit Breaker State Monitoring (Model A)
An operator at a remote location requires a reliable indication of the state of the switchgear.
Without an indication that each circuit breaker is either open or closed, the operator has insufficient information to decide on switching operations. The MiCOM P116 relays incorporate circuit breaker state monitoring, giving an indication of the position of the circuit breaker.
This indication is available either on the relay front panel or via the communication network.
The CB positions can be selected at SETTING GROUPx/INPUT CONFIGURATION Gx ):
CB status 52A
CB status 52B
If two inputs are assigned to both the above inputs, CB status is based on both indications.
If only one function is used, CB status is based on a single-bit information only (the second is derived from the first one).
If CB Supervision function is activated ( GLOBAL SETTINGS/CIRCUIT BREAKER/CB
Supervision?: 1:Yes ), CB monitoring logic detects abnormal CB’s position (opened and closed, or not opened and not closed) in the monitoring window: the max value from settings:
Max CB Close Time or Max CB Open Time ( GLOBAL SETTINGS/CIRCUIT BREAKER column). CB monitoring logic checks CB position permanently, if an abnormal CB status is detected by the time longer than the monitoring window, the Alarm is issued ( Alarm State of
CB ).
The CB’s status can be displayed on the P116 front panel using programmable LEDs. To assign an input to the CB status, an AUX function must be used.
For example:
L1 is assigned to CB status 52a and AUX5
L2 is assigned to CB status 52b and AUX6
LED 7 is assigned to AUX5
LED 8 is assigned to AUX6
In the above configuration LED7 indicates the CB closed position and LED8 indicates the CB open position.
If the Control menu cell is selected as the default display, the CB status is indicated on the
LCD display:
CB status:Opened
CTRL: no operat.
OP
OP
P116_EN_OP_A11 v2.7
(OP) 5-38
3.2 Circuit Breaker Condition Monitoring (Model A)
Operation
MiCOM P116
Periodic maintenance of circuit breakers is generally based on a fixed time interval, or a fixed number of fault current interruptions.
The relays record the following controls and statistics related to each circuit breaker trip or close operation:
monitoring time for CB opening (triggered by the Trip CB order and Protect.Trip
outputs). Operations based on the setting:
time-delay setting for tripping ( GLOBAL SETTINGS/CIRCUIT BREAKER/Max
CB Open Time )
If CB opening time is longer than Max CB Open Time the Alarm is issued ( Alarm
CB Time Monit.
). This function can be activated in the menu: GLOBAL
SETTINGS/CIRCUIT BREAKER/ CB Supervision? 1: Yes ,
monitoring time for CB closing (triggered by the Close CB order output).
Operations based on the setting:
time-delay setting for closing ( GLOBAL SETTINGS/CIRCUIT BREAKER/Max
CB Close Time )
If CB closing time is longer than Max CB Close Time the Alarm is issued ( Alarm
CB Time Monit.
). This function can be activated in the menu: GLOBAL
SETTINGS/CIRCUIT BREAKER/ CB Supervision: 1: Yes ,
CB open operations counter (triggered by Trip CB order: HMI, Manual Trip Logic Input,
HMI ‘ Trip ’ key, rear communication trip command, USB port trip command)
Number of open operations
( RECORDS/COUNTERS/CONTROLCOUNTER/Open No.
)
CB close operations counter (triggered by Close CB order : HMI, Manual Close Logic
Input, HMI ‘Close’ key, rear communication close command, USB port close command)
Number of close operations
( RECORDS/COUNTERS/CONTROL COUNTER/Close No.
)
protection CB open operations counter (triggered by Protect.Trip
output)
Number of CB open operations
( RECORDS/COUNTERS/FAULT COUNTER/Fault Trips No.
)
CB open operations counter monitoring (triggered by the Trip CB order and
Protect.Trip
output function)
setting threshold ( GLOBAL SETTINGS/CIRCUIT BREAKER/MAX CB Open
No.
)
current value ( RECORDS/COUNTERS/CB MONITORING COUNTER/ CB
Open Mon.No.
). This value is editable, so it is possible to change this value or set the value when the relay was replaced by another one,
This function can be activated in menu: GLOBAL SETTINGS/CIRCUIT BREAKER/
CB Diagnostic? 1: Yes ,
summation of the current interrupted by the CB (triggered by the Protect.Trip
output function):
setting threshold ( GLOBAL SETTINGS/CIRCUIT BREAKER/MAX SUM
AMPS^n)
current value ( RECORDS/COUNTERS/CB monitoring/CB AMPS Value ). This value is editable, so it is possible to change this value or set the value when the relay was replaced by another one,
exponent for the summation ( GLOBAL SETTINGS/CIRCUIT
BREAKER/AMPS’s n= ),
Operation
MiCOM P116
P116_EN_OP_A11 v2.7
(OP) 5-39
This function can be activated in menu: GLOBAL SETTINGS/CIRCUIT BREAKER/
CB Diagnostic: 1: Yes .
Note: summation of the current interrupted by CB is phase selective, but the max value from three phases is displayed in menu only. If the new value is entered, it is applied for all phases.
CB Alarm output function and CB Alarm LEDs function signal is generated if CB
Supervision or CB Diagnostic function detects any problem.
Additionally CB Diagnostic function triggers TCS 52 Fail output function.
Cause of Alarm
The monitoring time for
CB opening
The monitoring time for
CB closing
Alarm function
CB
Supervision
CB
Supervision
The abnormal CB’s position for two bits CB’s connection (00 or 11)
CB
Supervision
Key setting
Max CB
Open
Time
Max CB
Close
Time
Max value:
Max CB
Close
Time
or
Max CB
Open
Time
Alarm
Label
CB Time
Monit.
CB Time
Monit.
State of
CB
Output
CB Alarm CB Alarm
CB Alarm CB Alarm
CB Alarm CB Alarm
CB open operations counter monitoring
Summation of the current interrupted by the CB
CB
Diagnostic
CB
Diagnostic
MAX CB
Open No.
Max Sum
AMPS^n
CB Nb
Diagn.
CB Curr,
Diagn.
CB
Alarm ,
TCS 52
Fail
CB
Alarm ,
TCS 52
Fail
For the proper collaboration with CB coils, in menu it is possible to set:
LED
CB Alarm
CB Alarm
trip pulse time ( GLOBAL SETTINGS/CIRCUIT BREAKER/tOpen pulse )
close pulse time ( GLOBAL SETTINGS/CIRCUIT BREAKER/tClose pulse )
The trip pulse time is used by: Protect.Trip pulse and Trip CB Order output functions.
The close pulse time is used by: Close CB Order output functions.
In cases where the breaker is tripped by an external protection device it is also possible to update the CB condition monitoring. This is achieved by setting one of the AUX protection element ( Protect.Trip) or Manual Trip logic inputs or via the communications to accept a trigger from an external device.
OP
OP
P116_EN_OP_A11 v2.7
(OP) 5-40
3.3 Local / Remote Mode (Model A)
Operation
MiCOM P116
The goal of this feature is to make it possible to block commands sent remotely through communication networks (such as setting parameters, control commands, etc.), so as to prevent any accidents or maloperations during maintenance work performed on site.
P116 can be in two modes: “Remote” or “Local”.
Meaning of “Local” mode is clear. The control is possible locally only. Remote commands
(via RS485/USB) are rejected by P116 (except remote commands: CTRL: Remote or
CTRL: Local, Comms.Order commands).
The meaning of “Remote” mode can differ depends on the custom of users or application.
There are two possible definition:
“ Remote ” mode means that remote or local control are possible
“ Remote ” mode means that remote control is possible only (local control is rejected by
P116)
Customization of “Remote” mode definition is applied by selection of proper setting at
GLOBAL SETTINGS/CIRCUIT BREAKER/Remote CTRL Mode:
0: Remote only – the first “ Remote ” definition - in “ Remote ” mode, remote control is permitted only. All manual controls (HMI, Close/Trip function keys, Binary Inputs assigned to Manual Close or Trip) are blocked.
1: Remote + LOC - the second “ Remote ” definition - remote and local controls are permitted.
“ Local ” mode can be achieved by:
Control Mode default cell in the menu:
LR Status:L+R
CRL: no operat.
- A digital input labeled: Local CTRL Mode
When the Local CTRL Mode input is energized, all remote commands are blocked
(RS485/USB command: CTRL: Remote is blocked too). When the Local CTRL Mode input is de-energized, remote control commands can be issued. In Local mode, only the synchronizing time signal is allowed.
The first line of “Local/Remote” cell allows monitoring of the Local/Remote Mode status:
LR Status: Local - Local mode
LR Status: Remote – Remote Mode. This description will appear if in GLOBAL
SETTINGS/CIRCUIT BREAKER/Remote CTRL Mode is set to 0: Remote only .
Status: L+R – both : local and remote control are possible. This description will appear if GLOBAL SETTINGS/CIRCUIT BREAKER/Remote CTRL Mode is set to 1: Remote
+ LOC .
The second line is used to change Local/Remote Mode in the menu:
CTRL: no operat . – No operation
CTRL: Local – Local Mode command
CTRL: Remote – Remote Mode command
To change from Remote to Local mode it is necessary to press the OK key, enter Control
Password (if it is set), press the OK key twice (confirm password and select changing).
Press down or up key to choose Local confirm by Enter. LR Status indicates: LR Status:
Local.
To change from Local to Remote mode it is necessary to press the OK key, enter Control
Password (if it is set), press the OK key twice (confirm the password and select the change).
Operation P116_EN_OP_A11 v2.7
MiCOM P116 (OP) 5-41
Press the
or
key to select Remote then confirm by pressing the OK key. LR Status indicates: LR Status L+R (option Remote CTRL Mode 1: Remote + Local ) or LR Status
Remote (option Remote CTRL Mode 0: Remote ) .
Note: if the Control Password is set to zero: no asking about password will appear – the
Control Password is disabled.
It is possible to map the Local Mode state to an output contact by assigning the output contact to the Local CTRL Mode output ( SETTING GROUP x/OUTPUT RELAYS
CONFIGURATION Gx .
It is possible to map the Local Mode state to a LED by assigning the LED to the Local CTRL
Mode function ( SETTING GROUP x/LEDs CONFIGURATION Gx ).
Note: If in Local Mode is remote trip is desired, For remote trip Comm.Order command can be used (refer to output configuration).
OP
OP
P116_EN_OP_A11 v2.7
(OP) 5-42
3.4 Setting Group Selection (Model A)
Operation
MiCOM P116
MiCOM P116 relays have two protection setting groups called PROTECTION G1 and
PROTECTION G2 . Only one group is active at any time.
If a group is used in an application it is possible to remove the other group from the menu in order to simplify the setting procedure. If one group only is chosen the relay uses Group 1 even if the other parameters are set to Group 2 (Inputs, Menu, Remote Group Setting).
The selection of the number of groups is done at GLOBAL SETTINGS/SETTING GROUP
SELECT/ Number of Groups: 1: One Group or 2: Two Groups.
If 1: One Group is selected, the SETTING GROUP 2 column and the setting group cell are hidden in the menu.
Switching between groups can be done via:
a selected binary input assigned to the Setting Group 2 logic input ( SETTING GROUP x/INPUTS CONFIGURATION Gx submenu),
the relay front panel interface ( GLOBAL SETTINGS/SETTING GROUP SELECT/
Setting Group: 1: Group1 or 2: Group2 ),
through the communications port (refer to the Mapping Database for detailed information).
Switching between setting groups can be done even while a protection function is active, but it resets all timers, LEDs or flag's on P116 front panel).
The user can check which one of the setting groups is active in the OP PARAMETERS menu: Active Set Group cell.
The user can also assign the active group ( Setting Group x function) to an output relay
( SETTING GROUP x/OUTPUT RELAYS CONFIGURATION Gx ) or to an LED ( SETTING
GROUP x/LEDs CONFIGURATION G1 ).
Setting group change via a digital input
It is possible to change the setting group by energizing a digital input (operates on level: logic input is low – setting group 1, logic input is high – setting group 2 ).
If the setting group switchover is done via a binary input, the change from Group 1 to
Group 2 is executed after the set time-delay: t Change Setting G1->G2 ( GLOBAL
SETTINGS/SETTING GROUP SELECT ). The switch from Group 2 back to Group 1 is instantaneous.
Warning: If the digital input that has been assigned to the setting group change operates on level (low or high), it is not possible to change the setting group via remote communications.
Switch between Active Groups via a Binary Input
When powering up the relay, the selected group (Group 1 or Group 2) corresponds to the state of the logic input assigned to Setting Group 2 . This means:
A – Reverse Inp.Logic
= 0 and Setting Group 2 = 1
( SETTING GROUP x/INPUTS CONFIGURATION Gx submenu),
If the programmed logic input starts being supplied with +V, then after the t Change Setting
G1->G2 time-delay the active group will be G2.
If the programmed logic input is not supplied with +V , then the active group will be G1.
B – Reverse Inp.Logic
= 1 and Setting Group 2 = 1
( SETTING GROUP x/INPUTS CONFIGURATION Gx submenu),
If the programmed logic input is supplied with +V, then the active group will be G1.
If the programmed logic input stops being supplied with +V , then after the t Change Setting
G1->G2 time-delay the active group will be G2.
Operation
MiCOM P116
Notes:
P116_EN_OP_A11 v2.7
(OP) 5-43
1. Binary Input configuration is associated with both Setting Groups, so that if in a
Setting Group the selected binary input is assigned to Setting Group 2 , in the other group it must be set to Setting Group 2 as well, otherwise no switch will occur.
2. If the P116 is powering up (from the currents or the auxiliary voltage) and Group 2 is selected via a binary input, the t Change Setting G1->G2 time-delay is ignored
(changing to setting group 2 is instantaneous – without time-delay).
3. The setting group switch is based on the level of the binary input. So as long as
Setting Group 2's logic signal is high, the P116 uses Setting Group 2.
4. After changing the setting group all latched LEDs and output contacts are reset.
Switch between Active Groups via the Menu or a Remote Command (RS485, USB)
By using the relay front panel interface it is possible to change the active setting group:
1: Group1 or 2: Group2 (menu cell: GLOBAL SETTINGS/SETTING GROUP SELECT/
Setting Group ).
This menu cell is commonly used for switching groups from the front panel interface and via a remote command (RS485 or USB).
It means that if the GLOBAL SETTINGS/SETTING GROUP SELECT/ Setting Group menu cell is set to 1: Group1 and the remote setting group 2 command is executed, the value of menu cell: GLOBAL SETTINGS/SETTING GROUP SELECT/ Setting Group will be changed to 2: Group2 (Active group: 2).
Setting group 1 will be applied if:
1: Group1 is set in the GLOBAL SETTINGS/SETTING GROUP SELECT/ Setting
Group menu cell from the relay's front panel interface,
the remote setting group 1 command is executed. The value of the GLOBAL
SETTINGS/SETTING GROUP SELECT/ Setting Group menu cell will then be changed to 1: Group1 .
Priority
Warning: If the digital input that has been assigned to the setting group change operates on level (low or high), it is not possible to change the setting group via neither remote communications nor the front panel.
The detailed logic table for setting group selection is shown below:
Binary Input
Group 2
Setting
Not configured
Not configured
G1
G1
G2
G2
G1
G2
G1
G2
Front Panel and
Remote Setting
G1
G2
Active Group
G1
G2
G1
G1
G2
G2
Note: If a setting group change initiated by a remote command has not been effected due of priority settings, that command is ignored (not recorded in the P116's logic for the future, when priority settings allow changing).
It is possible to assign an Active Group state to an output contact by setting the output contact to the Setting Group x output ( SETTING GROUP x/OUTPUT RELAYS
CONFIGURATION Gx .
OP
OP
P116_EN_OP_A11 v2.7 Operation
(OP) 5-44 MiCOM P116
If Active Group signaling is required, some LEDs should be assigned to the Setting Group x function ( SETTING GROUP x/LEDs CONFIGURATION Gx ).
Operation
MiCOM P116
3.5 Trip Circuit Supervision (Model A)
P116_EN_OP_A11 v2.7
(OP) 5-45
The trip circuit extends beyond the relay's enclosure and passes through more components, such as fuses, wires, relay contacts, auxiliary switch contacts and so on.
These complications, coupled with the importance of the circuit, have directed attention to its supervision.
The simplest arrangement for trip circuit supervision contains a healthy trip lamp in series with a resistance placed in parallel with the trip output relay contacts of the protection device.
3.5.1 Trip Circuit Supervision Mechanism
The Trip Circuit Supervision function included in the MiCOM P116 relays is described below:
A logic input is programmed to the GLOBAL CONFIGURATION/CIRCUIT BREAKER/TC
Supervision function. The logic input is associated to the label Trip Circ Supervis..
within the SETTING GROUPx/INPUT CONFIGURATION Gx menu. Then, this logic input is wired in the trip circuit according to one of the typical application diagrams shown in the following example.
When the TC Supervision function is set to Yes under the CIRCUIT BREAKER sub-menu, the relay checks continuously on trip circuit continuity whether the CB's status is open or closed.
When the TC Supervision function is set to Yes-52A under the CIRCUIT BREAKER submenu, the relay checks continuously on trip circuit continuity in case when the CB's status is closed only.
The TC Supervision function is enabled when the Protect.trip
or Trip CB order output is not energized. The TC Supervision function is not enabled when the Protect.trip
or Trip
CB is energized.
A TCS 52 Fail and CB Alarm output function, TCS Supervision Alarm and CB Alarm
LEDs function signal is generated if the logic input detects no voltage signal during a time longer than the settable timer tSUP (in GLOBAL CONFIGURATION/CIRCUIT BREAKER menu). See Chapter P116/EN TD (Technical Data) for the settings.
As this function is disabled when the Protect.trip
or Trip CB order output is energized, this function is suitable for use with the enabled relay latching logic.
The tSUP timer can be set according to the following table:
MENU TEXT
TC Supervision ? tSUP
Yes
100ms
MIN
SETTING RANGE
MAX
No
10s
STEP SIZE
10ms
OP
TC Supervision? 1: Yes
CB closed (52A)
TC Supervision?
2: Yes – 52A
Trip Circ Supervis. Input
Protect Trip
Prot.Trip pulse
Trip CB Order
&
OR
OR
&
T
TIMER
0
TC Supervision tSUP Time Delay
GLOBAL SETTINGS/
CIRCUIT BREAKER
CB Alarm
Alarm
TCS 52 Fail
Figure 14: Trip Circuit Supervision Principle
For more details refer to the Application Chapter (P116/EN AP/A11)
P0933ENb
OP
P116_EN_OP_A11 v2.7
(OP) 5-46
3.6 Commissioning
3.6.1 Maintenance Mode
This menu allows the user to check the operation of the protection functions.
Operation
MiCOM P116
It is possible to set following Maintenance mode options (settings):
•
“ No ” - Maintenance mode is disabled. All window cells below are hidden
( Maintenance mode is the latest cell in COMMISIONING column)
•
“ Yes,outp.trips
” - Maintenance mode is enabled. In this mode all test cells in
COMMISIONING column are shown. During tests outputs are energized.
•
“Yes,outp.block” - Maintenance mode is enabled and all test cells in
COMMISIONING column are shown. In this mode, the high state of output functions are ignored (control of outputs are blocked).
This option allows the user to check the operation of the protection functions without actually sending any external command (Tripping or signalling).
Depends on the rear protocol selected in menu, transmission of information to SCADA is blocked (Modbus RTU) or sent (IEC 103) with additional information to know that
P116 is in Maintenance mode (refer to Communication chapter and EN 60870-5-103 standard).
Changing of setting from “ No ” to “ Yes,….
” from the front panel activate this mode for
10 minutes only . After this time the option is automatically switched to “ No ”.
The selection of the maintenance mode is possible by logic input (the level), control command (rear or front port), or by front panel interface.
The maintenance mode is terminated by:
•
Low state of logic input assigned to Maintenance mode function,
•
Control command which deactivate this mode (rear command or setting: “ No,….
”) and by turning off the power supply.
Note: Maintenance rear command is available in Modbus protocol only
3.6.2
Maintenance Mode
1: Yes,outp.trips
It is possible to assign the state of Maintenance Mode to programmable LEDs.
In “ Yes,outp.block
” case, all the output contacts are blocked, and no command can be issued to these contacts, even if a protection threshold associated with one of these output contacts has been crossed. (If a protection threshold is crossed, all associated LEDs will be ON, even the TRIP LED, if protection element is set to Trip ).
If the Maintenance Mode is set in menu (“ Yes,outp.trips
” or “ Yes,outp.block
”) after 10 minutes this function returns automatically to Maintenance mode “ No ” (function disabled).
If the input assigned to Maintenance Mode is logical high, the Maintenance Mode is active
(without any time limitation) up to low state of the logical input.
Outputs test
This function is available after activation of Maintenance mode
The commissioning cells allow the user to check the external wiring to the relay's output contacts. To do this, the user has only to set to 1 the desired output contact's corresponding bit, and this will close the contact and allow the continuity of the wiring to be checked.
Test
Pattern
TF654321
00000000
In the cell below, the contact test time can be set:
Operation
MiCOM P116
P116_EN_OP_A11 v2.7
(OP) 5-47
Contact Test
Time 001.00s
If the outputs for test are selected and Time for output closing is set, the closing command can be executed in this cell:
3.6.3
Test output
0: no operation
To execute the test, press OK key, press the
or
key to select 1: Apply test and confirm action by OK . The contact will be closed for the duration of the Contact Test Time pulse.
Functional test
This function is available after activation of Maintenance mode
The next commissioning cells allow the user to check the functional output configuration of the P116. To do this, the user has only to select which protection element will be triggered, and this will close the contact assigned to this protection element and allow the continuity of the wiring to be checked. If the protection element is disabled there will be no action.
Functional Test
0: I>
In the cell below the end of the functional test can be configured:
Functional Test
End 0: CB trip
The following options are possible:
0: CB trip – after triggering the functional test, the test is interrupted after trip command.
1: Time – the protection element will be triggered for the duration of the pulse time.
If the 1: Time option is selected it is necessary to set the pulse length:
Contact Test
Time 001.00s
The next cell is used for functional test execution:
Functional Test
CTRL: no operation
To execute this test, press the OK key, press the
or
key to select 1: Operate and confirm action by pressing OK . The contact will be closed for the duration of the Contact
Test Time pulse.
NOTE: In Maintenance Mode P116 works with full functionality (ready to trip in a fault condition, even during functional test). During functional test of selected stage (for example tI>), P116 measures currents so the rest active stages (for example tI>>, tIN>, etc) work on the measured current from the field. Only the tested stage (for example tI>) sees test current: two times greater than tI> current setting value in all phases. After functional test of
Thermal replica, the thermal value is set to 0%. After test, in the fault record all recorded current values are based on the currents measured in the field.
If Functional Test will be applied for protection element which is disabled there will be no any action done.
OP
OP
P116_EN_OP_A11 v2.7
(OP) 5-48
3.7 Circuit Breaker Control (Model A)
The relay includes the following options for control of a single circuit breaker:
-
Local tripping and closing, via the relay menu or function keys
Operation
MiCOM P116
-
-
Local tripping and closing, via relay binary inputs
Remote tripping and closing, using the relay communications
If a local/remote external selector switch is to be used, it is recommended that separate relay output contacts are assigned to remote circuit breaker control and protection trip. This enables the control outputs to be selected via a local/remote selector switch as shown in
Figure 14.
Where this feature is not required or is connected to a P116's binary input, the same output contact(s) can be used for both protection ( Protect.Trip
output) and remote tripping ( Trip
CB order output).
Figure 15: Remote Control of Circuit Breaker
A manual trip will be permitted provided that the circuit breaker is initially closed. Likewise, a close command can only be issued if the CB is initially open. To confirm these states it will be necessary to use the breaker 52A (assigned to CB status 52A input) and/or 52B
(assigned to CB status 52B input) contacts. Under these circumstances manual CB control will be possible, but the Auto-reclose function will not be available. Additionally, it will be not possible to see the CB status in the Control default cell.
Once a CB Close command is initiated the output contact ( Close CB order) can be set to operate following a user-defined time-delay ( Time-delay for Close setting in GLOBAL
SETTINGS/CIRCUIT BREAKER menu). This would give personnel time to move safely away from the circuit breaker following the close command. This time-delay will apply to all manual CB Close commands.
Operation P116_EN_OP_A11 v2.7
MiCOM P116 (OP) 5-49
The length of the trip or close control pulse can be set via the tOPen pulse min and tClose
Pulse settings respectively ( GLOBAL SETTINGS/CIRCUIT BREAKER menu). These should be set long enough to ensure the breaker has completed its open or close cycle before the pulse has elapsed.
Note: The manual trip and close commands are found in the default Control cell and the Close/Trip keys on the front panel.
If an attempt to close the breaker is being made, and a protection trip signal is generated, the protection trip command overrides the close command.
If CB FLT Ext.Sign
is assigned to a binary input this signal is checked before manual closing of the CB. This function uses the signal received at the relay's binary input to confirm whether the breaker is capable of closing (sufficient circuit breaker energy for example). A user-settable time-delay, tCB FLT ext , is included for manual closure. If, following a close command, the CB does not signal a healthy condition before that timer elapses, then the relay will lockout and issue an alarm.
OP
OP
P116_EN_OP_A11 v2.7
(OP) 5-50
3.8 General Input Configuration (Model A)
Operation
MiCOM P116
Depending on the P116's hardware version defined in the GLOBAL
CONFIGURATION/GENERAL INPUT CONFIGURATION menu, two types of menu cells are available.
Inputs Hardware Options:
3.8.1
P116xxxxxxx 1 xxxxxx: Standard Binary Inputs: 24-240 Vac or 24-250 Vdc
P116xxxxxxx 2 xxxxxx: DC Binary Inputs with settable switching thresholds:
110 Vdc / 129 Vdc / 220 Vdc
Standard Binary Inputs
Standard Binary Inputs are designed to have a high immunity to the disturbances that can appear on the wires connected to the binary inputs:
the activation current level is high (35 mA over 2 ms) and does not depend on the voltage level. After 2 ms the consumption of current is reduced to 2.3 mA.
the level of the voltage connected to the binary input must be greater than the minimum acceptable value,
time filtering is executed. The window and filtering method depend on the type of voltage which will be fed to the input terminals:
dc voltage with 5 ms filtering window (at 50 Hz): Inp.X Filtering: 2:dc (in the
GLOBAL SETTINGS/GENERAL INPUT CONFIGURATION menu). ‘X’ – the number of binary inputs (1-6)
ac voltage with 7.5 ms filtering window (at 50 Hz): Inp.X Filtering: 1:ac (in the
GLOBAL SETTINGS/GENERAL INPUT CONFIGURATION menu). ‘X’ – the number of binary inputs (1-6)
ac/dc ENA with 15 ms filtering window (at 50 Hz): Inp.X Filtering: 0:dc/ac ENA
(in the GLOBAL SETTINGS/GENERAL INPUT CONFIGURATION menu). ‘X’ – the number of binary inputs (1-6)
Figure 12 shows two cases:
The Logic Input is high because the voltage level is higher than is required (RT level) and the current is greater than about 35 mA. After 2 ms the binary input reduces the current consumption to about 2.3 mA.
The Logic Input is low because the voltage source connected to the binary input has too high an internal impedance so that the current is lower than 35 mA. The voltage level is
OK because it is above the RT level (this value is fixed: refer to chapter P116/EN TD).
Each Input can be configured separately for the dc or ac or ac/dc ENA options.
For example input L1 can be set to 2: dc and input L2 can be set to 1: ac .
Operation
MiCOM P116
P116_EN_OP_A11 v2.7
(OP) 5-51
Binary state
(0 or 1)
I opto
V opto
Binary Input is in high state:
V opto
RT
0V
I opto
35mA
2,3mA
0mA
Binary state
1L
0L
0,5ms
Time
2ms
Binary Input is in low state because the current is lower than 35mA:
V opto
RT
0V
I opto
25mA
0mA
Binary state
1L
0L
Figure 16: Energizing of binary inputs (P116xxxxxxx1xxxxxx)
Time
P0934ENa
OP
OP
P116_EN_OP_A11 v2.7
(OP) 5-52
3.8.2 DC Binary Inputs
Operation
MiCOM P116
DC Binary inputs can set the nominal dc voltage for inputs. In this way the RT threshold can be set as high as possible (0.7-0.8 x nominal voltage value – refer to chapter
P116/EN TD/A11) in order to increase immunity to the disturbances that can appear in the wires connected to the binary inputs. The current consumption is about 3.5 mA at nominal voltage value. The filtering time is 5 ms only.
In the GLOBAL SETTINGS/GENERAL INPUT CONFIGURATIO N menu it is possible to select the following nominal (rated) voltages:
110 Vdc
129 Vdc
220 Vdc
The maximum permissible voltage connected to these inputs does not depend on the selected nominal voltage and is equal to 264 Vdc.
Operation
MiCOM P116
3.9 Real Time Clock Synchronization via Opto-Inputs (Model A)
P116_EN_OP_A11 v2.7
(OP) 5-53
In modern protective schemes it is often desirable to synchronize the relay’s real time clock so that events from different relays can be placed in chronological order. This can be done using the communication interface connected to the substation control system or via a binary input. Any of the available binary inputs on the P116 relay can be selected for synchronization. Pulsing this input will result in the real time clock snapping to the nearest minute. The recommended pulse duration is 20 ms to be repeated no more than once per minute. An example of the time synchronization function is shown.
Time of “Sync. Pulse”
19:47:00.000 to 19:47:29.999
19:47:30.000 to 19:47:59.999
Corrected Time
19:47:00.000
19:48:00.000
Note: The above assumes a time format of hh:mm:ss
The input is configured in the SETTING GROUPx/INPUT CONFIGURATION Gx menu. The input must be assigned to the Time Synchr.
input. OP
OP
P116_EN_OP_A11 v2.7
(OP) 5-54
3.10 Resetting of Latched LEDs and Outputs
Operation
MiCOM P116
How latched LEDs and outputs are reset is determined by the inputs assigned to the resetting of latched LED. Outputs can be reset via external inputs, by pressing the
clear key on the P116's front panel if the LCD shows the default display or via the communication port.
The resetting configuration can be entered in the GLOBAL SETTINGS/LOC menu:
LEDs Reset:
0: Manual only (via Inputs, HMI
key, Remote Reset command)
1: Start protect.
(Start of a protection element set to Trip)
Ltchd Outp. Reset:
0: Manual only (via Inputs, HMI
key, Remote Reset command)
1: Start protect.
(Start of a protection element set to Trip)
The Manual only option prevents a close command from being issued without readout of the cause of trip by maintenance personnel. It reduces the risk to switch on to fault.
The Start protect option allows to signal the latest trip only: Start of any protection element set to trip the CB, reset all latched LEDs and show the default display.
3.11 Records
3.11.1 Fault Recorder
Each time any of the set thresholds are crossed, an instantaneous record is created and displayed in the RECORDS/INSTANTANEOUS RECORD menu. Information on the last five starts is available, with the duration of the signal.
The following information is displayed in the RECORDS/INSTANTANEOUS RECORD menu: number of starts, time, date, origin (crossing of a current threshold or start of a protection element's time-delay), current values, duration of the instantaneous signal, and whether or not the crossing of the threshold lead to a trip.
Each time any of the set protection elements trips ( Protect.Trip
output), a fault record is created and stored in memory. The fault record tags up to 20 faults and stores them in a non-volatile (FRAM) memory. This allows the operator to identify and analyze system failures. When the available memory space is exhausted, the new fault automatically overwrites the oldest fault.
The user can view the latest fault record in the RECORD/FAULT RECORDS menu, where he or she can choose to display up to 20 stored records. These records are the fault flags, the fault measurements, etc. Also note that the time stamp displayed in the fault record itself will be more accurate than the corresponding time stamp given in the event record. This is due to the fact that events are logged some time after the actual fault is recorded.
The user can view event records either via the front panel interface, via the USB port, or remotely, via the rear EIA(RS)485 port.
3.11.2 Alarm Recorder (Model A)
Each time any of the set protection element issues an ALARM signal ( Alarm output), an
Alarm record is created and stored in memory. The fault record tags up to 5 faults and stores them in a non-volatile (FRAM) memory. This allows the operator to identify and analyze system failures. When the available memory space is exhausted, the new alarm automatically overwrites the oldest alarm.
The user can view the latest Alarm record in the RECORD/ALARM RECORDS menu, where he or she can choose to display up to 5 stored records. These records are the alarm flags, the alarm measurements, etc. Also note that the time stamp displayed in the Alarm record itself will be more accurate than the corresponding time stamp given in the event record..
Operation
MiCOM P116
3.11.3 Instantaneous Recorder (Model A)
P116_EN_OP_A11 v2.7
(OP) 5-55
Each time any of set thresholds are crossed, an instantaneous record is created and displayed in the RECORDS/INSTANTANEOUS RECORD menu. The last five starting records are available, with the duration of the signal.
The following information is displayed in the RECORDS/INSTANTANEOUS RECORD menu: number of starts, time, date, origin (crossing of a current threshold or start of a protection element's time-delay), current values.
3.12
NOTE: Instantaneous Records is active if P116 is powered from the auxiliary voltage Vx.
Disturbance Recorder
The integral disturbance recorder has a memory space specifically dedicated to the storage of disturbance records. Up to 6 seconds of disturbance recording can be stored. When the available memory space is exhausted, the new record automatically overwrites the oldest record.
Disturbance recorder are triggered by protection element set to Trip or via binary input assigned to Start Distur. R.
input function.
The recorder stores actual samples that are taken at a rate of 16 samples per cycle.
Each disturbance record consists of analogue and digital channels. (Note that the relevant
CT ratios for the analogue channels are also extracted to enable scaling to primary quantities).
The disturbance recorder is set in the GLOBAL SETTINGS/DISTURBANCE RECORDER menu.
The total disturbance recording time is 6 s but not more than 5 records are available.
Total number of records available in disturbance recorder is: o One - for set Max Record Time from in range: 3.01s - 6s o Two – for set Max Record Time from in range: 2.01s - 3s o Three – for set Max Record Time from in range: 1.51s - 2s o Four – for set Max Record Time from in range: 1.21s – 1.5s o Five - for set Max Record Time from in range: 0.10s – 1.2s
Triggering of disturbance recording depends on the Disturb.Rec.Trig. configuration:
0: on Inst.
– Start of a protection element set to Trip ,
1: on Trip – Trip by a protection element followed by the Protect.Trip output.
If the 0: on Inst . option is selected the record consists of: Pre-fault time + duration of the
"any Start" signal presence + Post-fault time.
If the 1: on Trip option is selected the record consists of: Pre-fault time + duration of the Trip signal presence ( Protect.Trip
function active) + Post-fault time.
The pre-fault time can be set in the cell: GLOBAL SETTINGS/DISTURBANCE
RECORDER/Pre-Time .
If the pre-fault time is set to 100 ms, recording starts 100 ms before the disturbance.
The post-fault time can be set in the cell: GLOBAL SETTINGS/DISTURBANCE
RECORDER/Post Trip Time .
If the post trip time is set to 100 ms, recording stops 100 ms after the trip signal.
OP
OP
P116_EN_OP_A11 v2.7
(OP) 5-56
3.13 Event Records (Model A)
Operation
MiCOM P116
The relay records and time-tags up to 200 events and stores them in a non-volatile (Fram) memory. This allows the system operator to analyze the sequence of events that has occurred within the relay after a particular power system condition, or switching sequence, etc. When the available space is exhausted, the new fault automatically overwrites the oldest fault.
The real time clock within the relay time-tags each event, with a resolution of 1 ms.
3.14
The user can view the event records either locally via the USB port, or remotely, via the rear
EIA(RS)485 port.
Demand values
The relay produces fixed and peak demand values, using the reset demand menu cell it is possible to reset these quantities via the user interface or the remote communications.
Information about actual values is available in the RECORDS/MAX & AVERAGE
I submenu.
3.14.1 Fixed Demand Values
The fixed demand value is the average value of a quantity over a specified interval ( Time
Window) . Values are produced for each phase current (A, B, C). The fixed demand values displayed by the relay are those for the previous interval, the values are updated at the end of the settable demand period: Time Window cell ( GLOBAL SETTINGS/MAX&AVERAGE
I
CONFIGURATION/ )
NOTE: Fixed Demand Values is active if P116 is powered from the auxiliary voltage Vx.
Time Window setting: from 1 mn to 24 hours
The 3 phase Peak demand values are displayed in the RECORDS/MAX & AVERAGE
I menu:
Average
I
A
Average
I
B
Average
I
C
The calculation is reset either via the front panel interface in the RECORDS/MAX &
AVERAGE
I
/ MAX&Aver.Reset cell, under Control password (Note: Control password can be deactivated if it is set to 0):
Max&Aver.Reset
CTRL: No operation
Resetting can be applied by:
- pressing the OK key,
- enter the Control Password,
- confirm the password by pressing the OK key,
- pressing
or
key then selecting: Reset
- confirming the command by pressing OK
.
Note: In case of loss of power supply the fixed demand values are not stored.
Any modification of the Time Window setting resets the calculation.
Operation
MiCOM P116
3.14.2 Peak Demand Values
P116_EN_OP_A11 v2.7
(OP) 5-57
Peak demand values are produced for each phase current quantity. These display the maximum value of the measured quantity since the last reset of the demand values.
The principle of calculation of the Peak value demand for the
I
A,
I
B and
I
C phase currents is as follows:
For every Time Window , a new average value is compared with the previous value calculated for the previous Time Window . If this new value is greater than the previously stored value, then this new value is stored instead of the old one.
To the contrary, if this new value is lower than the previously stored value, then the old value is kept.
This way the average peak value will be refreshed with each Time Window .
There is no dedicated setting for this calculation. The setting for the Time Window is shared with that for the Fixed Demand value.
The 3 phase Peak demand values are displayed in the RECORDS/MAX & AVERAGE
I menu:
MAX
I
A
MAX
I
B
MAX
I
C
The calculation can be reset – see Fixed demand value.
Note: In case of loss of power supply, Peak average values are stored.
Any modification of the Time Window setting resets the calculation.
OP
OP
P116_EN_OP_A11 v2.7
(OP) 5-58
Operation
MiCOM P116
Application Notes
MiCOM P116
P116_EN_AP_A11 v2.7
APPLICATION NOTES
Date:
Hardware Suffix:
Software Version:
Connection Diagrams:
17 th
November 2013
A
1C
10P11602
AP
AP
P116_EN_AP_A11 v2.7 Application Notes
MiCOM P116
Application Notes
MiCOM P116
CONTENTS
Protection of Underground and Overhead Lines
APPLICATION OF INDIVIDUAL PROTECTION FUNCTIONS
Earth and Phase Overcurrent Functions
Transformer Magnetizing Inrush (Inrush Blocking)
Busbar Protection on Radial Systems
Blocking Logic Function (Blocked Overcurrent Protection)
Protection of Silicon Rectifiers
Back-up Scheme using “Selective Transfer Tripping”
Remote Stand-By Protection Scheme
Example of Application for Earth Fault Protection Applied to Transformers
Switch On To Fault / Trip On Reclose Protection (Model A)
Selective scheme logic (Model A)
Setting Group Selection (Model A)
Negative Sequence Overcurrent Protection (Model A)
Broken Conductor Detection (Model A)
P116_EN_AP_A11 v2.7
(AP) 6-1
AP
AP
P116_EN_AP_A11 v2.7 Application Notes
(AP) 6-2
Description and Setting Guide of the Auto-Reclose Function (Model A)
Auto-reclose Output Information
MiCOM P116
Auto-reclose Logic Description
Auto-reclose Inhibit after Manual Closing
Signaling Reset after Close via 79
Circuit Breaker State Monitoring (Model A)
Circuit Breaker Condition Monitoring (Model A)
Circuit Breaker Condition Monitoring Features (Model A)
Setting the Number of Operations Threshold
Setting the Operating Time Threshold
Undercurrent Protection Function (Model A)
Circuit Breaker Failure Protection: CB Fail
Trip Circuit Supervision (Model A)
Trip Circuit Supervision Mechanism
Real time clock synchronization via opto-inputs (Model A)
Instantaneous Recorder (Model A)
Recapitulation of the Current Transformer's Characteristics
Application Notes P116_EN_AP_A11 v2.7
MiCOM P116 (AP) 6-3
Characterization of a Current Transformer
Equivalent diagram of a current transformer
How to calculate the rated burden, in VA, of a CT based on its characteristic quantities
Definition equivalence for common CTs
How to calculate the knee-point voltage Vk of a CT defined in class P
Consumption of MiCOM P116 Relays
Calculation of Required CT for Protection Relays
POSSIBLE CONNECTIONS OF CTs AT THE P116's INPUT
Connection to 3 Phase CTs + Core Balance CT
Core balance CT connected to the Earth Current Measurement Input (terminals A9 –
Connection to 2 Phase CTs + Core Balance CT
Earth Current Input Connected to the Summation of the 3 Phase CTs
AUXILIARY SUPPLY FUSE RATING (Model A)
FIGURES
AP
Figure 1: Model A - P116 single-line functional diagram (all options included) 7
Figure 2: Logic diagram for the phase stages
Figure 3: Inrush Blocking Logic
Figure 4: Blocked Overcurrent for Busbar Protection
Figure 6: Protection of silicon rectifiers
Figure 7: Matching curve to load and thermal limit of rectifier
Figure 8: Example of a back-up scheme using "selective transfer tripping" 20
Figure 9: MiCOM P116 relay used as back-up for a distance protection device 22
Figure 11: Cold Load Pick-Up Logic
Figure 13: Example of Local/Remote Application
Figure 14: Example of Local/Remote Application
Figure 15: TYPICAL SCHEME LOGIC
Figure 16: An example: Load Shedding and Auto-reclose after Load
Shedding logic. Separate inputs for: LS (AUX1) and AR after LS (AUX2) 33
Figure 17: Load Shedding and Auto-reclose after Load Shedding logic.
AP
P116_EN_AP_A11 v2.7 Application Notes
(AP) 6-4 MiCOM P116
Figure 19: Load Shedding and Auto-reclose after Load Shedding logic.
The same input for: LS (AUX1) and AR after LS (AUX2) (for example:
Input 1 configured to AUX1 and AUX2) - see Figure 18 35
Figure 16: Typical Auto-Reclose Sequence
Figure 17: Undercurrent Protection Logic
Figure 23: Trip Circuit Supervision Principle
Figure 24: Trip Coil Monitoring
Figure 25: Example 2: Trip Coil and Auxiliary Contact Monitoring
Figure 26: Example 3: Trip Coil and Auxiliary Contact Monitoring
Whatever the Position of the CB contacts
Figure 27: Example 4: Trip Coil and Auxiliary Contact Monitoring by using two
Figure 28: Example 4: Trip Coil and Auxiliary Contact Monitoring by using two
Figure 29: Definition of the Magnetizing Curve's Knee-Point
Figure 30: Equivalent diagram of a current transformer
Application Notes
MiCOM P116
1. INTRODUCTION
1.1 Protection of Underground and Overhead Lines
P116_EN_AP_A11 v2.7
(AP) 6-5
The secure and reliable transmission and distribution of power within a network is heavily dependent upon the integrity of underground cables and overhead lines, which link the various sections of the network together. Therefore the associated protection system must also provide both secure and reliable operation.
The most common fault conditions on underground cables and overhead lines are short circuit faults. These faults may occur between the phase conductors but will most often involve one or more phase conductors being short-circuited to the earth.
Faults caused by short circuits require the fastest clearance times but these should still allow for suitable co-ordination with other downstream protection devices.
Fault sensitivity is an issue common to all voltage levels. For transmission systems, towerfooting resistance can be high. Also, high resistance faults might be prevalent where lines pass over sandy or rocky terrain. Fast and discriminative fault clearance is required in these conditions.
The effect of fault resistance is more pronounced on lower voltage systems, resulting in potentially lower fault currents, which in turn increases the difficulty in the detection of high resistance faults. In addition, many distribution systems use earthing arrangements designed to limit the passage of earth fault current.
Earthing methods as such as resistance, Petersen coil or neutral-insulation make the detection of earth faults arduous. Special protection equipment is often used to overcome these problems.
Nowadays, the supply continuity of power distribution is of paramount importance.
On overhead lines, most faults are transient or semi-permanent in nature.
In order to increase system availability, multi-shot auto-reclose cycles are commonly used in conjunction with instantaneous tripping elements. For permanent faults it is essential that only the faulted section of the system is isolated. High-speed, discriminative fault clearance is therefore a fundamental requirement of any protection scheme on a distribution system.
Power transformers are installed at all voltage levels and have their own specific requirements with regard to protection. In order to limit the damage incurred by a transformer under fault conditions, fast clearance of phase to phase and phase to earth faults on the windings is a primary requirement.
Damage to electrical plant equipment such as transformers, cables and lines may also be incurred by excessive loading conditions, which lead directly to overheating of the equipment and subsequent damage to insulation. To protect against such fault conditions, protective devices must also provide thermal protection.
Uncleared faults, arising either from the failure of the associated protection system or of the switchgear itself, must also be considered. The protection devices concerned should be fitted with logic dealing with breaker failure and the upstream relays must be able to provide adequate back-up protection for such fault conditions.
Other situations may arise on overhead lines, such as broken phase conductors.
Traditionally, series faults have been difficult to detect.
With today's numerical technology, it is now possible to design elements that are responsive to such unbalanced system conditions and to subsequently issue alarm and trip signals.
On large networks, time co-ordination of the overcurrent and earth fault protection relays can often lead to problematic grading situations or, as is often the case, excessive fault clearance times. Such problems can be overcome by relays operating in blocked overcurrent schemes.
Due to its dual powering featuer, the P116 can be used as back-up protection of HV/MV transformers.
AP
AP
P116_EN_AP_A11 v2.7
(AP) 6-6
Application Notes
MiCOM P116
Before carrying out any work on the equipment, the user should be familiar with the contents of the Safety Guide, SFTY/4L M/E11 or later issue, or the safety and technical data section of the technical manual and also the ratings on the equipment rating label.
For safety reasons, no work must be carried out on the P116 until all power sources to the unit have been disconnected.
Application Notes
MiCOM P116
2. APPLICATION OF INDIVIDUAL PROTECTION FUNCTIONS
P116_EN_AP_A11 v2.7
(AP) 6-7
P116 have two models: model A and Model L.
Application section shows maximum software/hardware option. To see which functions are available in which model – refer to INTRODUCTION (P116/EN IT), GETTING STARTED
(P116/EN GS) and SETTINGS (P116/EN ST) chapters.
The following sections detail individual protection functions in addition to where and how they may be applied. Each section provides some worked examples on how the settings are applied to the relay.
CB
I, IN
USB port
Setting software S1 or Studio
Rear port
RS485 port
DCS system
Output for low energy CB coil charged in real time
(extreme fast charged)
Output for external flag indicator
(extreme fast charged)
Auxiliary power supply (Vx)
CT power supply
Internal energy for powering of electronic boards
Recording features
Fault recording:
20
Alarm recording:
5
Event recording:
200
Disturbance
Recorder: up to 6s
Counters
Start of protection recording: 5
79 86
I/O features
Outputs Relay:
RL1
Flag indicator:
TRIP.
Output Relays:
RL2-RL6
LEDs: 8
Binary Inputs: 6
Close and Trip functional keys
Watchdog contact
WD
Flag indicators:
4 optional.
50/51
50N
51N
49 46 46BC 50BF 37
AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS
- SOFT (Switch on to fault)
- Self Diagnostic
- Memorising of latched LEDs
and outputs relays (86)
- Blocking logic
- Cold Load Pick Up
- Selective Scheme Logic
- 4 Auxiliary timers
- CB Local/Remote
- CB Monitoring
- Time Synchronisation via
Binary Input
- Relay Maintenance Mode
- Remote Ctrl on Output
Relays
- Trip Circuit Supervision
- Peak and Rolling Demand
MEASUREMENTS
- Phase current
- Residual current
- Trip, start, alarm counters
- CB electrical operation
counter
- CB mechanical operation
counter
- Autoreclose counters
16x2 alphanumerical
LCD display
Function available for current above 0.2In (Ien) or when Vx (auxiliary voltage) is applied
Function available when vector IA+IB+IC+IN is greater than 0.7A
(for example: 0.28In + 0.28In + 0.28In + 0Ien) or Vx is applied
Function available even if supplying of P116 is carried from
CTs only but inputs must be triggered from an additional source of the power supply
Function available if Vx is present on P116 terminals
Figure 1: Model A - P116 single-line functional diagram (all options included)
P0912ENb
2.1 Earth and Phase Overcurrent Functions
MiCOM P116 relays provide definite and independent time-delayed overcurrent protection.
Each phase current and earth current input is associated with three stages.
The first and second timer stages can be set to definite time-delay or inverse time-delay using the IEC, IEEE, CO, RXIDG, BPN, RI and RECT curves. Their parameters are shown in the Technical Data chapter of this Technical Guide.
The third stages can be set as definite time-delay only.
Similarly, the earth fault elements has three different stages, that also can be set independently of the settings chosen for the phases.
The instantaneous stages are labeled “
I
>” for the first stage, “
I
>>” and “
I
>>>” for the second and third instantaneous stages respectively (“
I
N_1”, “
I
N_2” and “
I
N_3” for earth fault elements).
The time-delayed stages are labeled “t
I
>” for the first stage, “t
I
>>” and “t
I
>>>” for the second and third time-delayed stages respectively (“t
I
N_1”, “t
I
N_2” and “t
I
N_3” for the timedelayed earth fault stages).
The protection elements trip when the following conditions are realized:
A phase current exceeds the set overcurrent threshold
The relevant time-delay has elapsed
The blocking logic (if used) is not activated.
The following diagrams show the functionality for each stage.
AP
P116_EN_AP_A11 v2.7
(AP) 6-8
Application Notes
MiCOM P116
Start I>
Max I>
& IDMT/DT
tI>
Block.tI> Input
AP
Start I>>
Max I>>
& IDMT/DT
tI>>
Block.tI>> Input
Start I>>>
Max I>>>
& DT
tI>>>
Block.tI>>> Input
P0942ENa
Figure 2: Logic diagram for the phase stages
I
>,
I
>> and
I
>>>
2.1.1
2.1.2
With: Max
I
> = [
I
A>] OR [
I
B>] OR [
I
C>]
Max
I
>> = [
I
A>>] OR [
I
B>>] OR [
I
C>>]
Max
I
>>> = [
I
A>>>] OR [
I
B>>>] OR [
I
C>>>]
The logic associated with the earth fault stage is identical to the logic described above. The stages
I
> & t
I
>,
I
>> & t
I
>> and
I
>>> & t
I
>>> are respectively replaced by the stages
I
N_1 & t
I
N_1,
I
N_2 & t
I
N_2,
I
N_3 & t
I
N_3.
Thanks to the "Blocking Logic" function, it is possible to freeze the timer as long as the
"Block Logic" signal is active.
As soon as the blocking “Block Logic" signal drops, if the overcurrent value is still over the set threshold, the time-delay resumes using the value prior to the activation of the blocking function as its new initial value. This allows faster clearance of the fault after resetting of the
“Block Logic" signal.
Instantaneous function
As soon as a phase (or earth) timer stage starts running, the instantaneous output associated with that stage is activated. This output indicates that the protection element has detected a phase (or earth) fault and that the corresponding time-delay has started. This time-delay can be blocked via the associated "Block Logic" logic input. If this blocking input is activated by an output contact of a downstream relay, the logic that will lead to the trip command is then blocked only if the relay that is the closest to the fault can see and therefore eliminate the fault. This principle is known as «Blocking logic» or «Blocking». It is described in more detail in this document.
DMT timer stages
The three phase (earth) overcurrent stages can be assigned definite time-delays. The time to operate is equal to the set time-delay plus the time for the output contact to operate (typically about 30 ms, 20 ms for a current exceeding or equal to twice the threshold) and the time required to detect the overcurrent condition (maximum 20 ms at 50 Hz).
For DMT stages, a definite-time "tReset" reset timer is associated with the first phase o/c stage, and with the first and second earth fault stages.
Application Notes
MiCOM P116
2.1.3 IDMT timer stages
P116_EN_AP_A11 v2.7
(AP) 6-9
The first and the second phase (
I
>,
I
>>) and e/f (
I
N_1) overcurrent stages can be selected with an inverse maximum time (IDMT) characteristic.
The time-delay in relay operation is calculated with a mathematical formula that depends on the relay current and TMS (IEC and UK) or TD (IEEE and US) values.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
There are twelve inverse time characteristics available:
•
SI: Standard Inverse Time Characteristic (IEC/A)
VI: Very Inverse Time Characteristic (IEC/B)
EI: Extremely Inverse Time Characteristic (EC/C)
LTI: Long Time Inverse Characteristic (IEC)
STI: Short Time Inverse Characteristic (FR)
RC: Rectifier Characteristic (UK)
MI: Medium Inverse Time Characteristic (IEEE, IEC/D)
VI: Very Inverse Time Characteristic (IEEE, IEC/E)
EI: Extremely Inverse Time Characteristic (IEEE, IEC/F)
CO2 P20: Short Time Inverse Characteristic (US)
CO2 P40: Short Time Inverse Characteristic (US)
CO8: Inverse Characteristic (US)
RI: Electromechanical Inverse Characteristic
BNP Time Charactristic (EDF)
RXIDG Time Charactristic
The mathematical formulae and curves for the twelve Inverse Time characteristics available with the P116 are presented in chapter OP (“Operation”).
2.1.4
In menu of P116 it is possible to select if the curve has no limitation for greater current value, is blocked via DMT stages or is cut (the same time delay as for 20 x Is point for current above 20 x Is, where Is - current setting). Setting parameter: GLOBAL SETTINGS/ O/C
ADVANCED / IDMT interlock by DMT . Above setting is common for all IDMT stages.
Reset timer
The first two phase overcurrent stages [
I
>/t
I
>,
I
>>/t
I
>>] and the first earth fault stage
([
I
N_1/t
I
N_2] have a reset timer.
The value that is set for this reset timer corresponds to the minimum time during which the current value needs to be lower than 95% of the phase (or earth) threshold before the corresponding phase (or earth) time-delay is reset.
Note: This rule does not apply when the protection element is triggered.
When the protection element is triggered, the time-delay t
I
> (or t
I
N>) is immediately reset.
DMT stages have DMT reset timers only.
IDMT characteristics can be associated with either a DMT or an IDMT reset timer. This selection is made in the menu:
phase current: SETTING GROUP x/PROTECTION Gx /[50/51] PHASE OC Gx
/Reset Delay Type : 0:DMT or 1: IDMT
earth current: SETTING GROUP x/PROTECTION Gx /50/51N] E/GND FAULT
Gx/Reset Delay Type : 0:DMT or 1: IDMT
AP
AP
P116_EN_AP_A11 v2.7
(AP) 6-10
DMT Reset Timer
Application Notes
MiCOM P116
Type of timer associated with the first
& second phase (50/51 only) stages
DMT (see note below)
IDMT
DMT Reset Timer
0 ms to 600 s
0 ms to 600 s
For the first phase and earth overcurrent stages, the MiCOM P116 has a timer hold facility,
DMT tReset , which can be set to a definite time value or to an inverse time characteristic.
This may be useful in some applications, for example when grading with upstream electromechanical overcurrent relays which have inherent reset time-delays.
This timer hold facility is used to reduce fault clearance times and is also useful in situations where intermittent faults may be experienced. This can for example be the case on a plasticinsulated cable. In that case, the fault energy may cause the cable insulation to melt and reseal, thereby extinguishing the fault. This process repeats itself a couple of times giving a succession of fault current pulses, each of increasing duration with reducing intervals between the pulses, until the fault becomes permanent.
When the reset time of the overcurrent relay is instantaneous the relay will be repeatedly reset and unable to trip until the fault becomes permanent. By using the Timer Hold facility, the relay will integrate the fault current pulses, thereby reducing fault clearance time.
The MiCOM P116's reset timer DMT tReset can be found in the following menu cells:
•
SETTING GROUP x/PROTECTION Gx /[50/51] PHASE OC Gx /DMT tReset for the phase.
•
SETTING GROUP x/PROTECTION Gx /[50/51N] E/GND FAULT Gx /DMT tReset for the earth.
IDMT Reset Timer (IDMT Reset Characteristic)
This feature may be useful in certain applications, for example when grading with upstream electromechanical overcurrent relays, which have inherent reset time-delays. Setting the hold timer to a value other than zero, delays the resetting of the protection element timers for this period, thus allowing the element to behave similarly to an electromechanical relay.
Another possible situation where the timer hold facility may be used to reduce fault clearance times is where intermittent faults may be experienced. An example of this may occur in a plastic-insulated cable. In this application it is possible that the fault energy melts and reseals the cable insulation, thereby extinguishing the fault. This process repeats to give a succession of fault current pulses, each of increasing duration with reducing intervals between the pulses, until the fault becomes permanent.
When the reset time of the overcurrent relay is instantaneous, the relay will be repeatedly reset and unable to trip until the fault becomes permanent. By using the Timer Hold facility for IDMT characteristics the relay will integrate the fault current pulses, thereby reducing fault clearance time.
For IDMT it is possible to set the timer hold facility based on the following formulae:
IEC: t
=
RTMS
×
1
− tr
G
Gs p
IEEE and US: t
=
RTD
×
1
− tr
G
Gs p
Application Notes
MiCOM P116 where: t Reset time tr, p Constant (see table)
G
Value of the measured current
G s Value of the programmed threshold (pick-up value)
RTMS Reset time multiplier setting between 0.02 and 1.5.
RTD Reset time multiplier setting between 0.02 and 100.
2.1.5
P116_EN_AP_A11 v2.7
(AP) 6-11
Type of curve
US Short time inverse
US Short time inverse
Long time inverse
IEEE Moderately inverse (MI)
IEEE Very inverse (VI)
IEEE Extremely Inverse (EI)
IEC Standard Inverse Time (SI)
Standard
C02_P40
C02_P20
C08
IEEE
ANSI/IEEE
ANSI/IEEE
IEC/A
IEC Very Inverse Time (VI)
IEC Extremely Inverse Time (EI)
IEC Long Time Inverse (LTI)
FR Short Time Inverse (STI)
IEC/B
IEC/C
IEC
FR
UK Rectifier (Rect)
BNP EDF
UK
BNP EDF
RXIDG RXIDG
RI RI
Table 1: The value of “tr” for IDMT characteristics
Notes: tr
2.261
0.323
5.950
4.850
21.600
29.100
8.2
50.92
44.1
40.62
0
0
0
0
0
1. According to the IEEE and US standards, RTD should be equal to
TD. By separately setting the values for RTD and TD it is possible to adapt the reset time to a specific application.
2. Typically for IEC characteristic RTMS can be set equal to TMS.
2
2
2
2
2.4
3.03
0.4
2
2
2 p
2
2
2
2
6.45
Time-graded protection
Inverse definite minimum time relays are time graded in such a way that the relay closer to the fault operates faster than the upstream relays. This is referred to as relay co-ordination because if the relay nearest to the fault does not operate, the next relay will trip in a slightly longer time. The time grading steps are typically 400 ms, the operation times becoming progressively longer with each stage.
When difficulty is experienced in arranging the required time grading steps, the use of a blocked overcurrent scheme should be considered (described in § 2.14 of the Operation chapter, P116/EN OP).
Note : The dynamic measurement range is typically 600 times the minimum setting.
AP
AP
P116_EN_AP_A11 v2.7
(AP) 6-12
2.1.6 Earth fault protection
Earth fault (E/F) current is measured on the e/f input.
Application Notes
MiCOM P116
Depending on the connection of the terminals, the e/f input can power the P116 hardware
(terminals A7 and A8) or not power the P116 hardware (terminals A9 and A10).
Three stages are available:
I
N_1,
I
N_2 and
I
N_3. The first stage has IDMT or DT characteristics. The types of characteristics are the same as for
I
> (refer to section 2.1.3).
If the e/f CT is connected to terminals A7 and A8 and auxiliary voltage supply is not connected to terminals B1-B2, the current on the e/f input must be greater than 0.2
I en in order to power the P116 hardware.
2.1.7 Setting guidelines
When applying the overcurrent protection provided in the P116 relays, standard principles should be applied in calculating the necessary current and time settings for co-ordination
The Network Protection and Automation Guide (NPAG) textbook offers further assistance.
The example detailed below shows a typical setting calculation and describes how the settings are applied to the relay.
Assume the following parameters for a relay feeding an LV switchboard:
CT Ratio = 500 A/1 A
Full load current of circuit = 440 A
Slowest downstream protection = 100 A Fuse
The current setting employed on the P116 relay must account for both the maximum load current and the reset ratio of the relay itself:
I
> must be greater than: (440 A/0.95)/500 A = 0.9263
I n
I
> must be greater than: 0.9263
I n
For setting range 0.2-4
I n step is 0.01
I n, so the closest
I
> set value = 0.93
I n.
A suitable time-delay characteristic can now be chosen. When coordinating with downstream fuses, the applied relay characteristic should be closely matched to the fuse characteristic. Therefore, assuming IDMT co-ordination is to be used, an IEC Extremely
Inverse (EI) time characteristic would normally be chosen.
Finally, a suitable time multiplier setting (TMS) must be calculated and entered. .
MV/LV transformer application
Example:
Transformer:
Snom = 1000 kVA
Unom = 6 kV
CT ratio: 100 A/1 A
I nom
=
3
S nom
⋅
U nom
=
1000 kVA
3
⋅
6 kV
=
96 A
Where:
I - nominal current of the transformer nom
S - nominal power of the transformer nom
U - nominal phase-phase voltage nom
Application Notes
MiCOM P116
Short circuit
I
>>
Primary value setting: 1.5kA
I
>> current stage: I
>>
=
1500 A / 100 A
=
15 [ In ]
2.2
2.2.1
P116_EN_AP_A11 v2.7
(AP) 6-13
I
>>
_ set _ value : 15In
Where:
I
>>
_ set _ value : setting value of the short-circuit overcurrent stage
Overcurrent
I
>
Overcurrent stage
I
> should be set above the normal load current
If the primary setting value of
I
> is equal to 172 A, the set value is calculated as follows:
I
>
=
172 A / 100 A
=
1 .
72
⋅
In
Calculation of the required E/F settings
The setting value of E/F overcurrent protection should be greater (with safety margin) than the charging currents flowing in the protected line to prevent an earth fault in other parts of the system tripping the relay. The value of the safety coefficient depends on the application and accuracy of obtained earth fault current value (typically: 1.5 to 2.5).
Transformer Magnetizing Inrush (Inrush Blocking)
The inrush blocking function ensures protection stability during transformer energizing based on the presence of harmonic 2.
Either
I
>>/
I
N_2 or
I
>>>/
I
N_3 can be used as high-set instantaneous elements. Their design is such that they do not respond to the DC transient component of the fault current. The principle of operation allows the current settings to be set down to 35% of the prospective peak inrush current that will be absorbed by a transformer when it is energized. As a first approximation, the peak inrush current is given by the converse of the per unit series reactance of the transformer.
As an alternative, inrush blocking can be applied. This is discussed in the next section.
In applications where the sensitivity of overcurrent thresholds need to be set below the prospective peak inrush current, the inrush blocking function can be used to block the overcurrent, earth fault and negative sequence overcurrent stages. During transformer inrush conditions, the second harmonic component of the inrush current may be as high as
70%. In practice, the second harmonic level may not be the same for all phases during an inrush and therefore the relay will issue an Inrush Blocking signal for any phase above the set threshold. A setting of 15% to 20% for the Inrush harmonic 2 ratio can be applied in most cases. Care must be taken that it is not set too high, as inrush blocking may not operate for low levels of second harmonic current which may result in the O/C element tripping during transformer energization. Similarly if it is set too low, inrush blocking may prevent tripping for some internal transformer faults with significant second harmonic current
Overview
The Inrush Blocking function measures the ratio of second to fundamental harmonic currents. It can be used as “blocking logic” for
I
>,
I
>>,
I
>>>, SOTF,
I
N_1,
I
N_2,
I
N_3,
I
2>,
I
<, Broken Conduct, in cases where the harmonic 2 ratio is higher than the set threshold.
Indeed, inrush blocking functions will reset selected protection starts.
Two options are available ( GLOBAL SETTINGS/INRUSH BLOCKING menu):
1: Yes
2: Closing
If 1: Yes is selected, the minimum duration of the overcurrent stage inhibition ( T Inrush
Reset ) can be also set. This value depends on the transformer power transient inrush duration: between 0.1 second (for a 100 kVA transformer) to 1.0 second (for a larger unit).
AP
AP
P116_EN_AP_A11 v2.7 Application Notes
(AP) 6-14 MiCOM P116
It is used to avoid any maloperation during a fixed time period in case of too sensitive a setting. For example, this option is recommended for incoming feeders where the inrush current is caused by a transformer connected to an outgoing line. However, using the second harmonic can increase the tripping time in case of a fault, especially with DC component included. This option can also be used if the CB contacts are not assigned to any
P116 inputs (no information about CB closing).
If 2: Closing is selected, the protection element block is active after the CB closes until
Unblock Inrush Time elapses (this can be also set in the GLOBAL SETTINGS/INRUSH
BLOCKING menu column). If 1: Closing is selected, the minimum duration of the overcurrent stage inhibition ( T Inrush Reset ) can be also set (see above: 1: Yes ). This option can increase protection reliability, because inrush blocking is limited to cases where inrush current can appear (closing of CB). Therefore it can be used on outgoing lines with transformers. Note that for incoming feeders the inrush current can be also present when CB is closed and an outgoing line with a transformer is closing. In such a case the CB status of the incoming feeder is not changed but Inrush current can trip protection element. The
2: Closing option is not recommended for such an application.
2.2.2 Operation
For each of the three phases currents (
I
A,
I
B,
I
C), the harmonic restraint function compares the ratio of harmonic 2 to the fundamental with the set ratio (Harmonic 2 / Fundamental settable from 10 % to 50 % in steps of 1%).
The minimum fundamental current value required for operation of the Inrush Blocking function is 0.2
I n, and there is no upper limit to disable this feature. However, in transformer protection, this Inrush Blocking feature shall not control the high set overcurrent stage; this enables detection of all high current faults without inrush blocking.
Inrush blocking configuration offers two options:
1: Yes - The Inrush Blocking function will block the selected protection stages every time inrush conditions occur on the line (Ratio of measured 2nd Harmonics > Inrush H2 set ratio), and will remain active at least for the duration of T Inrush Reset . The tReset timer defines the minimum duration of overcurrent protection inhibition (0-200 s, settable). This timer starts as soon as an inrush current threshold picks up:
If the inrush condition lasts less than the set value for T Inrush Reset ., the selected overcurrent function will remain inhibited for the duration of tReset.
If the inrush condition lasts longer than the set value for T Inrush
Reset ., the selected overcurrent function will remain inhibited as long as the inrush condition is present.
2: Closing - The Inrush Blocking function will block the selected protection stages every time the CB closes (P116 closing command) until Unblock Inrush Time has elapsed and as long as the inrush conditions are present on the line (Ratio of measured 2nd
Harmonics > Inrush H2 set ratio). If 1: Closing is selected, the minimum duration of the overcurrent stage inhibition ( T Inrush Reset ) can be also set (see above: 1: Yes ).
The operating Inrush current (2 nd
Harmonic Ratio) is settable from 10% to 50% of the fundamental current.
Under inrush conditions, the following selectable protection stages can be blocked:
I
>,
I
>>,
I
>>>, SOTF,
I
N_1,
I
N_2,
I
N_3, Is2>,
I
<, Broken Conduct, if they are set to 3: Trip-Inrush
Bl .
Note: Inrush Blocking in P116 relays is not phase-selective. If an inrush condition occurs on any phase, the selected protection stages will be blocked in all 3 phases.
Application Notes
MiCOM P116
2.2.3 Principle (example for the
I
> protection element only)
Inrush Blocking? 1:Yes
Calculation for curents above
0.2In: IA2h, IB2h, IC2h
If IA<0.2In then IA2h=0%
If IB<0.2In then IB2h=0%
If IC<0.2In then IC2h=0%
MAX
{IA2h,
IB2h,
IC2h}
Inrush Blocking? 2:Yes,
Closing
HMI Close CB Order
2nd Harmonic
Ratio setting
GLOBAL SETTINGS
/INRUSH BLOCKING
&
RS485 Close CB Order
Front key Close CB Order OR
Unblock
Inrush Time
Pulse setting
GLOBAL SETTINGS
/INRUSH BLOCKING
Manual Close Input
&
Inrush
Reset Time
Pulse setting
GLOBAL SETTINGS
/INRUSH BLOCKING
OR
&
[79] Close CB Order
Start I> Threshold
IA, IB, IC
I> setting value
SETTING GROUP 1(2)
/PROTECTION/
{50/51] PHASE O/C G1(2)
Inrush detection (I2h/I1h)
&
P116_EN_AP_A11 v2.7
T
TIMER
0 tI> Time Delay
DMT/IDMT with DMT or IDMT
RESET
SETTING GROUP 1(2)
/PROTECTION/
[50/51N] E/GND FAULT G1
P0932ENb
(AP) 6-15
Figure 3: Inrush Blocking Logic
AP
AP
P116_EN_AP_A11 v2.7
(AP) 6-16
2.3 Busbar Protection on Radial Systems
Application Notes
MiCOM P116
The use of non-directional overcurrent relays to protect a busbar is based on the following hypotheses:
The network is a radial system,
The incoming and outgoing feeders are clearly defined, the incoming feeders always being considered as suppliers of energy and outgoing feeders as loads.
Under these circumstances, the busbar is effectively protected using the interlocking principle (Figure 4).
Incomer
I>/tI>
I>>/tI>>
I>>>/tI>>>
Trip
Back trip
Busbar
I>/inst.
I>>/tI>>
I>/inst.
I>>/tI>>
I>/inst.
I>>/tI>>
Feeder 1 Feeder 2
Feeder n
P0943ENa
Figure 4: Blocked Overcurrent for Busbar Protection
The instantaneous overcurrent signals of the protection relays on the feeders are grouped together and wired to the "Blocking logic" logic input of the relay protecting the incoming feeder. The blocking function is programmed to inhibit either the first or first two stages.
The third
I
>>> stage will operate at a high value (> 10
I n) with a short time-delay (< 60 ms).
If a fault appears on the system, the relay protecting the associated feeder will immediately
(in less than 30 ms) send a blocking command to the relay protecting the incoming feeder.
After the fault has been cleared (by opening the circuit breaker), the blocking command is withdrawn and the relay protecting the incoming feeder is unblocked. As the fault current is no longer present, the timer is reset.
If a fault appears on the busbar, the fault current exceeds by far the value of the third threshold (
I
>>>). As this third stage is not blocked by the blocking logic of the relays protecting the incoming feeders, the trip command is sent in less than 60 ms and the busbar is isolated.
Application Notes
MiCOM P116
2.4 Blocking Logic Function (Blocked Overcurrent Protection)
P116_EN_AP_A11 v2.7
(AP) 6-17
This type of protection can be applied to radial feeder circuits where there is little or no back feed. For parallel feeders, ring circuits or where there can be a back feed from generators, directional relays should be considered.
The blocking logic function allows the upstream IDMT relay to be blocked by the start output of a downstream relay that has detected the presence of a fault current above its threshold.
Thus both upstream and downstream relays can have the same current and time settings, and the blocking feature will automatically provide grading. If the CB failure protection is active, the blocking command on the upstream relay will be removed if the down-stream circuit breaker fails to trip.
Thus for a fault downstream from relay C, the start output from relay C will prevent relay B from operating and the start output of relay B will prevent relay A from operating. Therefore all 3 relays could have the same timer and current settings and grading would be obtained by the blocking signal received from a relay closer to the fault. This gives a constant, close time grading, but there will be no back-up protection in the event of pilot wires being shortcircuited.
In practice it is recommended to set the upstream relay to a value that is 10% higher than the downstream relay setting. This ensures that the downstream relay successfully blocks the upstream relay when required.
AP
Figure 5: Blocking Logic
The "Blocking Logic" functions are assigned in the SETTING GROUP x/ INPUT
CONFIGURATION Gx/ menu. Every protection element can be assigned a blocking function: Block.t
I
> , Block.t
I
>> , Block.t
I
>>> , Block.tSOTF
, Block.t
I
N> , Block.t
I
N_2 ,
Block.t
I
N_3 , Block.t
I
< , Block.t
I
2> , Block.tBrkn Cond , Block.
I therm , Block.AUX1
,
Block.AUX2
, Block.AUX3
, Block.tCB Fail , Block.[79] .
MiCOM P116 relays have separate blocking functions, which can be used to block every protection element, for example: Earth fault and phase overcurrent stages.
AP
P116_EN_AP_A11 v2.7
(AP) 6-18
2.5 Protection of Silicon Rectifiers
A B C N
Figure 6: Protection of silicon rectifiers
Application Notes
MiCOM P116
P0799ENa
Figure 7: Matching curve to load and thermal limit of rectifier
The rectifier protection feature is based upon the inverse time/current characteristic as used in the MCTD01 (Silicon Rectifier Protection Relay) and the above diagrams show a typical application.
Rectifier protection differs from the more traditional overcurrent applications in that many rectifiers can withstand relatively long overload periods without damage, typically 150% for
2 hours and 300% for 1 min.
The threshold
I
> should typically be set to 110% of the maximum allowable continuous load of the rectifier. The relay issues start indications when the setting of
I
> has been exceeded, but this is of no consequence, as this function is not used in this application. The rectifier curve should be selected as it allows for relatively long overloads even with
I
> set to 110%.
Application Notes
MiCOM P116
Typical settings for the TMS factor are:
Light industrial service TMS = 0.02
Medium duty service TMS = 0.1
P116_EN_AP_A11 v2.7
(AP) 6-19
Heavy duty traction TMS = 0.8
The high set threshold is typically set to 8 times the rated current as this ensures that HV AC protection will discriminate with faults covered by LV protection. However, it has been known for the high set threshold to be set to 4 or 5 times the rated current where there is more confidence in the AC protection device. Use of the thermal element to provide protection between 70% and 160% of the rated current could enhance protection. It is also common practice to provide restricted earth fault protection for the transformer feeding the rectifier.
AP
AP
P116_EN_AP_A11 v2.7
(AP) 6-20
2.6 Back-up Scheme using “Selective Transfer Tripping”
Application Notes
MiCOM P116
In this application, the relay protecting the incoming feeder can trip the circuit breaker of the faulty feeder via the watchdog contact of the relay protecting the faulty feeder.
Figure 8 illustrates this example:
Incomer
Busbar
OR
AND
Trip
P116
50/51
WD
P116
50/51 tI>>>
Trip
CB tI>>
Trip
CB
OR
Trip
P116
50/51
AND
WD
Feeder 1
Feeder n
P0944ENa
Figure 8: Example of a back-up scheme using "selective transfer tripping"
Thus, a fault occurring on a feeder can be cleared by tripping the circuit breaker of the faulty feeder even if the relay protecting this feeder has failed to operate. Without this function, the fault would normally be cleared by the opening of the circuit breaker of the incoming feeder.
This would lead to total disconnection of the affected busbar.
The relay protecting the incoming feeder has two time-delayed outputs available (among others):
•
3rd stage: t
I
>>> time-delay, at 60 ms (active stage for the high phase current faults).
•
2nd stage: t
I
>> time-delay, selectively longer than the third stage, i.e. 360 ms.
The output contact associated with the 2nd stage is wired in series with the watchdog contact of the downstream relays, so that it can activate the trip coil of the circuit breakers of the feeders. Regarding the output contact associated with the 2nd and 3rd stages, this contact is directly wired to the trip coil of the incoming feeder's circuit breaker.
Case n°1
→
all relays operate normally:
In this case, the watchdog contacts of all the relays are open.
Thus, for a phase fault on the busbar, stage t
I
>> or t
I
>>> of the P116 located on the incoming feeder will clear the fault.
For a phase fault on one of the feeder, the stages t
I
>> and t
I
>>> of the relay located on the incoming feeder being selectively set to higher values than the ones set for the phase o/c stages of downstream relays, the fault shall be cleared selectively by the relay of the faulty feeder (selectivity between the relay of the incoming feeder and relays of the outgoing feeders is ensured thanks to intervals of selectivity correctly chosen, or thanks to a suitable blocking scheme).
Application Notes
MiCOM P116
Case n°2
→
the relay supervising one of the feeders is faulty:
P116_EN_AP_A11 v2.7
(AP) 6-21
In this case, the watchdog contact of that relay is closed.
Thus, for a phase fault on the busbar, stages t
I
>> and t
I
>>> activate their associated output contacts. However, stage t
I
>> will clear the fault as its threshold has been set to a lower value than that of stage t
I
>>>.
For a phase fault on one of the ‘healthy’ feeders, stages t
I
>> and t
I
>>> of the relay located on the incoming feeder being selectively set to higher threshold values than the ones set for the phase o/c stages of the downstream relays, the fault shall be cleared selectively by the relay of the faulty feeder (selectivity between the relay of the incoming feeder and relays of the outgoing feeders is ensured thanks to intervals of selectivity correctly chosen or to a suitable blocking scheme).
For a phase fault on the feeder of the failed relay, the stage t
I
>> of the relay located on the incoming feeder operates via the watchdog contact of the faulty relay on the trip coil of the circuit breaker of the faulty feeder. This stage being selectively set to a value lower than the stage t
I
>>> (which operates directly on the coil of the incoming feeder circuit breaker), the fault is therefore selectively cleared.
AP
P116_EN_AP_A11 v2.7
(AP) 6-22
2.7 Remote Stand-By Protection Scheme
Application Notes
MiCOM P116
MiCOM P116 relays can be used as back-up for HV distance protection devices (Figure 9).
Depending on the type of selectivity required, the P116's 51/51N element needs to be timedelayed either as definite time or as inverse time. The time-delay t
I
>/t
I
N> is set to a value that is compatible with stages Z2 or Z3 (2nd and 3rd distance protection zones).
Busbar
Circuit
Breaker
Distance protection
21
P116
50/51
AP
Feeder
P0945ENa
Figure 9: MiCOM P116 relay used as back-up for a distance protection device
The Watchdog contact of the distance protection (on a numerical protection unit) can be wired to a MiCOM P116 relay to optimize the trip time.
Application Notes
MiCOM P116
2.8 1 ½ Breaker Scheme
P116_EN_AP_A11 v2.7
(AP) 6-23
For HV/EHV substations with 1½ circuit breaker arrangements (Figure 10), the zone
between the two circuit breakers and the switch section must be protected with a standard
ANSI 50 protection device.
The tripping time is an essential criterion to be considered when choosing this protection device. MiCOM P116 relays are perfectly suited for this application. The time-delay of the first stage (t
I
>) is set to a low value (typically 100 ms above the circuit breaker failure time).
This will allow the relay to be blocked by the close contact of the associated switch.
Circuit
Breaker
Circuit
Breaker
P116
50/51
Busbar
AP
Circuit
Breaker
Busbar
Contactor
Feeder
Figure 10: 1 ½ Breaker Scheme
P0946ENa
AP
P116_EN_AP_A11 v2.7
(AP) 6-24
2.9 Thermal Overload Protection
Application Notes
MiCOM P116
Thermal overload protection can be applied to prevent damages to the equipment of the electrical plant when operating at temperatures that are above the values designed for maximum withstand. A prolonged overloading causes excessive heating, which may result in premature deterioration of the insulation, or in extreme cases, insulation failure.
2.9.1
MiCOM P116 relays incorporate a current-based thermal replica, using load current to reproduce the heating and cooling of the equipment to be protected. The thermal overload protection element can be set with both alarm and trip stages.
Heating within any plant equipment, such as cables or transformers, is of resistive type (
I
²R x t). Thus, the quantity of heat generated is directly proportional to the current squared (
I
²).
The thermal time characteristic used in the relay is based on current squared, integrated over time.
MiCOM P116 relays automatically use the highest phase current as input information for the thermal model.
The equipment is designed to operate continuously at a temperature corresponding to its full load rating, where the generated heat is balanced by the heat dissipated through radiation etc. Over-temperature conditions therefore occur when currents in excess of the rating are allowed to flow for a certain period of time. It can be shown that temperatures during heating follow exponential time constants and a similar exponential decrease of temperature occurs during cooling.
In order to apply this protection element, the thermal time constant (Te) of the plant equipment to be protected is therefore required.
A thermal time constant for cooling (Tr) is available for motor protection applications.
The following sections will show that different plant items possess different thermal characteristics, due to the nature of their construction.
Time Constant Characteristic
This characteristic is used to protect cables, dry type transformers (e.g. type AN), and capacitor banks.
The thermal time characteristic is given by: e
− t
τ =
I
(
2 −
I
( k
×
−
I
(
2
I
FLC
2 p
)
)
2
)
Where: t
τ
I
I
FLC k
I
P
=
=
=
Tripping time, following application of the overload current,
I
Heating and cooling time constant of the protected plant equipment
Largest phase current
= Full load current rating (relay setting ‘Thermal Trip’: Itherm)
= 1.05 constant, allows continuous operation up to < 1.05
I
FLC
= Steady state pre-loading current before application of the overload
The tripping time varies depending on the load current carried before application of the overload, i.e. whether the overload was applied from “hot” or “cold”.
Application Notes
MiCOM P116
Mathematical formula applicable to MiCOM Relays:
The calculation of the tripping time is given by: t trip
= Te
I n
K
2 − θ
K
2 − θ trip
2.9.2
P116_EN_AP_A11 v2.7
(AP) 6-25
Where: t trip
= Tripping time (in seconds)
Te = Thermal time constant of the protected element (in seconds)
K = Thermal overload equal to
I eq
/(k*
I θ
>)
I eq
= Equivalent current corresponding to the R.M.S. value of the largest phase current.
I θ
> = Full load current rating given by the national standard or by the supplier. k
θ
=
=
Constant associated with the thermal state formula (1.05).
Initial thermal state. If the initial thermal state = 30% then
θ = 0.3
θ trip
= Trip thermal state. If the trip thermal state is set at 100%, then
θ trip = 1
The settings of these parameters are available in the menus:
PROTECTION G1/ [49] Therm OL
PROTECTION G2/ [49] Therm OL
The calculation of the thermal state is given by the following formula:
Θ
τ +
1
=
k
×
I eq
I
Θ >
2
1
− e
−
T e t
+ Θ
τ e
−
T e t
θ being calculated every 20ms.
Setting Guidelines
The current setting is calculated as:
Thermal Trip (
θ trip
) = permissible continuous loading of the plant equipment / CT ratio.
Typical time constant values are given in the following tables. The ‘Time Constant’ parameter is given in minutes.
Paper-insulated lead sheathed cables or polyethylene insulated cables are placed above the ground or in conduits. The table shows
τ
in minutes, for different cable rated voltages and conductor cross-sections (CSA):
CSA mm
2
25 - 50
70 - 120
150
185
240
300
6 - 11 kV 22 kV 33 kV
10
15
25
25
15
25
40
40
40 40 60
40 60
Time constant
τ
(minutes)
60
40
40
40
60
66 kV
-
60
60
60
60
90
AP
AP
P116_EN_AP_A11 v2.7
(AP) 6-26
Other plant items:
Application Notes
MiCOM P116
Dry-type transformers
Air-core reactors
Capacitor banks
Overhead lines
Time constant Te (minutes) Limits
40
60 - 90
40
Rating < 400 kVA
Rating 400 - 800 kVA
10
10
60
Cross section
≥
100 mm
2
Cu or 150mm² Al
Busbars
An alarm can be raised when reaching a thermal state corresponding to a percentage of the trip threshold. A typical setting might be ‘Thermal Trip’ = 70% of thermal capacity.
Application Notes
MiCOM P116
2.10 Cold Load Pick-Up (Model A)
P116_EN_AP_A11 v2.7
(AP) 6-27
The Cold Load Pick-up feature allows selected settings of MiCOM P116 relays to be changed to react to temporary overload conditions that may occur during cold starts. This condition may happen by switching on large heating loads after a sufficient cooling period, or loads that draw high initial starting currents.
When a feeder is energized, the current levels that flow for a period of time following energizing may differ greatly from the normal load levels. Consequently, overcurrent settings that have been applied to give short circuit protection may not be suitable during this period.
The Cold Load Pick-up (CLPU) logic raises the settings of selected stages for a set duration
(tCL). This allows the protection settings to be set closer to the load profile. Cold load pick-up cannot restart until the end of tCL duration. The CLPU logic provides stability, without compromising protection performance during starting.
The CLP can be started by a digital logic Input Cold Load PU ( Cold Load PU? 1: Cur+Input or Cold Load PU? 2: Input ) which can be assigned to 52a CB status or by current stages logic ( Cold Load PU? 1: Cur+Input ). If the Cold Load PU logic has to be triggered by current criteria only, Cold Load PU Input function must not be configured to any digital input. If this function is configured to selected input, both criteria will work in parallel way.
But the current criteria reset will be blocked if the Cold Load PU Input will be in the high state. So if Cold Load PU Input is in the high state (CB is closed) even if the current is below 10% In tCL timer will counts pulse time (P116 works on the Cold Load PU values).
The following diagram shows the logic start for CLPU:
MAX
IA, IB, IC tCL Reset via Input
I> setting value
SETTING GROUP 1(2)
/PROTECTION/
[50/51] PHASE O/C G1(2)
& &
&
&
Cold Load PU Input
Cold Load PU? 2:Input
Cold Load PU? 1:Cur.+Input
OR tCL
Pulse
SETTING GROUP
1(2)
/PROTECTION/
COLD LOAD PU G1 (I> setting value {see above}) x
(Cold Load PU Level {
SETTING GROUP
1(2)/PROTECTION / COLD LOAD PU G1(2))}
&
Current detection of CLPU
I< 5% In
T
TIMER
0
10s
Time Delay
I> 10% In
&
OR
&
&
Start I> Threshold
P0930ENc
Figure 11: Cold Load Pick-Up Logic
2.10.1 Example of Application for Earth Fault Protection Applied to Transformers
Where an earth fault relay is residually connected on the primary side of a delta-star transformer, no time-delay is required for co-ordination purposes, due to the presence of the delta winding. However, a nominal time-delay or stabilizing resistor is recommended, to ensure transient stability during transformer energizing.
The CLPU logic may be used in a similar manner to that previously described for the motor application.
This method will not provide stability in the event of asymmetric CT saturation (as a result of an unbalanced fault condition). In this case, use a stabilizing resistor.
AP
AP
P116_EN_AP_A11 v2.7
(AP) 6-28
2.11 Switch On To Fault / Trip On Reclose Protection (Model A)
Application Notes
MiCOM P116
2.11.1 General
In some feeder applications, fast tripping may be required if a fault is still present on the feeder after the reclosure of the circuit breaker (Close on to fault).
Some faults may not be cleared after a reclose due to the fact that the conditions that led to the fault have not been removed from the feeder after a reclosing cycle or a manual trip, or due to earthing clamps left on after a maintenance visit. In these cases, it may be desirable to clear the fault more quickly, rather than wait for the DMT or IDMT trip time-delay associated with the involved protection to elapse.
In the case of a CB being manually closed, a switch on to an existing fault may occur. This situation is particularly critical because the overcurrent protection element would not clear the fault until the set time-delay has elapsed. It is then desirable to clear the fault as fast as possible.
Enabling and setting the SOTF (Switch On To Fault) function can be done under the
SETTING GROUP x/PROTECTION Gx/SOTF submenu.
Crossing of SOTF threshold will initiate the SOTF function.
2.11.2 SOTF description
The following signals can activate the SOTF function:
closing by Input (Manual Close Input) ,
manual closing controlled by the HMI, ( Close key order ),
front panel communication control ( HMI order ),
rear communication control ( Rear Com order ),
The diagram below illustrates this functionality.
Inrush detection (I2h/I1h)
SOTF? 3: Trip-Inrush Bl
Block.tSOTF Input
&
SOTF? 0: disabled
Start SOTF Threshold
Rear Com order
Close key order
HMI order
Manual Close Input
OR
52 Unblock.
SOTF Time
Pulse
(0-200s)
GLOBAL SETTINGS/
CIRCUIT BREAKER/
&
&
Start SOTF
SOTF? 2: Alarm
T
TIMER
0 tSOTF>
Time Delay
(0-200s)
SETTING GROUP 1(2)
/PROTECTION/
[50/51] SOTF G1(G2)
&
Alarm
Alarm Recorder tSOTF
&
INSTANTENOUS
Recorder
RESET LEDs OR
&
SOTF? 4: Trip-Latch
SOTF? 1: Trip
SOTF? 3: Trip-Inrush Bl
OR
&
Protect. Trip
Protect. Trip pulse
Fault Recorder
P0921ENb
Figure 12: SOTF Logic Diagram
When at least one of the selected signals has been detected, a 52 Ublock.SOTF Time
( GLOBAL SETTINGS/ CIRCUIT BREAKER/ 52 Unblock.SOTF Time submenu) timer starts to activates SOTF protection element.
Application Notes P116_EN_AP_A11 v2.7
MiCOM P116 (AP) 6-29
Once this timer ( 52 Ublock.SOTF Time ) is active and SOTF thresholds have been crossed, the tSOTF settable time-delay starts. This settable time-delay is particularly useful in applications where fault selectivity in stages two or three is required.
This time-delay ( tSOTF ) is also useful in cases where serious transients may be present, where the three poles of the CB do not all close at the same time and in cases where the CB may not close instantaneously. tSOTF can also be considered as a trip time-delay that substitutes itself to the trip time-delay associated with the crossed threshold so that the tripping time is accelerated.
If a trip due to switch on to fault occurs during the reclaim time of the ARC, the trip will be final and the ARC will be locked.
If the SOTF stage is reset before the settable time-delay tSOTF elapses, the SOTF function is reset.
AP
AP
P116_EN_AP_A11 v2.7
(AP) 6-30
2.12 LOCAL / REMOTE MODE (Model A)
Application Notes
MiCOM P116
2.12.1 General
The goal of this feature is to make it possible to block commands sent remotely through communication networks (such as setting parameters, control commands, etc.), so as to prevent any accidents or maloperation during maintenance work performed on site.
A digital input labeled “ Local CTRL mode ” is assigned to this feature. In Local mode, only the synchronizing time signal, Remote CTRL mode and Comm. Oder are allowed.
The local mode can also be set in default CTRL mode cell. The Local/Remote mode state is displayed in this cell.
2.12.2 Setting
Meaning of “ Local ” mode is clear: the control is possible locally only so remote commands
(via RS485) are rejected by P116.
The meaning of “ Remote ” mode can differ depends on the custom of users or application.
There are two possible definition:
“ Remote ” mode means that remote or local control are possible
“ Remote ” mode means that remote control is possible only (local control is rejected by
P116)
Customization of “ Remote ” mode definition is applied by selection of proper setting in the
GLOBAL SETTINGS/CIRCUIT BREAKER/ Remote CTRL Mode cell:
0: Remote only – Local control via an input or/and the HMI or/and the Close/Trip key are blocked.
1: Remote + LOC – Local and Remote control are permitted.
Note: The auto-recloser is not blocked via the Local/Remote Mode.
When the “Local” input is energized, all remote commands are blocked. When the “Local” input is de-energized, remote control commands are accepted.
If local/remote switching has to be done outside of the P116, the output configuration can be as follows (Figure 13):
the protection trip is assigned to the Prot.Trip pulse output,
the remote close command is assigned to the Close CB Order output,
the remote trip command is assigned to the Trip CB Order output.
P116 DC VDC V+
REMOTE: opened
LOCAL: closed
Switch
REMOTE/LOCAL
Local CTRL Mode
RL2
Trip CB Order
RL3
Close Order
RL1
Protection
Trip (pulse)
Figure 13: Example of Local/Remote Application
Manual Trip CB
Coil
Close CB Coil
Protection Trip
CB Coil
P0947ENa
Application Notes P116_EN_AP_A11 v2.7
MiCOM P116 (AP) 6-31
If separate output contacts for remote and local commands are required because external
Local/Remote switching is used, commands sent remotely should be assigned to:
Comm.Order1
for a remote trip command,
Comm.Order2
for a remote close command,
The protection trip is assigned to the Prot.Trip pulse output.
The Local Trip (HMI, Input, Trip key) is assigned to the Trip CB Order output.
The Local Close (HMI, Input, Trip key) and the Auto-reclose function are assigned to the
Close CB Order output.
Example for the above application:
In the following scheme (Figure 14), the user may assign the different signals to different relays: “TRIP” signal may be assigned to the trip relay ( Prot.Trip pulse and Trip CB Order) , the Comm.Order1
(remote trip) signal to the auxiliary relay number 2, the Close CB Order signal to the auxiliary relay number 3 and the Comm.Order2
(remote close) to the auxiliary relay number 4.
DC V+
P116
REMOTE: 1,2 closed; 7,8 closed; 3,4 open; 5,6 open
LOCAL: 3,4 closed; 5,6 closed; 1,2 open; 7,8 open
Switch
REMOTE/LOCAL
RL2
Comm.Order 1
(remote trip) 1
Local Trip
Local Close
3
5
7
6
8
2
4
RL4
Comm.Order 2
(remote close)
RL3
Close Order
(AR close)
RL1
Protection
Trip (pulse)
P0948ENa
Figure 14: Example of Local/Remote Application
AP
AP
P116_EN_AP_A11 v2.7
(AP) 6-32
2.13 Selective scheme logic (Model A)
Application Notes
MiCOM P116
The following figure describes the use of non-cascade protection schemes using the start contacts from downstream relays to block operation of upstream relays.
In the case of Selective Overcurrent Logic (SOL), the start contacts are used to increase the time-delays of upstream relays, instead of blocking them. This provides an alternative approach to achieving a non-cascade type of overcurrent scheme. It may be more familiar to some utilities than the blocked overcurrent arrangement.
Figure 15: TYPICAL SCHEME LOGIC
The SOL function temporarily increases the time-delay settings of the second and third stages of phase overcurrent, derived and measured earth fault and sensitive earth fault protection elements. This logic is initiated by energizing the appropriate logic input ( SEL1 or
SEL2 ) as selected in SETTING GROUP x/INPUTS CONFIGURATION Gx menu.
To allow time for a start contact to initiate a change of setting, the time settings of the second and third stages should include a nominal delay. Guidelines for minimum time settings are identical to those given for blocked overcurrent schemes.
The tSel1 and tSel2 timers can be independently set from 0 to 200 s ( SETTING GROUP x/PROTECTION Gx/LOGIC SELECT. Gx menu).
Application Notes
MiCOM P116
2.14 Auxiliary timers (Model A)
P116_EN_AP_A11 v2.7
(AP) 6-33
Four auxiliary timers tAux1, tAux2, tAux3, tAux4 are available and associated with Aux1,
Aux2, Aux3, Aux4 logic inputs (refer to SETTING GROUP x/INPUTS CONFIGURATION Gx menu). When these inputs are energized, the associated timers start and, when the set time has elapsed, the associated output relays close (refer to SETTING GROUP x/OUTPUT
RELAYS CONFIGURATION Gx menu). Time-delays can be independently set from 0 ms to
600 s ( SETTING GROUP x/PROTECTION Gx/AUX TIMERS Gx menu).
AUX function can be configured to:
Trip CB ( Protect.Trip
, Prot.Trip pulse , Disturbance and Fault Recorder, TRIP LED and
FLAG)
Alarm signal ( Alarm , Alarm LED),
Trip CB with Inrush blocking ( Protect.Trip
, Prot.Trip pulse , Disturbance and Fault
Recorder, TRIP LED and FLAG)
Trip CB with latching up to signaling reset ( Protect.Trip
, Prot.Trip pulse , Disturbance and Fault Recorder, TRIP LED and FLAG)
Load Shedding triggered via AUX input ( Trip CB Order), tAUX is time-delay for trip,
Auto-reclose after Load Shedding triggered via AUX input (high level); tAUX is timedelay for close (Close CB Order) ,
Auto-reclose after Load Shedding triggered via AUX input (low level); tAUX is time-delay for close (Close CB Order) ,
For more details about: Trip CB, Alarm signal, Trip with Inrush blocking, Trip CB with latching refer to the Operation Chapter (P116/EN OP)
AUX and tAUX signal can be assigned to LEDs or outputs.
AUX1 , AUX2 and AUX3 can be blocked via binary input assigned to the Block.AUXn
output.
Binary Inputs can be configured to AUX5 and AUX6. These AUX functions have no timers and can be used as logic bridge between inputs and: LEDs and/or outputs.
An example of Load Shedding and Auto-reclose after Load Shedding logic is shown: Figure
16.
AP
MiCOM
P92x tf> tf<
MiCOM
P116
Input 1
AUX1
(LS)
Input 2
AUX2
(AR/ LS Hi)
MiCOM
P116
Input 1
AUX1
(LS)
Input 2
AUX2
(AR/ LS Hi)
PJ015ENb
Figure 16: An example: Load Shedding and Auto-reclose after Load Shedding logic.
Separate inputs for: LS (AUX1) and AR after LS (AUX2)
AP
P116_EN_AP_A11 v2.7
(AP) 6-34
Rear Com order
Close key order
HMI order
Manual Close Input
Protection Trip
OR
Application Notes
AUX1
MiCOM P116
CB closed (52A)
AUX1? 5: Load Shedding
AUX1 Input
CB opened (52B)
&
T
TIMER
0 tAUX1
SETTING GROUP
1(2)
/PROTECTION/
AUX TIMERS G1(2)
With 20ms delayed reset
&
&
OR
Trip CB Order tAUX1
T
TIMER
0 tOpen Pulse min +150ms
GLOBAL SETTING
/CIRCUIT BREAKER
AUX2? 6: AR after LS Hi
AUX2 Input
&
T
TIMER
0 tAUX2
SETTING GROUP
1(2)
/PROTECTION/
AUX TIMERS G1(2)
Close CB Order tAUX2
AUX1
PJ013ENb
Figure 17: Load Shedding and Auto-reclose after Load Shedding logic. Separate inputs for: LS (AUX1) and auto-reclose after LS (AUX2) (for example: Input 1 configured to AUX1, Input 2 to AUX2) – see Figure 16
MiCOM
P92x tf<
MiCOM
P116
Input 1
AUX1 (LS) &
AUX2 (AR/ LS Lo)
MiCOM
P116
Input 1
AUX1 (LS) &
AUX2 (AR/ LS Lo)
PJ015ENb
Figure 18: An example: Load Shedding and Auto-reclose after Load Shedding logic.
Separate inputs for: LS (AUX1) and auto-reclose after LS (AUX2)
Application Notes
MiCOM P116
Rear Com order
Close key order
HMI order
Manual Close Input
Protection Trip
OR
P116_EN_AP_A11 v2.7
(AP) 6-35
AUX1
CB closed (52A)
AUX1? 5: Load Shedding
AUX1 Input
CB opened (52B)
&
T
TIMER
0 tAUX1
SETTING GROUP
1(2)
/PROTECTION/
AUX TIMERS G1(2)
With 20ms delayed reset
&
&
OR
Trip CB Order tAUX1
T
TIMER
0 tOpen Pulse min +150ms
GLOBAL SETTING
/CIRCUIT BREAKER
T
TIMER
0
AUX2? 6: AR after LS Lo
AUX2 Input
& tAUX2
SETTING GROUP
1(2)
/PROTECTION/
AUX TIMERS G1(2)
Close CB Order tAUX2
AUX2
PJ914ENb
Figure 19: Load Shedding and Auto-reclose after Load Shedding logic. The same input for: LS (AUX1) and AR after LS (AUX2) (for example: Input 1 configured to
AUX1 and AUX2) - see Figure 18
AP
AP
P116_EN_AP_A11 v2.7
(AP) 6-36
2.15 Setting Group Selection (Model A)
Application Notes
MiCOM P116
MiCOM P116 relays have two protection setting groups called PROTECTION G1 and
PROTECTION G2. Only a one group is active at any time.
If a group is used in an application it is possible to remove the other group from the menu in order to simplify the setting procedure. If one group only is chosen the relay uses Group 1 even if the other parameters are set to Group 2 (Inputs, Menu, Remote Group Setting).
The selection of the number of groups is done at GLOBAL SETTINGS/SETTING GROUP
SELECT/ Number of Groups: 1: One Group or 2: Two Groups.
If 1: One Group is selected, the SETTING GROUP 2 column and the setting group cell are hidden in menu.
Switching between the groups can be done via:
a selected binary input assigned to the Setting Group 2 logic input ( SETTING
GROUP x/INPUTS CONFIGURATION Gx submenu),
the relay front panel interface ( GLOBAL SETTINGS/SETTING GROUP SELECT/
Setting Group: 1: Group1 or 2: Group2 ),
through the communications port (refer to Mapping Database for detailed information).
Switching between setting groups can be done even while a protection function is active (no timers are resetting).
The user can check which one of the setting groups is active looking in the OP
PARAMETERS menu: Active Set Group cell.
The user can also assign the active group ( Setting Group x function) to an output relay
( SETTING GROUP x/OUTPUT RELAYS CONFIGURATION Gx ) or to an LED ( SETTING
GROUP x/LEDs CONFIGURATION G1 ).
Setting group change via a digital input
It is possible to change the setting group by energizing a digital input (on level).
If the setting group switchover is done via a binary input, the change from Group 1 to
Group 2 is executed after the set time-delay: t Change Setting G1->G2 ( GLOBAL
SETTINGS/SETTING GROUP SELECT ). The switch from Group 2 back to Group 1 is instantaneous.
Switch between Active Groups via a Binary Input
When powering up the relay, the selected group (Group 1 or Group 2) corresponds to the state of the logic input assigned to Setting Group 2 . This means:
A – Reverse Inp.Logic
= 0 and Setting Group 2 = 1
( SETTING GROUP x/INPUTS CONFIGURATION Gx submenu),
If the programmed logic input starts being supplied with +V, then after the t Change Setting
G1->G2 time-delay the active group will be G2.
If the programmed logic input is not supplied with +V, then the active group will be G1.
B – Reverse Inp.Logic
= 1 and Setting Group 2 = 1
( SETTING GROUP x/INPUTS CONFIGURATION Gx submenu),
If the programmed logic input is supplied with +V, then the active group will be G1.
If the programmed logic input stops being supplied with +V, then after the t Change Setting
G1->G2 time-delay the active group will be G2.
Application Notes
MiCOM P116
Notes:
P116_EN_AP_A11 v2.7
(AP) 6-37
1. Binary Input configuration is associated with both Setting Groups, so that if in a Setting Group the selected binary input is assigned to
Setting Group 2 , in the other group it must be set to Setting Group 2 as well, otherwise no switch will occur.
2. If the P116 is powering up (from the currents or the auxiliary voltage) and Group 2 is selected via a binary input, the t Change
Setting G1->G2 time-delay is ignored (changing to setting group 2 is instantaneous – without time-delay).
3. The setting group switch is based on the level of the binary input.
So as long as Setting Group 2's logic signal is high, the P116 uses
Setting Group 2.
Switch between Active Groups via the Menu or a Remote Command (RS485, USB)
By using the relay front panel interface it is possible to change the active setting group:
1: Group1 or 2: Group2 (menu cell: GLOBAL SETTINGS/SETTING GROUP SELECT/
Setting Group ).
Above menu cell is common for changing from panel interface and via remote command
(RS485 or USB).
It means that if the GLOBAL SETTINGS/SETTING GROUP SELECT/ Setting Group menu cell is set to 1: Group1 and the remote setting group 2 command is executed, the value of menu cell: GLOBAL SETTINGS/SETTING GROUP SELECT/ Setting Group will be changed to 2: Group2 value (Active group: 2).
Setting group 1 will be applied if:
1: Group1 is set in the GLOBAL SETTINGS/SETTING GROUP SELECT/ Setting
Group menu cell from the relay's front panel interface, or
the remote setting group 1 command is executed. The value of the GLOBAL
SETTINGS/SETTING GROUP SELECT/ Setting Group menu cell will then be changed to 1: Group1 .
WARNING: If the digital input has been assigned to the setting group change, it is not possible to change the setting group via remote communications. If changing via
Menu or RS485 is required ensure that no input is assigned to Setting Group 2 .
Priority
The detailed logic table for setting group selection is shown below:
Binary Input Setting
Group 2
Not configured
Not configured
G1
G1
G2
G2
Front Panel and
Remote Setting
G1
G2
G1
G2
G1
G2
Active Group
G1
G2
G1
G1
G2
G2
Note: If a setting group change initiated by a remote command has not been effected due of priority settings, that command is ignored (not recorded in the P116's logic for the future, when priority settings allow changing).
It is possible to assign an Active Group state to an output contact by setting the output contact to the Setting Group x output ( SETTING GROUP x/OUTPUT RELAYS
CONFIGURATION Gx .
If Active Group signaling is required, some LEDs should be assigned to the Setting Group x function ( SETTING GROUP x/LEDs CONFIGURATION Gx ).
AP
AP
P116_EN_AP_A11 v2.7
(AP) 6-38
2.16 Maintenance Mode
This menu allows the user to check the operation of the protection functions.
Application Notes
MiCOM P116
It is possible to set following Maintenance mode options (settings):
•
“ No ” - Maintenance mode is disabled. All window cells below are hidden
( Maintenance mode is the latest cell in COMMISIONING column)
•
“ Yes,outp.trips
” - Maintenance mode is enabled. In this mode all test cells in
COMMISIONING column are shown. During tests outputs are energized.
•
“ Yes,outp.block
” - Maintenance mode is enabled and all test cells in
COMMISIONING column are shown. In this mode, the high state of output functions are ignored (control of outputs are blocked).
This option allows the user to check the operation of the protection functions without actually sending any external command (Tripping or signalling).
Depends on the rear protocol selected in menu, transmission of information to SCADA is blocked (Modbus RTU) or sent (IEC 103) with additional information to know that P116 is in
Maintenance mode (refer to Communication chapter and EN 60870-5-103 standard).
Changing of setting from “ No ” to “ Yes,….
” from the front panel activate this mode for 5 minutes only. After this time the option is automatically switched to “ No ”.
The selection of the maintenance mode is possible by logic input (the level), control command (rear or front port), or by front panel interface. The maintenance mode is terminated by:
•
Low state of logic input assigned to Maintenance mode function,
•
Control command which activate this mode (rear command or setting: “ Yes,….
”) and by turning off the power supply.
Note: Maintenance rear command is available in Modbus protocol only
When this menu is activated (set to: “ Yes,outp.trips
” or “ Yes,outp.block
”), the Alarm led is lit. Additionally it is possible to configure Maintenance Mode to programmable LED.
In “ Yes,outp.block
” case, all the output contacts are blocked, and no command can be issued to these contacts, even if a protection threshold associated with one of these output contacts has been crossed. (If a protection threshold is crossed, all associated LEDs will be ON, even the TRIP LED, if protection element is set to Trip ).
Application Notes
MiCOM P116
2.17 Negative Sequence Overcurrent Protection (Model A)
P116_EN_AP_A11 v2.7
(AP) 6-39
In traditional phase overcurrent protection schemes, overcurrent thresholds must be set above the maximum load current levels. This limits sensitivity of the relay. Most protection schemes also use an earth fault element based on residual current, which improves sensitivity for earth faults. However, it can happen that some faults occur and stay undetected by such schemes.
Any unbalanced fault condition will produce negative sequence current. Thus, a negative phase sequence overcurrent element can detect both phase-to-phase and phase-to-earth faults.
This section describes how negative phase sequence overcurrent protection may be applied in conjunction with standard overcurrent and earth fault protection in order to solve some application problems.
•
Negative phase sequence overcurrent protection is more sensitive to resistive phaseto-phase faults than phase overcurrent elements, which may not operate.
•
In some applications, an earth fault relay may not be able to detect a residual current because of the configuration of the network. For example, an earth fault relay connected on the delta side of a delta-star transformer is unable to detect earth faults on the star side. However, negative sequence current will be present on both sides of the transformer in any fault condition, independently of the transformer configuration.
Therefore, negative phase sequence overcurrent element may be used to provide time-delayed back-up protection for any uncleared asymmetrical faults.
•
Where fuses are used to protect motors on rotating machines, a blown fuse produces a large amount of negative sequence current. This is a dangerous condition for the machine because negative phase sequence current generates overheating. Then, a negative phase sequence overcurrent element may be used to back-up motor protection relays.
•
It may also be required to trigger an alarm to announce the presence of negative phase sequence currents in the system. Operators are then prompted to investigate the cause of the unbalance.
The negative phase sequence overcurrent elements have a current pick up setting,
I
2>, and can be time-delayed using configurable timer t
I
2>.
I
2> stages can be set under the SETTING GROUP x/PROTECTION G1 (2)/[46] NEGATIVE
SEQ. O/C menu column.
The current pick-up stage
I
2> must be set to a value that is higher than the normal negative phase sequence current because of the normal unbalance conditions on the network. This can be done practically during the commissioning, using the MEASUREMENTS menu of the relay to display the negative phase sequence current value. Then, this value has to be increased by 20%.
Where negative phase sequence element is used to clear particular cases of uncleared asymmetric faults, the stage setting have to be calculated based on a fault analysis of that particular system, due to the complexities involved. However, to ensure that the protection element will operate, the current pick-up value has to be set to approximately 20% below the lowest calculated negative phase sequence fault current for a specific remote fault.
It is essential to set correctly the time-delay associated with this function. It should also be noted that this element is used primarily as a back-up protection to other protective devices or to provide an alarm. Therefore, this function is usually set with a long time-delay.
•
•
Care must be made to ensure that the time-delay is set above the operating time of any other protection device (at minimum fault level) present on the system and that may react to unbalanced faults, such as:
•
Phase overcurrent elements
Earth fault elements
Broken conductor elements
AP
AP
P116_EN_AP_A11 v2.7
(AP) 6-40
•
Negative phase sequence influenced thermal protection elements
Application Notes
MiCOM P116
The t
I
2> time-delay associated with the
I
2> stage can be set under the menu SETTING
GROUP x/PROTECTION G1 (2)/[46] NEGATIVE SEQ. O/C .
2.18 Broken Conductor Detection (Model A)
Most of the faults that affect a power system occur between one phase and the earth or between two phases and the earth. These faults are shunt faults and are caused by lightning discharges and other overvoltages generating flashovers. They may also arise from birds on overhead lines or mechanical damage on underground cables, etc.
Such faults lead the current to increase appreciably and therefore they can easily be detected in most applications. Open circuit faults are a different type of faults that can happen in electrical networks. These faults can be caused by broken conductors, blown fuses or maloperation of a pole of a circuit-breaker.
Series faults will not lead to an increase in phase current and therefore they cannot easily be detected by common overcurrent relays. However, this type of fault produces an unbalance that creates negative phase sequence current, which can be detected.
The use of negative phase sequence overcurrent is then recommended to detect such faulty conditions. However, on lightly loaded lines, the value of the negative sequence current caused by a faulty condition may be very close to, or even inferior, to the full load steady state unbalance generated by CT errors, load unbalances, etc. As a consequence, a negative sequence protection element would not work for low level of loads.
As a solution, the MiCOM P116 have a protection element that measures the ratio between the negative and the positive phase sequence current (
I
2/
I
1). By using this ratio rather than only the measured
I
2, the relay will be able to detect a fault condition independently of the load level on the power system, since the ratio remains approximately constant whatever the variations in load current. It is then possible to have a more sensitive setting.
Note: The Broken Conductor function is inhibited if the value of the current flowing in each of the three phases is below Brkn Cond I< block undercurrent threshold (factory setting: 10% of the nominal current).
Setting Guidelines
On single point earthed power systems, there is a low zero sequence current flow and the ratio
I s2/
I s1 that flows is close to 100%. On power systems with multiple earthing,
(assuming that the impedances in each sequence system are equals), the ratio
I
2/
I
1 will be equal to 50%.
It is possible to calculate the ratio
I
2/
I
1 corresponding to various system impedances, according to the following equations:
I
1F
=
Z
E
1
Z
2 g
(Z
+Z
1
2
+Z
0
)
Z
0
+Z
2
Z
0
I
2F
=
Z
1
Z
2
–E
+Z
1 g
Z
0
Z
0
+Z
2
Z
0
Where:
E g
= Power System Voltage
Z
0
= Zero sequence impedance
Z
1
= Positive sequence impedance
Z
2
= Negative sequence impedance
Therefore:
I
2F
I
1F
=
Z
Z
0
0
+Z
2
As a consequence, for an open circuit in a particular part of the system,
I
2/
I
1 can be determined from the ratio between the zero sequence and the negative sequence impedance. It must be noted however that this ratio may vary depending on the location of
Application Notes P116_EN_AP_A11 v2.7
MiCOM P116 (AP) 6-41 the fault. It is therefore desirable to apply a setting that is as sensitive as possible.
Practically, the levels of standing negative phase sequence current present on the system guide the choice of this minimum setting. A system study or the use of the relay's measurement data during commissioning are two ways to determine this minimum setting.
If the latter method is chosen, it is important to record measurements during maximum load conditions, to ensure that all single-phase loads are taken into account.
A time-delay (tBCond) is necessary to ensure co-ordination with other protective devices.
2.18.1 Setting Example
The following information comes from a the relay commissioning report;
I
FLC
= 500 A
I
2= 50 A
Then:
I
2/
I
1 = 50/500 = 0.1
To include some margin and tolerate load variations, it is typical to set this value 200% above this result: Therefore, RATIO
I
2/
I
1 = 20%
Set tBCond to 60 s to allow short circuits to be cleared by time-delayed protection elements.
AP
AP
P116_EN_AP_A11 v2.7
(AP) 6-42
2.19 Description and Setting Guide of the Auto-Reclose Function (Model A)
Application Notes
MiCOM P116
2.19.1 Introduction
An analysis of faults on overhead line network has shown that:
•
•
80-90% of faults are transient in nature, the remaining 10-20% of faults are either non-permanent (arcing faults) or permanent.
A transient fault is a self-clearing ‘non-damage’ fault. This type of fault can be isolated and cleared by the immediate tripping of one or more circuit breakers, and does not reappear when the line is re-energized. The most common causes of transient faults are lightning, insulator flashover, clashing conductors and debris blown by the wind.
The initial trip might not clear a non-permanent or permanent fault, and the use of the reclosing sequence could be necessary in order to clear it. A small tree branch falling on the line could cause a non-permanent fault. Permanent faults could be caused by broken conductors, transformer faults, cable faults or machine faults, which must be located and repaired before the supply can be restored.
Most of the time, if the faulty line is immediately opened, and the fault arc is allowed sufficient time to de-ionize, reclosing the circuit breakers will result in the line being successfully re-energized. Auto-reclosing schemes are used to automatically reclose a switching device once a time-delay started after the CB has opened has elapsed.
On HV/MV distribution networks, the Auto-reclose function is used mainly for radial feeders where system stability problems do not generally arise. Using the auto-recloser minimizes outage time and reduces operating costs.
Automatic reclosing allows a substation to operate unattended: the number of visits to manually reclose a circuit breaker is substantially reduced. This feature constitutes therefore an important advantage for substations supervised remotely.
On circuits using time-graded protection, the auto-recloser allows the use of instantaneous
(fast) protection ( Fast O/C Trip function in SETTING GROUP x/PROTECTION Gx/[79]
AUTORECLOSE Gx menu) to issue a high speed first trip. With fast tripping, the duration of the power arc resulting from an overhead line fault is reduced to a minimum, thus lessening the chance of damage and of the transient fault developing into a permanent fault. To avoid maloperation because of transients, it is possible to assign a short time-delay to the fast trip:
Fast O/C Trip Delay setting ( SETTING GROUP x/PROTECTION Gx/[79] AUTORECLOSE
Gx menu column) above the typical transient time value. The fast trip can be associated with phase-to-phase faults ( Fast O/C Trip) and/or earth faults ( Fast E/Gnd Trip ), separately for every shot in the auto-reclose sequence. If in Fast O/C Trip configuration the setting for chosen trip shot is ' 0 ' , the trip is executed after the time-delay of the protection element. If it is set to ' 1 ' , the time-delay set in the Fast O/C Trip Delay menu cell is applied. In some regions the typical setting of the fast trip for a 2-shot AR is set:
Fast O/C Trip (trip shots): 00011 (The first and second trips with Fast O/C Trip Delay to reduce to minimum the resulting power arc; The third – final – trip after the time-delay of the protection element to ensure the grading in the power system – trip selectivity)
Fast E/GND Trip (trip shots): 00000 (alls trips re executed after the time-delays of the protection elements).
Fast O/C Trip – refers to all O/C stages in the PHASE O/C menu column:
I
>,
I
>>,
I
>>>.
Fast E/GND Trip – refers to all E/GND stages in the PHASE E/GND menu column:
I
N_1,
I
N_2,
I
N_3 .
Fast O/C (E/GND) Trip Delay is associated with a DMT characteristic even if the protection element is set to an IDMT characteristic. For the fast trip the reset time-delay of the protection element is not applied.
Using a short time-delay prevents the blowing of fuses and reduces circuit breaker maintenance by eliminating pre-arc heating when clearing transient faults.
The figure below shows an example of 4 auto-reclose cycles (maximum numbers of allowed cycles) until the final trip (tD1, tD2, tD3, tD4 = dead times 1, 2, 3 and 4, tR = Reclaim time).
Application Notes
MiCOM P116
Current
P116_EN_AP_A11 v2.7
(AP) 6-43
Open
(1st trip shot )
Open
(2nd trip shot)
Close
(1st close shot)
Close
Open
(3rd trip shot)
(2nd close shot)
Open
(4th trip shot)
Close
(3rd close shot)
Open
(Final Trip)
Close
(4th close shot)
I threshold
I nominal
T tD1 T<tR tD2 T<tR tD3 T<tR tD4 T<tR
FAULT
Time
P0949ENa
Figure 20: Typical Auto-Reclose Sequence
When short time-delay protection is used with auto-reclosing, the scheme can be arranged to block the instantaneous element after the first trip. Therefore, if the fault persists after reclosing, time-graded protection will issue discriminative tripping with fuses or other protection devices, resulting in the isolation of the faulted section. However, for certain applications, where the majority of the faults are likely to be transient, it is not uncommon to allow more than one instantaneous trip before instantaneous protection stops being applied or the timedelay for fast trip is set.
Some schemes allow a number of re-closings and time-graded trips after the first instantaneous trip, which may result in the burning out and clearance of non-permanent faults. Such an approach may also be used to allow fuses to operate in teed feeders where the fault current is low.
Any decision to apply the Auto-reclose function would be influenced by all known data about the frequency of transient faults (for instance feeders which consist partly of overhead lines and partly of underground cables). When a significant proportion of the faults are permanent, the advantages of auto-reclosing are small, particularly since re-closing on to a faulty cable is likely to compound the damage.
The auto-reclose function has four inputs that can be assigned to the auto-reclosing logic.
These inputs can be mapped to opto-isolated inputs in the SETTING GROUP x/PROTECTION Gx/INPUT CONFIGURATION menu. External contacts can then be wired to these inputs and influence the auto-recloser scheme. These four logic inputs are:
one external CB Faulty signaling,
two external starting commands,
one external blocking command.
AP
AP
P116_EN_AP_A11 v2.7 Application Notes
(AP) 6-44 MiCOM P116
The following table gives the “AUTOMAT.CTRL/Inputs” menu assigned to the auto-reclose logic input.
External CB faulty signaling
External starting commands
External starting commands
INPUT
CONFIGURATION
Gx submenu:
CB FLT Ext.Sign.
AUTO-RECLOSE Gx submenu enabled with:
AUX1
Trip )
AUX2
Trip )
(Note: AUX1 timer should be set to
(Note: AUX2 timer should be set to
Close Shot ? 4321
tAUX1 1111
(‘1’ – means that closing is enabled)
Close Shot ? 4321
tAUX2 1111
(‘1’ – means that closing is enabled)
[79] ADVANCED
SETTING submenu enabled with:
CB FLT Monitor.?
1:Yes
External blocking command
Block 79
2.19.1.1 External CB Fail signaling
Block.via Input?
1: Yes
Most of circuit breakers provide one trip-close-trip cycle. A time-delay is necessary for the
CT to return to its nominal state (for example, the spring that allows the circuit breaker to close should be fully charged). The state of the CB can be checked using an input assigned to the CB FLT Ext.Sign.
function. If, on completion of the tCB FLT ext time ( GLOBAL
SETTINGS/CIRCUIT BREAKER submenu), the CB FLT ext (Alarm) indicates a failed state of the CB, a lockout occurs and the CB remains open.
2.19.1.2 External Starting Commands
Two independent and programmable inputs (AUX1 and AUX2) can be used to initiate the auto-reclose function from an external device (such as an existing overcurrent relay). These logic inputs may be used both independently and in parallel with the overcurrent elements.
Notes: 1. The input must be assigned to an AUXx function ( SETTING
GROUPx/INPUT CONFIGURATION Gx ),
2. AUXx must be set to Trip ( SETTING GROUP x/PROTECTION
Gx/AUX TIMERS Gx/AUXx?
) and time-delay tAUXx must be configured (instantaneous: tAUXx set to 0 s),
3. The tAUXx Close Shot cell must be set for every cycle (Close shot).
2.19.1.3 Internal and External Blocking Commands
The auto-recloser can be blocked by an internal or an external control. It can be used when a protection is needed without requiring the use of the auto-recloser function.
The external block is the Block [79] input.
The internal block can be a final trip, a number of [79] rolling demand valid or an [79] conflict.
A typical example is on a transformer feeder, where the Auto-reclose may be initiated from the feeder protection but need to be blocked from the transformer protection side.
Application Notes
MiCOM P116
2.19.2 Auto-reclose Output Information
P116_EN_AP_A11 v2.7
(AP) 6-45
The following output signals can be mapped to an LED (see SETTING GROUP x /LEDS
CONFIGURATION Gx menu) or to output relays (see SETTING GROUP x/OUTPUT
RELAYS CONFIGURATION Gx menu) in order to provide information about the status of the auto-reclose cycle:
Auto-reclose cycle in progress
Final Trip
Internal block
External block
Auto-reclose successful
The following table gives the SETTING GROUP x /LEDS CONFIGURATION Gx and the
SETTING GROUP x/OUTPUT RELAYS CONFIGURATION Gx menus used to assign the auto-reclose output signal.
Auto-reclose in progress
Final Trip
Internal block
External block
Auto-reclose successful
2.19.2.1 Auto-reclose in progress
LEDs menu
79 in Progress
79 Trip Final
79 Lockout
79 Blocked
79 Success.
Output relays menu
79 in Progress
79 Trip Final
79 Lockout
79 Blocked
79 Success.
The “Auto-reclose in progress” signal is present during the complete reclosing cycles from protection initiation to the end of the reclaim time or lockout.
2.19.2.2 Final trip
The "Final trip" signal indicates that a complete auto-reclose cycle has been performed and that the fault has been cleared.
The "Final trip" signal can be reset after a manual closing of the CB after the settable Inhibit
Time t
I
on Close ( GLOBAL SETTINGS/ [79] ADVANCED SETTING ) time-delay or reset via a Reset Command
2.19.3 Auto-reclose Logic Description
The auto-reclose function makes it possible to automatically control the CB's reclosing cycles
(two, three or four shot cycle, settable using the Close Shot ? parameter – separate for each O/C and E/GND protection element ( SETTING GROUP x/PROTECTION Gx/[79]
AUTO-RECLOSE Gx menu).
Dead times for all the shots (reclose attempts) can be independently adjusted.
The number of shots is directly related to the type of faults likely to occur on the system and the voltage level of the system (for instance medium voltage networks).
The Dead Time (tD1, tD2, tD3 and tD4) and the minimum drop-off time start when the CB has tripped (when the 52a input has dropped off – Start Dead t on 1: CB trips or the protection element has reset – Start Dead t on 0: Protect.Reset
configuration option).
The Dead Time is set to initiate the auto-recloser when the circuit breaker is opened.
At the end of the relevant dead time the close command ( Close CB Order ) is executed and the CB supervision timer is started. The length of this timer is equal to: tClose Pulse
( GLOBAL SETTINGS/CIRCUIT BREAKER ) + 150 ms. If the CB is not closed after this timedelay, the auto-recloser is locked out and Alarm is issued ( Alarm CB Time Monitor ).
The reclaim time ( Reclaim Time tR ) starts when the CB has closed. If the circuit breaker does not trip again, the Auto-reclose function resets at the end of the reclaim time.
AP
AP
P116_EN_AP_A11 v2.7 Application Notes
(AP) 6-46 MiCOM P116
If a protection element operates during the reclaim time, the relay either advances to the next shot programmed in the auto-reclose cycle, or it locks out (see Inhib.Trip
function description).
The total number of reclosures is displayed in the RECORDS/ COUNTERS/
AUTORECLOSE COUNTER menu cell.
2.19.4 Auto-reclose Inhibit Trip
The trip inhibit is used for following cases:
-
e/f protection in neutral-insulated or compensated systems. The A/R can clear a nonpermanent fault in the first cycles. If it will be permanent fault, there will be no the final trip up to reset of the protection trip. application where for example the setting for the I> stage covers more than the protected zone, so that the [79] can clear faults downstream too, but the final trip will be executed by the downstream relay or a fuse, therefore in the upstream relay, tI> should be inhibited – waiting for tI>> trip of the downstream relay).
Note: for this case Fast Trip O/C function can be used too (see below).
It is recommended to set another protection stage with setting for Alarm only, to inform that this fault was not cleared by autorecloser so it’s still present (tripping from this protection element is inhibited). For above case when the auto-reclose is successful, the reset of inhibition is applied after reset of protection stage (current below the stage value).
For another case when during inhibition of protection element, another protection element
(set to run [79]) makes a trip after going to the next cycle (the next A/R close command is executed) the inhibition is reset and the further action depends on the configuration:
if in the next cycle this protection element is still set with inhibition, the protection element is still inhibited
if in the next cycle this protection element is not set with inhibition, but the fault is still not cleared, this protection element will trip CB (If another protection element moves autoreclose to the next cycle, the inhibition is removed automatically and [79]logic checks configuration for the next [79] shot).
2.19.5 Auto-reclose Inhibit after Manual Closing
The Inhibit Time t
I
on Close timer ( GLOBAL SETTINGS/ [79] ADVANCED SETTING) can be used to block the auto-reclose cycle being initiated after the CB has been manually closed onto a fault. The Auto-reclose is blocked for the duration of Inhibit Time t
I
on Close after a manual CB Closure (The blocking indication: [79] blocked , the reason of blocking:
[79] Tempor.Block
).
2.19.6 Recloser lockout
If a protection element operates during the reclaim time, following the final reclose attempt, the relay will lockout and the auto-reclose function will be disabled until the lockout condition is reset.
The lockout condition can be reset by a manual closure after the Inhibit Time t
I
on Close timer elapses.
The auto-recloser can also be locked out using a CB FLT Ext.Sign.
input. This information can be issued from the "not charged" or "Low gas pressure" indications of CB springs.
•
•
Note that the auto-recloser can also be locked out by:
•
The fact that the CB does not open after the tBF delay (CB Fail) elapses,
An operating time longer than the set thresholds,
Local or remote manual Close or Open command when the auto-reclose is in progress,
•
The Rolling Demand function detects too many auto-reclose shots.
In the lockout condition the ALARM with the cause: ALARM [79] Lockout is displayed up to reset of the lockout condition.
Application Notes P116_EN_AP_A11 v2.7
MiCOM P116 (AP) 6-47
2.19.7 CB monitoring logic detects abnormal CB position (opened and closed, or not opened and not closed) for longer than set: Max CB Close or Max CB Open time.
2.19.8 Setting Group Change
During the auto-reclose cycle, if the relay receives a command to switch setting groups, it is executed immediately upon the end of the current A/R cycle.
2.19.9 Rolling demand
This specific counter avoids frequent operations of a CB in case of intermittent faults.
The number of shots can be set from 2 to 100 in the cell Max cycles Nb Rol.Demand
, settable over a time period ( GLOBAL SETTINGS/ [79] ADVANCED SETTING /Time period
Rol.Demand
) from 1 min to 24 hours.
The rolling demand is used when a defined number of successful recloses are performed over a defined time. If it is happened auto-reclose function is Lockout and he ALARM with the cause: ALARM [79] Roll.Demand is displayed up to reset the lockout condition.
If after Alarm [79] Rolling Demand signaling, the lockout condition reset is applied, the recorded number of rolling demand shots are cleared
2.19.10 Signaling Reset after Close via 79
In the GLOBAL SETTINGS/ [79] ADVANCED SETTING menu it is possible to set the signaling reset after a close command executed by the auto-recloser. If Signaling Reset is set to 1: Close via 79 , after the auto-recloser's close shot (confirmed by the 52a CB status), signaling (LEDs, display) of the last trip before the close shot is reset:
Latched LEDs
Trip information on the P116's front panel
Electromagnetic Flag Indicators on the Front Panel
Latched outputs
This function signals the final trip only and clears signaling if the CB remains closed (Autoreclose is successful). This function is recommended if the P116 is integrated into a SCADA system or if the substation is rarely supervised by maintenance personnel. In this case it is not necessary to clear signaling if the fault has disappeared and the line is healthy.
Note: Reset of signaling and of latched outputs can be done using the
General resetting function.
This configuration can be set in the GLOBAL SETTINGS/LOC submenu:
LEDs Reset: o 0: Manual only (via Inputs, HMI
key, Remote Reset command) o 1: Start protect.
(Start of the protection element set to Trip)
Ltchd Outp. Reset: o 0: Manual only (via Inputs, HMI
key, Remote Reset command) o 1: Start protect.
(Start of the protection element set to Trip)
The Manual only option prevents a close command from being issued without readout of the cause of trip by maintenance personnel. It reduces the risk to switch on to fault.
The Start protect option allows signaling of the latest trip only.
AP
AP
P116_EN_AP_A11 v2.7
(AP) 6-48
2.19.11 Setting Guidelines
Application Notes
2.19.11.1 Number Of Shots
There is no perfect rule to define the number of shots for a particular application.
MiCOM P116
In medium voltage systems it is common to use two or three auto-reclose shots, and, for specific applications, four shots. Using four shots, the final dead time can be set to a time long enough to allow thunderstorms to end before the final reclosure. This scheme prevents unnecessary lockout caused by consecutive transient faults.
Typically, the first trip, and sometimes the second, are caused by the instantaneous protection element. Since 80% of faults are transient, further trips will be time-delayed, and all will have increasing dead times so as to clear non-permanent faults.
In order to determine the required number of shots, the first factor is the ability for the circuit breaker to perform several trip-close operations in a short time and the effect of these operations on the maintenance period.
If a moderate percentage of non-permanent faults are present in a system, two or more shots are justified. If fused ‘tees’ are used and the fault level is low, the timer of the fuses may not discriminate with the main IDMT relay: several shots are useful. This would not warm up the fuse to such an extent that it would eventually blow before the main protection element operated.
2.19.11.2 Dead Time Setting
Load, circuit breaker, fault de-ionizing time and protection reset are taken into consideration when setting the dead time.
2.19.11.3 Minimum Drop-Off Time Setting
If an electromagnetic relay is used (working on the principle of disc in the electromagnetic field due to eddy current generated in the disc), an additional dead time (Min Drop-off Time), depending of the trip cause, is settable.
This function includes the choice to select an IDMT curve on the relay's reset time, setting the drop-off time on phase and neutral auto-reclose cycles.
This drop-off time blocks the next cycle if the current one has not elapsed.
A new cycle can start if both the dead time and tReset have elapsed.
Application Notes
MiCOM P116
Reset time with AR and electromechanical relay
- Today treset
P116_EN_AP_A11 v2.7
(AP) 6-49
- Evolution treset proposition
Including and IDMT curve after the trip and start the new cycle after the dead time and
IDMT reset finish.
Trip time
Upstream relay
Trip
Upstream relay
Trip time
Downstream relay
Trip
Trip time
Downstream relay
Trip Trip
Note:
Trip 1st cycle Trip 1st cycle Trip 2nd cycle
P0906ENa
This function is currently used with an IDMT curve.
If dead time > drop-off time, the relay will close the CB at the end of the dead time.
If dead time < drop-off time, the relay will close the CB at the end of the drop-off time.
AP
AP
P116_EN_AP_A11 v2.7
(AP) 6-50
2.19.11.3.1 Load
Application Notes
MiCOM P116
It is very difficult to optimize the dead time due to the great diversity of loads on a system.
However, it is possible to study each type of load separately and thereby be able to define a typical dead time.
The most common types of loads are synchronous or induction motors and lighting circuits.
Synchronous motors tolerate only extremely short interruptions of supply without loss of synchronism. In practice, the dead time should be sufficient to allow the motor no-volt device to operate. Typically, a minimum dead time of 0.2-0.3 second is recommended.
Induction motors, on the other hand, can withstand supply interruptions, up to a maximum of
0.5 second and re-accelerate successfully. In general dead times of 3-10 seconds are normally satisfactory, but there may be special cases for which additional time is required to allow the reset of manual controls and safety devices.
Loss of supply of lighting circuits, such as street lighting, can lead to important safety problems (car circulation). Regarding domestic customers, the main consideration is linked to the inconvenience caused.
The number of minutes lost per year to customers will be reduced on feeders using the autorecloser and will also be affected by the dead time settings used.
2.19.11.3.2 Circuit Breaker
For high speed reclosing, the minimum dead time of the power system depends on the minimum time-delay imposed by the circuit breaker during a trip and reclose operation.
Since a circuit breaker is a mechanical device, it has an inherent contact separation time.
This operating time for a modern circuit breaker is usually within the 50-100 ms range, but could be longer with older designs.
After a trip, the mechanism needs some time to reset before applying a close pulse. This reset time varies depending on the circuit breaker, but lasts typically 0.1 second.
Once the circuit breaker has reset, the breaker can start to close. The period of time between the energization of the closing mechanism and the making of the contacts is called closing time. Because of the time constant of a solenoid closing mechanism and the inertia of the plunger, a solenoid closing mechanism may take 0.3 s. A spring-operated breaker, on the other hand, can close in less than 0.2 second.
Where high speed reclosing is required, for the majority of medium voltage applications, the circuit breaker mechanism dictates itself the minimum dead time. However, the fault deionizing time may also have to be considered.
High speed reclosing may be required to maintain stability on a network that has two or more power sources. For high speed reclosing, the system disturbance time should be minimized using fast protection, <50 ms, such as distance or feeder differential protection and fast circuit breakers < 100 ms. Fast fault clearance can reduce the time for the fault arc to deionize.
To ensure stability between two sources, a dead time of less than 300 ms is typically required. Considering only the CB, this minimum time corresponds to the reset time of the mechanism plus the CB closing time. Thus, a solenoid mechanism is not adapted for high speed reclosing due to the fact that the closing time is generally too long.
2.19.11.3.3 Fault De-ionizing Time
For high speed reclosing, the time to de-ionize faults may be the most important factor when considering the dead time. This is the time required for the ionized air to disperse around the fault location so that the insulation level of the air is restored. This time may be around the following value:
De-ionizing time = (10.5 + ((system voltage in kV)/34.5)) / frequency
For 66 kV = 0.25 s (50 Hz)
Application Notes
MiCOM P116
For 132 kV = 0.29 s (50 Hz)
P116_EN_AP_A11 v2.7
(AP) 6-51
2.19.11.3.4 Protection Reset
It is essential that the protection device fully resets during the dead time, so that correct time discrimination is maintained after reclosing on to a fault. For high speed reclosing, instantaneous protection reset is required.
Typical 11/33 kV dead time settings in the UK are as follow:
1st dead time = 5 - 10 seconds
2nd dead time = 30 seconds
3rd dead time = 60 - 100 seconds
4th dead time (uncommon in the UK, however used in South Africa) = 60 - 100 seconds
2.19.11.4 Reclaim Time Setting
The following factors influence the choice of the reclaim time:
•
Supply continuity - Large reclaim times can result in unnecessary lockout for transient faults.
•
Fault incidence/Past experience - Small reclaim times may be required where there is a high incidence of lightning strikes to prevent unnecessary lockout for transient faults.
•
Charging time of the spring or resetting of electromagnetical induction disk relay - For high speed reclosing, the reclaim time may be set longer than the spring charging time to ensure that there is sufficient energy in the circuit breaker to perform a trip-close-trip cycle. For delayed reclosing, this setting is of no need as the dead time can be extended by an extra CB healthy check window time if there is insufficient energy in the CB. If there is insufficient energy after the check window time the relay will lockout.
•
Switchgear Maintenance - Excessive operation resulting from short reclaim times can mean shorter maintenance periods. A minimum reclaim time of 5 s may be needed to give sufficient time to the CB to recover after a trip and close before it can perform another trip-close-trip cycle.
The reclaim time must be long enough to allow any time-delayed protection leading the autorecloser to operate. Failure to do so can cause the auto-recloser to reset too soon and the reactivation of the instantaneous protection.
If that were the case, a permanent fault would look like a sequence of transient faults caused by repeated auto-recloses. Applying protection against excessive fault frequency lockout is an additional precaution that can solve this problem.
It is possible to obtain short reclaim times to reduce the number of CB lockouts by blocking the reclaim time from the protection start signals. If short reclaim times are to be used, then the switchgear rating may dictate the minimum reclaim time.
Sensitive earth fault protection is used to detect high resistance earth faults. The time-delay of such protections is usually a long time-delay, typically about 10-15 s. If auto-reclosing is caused by SEF protection, this timer must be taken into account when deciding the value of the reclaim time, if the reclaim time is not blocked by an SEF protection start signal.
Sensitive earth faults, caused by a broken overhead conductor in contact with dry ground or a wood fence are rarely transient faults and may be dangerous to people.
It is therefore common practice to block the auto-recloser using the sensitive earth fault protection element and to lockout the circuit breaker.
Where motor-wound spring closed circuit breakers are used, the reclaim time must be at least as long as the spring winding time for high speed reclosing to ensure that the breaker can perform a trip-close-trip cycle.
A typical 11/33 kV reclaim time is 3-10 seconds, this prevents unnecessary lockout during thunderstorms. However, times up to 60-180 seconds may be used.
AP
AP
P116_EN_AP_A11 v2.7
(AP) 6-52
2.19.11.5 Auto-reclose Setting Guideline
2.19.11.5.1 General Setting
Application Notes
MiCOM P116
SETTING CONDITION FOR THE A/R FUNCTIONALITY
SETTING GROUP x/PROTECTION Gx / [79] AUTO-RECLOSE Gx
Autoreclose?
Dead Time tDx , where x – number of cycle after a trip during A/R
1: Enabled Enabling the Auto-reclose function
See 2.22.2 The time-delay between CB opening via the trip command and reclose command via the A/R.
These values must be set according to the application.
Reclaim Time tR
Fast O/C Trip is activated.
Fast O/C Trip Delay
Fast E/Gnd
for every trip when the A/R
Trip
A/R is activated. for every trip when the
See 2.22.4 The time between CB closure via the reclose command and reset of the Autoreclose function (ready to the next fault from the first cycle). This value must be set according to application.
54321
00000
' 0 ' - means that the overcurrent trip before the A/R reclosing shot will occur according to the time-delay set in the protection element submenu (Fast Trip function is not applied)
' 1 ' - means that the overcurrent trip before the reclosing shot will occur according to the DMT time-delay and
Fast E/Gnd Trip Delay – not according to the time-delay set in the protection element submenu (Fast Trip function is applied).
The default value is 00000 .
0s
54321
00000
Time-delay for Fast Trip function. The time-delay set to avoid transients impacting on selectivity. The fast tripping reduces de-ionization time.
The default value is 0 s.
' 0 ' - means that the e/f trip before the
A/R reclosing shot will occur according to the time-delay set in the protection element submenu (Fast Trip function is not applied)
' 1 ' - means that the e/f trip before the reclosing shot will occur according to
DMT time-delay and Fast E/Gnd Trip
Delay – not according to the time-delay set in the protection element submenu
( Fast Trip function is applied).
The default value is 00000 .
Fast E/Gnd Trip Delay 0s Time-delay for Fast Trip function. The time-delay is set to avoid transients impacting on selectivity. Fast tripping reduces de-ionization time.
The default value is 0 s.
Application Notes
MiCOM P116
SETTING GROUP x/PROTECTION Gx / [79] AUTO-RECLOSE Gx
Close Shot ?
Freely settable the number of Autoreclose cycles (closing shots), set separately for each protection element: t
I
>, t
I
>>, t
I
>>>, t
I
N_1, t
I
N_2, t
I
N_3, tAUX1, tAUX2
Inhibit Trip
Freely settable the inhibit of the trip after closing command issued via the A/R, set separately for each protection element: t
I
>, t
I
>>, t
I
>>>, t
I
N_1, t
I
N_2, t
I
N_3, tAUX1, tAUX2
4321
0111
4321
0000 tI>, tI>>, tI>>>, tIN_1, tIN_2, tIN_3, tAUX1, tAUX2
P116_EN_AP_A11 v2.7
(AP) 6-53
Max number cycle: 4 cycles.
' 0 ' - means that after a trip issued by a protection element, the A/R will be blocked – no reclose command will be executed.
' 1 ' - means that after a trip issued by a protection element the A/R will close CB
(closing shot will be executed).
If the protection element is set: 1111 – it means that 4 cycles are set. If 0011 – it means that 2 cycles are set.
The default value is 00000 . This value must be set according to the application.
Freely settable the inhibit of the trip after closing command issued via the
A/R, set separately for each protection element:
Inhibit Trip setting:
0: means that after close via the
A/R, the protection element trip will be not inhibited (function is disabled).
1 : means that after close via the
A/R, the protection element trip will be inhibited.
An example:
For 4-cycle [79]: Inhibit Trip 1000 setting. In the first three cycles (000) the trip is executed to allow fault clearance, but the last one (1) is with inhibition, so no trip is executed in case of permanent fault).
(see P116 Operation chapter)
The default value is: 0000
AP
AP
P116_EN_AP_A11 v2.7
(AP) 6-54
GLOBAL SETTINGS / [79] ADVANCED SETTINGS
CB FLT Monitor. ?
Block.via Input?
Application Notes
MiCOM P116
No or Yes Disable or enable: CB faulty monitoring via binary input.
See 2.19.1.1, 2.20, 2.21
Typically the auto-recloser uses this function. Default value is Yes.
No or Yes Disable or enable: blocking of the Autoreclose function via a binary input.
See section 2.19.6.
Typically the auto-recloser uses this function. Default value is Yes .
Start Dead t on
Rolling Demand?
Max cycles No.
Time period Rol.Demand
Inhibit Time t
I
on Close
Protection reset or CB trips
Definition of Dead time start:
Protect.Reset
: no protection elements are energized.
CB trips : the CB is open
(information from inputs)
Typically auto-reclosing occurs based on
CB status. The default value is CB trips .
No or Yes Enable of Rolling Demand function.
This function protects the CB against mechanical wear in case of intermittent faults (for example a fault caused by a tree branch).
100 Number of accepted cycles in settable time period. If the number in the sliding window is greater than the set value for
Max cycles Nb the auto-recloser is blocked.
If Rolling Demand? = Yes, these values must be set according to the application.
See section 2.19.8.
0010 mn
1.00 s
Sliding window period Max cycles No. calculation.
Inhibit of auto-reclosing time after manual closure of the CB (via a binary input, the front panel, RS485 or USB port).
The default value: 1s.
If 0 s is applied, inhibition of A/R on closing is disabled.
See section 2.19.5.
Signaling Reset No or Close via
79
This function resets the latched LEDs and outputs via the auto-reclose Close command. If Close via 79 is selected, in case of a successful A/R there will be no signaling (reset not needed). Only the last fault will be displayed.
See section 2.19.9.
SETTING GROUP x/INPUTS CONFIGURATION Gx
CB status CB status 52A At least a one of the digital inputs have
Application Notes
MiCOM P116
P116_EN_AP_A11 v2.7
(AP) 6-55
SETTING GROUP x/INPUTS CONFIGURATION Gx
Input or inputs assigned to CB state
(contact position) or/and
CB status 52B
Inputs: 654321
000000 to be assigned to the CB's contact position.
CB status 52A: This input must correspond to the CB state: HIGH for CB close, LOW for CB open.
CB status 52B: This input must correspond to the CB state: LOW for CB close, HIGH for CB open.
If a one input is used the CB status is based on a one-bit monitoring.
If two inputs are used, the CB status is based on two-bit monitoring.
By default no inputs are assigned to CB contact position. These values must be set according to the application.
CB FLT Ext.Sign.
CB failure external signaling mapped to an input.
Block.79
Blocking of the auto-recloser via a binary input.
Inputs: 654321
000000
See section 2.19.1.
By default no inputs are assigned to CB failure monitoring. This value can be set according to application.
Inputs: 654321
000000
See section 2.19.1.3.
By default no inputs are assigned to blocking of the auto-reclose function.
This value can be set according to the application.
AP
AP
P116_EN_AP_A11 v2.7
(AP) 6-56
SETTING GROUP x/ OUTPUT RELAYS CONFIGURATION Gx
Prot.Trip pulse
CB Open via protection elements and the auto-reclose function.
Close CB order
CB Close by the A/R or a manual close command.
Outputs:
654321
000000
Outputs:
654321
000000
Output relays 1 to 6.
An output relay must be assigned to this function to CB close.
Application Notes
MiCOM P116
Output relays 1 to 6.
An output relay must be assigned to this function to CB trip.
[79] in Progress
Auto-reclose in progress (running)
An output relay can be assigned to this function.
[79] F.Trip
Auto-recloser lockout after final trip.
[79] Lockout
Auto-recloser lockout.
[79] Blocked
Auto-recloser blocked or disabled
[79] Success.
The Reclaim Time is elapsed and no trip has occurred.
Outputs:
654321
000000
Outputs:
TF654321
00000000
Outputs:
F654321
0000000
Outputs:
F654321
0000000
Outputs:
F654321
0000000
An output relay can be assigned to this function.
An output relay can be assigned to this function.
An output relay can be assigned to this function.
An output relay can be assigned to this function.
Application Notes
MiCOM P116
2.19.11.5.2 Trip and reclose (normal operation)
P116_EN_AP_A11 v2.7
(AP) 6-57
The auto-recloser starts only if a trip command ( Prot.Trip pulse output) has been issued.
The red Trip LED will illuminate whenever the auto-recloser starts. It can however be reset by a close command ( Signalling Reset setting).
PROTECTION Gx / [79] AUTORECLOSE t
“Autoreclose”
Cycles t
I
N_3
I
>, t
I
>>, t
I
>>>, t
I
N_1, t
I
N_2,
Yes
1234
0111
Maximum number of shots:
Max. 4 shots for each protection element selected separately.
SETTING GROUP x/ OUTPUT RELAYS CONFIGURATION Gx
Trip and Close Commands At least one trip and close command
Overcurrent and/or earth fault overcurrent trip stages
(One is enough).
AP
AP
P116_EN_AP_A11 v2.7
(AP) 6-58
2.20 Circuit Breaker State Monitoring (Model A)
Application Notes
MiCOM P116
An operator at a remote location requires a reliable indication of the state of the switchgear.
Without an indication that each circuit breaker is either open or closed, the operator has insufficient information to decide on switching operations. The MiCOM P116 relays incorporate a circuit breaker state monitoring feature, giving an indication of the position of the circuit breaker.
This indication is available either on the relay's front panel or via the communication network.
2.21
The positions of the CB contacts can be selected under the SETTING GROUP x/INPUTS
CONFIGURATION Gx and SETTING GROUP x/LEDs CONFIGURATION Gx menus using
AUX5 (in parallel with CB Status 52A ) and AUX6 (in parallel with CB Status 52B ).
AUX5 (CB closed) and AUX6 (CB opened) must be assigned to LEDs in SETTING GROUP x/LEDs CONFIGURATION Gx menu.
Furthermore, the MiCOM P116 relays can inform the operator that the CB has not opened following a remote trip command (refer to section “CB FAIL protection”).
Circuit Breaker Condition Monitoring (Model A)
2.22
Periodic maintenance of circuit breakers is generally based on a fixed time interval, or a fixed number of fault current interruptions.
The relays record the following controls and statistics related to each circuit breaker trip operation:
•
•
•
•
•
• time-delay setting, monitoring time for CB open and close operations,
CB open count, summation of the current interrupted by the CB, exponent for the summation, tripping and closing pulse time
Circuit Breaker Condition Monitoring Features (Model A)
For each circuit breaker trip operation the relay records statistics as shown in the following table taken from the relay menu. The RECORDS/COUNTERS/CB Monitoring menu cells shown are counter values only.
The circuit breaker condition monitoring counter increases when it receives:
a protection trip command ( Prot.Trip pulse ),
an HMI (or MiCOM S1) opening command ( Trip CB Order ),
a rear com opening command ( Trip CB Order ),
a digital input opening command ( Trip CB Order ).
In cases where the breaker is tripped by an external protection device it is also possible to update the CB condition monitoring. This is achieved by assigning one of the logic inputs or via the communication to accept a trigger from an external device.
Application Notes
MiCOM P116
2.23 Setting guidelines
2.23.1 Setting the
Σ I n
Threshold
P116_EN_AP_A11 v2.7
(AP) 6-59
Where overhead lines are prone to frequent faults and are protected by oil circuit breakers
(OCB’s), oil changes account for a large proportion of the life cycle cost of the switchgear.
Generally, oil changes are performed at a fixed interval of circuit breaker fault operations.
However, this may result in premature maintenance where fault currents tend to be low, and hence oil degradation is slower than expected.
The
Σ I n
counter monitors the cumulative severity of the duty placed on the interrupter allowing a more accurate assessment of the circuit breaker condition.
For OCB’s, the dielectric withstand of the oil generally decreases as a function of
Σ I 2 t. This is where ‘
I
’ is the fault current broken, and ‘t’ is the arcing time within the interrupter tank (not the interrupting time). As the arcing time cannot be determined accurately, the relay would normally be set to monitor the sum of the broken current squared, by setting n = 2.
For other types of circuit breaker, especially those operating on higher voltage systems, practical evidence suggests that the value of n = 2 may be inappropriate. In such applications n ’ may be set to 1.
An alarm in this instance may be indicative of the need for gas/vacuum interrupter HV pressure testing, for example.
It is imperative that any maintenance program must be fully compliant with the switchgear manufacturer’s instructions.
2.23.2 Setting the Number of Operations Threshold
Every operation of a circuit breaker results in some degree of wear for its components. Thus, routine maintenance, such as oiling of mechanisms, may be based upon the number of operations. Suitable setting of the maintenance threshold will allow an alarm to be raised, indicating when preventative maintenance is due.
Should maintenance not be carried out, the relay can be set to lockout the auto-reclose function upon reaching a number of operations. This prevents further reclosure when the circuit breaker has not been maintained to the standard required by the switchgear manufacturer’s maintenance instructions.
Certain circuit breakers, such as oil circuit breakers (OCB’s) can only perform a certain number of fault interruptions before requiring maintenance attention. This is because each fault interruption causes carbonizing of the oil, degrading its dielectric properties.
2.23.3 Setting the Operating Time Threshold
Slow CB operation is also indicative of the need for mechanism maintenance. Therefore, an alarm is provided and is settable in the range of 100 ms to 5 s. This time is set in relation to the specified interrupting time of the circuit breaker.
AP
AP
P116_EN_AP_A11 v2.7
(AP) 6-60
2.24 Undercurrent Protection Function (Model A)
MiCOM P116 relays include two undercurrent elements.
One is dedicated to CB fail detection (see CB Fail protection section).
Application Notes
MiCOM P116
The other can be used to provide additional protective functions to prevent damage/further damage to the power system. This function allows typical applications such as loss of load.
I<? 6: Alarm-Inhib 52A
I<? 2: Alarm
Inrush detection (I2h/I1h)
I<? 3: Trip-Inrush Bl
Block.tI< Input
I<? 6: Alarm-Inhib 52A
I<? 5: Trip-Inhib 52A
52A Input
OR
OR
&
&
&
T
TIMER
0 tI< Time Delay
DMT
SETTING GROUP 1(2)
/PROTECTION/
[37] UNDERCURRENT G1
&
Alarm
Alarm Recorder tI<
I<? 0: disabled
Start I< Threshold
&
Start I<
&
INSTANTENOUS
Recorder
RESET LEDs
&
OR
I<? 4: Trip-Latch
I<? 1: Trip
I<? 3: Trip-Inrush Bl
OR
&
Protect. Trip
Protect. Trip pulse
Fault Recorder
I<? 5: Trip-Inhib 52A
P0923ENb
Figure 21: Undercurrent Protection Logic
Undercurrent stage
I
< can be set to Alarm , Trip , Trip-Inrush Bl , Trip-Latch , Alarm inhib
52 or Trip inhib 52 .
For the Alarm , Trip , Trip-Inrush Bl , Trip-Latch and Trip inhib 52 settings the outputs and
LEDs are energized if they are set to Protect.Trip
, Prot.Trip pulse or t
I
< .
If
I
< is set to Alarm : the outputs and LEDs are energized if they are set to Alarm or t
I
< .
If Trip-Inrush Bl is selected the overcurrent stage is blocked by the Inrush Blocking function (refer to Inrush Blocking section).
If Trip-Latch is selected, after a trip the overcurrent stage remains high until it is reset via a binary input, the HMI or by a remote RESET command.
The undercurrent stage can be blocked by the CB open status ( CB status 52B logic input ) if
I
< is set to Alarm inhib 52 or Trip inhib 52 .
See the AUTOMAT. CTRL/Output Relays/ t
I
< menu for the mapping of t
I
< to an auxiliary output relay RL2 to RL8 (to RL6 for P122).
The
I
< threshold can be set in the SETTING GROUP x/PROTECTION Gx/
UNDERCURRENT [37]/
I
< menu, from 10% to 200% of the rated current
I n.
The t
I
< time-delay can be set in the SETTING GROUP x/PROTECTION Gx/
UNDERCURRENT [37]/t
I
< menu from 0 to 200 s.
Application Notes
MiCOM P116
2.25 Circuit Breaker Failure Protection: CB Fail
P116_EN_AP_A11 v2.7
(AP) 6-61
When a fault is detected, one or more main protection elements will issue a trip command to the associated circuit breaker(s). To isolate the fault, and prevent (further) damage to the power system it is essential that the circuit breaker operates correctly.
A fault that is not cleared quickly enough threatens the stability of the system. It is therefore common practice to install circuit breaker failure protection devices/elements that check that the circuit breaker has opened within a reasonable period of time. If the fault current has not been eliminated after the set time-delay, breaker failure protection (CB Fail) will send a signal.
The CB Fail protection element can be used to back-trip upstream circuit breakers to ensure that the fault is correctly isolated. The CB Fail protection element can also clear all blocking commands associated with logic selectivity.
CBF? 0: Disabled
Block.tCB Fail Input
50/51, 46, 46BC,
49 Trip
& Alarm
50N/51N Trip
Start A I< Threshold
Start B I< Threshold
Start C I< Threshold
Start IN< Threshold
&
&
&
&
OR
&
CBF? 2: Alarm
T
TIMER
0
CB Fail Time tBF DMT
SETTING GROUP
1(2)
/PROTECTION/
[50BF] CB Fail G1(2)
&
Alarm Recorder
CB Fail
&
Block I>
&
AUX n Trip
Strt tBF Input
CBF: Block I>? Yes
CBF: Block IN>? Yes
CBF? 1: Retrip
&
&
Block IN>
Protect. Trip
Protect. Trip pulse
Fault Recorder
P0927ENb
Figure 22: CB Fail Principle
The tBF timer is initiated when a trip command is issued by a protection element. Note that the trip command can be issued either by a protection element, or by a logic input assigned to an AUX counter. Then the relay monitors the current signal of each phase and compares each phase current signal with the bandzone made by the undercurrent
I
< threshold. This value can be set under the SETTING GROUP x/PROTECTION Gx / [50BF] CB FAIL Gx menu.
The selection in the relay menu is grouped as follows:
MENU TEXT
CB Fail ? tBF
I
< Threshold CBF
I
N< Threshold CBF
(hardware option:
0.002-1
I en)
I
N< Threshold CBF
(hardware option: 0.01-8
I en)
I
N< Threshold CBF
SETTING RANGE
MIN MAX
Disabled, Retrip, Alarm,
0.01 s
0.1
I n
10 s
2
I n
0.01
0.05
0.1
I
I
I n n n
1
1
1
I
I
I n n n
STEP SIZE
10 ms
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
I
I
I
I n n n n
AP
AP
P116_EN_AP_A11 v2.7
(AP) 6-62
(hardware option:
0.002-1
I en)
Block
I
>?
Block
I
N>?
One of these options:
•
Retrip
No, Yes
No, Yes
: a retrip signal is issued concurrently with the tCBF output (
Prot.Trip pulse output). The TRIP LED and FLAG are activated,
Application Notes
MiCOM P116
Protect.Trip and
•
Alarm : typical setting. In case of CB Failure, an alarm is issued concurrently with the tCBF output. The Alarm LED is lit, must be set in order to enable CB Fail protection.
2.25.1 Typical settings
2.25.1.1 Breaker Fail Timer Settings
The typical timer settings to use are as follows:
CB fail reset mechanism tBF time-delay
Typical delay for 2 cycle circuit breaker
Initiating element reset
CB open
Undercurrent elements
CB interrupting time + element reset time (max.) + error in tBF timer + safety margin
CB auxiliary contacts opening/ closing time (max.) + error in tBF timer + safety margin
CB interrupting time + undercurrent element (max.) + safety margin operating time
50 + 50 + 10 + 50 = 160 ms
50 + 10 + 50 = 110 ms
50 + 25 + 50 = 125 ms
Note that all the CB Fail resetting methods involve the operation of the undercurrent element. Where element reset or CB open resetting is used the undercurrent time setting should still be used if this proves to be the worst case.
The examples above consider direct tripping of a circuit breaker. Note that where auxiliary tripping relays are used, an additional 10-15ms must be added to allow for trip relay operation.
2.25.1.2 Breaker Fail Undercurrent Settings
The phase undercurrent threshold (
I
<) must be set below the load current, to ensure that
I
< operation indicates that the circuit breaker pole is open. A typical setting for overhead lines or cable circuits is 20%
I n, with 5%
I n common for generator circuit breaker CBF.
The standard earth fault undercurrent element must be set to less than the trip setting, typically as follows:
I
N< = (
I
N> trip) / 2
Application Notes
MiCOM P116
2.26 Trip Circuit Supervision (Model A)
P116_EN_AP_A11 v2.7
(AP) 6-63
The trip circuit extends beyond the relay enclosure and passes through more components, such as fuse, wires, relay contacts, auxiliary switch contact and so on.
These complications, coupled with the importance of the circuit, have directed attention to its supervision.
The simplest arrangement for trip circuit supervision contains a healthy trip lamp in series with a resistance placed in parallel with a trip output relay contacts of the protection device.
2.26.1 Trip Circuit Supervision Mechanism
The Trip Circuit Supervision function included in the MiCOM P116 relays is described below:
A logic input is assigned to the GLOBAL SETTINGS/CIRCUIT BREAKER/TC Supervision?
function. This logic input is labeled Trip Circ Supervis.
in the SETTING GROUP x/INPUTS
CONFIGURATION Gx menu. This logic input is then wired to the trip circuit according to one of the typical application scheme examples shown below.
When the TC Supervision function is set to "Yes" under the TC Supervision?
sub-menu, the relay checks continuously the trip circuit continuity whether the CB status is CB opened or
CB closed.
When the TC Supervision function is set to Yes-52A under the CIRCUIT BREAKER submenu, the relay checks continuously on trip circuit continuity in case when the CB's status is closed only.
The TC Supervision function is enabled when the Prot.Trip pulse and Trip CB order outputs are not energized. The TC Supervision function is not enabled when the Prot.Trip pulse and Trip CB order output are energized.
An Alarm : TC Supervision (trip circuit failure) signal is generated if the logic input detects no voltage signal for a time longer than the settable timer tSUP . See Chapter P116/EN OP
(Operation) and Chapter P116/EN TD (Technical Data) for the settings.
As this function is disabled when the Prot.Trip pulse and Trip CB order outputs are energized, it is suitable for use with the output latching logic disabled.
The tSUP timer can be set according to the following table:
TC Supervision ? tSUP
MENU TEXT
MIN
SETTING RANGE
MAX
No or Yes or Yes-52A
100 ms 10 s
STEP SIZE
10 ms
AP
TC Supervision? 1: Yes
CB closed (52A)
TC Supervision?
2: Yes – 52A
Trip Circ Supervis. Input
Protect Trip
Prot.Trip pulse
Trip CB Order
&
OR
OR
Figure 23: Trip Circuit Supervision Principle
&
T
TIMER
0
TC Supervision tSUP Time Delay
GLOBAL SETTINGS/
CIRCUIT BREAKER
CB Alarm
Alarm
TCS 52 Fail
P0933ENb
AP
P116_EN_AP_A11 v2.7
(AP) 6-64
Three examples of application are given below.
Note:
Example 1
Application Notes
MiCOM P116
It is considered that the CB is fitted out with its own safety device.
In this example only the 52a auxiliary contact is available, the MiCOM relay monitors the trip coil whatever the CB status is (CB open or CB closed).
+Vdc
52a
CB Trip
Coil
Prot.Trip pulse
Trip CB
Order
Trip Circ
Supervis.
MiCOM P116
- Vdc
P0950ENa
Figure 24: Trip Coil Monitoring
Example 2
In this example both 52a and 52b auxiliary contacts are available; the MiCOM P116 relay monitors the complete trip circuit when the CB is closed and a part of the trip circuit when the
CB is open.
In this case it is necessary to insert a resistor R1 in series with 52b, if either the output trip is latched or if it stays accidently closed, or if a long time trip pulse is programmed.
+Vdc
Output:
Prot.Trip pulse, Trip
CB Order
MiCOM P116
Binary Input:
Trip Circ
Supervis.
52a 52b
CB Trip
Coil
Resistor R1
- Vdc
P0951ENa
Figure 25: Example 2: Trip Coil and Auxiliary Contact Monitoring
Application Notes
MiCOM P116
Example 3
P116_EN_AP_A11 v2.7
(AP) 6-65
In this example both 52a and 52b auxiliary contacts are available, the MiCOM P116 relay monitors the complete trip circuit whatever the CB status (CB open or CB closed).
In this case it is necessary to insert a R1, if either the output trip is latched, or if it stays accidently closed, or if a long time trip pulse is programmed.
+Vdc
Output:
Prot.Trip pulse, Trip
CB Order
Binary Input:
Trip Circ
Supervis.
MiCOM P116
52a 52b
Resistor R1
CB Trip
Coil
- Vdc
P0952ENa
Figure 26: Example 3: Trip Coil and Auxiliary Contact Monitoring Whatever the
Position of the CB contacts
AP
External Resistor R1 Calculation
The calculation of the R1 resistor value will take into account the fact that a minimum current is flowing through the logic input. This minimum current value is a function of the relay auxiliary voltage range (U aux
).
1 - Case of example 2:
The R1 resistor maximum value (in Ohm) is defined by the following formula:
R 1
<
0 .
8
×
U aux
I min
−
U min Ω
Where:
U aux
= auxiliary voltage value (in this case a DC voltage; range is given on label under the top hinged cover. See table below).
U min
= internal minimum voltage value needed for the opto logic input to operate.
I min
= minimum current value needed for the opto logic input to operate.
Relay auxiliary voltage range (U aux
)
24-60 Vdc
(ordering code P116xxxxxx 4 xxxxxxx)
48-250 Vdc/ac
(ordering code P116xxxxxx5xxxxxxx)
R1 < (0.8 x U aux
– 19.2)/0.035 R1 < (0.8 x U aux
– 19.2)/0.035
AP
P116_EN_AP_A11 v2.7
(AP) 6-66
The R1 resistor withstand value (in Watt) is defined below:
P
R 1
>
2
×
(
1 .
2
×
U aux
)
2
R 1
Watts
2 - Case of example 3:
Application Notes
MiCOM P116
The R1 resistor maximum value (in Ohm) is defined by the following formula:
R 1
<
0 .
8
×
U aux
I min
−
U min −
R coil
Ω
Where:
U aux
= auxiliary voltage value (in this case a DC voltage; its range is given on the label under the top hinged cover. See table below.)
U min
= internal minimum voltage value needed for the opto-input to operate.
I min
= minimum current value needed for the opto-input to operate.
R coil
= trip coil resistance value.
Relay auxiliary voltage range (U aux
)
24-60 Vdc
(ordering code P116xxxxxx 4 xxxxxxx)
48-250 Vdc/ac
(ordering code P116xxxxxx5xxxxxxx)
R1 < (0.8 x U aux
– 19.2)/0.035 – R coil
R1 < (0.8 x U aux
– 19.2)/0.035 – R coil
The R1 resistor withstand value (in Watt) is defined below:
P
R 1
>
2
×
(
1 , 2
(
R 1
+
×
U a
R
Coil
)
2
Notes: – The presence of auxiliary relays, such as an anti-pumping system for instance, in the trip circuit must be taken into account for the R1 resistance values specification.
– We consider that the maximum variation of the auxiliary voltage value is ±20%.
Example 4
In this example both 52a and 52b auxiliary contacts are available, the MiCOM P116 relay monitors the complete trip circuit whatever the CB status (CB open or CB closed).
This application need to assign two Binary Inputs to one Trip Circuit Supervision input logic function.
In this case it is necessary to insert a RL1, if either the output trip is latched, or if it stays accidently closed, or if a long time trip pulse is programmed.
Application Notes
MiCOM P116
P116_EN_AP_A11 v2.7
(AP) 6-67
TC Supervision? 1: Yes
(GLOBAL SETTINGS/CIRCUIT BREAKER)
RL1:
Protection
Trip Pulse
Input 1:
Trip Circ.
Supervis.
Input 2:
Trip Circ.
Supervis.
MiCOM
P116
PJ017ENb
Figure 27: Example 4: Trip Coil and Auxiliary Contact Monitoring by using two Binary
Inputs
Example 5
In this example 52a auxiliary contacts is available, the MiCOM P116 relay monitors the complete trip circuit if the CB status is closed.
This application need to assign one Binary Input to Trip Circuit Supervision input logic function.
In this case it is necessary to insert a RL1, if either the output trip is latched, or if it stays accidently closed, or if a long time trip pulse is programmed.
AP
TC Supervision? 1: Yes
(GLOBAL SETTINGS/CIRCUIT BREAKER)
RL1:
Protection
Trip Pulse
Input 1:
Trip Circ.
Supervis.
Input 2:
Trip Circ.
Supervis.
MiCOM
P116
PJ017ENb
Figure 28: Example 4: Trip Coil and Auxiliary Contact Monitoring by using two Binary
Inputs
AP
P116_EN_AP_A11 v2.7
(AP) 6-68
2.27 Real time clock synchronization via opto-inputs (Model A)
Application Notes
MiCOM P116
In modern protection schemes it is often desirable to synchronize the relay’s real time clock so that events from various relays can be placed in chronological order. This can be done using the communication interface connected to the substation control system or via a binary input. Any of the available binary inputs on the P116 relay can be selected for synchronization. Pulsing this input will result in the real time clock snapping to the nearest minute. The recommended pulse duration is 20 ms to be repeated no more than once per minute. An example of the time synchronization function is shown.
Time of “Sync. Pulse”
19:47:00.000 to 19:47:29.999
19:47:30.000 to 19:47:59.999
Corrected Time
19:47:00.000
19:48:00.000
Note: The above assumes a time format of hh:mm:ss
The input is configured in the SETTING GROUPx/INPUT CONFIGURATION Gx menu.
The input must be assigned to Time Synchr.
Application Notes
MiCOM P116
2.28 Event Records (Model A)
P116_EN_AP_A11 v2.7
(AP) 6-69
The relay records and time-tags up to 200 events and stores them in a non-volatile (Fram) memory. This allows the system operator to analyze the sequence of events that has occurred within the relay after a particular power system condition, or switching sequence, etc. When the available space is exhausted, the new fault automatically overwrites the oldest fault.
The real time clock within the relay time-tags each event, with a resolution of 1 ms.
2.29
2.30
2.31
The user can view the event records either locally via the USB port, or remotely, via the rear
EIA(RS)485 port.
Fault Records
Each time any of the set thresholds are crossed, an instantaneous record is created and displayed in the RECORDS/INSTANTANEOUS RECORD menu. Information on the last five starts is available, with the duration of the signal.
The following information is displayed in the RECORDS/INSTANTANEOUS RECORD menu: number of starts, time, date, origin (crossing of a current threshold or start of a protection element's time-delay), current values.
Each time any of the set protection elements trips ( Protect.Trip
output), a fault record is created and stored in memory. The fault record tags up to 20 faults and stores them in a non-volatile (Fram) memory. This allows the operator to identify and analyze system failures.
When the available memory space is exhausted, the new fault automatically overwrites the oldest fault.
The user can view the latest fault record in the RECORD/FAULT RECORDS menu, where he or she can choose to display up to 20 stored records. These records are the fault flags, the fault measurements, etc. Also note that the time stamp displayed in the fault record itself will be more accurate than the corresponding time stamp given in the event record. This is due to the fact that events are logged some time after the actual fault is recorded.
The user can view event records either via the front panel interface, via the USB port, or remotely, via the rear EIA (RS) 485 port.
Instantaneous Recorder (Model A)
Each time any of set thresholds are crossed, an instantaneous record is created and displayed in the RECORDS/INSTANTANEOUS RECORD menu. The last five starting records are available, with the duration of the signal.
The following information is displayed in the RECORDS/INSTANTANEOUS RECORD menu: number of starts, time, date, origin (crossing of a current threshold or start of a protection element's time-delay), current values.
Instantaneous Recorder is memorized if P116 is powered from auxiliary voltage (Vx).
Alarm Recorder (Model A)
Each time any of the programmed protection element makes ALARM signal ( Alarm output), an Alarm record is created and stored in memory. The fault record tags up to 5 faults and stores them in a non-volatile (Fram) memory. This allows the system operator to identify and analyze network failures. When the available memory space is exhausted, the new fault automatically overwrites the oldest Alarm.
The user can view actual Alarm record under the RECORD/ALARM RECORDS menu, where he can select to display up to 5 stored records. These records are Alarm flags, Alarm measurements, etc. Also note that the time stamp displayed in the Alarm record itself will be more accurate than the corresponding time stamp given in the event record.
AP
AP
P116_EN_AP_A11 v2.7
(AP) 6-70
2.32 Disturbance Recorder
Application Notes
MiCOM P116
The integral disturbance recorder has a memory space specifically dedicated to the storage of disturbance records. Up to 6 seconds of disturbance recording can be stored. When the available memory space is exhausted, the new record automatically overwrites the oldest record.
The recorder stores actual samples that are taken at a rate of 16 samples per cycle.
Each disturbance record consists of analogue and digital channels. (Note that the relevant
CT ratios for the analogue channels are also extracted to enable scaling to primary quantities).
The disturbance recorder is set in the GLOBAL SETTINGS/DISTURBANCE RECORDER menu.
The total disturbance recording time is 6 s.
Total number of records available in disturbance recorder is: o One - for set Max Record Time from in range: 3.01s - 6s o Two – for set Max Record Time from in range: 2.01s - 3s o Three – for set Max Record Time from in range: 1.51s - 2s o Four – for set Max Record Time from in range: 1.21s – 1.5s o Five - for set Max Record Time from in range: 0.10s – 1.2s
Triggering of disturbance recording depends on the Disturb.Rec.Trig. configuration:
0: on Inst.
– Start of a protection element set to Trip ,
1: on Trip – Trip by a protection element followed by the Protect.Trip output.
If the 0: on Inst . option is selected the record consists of: Pre-fault time + duration of the
"any Start" signal presence + Post-fault time.
If the 1: on Trip option is selected the record consists of: Pre-fault time + duration of the Trip signal presence ( Protect.Trip
function active) + Post-fault time.
The pre-fault time can be set in the cell: GLOBAL SETTINGS/DISTURBANCE
RECORDER/Pre-Time .
If the pre-fault time is set to 100 ms, recording starts 100 ms before the disturbance.
The post trip time can be set in the cell: GLOBAL SETTINGS/DISTURBANCE
RECORDER/Post Trip Time .
If the post-fault time is set to 100 ms, recording stops 100 ms after the disturbance.
Demand values 2.33
The relay produces fixed and peak demand values, using the reset demand menu cell it is possible to reset these quantities via the user interface or the remote communications.
Information about actual values is available in the RECORDS/MAX & AVERAGE
I submenu.
2.33.1 Fixed demand values
The fixed demand value is the average value of a quantity over a specified interval ( Time
Window) . Values are produced for each phase current (A, B, C). The fixed demand values displayed by the relay are those for the previous interval, the values are updated at the end of the settable demand period: Time Window cell ( GLOBAL SETTINGS/MAX&AVERAGE
I
CONFIGURATION/ )
Time Window setting: from 1 mn to 24 hour
The 3 phase Peak demand values are displayed in the RECORDS/MAX & AVERAGE
I menu:
Average
I
A
Application Notes
MiCOM P116
Average
I
B
Average
I
C
P116_EN_AP_A11 v2.7
(AP) 6-71
The calculation is reset either via the front panel interface in the RECORDS/MAX & AVERAGE
I
/ MAX&Aver.Reset cell under Control password (Note: Control password can be deactivated if it is set to 0):
Max&Aver.Reset
CTRL:No operation
Resetting can be applied by:
- pressing the OK key,
- entering the Control Password,
- confirming the password by pressing the OK key,
- pressing
or
key then selecting: 1.Reset
- confirming the command by pressing OK
.
Note: In case of loss of power supply the fixed demand values are not stored.
Any modification of the Time Window setting resets the calculation.
2.33.2 Peak Demand Values
Peak demand values are produced for each phase current quantity. These display the maximum value of the measured quantity since the last reset of the demand values.
The principle of calculation of the Peak value demand for the
I
A,
I
B and
I
C phase currents is as follows:
For every Time Window , a new average value is compared with the previous value calculated for the previous Time Window . If this new value is greater than the previously stored value, then this new value is stored instead of the old one.
To the contrary, if this new value is lower than the previously stored value, then the old value is kept.
This way the average peak value will be refreshed with each Time Window .
There is no dedicated setting for this calculation. The setting for the Time Window is shared with that for the Fixed Demand value.
The 3 phase Peak demand values are displayed in the RECORDS/MAX & AVERAGE
I menu:
MAX
I
A
MAX
I
B
MAX
I
C
The calculation can be reset – see Fixed demand value.
Note: In case of loss of power supply, Peak average values are stored.
Any modification of the Time Window setting resets the calculation.
AP
AP
P116_EN_AP_A11 v2.7
(AP) 6-72
2.34 External trip (Model A)
Application Notes
MiCOM P116
A Binary Input can be configured to CB trip by using the AUX1 or AUX2 or AUX3 or AUX4 functions.
The AUX1 – AUX4 functions have a timer so a trip can be time-delayed. tAUX1 – tAUX4 can be mapped to:
RL1,
RL2,
2.35
RL3,
RL4,
RL5,
RL6,
Trip (protection trip)
Alarm signal
Programmable LEDs
If it is configured to Trip (protection trip), tAUX1 - tAUX2 will illuminate the “Trip” LED.
Minimum Tripping Time
The minimum tripping time when the relay switches on to a fault is subject to the fault current level.
TYPICAL OPERATION TIME
(protection time-delay set to 0 ms and the current value is greater than two times of the setting value)
The P116 is supplied from Vx or the current is above 0.2
I n (
I en).
Operation time: All types of faults
≤
40ms
TYPICAL OPERATION TIME
(protection time-delay set to 0 ms and the current value is greater than two times of the setting value)
The pre-fault current is below 0.2
I n (
I en) in all phases and that there is no Vx on the B1 - B2 terminals. The case: CB switch on to fault without auxiliary voltage supply. Typically:
≤
65ms.
Detailed calculation below:
Operation time calculation: I
A
−
I
B
+
K
I
C
+
I
N
−
S
+
C , but not less than 50 ms
K
=
7 ; S
=
0 .
1 ; C
=
60 ;
The trip coil and the flag indicator energy outputs are disabled.
The flag indicator energy output is enabled. The trip coil energy output is disabled.
The trip coil and the flag indicator energy outputs are enabled.
K
K
=
18 ; S
=
0 .
15 ; C
=
55 ; S
=
0 .
14 ; C
=
45 ;
=
25 ;
Example:
The trip coil and the flag indicator are enabled in the SETTING GROUP 1 (2) / OUTPUT
RELAYS CONFIGURATION G1 (G2) menu.
Application Notes
MiCOM P116
Three-phase fault with current value of 0.5
I n:
P116_EN_AP_A11 v2.7
(AP) 6-73
I
A
=
0 .
5 e j 0 deg
In ; I
B
=
0 .
5 e
− j 120 deg
In ; I
C
=
0 .
5 e j 120 deg
In ; I
N
=
0 .
0 e j 0 deg
Ien
Calculation:
I
A
−
I
B
=
(
0 .
5
⋅ cos( 0 deg)
−
0 .
5 cos(
−
120 deg)
) (
0 .
5
⋅ sin( 0 deg)
−
0 .
5 sin(
−
120 deg)
)
2 =
0 .
866 In
I
C
+
I
N
=
(
0 .
5
⋅ cos( 120 deg)
+
0 cos( 0 deg)
) (
0 .
5
⋅ sin( 120 deg)
+
0 sin( 0 deg)
)
2 =
0 .
5 In
Operation time:
I
A
−
I
B
+
55
I
C
+
I
N
−
0 .
14
+
25 ms
=
0 .
866
55
+
0 .
5
−
0 .
14
+
25 ms
=
70 ms
Operation time = 70 ms
AP
AP
P116_EN_AP_A11 v2.7
(AP) 6-74
3. CT REQUIREMENTS
Application Notes
MiCOM P116
For the conventional case of a resistive load, the voltage at the secondary winding of the transformer is proportional to the primary current, therefore the error remains constant.
3.1
3.1.1
In the case of a MiCOM P116 self-powered protection relay, this no longer applies, since the voltage at the input of the protection circuit is in a non-proportional ratio to the input current.
The best solution to check whether the MiCOM P116 relay is adapted to a given CT is to have available the magnetization curve and the internal resistance of the CT in question.
To guarantee good accuracy at low current levels, the magnetizing current of the CT must be low. In other words, the input voltage of the relay must be sufficiently low compared with the knee-point voltage Vk of the CT.
The following sections show the ac burden of the P116 MiCOM relay and, taking into account the magnetizing curve of a CT, it is then possible to determine the accuracy of the system as a whole for the entire current range: P116 + associated CT.
Recapitulation of the Current Transformer's Characteristics
Characterization of a Current Transformer
The characteristics of a protection relay CT are based on:
•
Its rated output burden expressed in VA, its relevant accuracy the rated accuracy limit current (5
I n, 10
I n, 15
I n, 20
I n). The accuracy limit factor (K) is the ratio between the precision limit current and the nominal current rating. class (5P or 10P) and
•
Naturally, the transformation ratio of the CT is to be added to this. This ratio is the ratio of the primary current to the secondary current
I
1/
I
2 . The secondary current rating is generally 1 A or 5 A.
•
Other characteristics such as the insulating voltage or the thermal behavior are also taken into account.
Standard BS 3938 proposes a specification identical to that of IEC 185 for class P transformers. The CT is characterized in accordance with a second class known as X class
(Cx) which, in addition to the calculated ratio, requires a knee-point voltage Vk and an internal resistance Rct .
The following quantities are associated with the magnetization curve of a CT:
•
The knee-point voltage beyond which an increase of 10% in the voltage V results in a 50% increase of the magnetizing current.
Vk , which is determined by the point on the curve V=f (
I m)
•
The voltage related to the accuracy limit of the CT.
- For a 5PK CT (accuracy class 5P, accuracy limit factor K):
At the saturation voltage Vs1 we will have a 5% accuracy on the current K *
I n.
- For a 10PK TC (accuracy class 10P, accuracy limit factor K):
At the saturation voltage Vs2 we will have a 10% accuracy on the current K *
I n
Application Notes
MiCOM P116
P116_EN_AP_A11 v2.7
(AP) 6-75
P0797ENa
Figure 29: Definition of the Magnetizing Curve's Knee-Point
With the materials generally used to manufacture current transformers, we have:
Vk corresponds to 1.4 tesla
Vs1 corresponds to 1.6 tesla
Vs2 corresponds to 1.9 tesla
3.1.2 Equivalent diagram of a current transformer
•
•
•
The equivalent diagram of a CT is indicated below:
•
CT ratio: n2/n1
•
•
L m:
magnetization self-induction coil of the CT
I m:
magnetizing current
I
1:
primary current
I
2:
secondary current =
I
1
* n2 /n1
• I s:
secondary current passing through the load resistance Rp.: I
S
=
I
2
−
I m
Rct: secondary winding resistance of the CT (ohms)
AP
P116_EN_AP_A11 v2.7
(AP) 6-76
I
1
I
2
I
s
R
ct
n
2
/n
1
I
m
L
m
V
s
R
p
Application Notes
MiCOM P116
AP
3.1.3
P0798ENa
Figure 30: Equivalent diagram of a current transformer
The magnetizing current
I m of the transformer depends on the voltage generated at the secondary windings of the transformer.
It is this current that introduces an error signal into the measurement. If the CT were perfect, the magnetizing current would be null.
How to calculate the rated burden, in VA, of a CT based on its characteristic quantities (Vk,
Rct)
The saturation voltage is derived using the following formula: Vs = (Rct + Rp ) Is
The nominal load impedance of the CT is Rp = Pn /
I n
2
We have Vs = (Rct + Pn /
I n
2
)
I s
Hence: Pn = (Vs/
I s - Rct )
I n
2
3.1.4
• For a transformer with in a 5P accuracy class: Vs1/Vk = 1.6/1.4
Thus: Vs1 = 1.6/1.4 * Vk, at
I s1 equals K *
I n
Hence: Pn = [(1.6/1.4 * Vk )/(K *
I n) - Rct ] *
I n
2
• For a transformer with a 10P accuracy class: Vs2/Vk = 1.9/1.4 thus Vs2 = 1.9/1.4 * Vk, at Is2 equals K *
I n
Hence: Pn = [(1.9/1.4 * Vk )/(K *
I n) - Rct ] *
I n
2
Definition equivalence for common CTs
Since the only constants of a CT are its magnetizing curve, its Rct resistance and its transformation ratio, it is possible to replace a transformer which Pn1 power in VA is of the
5PK1 type with a transformer which Pn2 power in VA is of the 5PK2 type.
Application Notes
MiCOM P116
Given that the values of Vs1 and Rct are known:
Vs1 = (Rct +Pn1/
I n
2
)*K1 *
I n = (Rct + Pn2/
I n
2
)*K2 *
I n
Pi = Rct *
I n
2
(ohmic loss of CT)
(Pi +Pn1) * K1 = (Pi + Pn2 ) * K2
Hence K2 = [(Rct *
I n
2
+ Pn1 )/ (Rct *
I n
2
+ Pn2 )] * K1
3.1.5 How to calculate the knee-point voltage Vk of a CT defined in class P
3.2
• For a transformer with accuracy class of 5P : Vs1/Vk = 1.6/1.4
Pn = [(1.6/1.4 * Vk )/(K*
I n) - Rct ] *
I n
2
Hence Vk = 1.4/1.6 (Pn/
I n
2
+ Rct) K *
I n
• For a transformer with a precision class 10P : Vs2/Vk = 1.9/1.4
Pn = [(1.9/1.4 * Vk )/K*
I n - Rct ] *
I n
2
Hence Vk = 1.4/1.9 (Pn/
I n
2
+ Rct) K *
I n.
Consumption of MiCOM P116 Relays
P116_EN_AP_A11 v2.7
(AP) 6-77
The MiCOM P116's self- and dual-powered hardware versions (with identical ac burden at their current inputs) have a minimum self-supply starting current of 0.2
I n. This minimum level of current is needed on at least one phase in order to enable the MiCOM relay to be correctly self-powered and thus ensure the full capability of its protection functions:
CAUTION: THE FOLLOWING ARE THERMAL CHARACTERISTICS
• 3
I n continuous rating
• 40
I n during 100 s
• 100
I n during 1 s
The P116's current input resistance depends on the value of the current. Table 2 shows the resistance for a single current input per P116:
I n = 1 A / 5 A, and common connection for a single current input per P116 + current transformer WA-25. if e/f input supplies P116, it is necessary to take into account a double value of the resistance (I + IN), as shown in Table 2.
AP
AP
P116_EN_AP_A11 v2.7
(AP) 6-78
Application Notes
MiCOM P116
Current
I
Input resistance (Rp) in tripping condition
Single current input I (IN)
CT powering only
(no Vx auxiliary supply)
With auxiliary supply (Vx)
WA25+I+IN
CT only
In (Ien) = 1 A In (Ien) = 5 A In (Ien) = 1 A In (Ien) = 5 A In (Ien) = 1 A
Rp Vp Rp Vp Rp Vp Rp Vp Rp Vp
In (Ien)
0.04
0.06
0.08
0.10
0.12
0.14
0.16
0.18
Ω n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a
V n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a
Ω n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a
V n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a
Ω
77.306
61.648
34.815
24.108
13.452
12.150
V
4.64
4.93
3.48
2.89
1.88
1.94
Ω
3.994
2.436
1.820
1.347
0.990
1.026
V n/a 71.656 2.87 4.687 0.94
1.20
0.98
0.91
0.81
0.69
0.82 n/a 8.937 1.61 0.346 0.31
Ω n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a
V n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a
0.20 31.063 6.21 1.219 1.22 7.373 1.47 0.313 0.31 61.063 12.21
0.22 27.683 6.09 1.074 1.18 6.376 1.40 0.247 0.27 46.415 10.21
0.24 24.395 5.85 0.938 1.13 4.552 1.09 0.177 0.21 40.182 9.64
0.30 21.82 6.55 0.646 1.00 3.172 0.95 0.118 0.18 25.933 7.78
0.40 12.274 4.91 0.351 0.70 1.508 0.60 0.074 0.15 21.056 8.42
0.50 7.629 3.81 0.225 0.56 0.949 0.47 0.047 0.12 13.710 6.86
0.60 5.320 3.19 0.250 0.75 0.902 0.54 0.036 0.11 10.199 6.12
0.70 5.833 4.08 0.186 0.65 0.679 0.48 0.033 0.12 8.092 5.66
0.80 4.44 3.55 0.148 0.59 0.595 0.48 0.029 0.12 6.744 5.40
0.90 3.564 3.21 0.123 0.55 0.513 0.46 0.028 0.13 5.763 5.19
1.00 2.898 2.90 0.099 0.49 0.450 0.45 0.026 0.13 5.108 5.11
1.20 1.852 2.22 0.074 0.44 0.366 0.44 0.021 0.13 4.150 4.98
1.40 1.415 1.98 0.062 0.44 0.321 0.45 0.021 0.15 3.777 5.29
1.60 1.123 1.80 0.045 0.36 0.305 0.49 0.020 0.16 3.479 5.57
1.80 0.940 1.69 0.040 0.36 0.273 0.49 0.018 0.16 3.234 5.82
2.00 0.791 1.58 0.035 0.35 0.261 0.52 0.018 0.18 3.074 6.15
3.00 0.475 1.43 0.024 0.36 0.240 0.72 0.018 0.28 2.658 7.98
4.00 0.328 1.31 0.019 0.38 0.235 0.94 0.017 0.34 2.539 10.16
5.00 0.317 1.58 0.019 0.47 0.238 1.19 0.016 0.41 2.496 12.48
10.0 0.250 2.50 0.016 0.81 0.235 2.35 0.015 0.75 2.432 24.32
15.0 0.240 3.60 0.016 1.20 0.235 3.53 0.015 1.11 2.402 36.04
20.0 0.235 4.70 0.016 1.57 0.234 4.67 0.015 1.45 2.427 48.54
25.0 0.238 5.94 0.016 1.96 0.237 5.94 0.015 1.82 2.448 61.21
30.0 0.241 7.23 0.016 2.36 0.240 7.19 0.015 2.19 2.447 73.41
Table 2: P116 Current Input Resistance
Application Notes
MiCOM P116
3.3 Calculation of Required CT for Protection Relays
P116_EN_AP_A11 v2.7
(AP) 6-79
It is not possible to recommend any CT without detailed information. The decision needs to be based on calculation.
•
•
The following parameters have to be considered:
•
Type of CT (nominal power, nominal current and current ratio, internal resistance, nominal accuracy limit factor, class and construction),
Resistance of wiring (length, cross section, specific resistance of material),
Resistance of P116 current inputs (as per table 2 in section 3.2).
Depend on the regional laws and the best practice two ways of calculation is possible:
The first method gives the minimum CT requirement to be sure that the o/c relay trips
The second method assures that CTs will be not saturated at all conditions (DC component should be taken into account in fault prospective current). This method is recommended for full functionality (measurement, recording in full range, etc) of the relay.
Note: Assuming that the CT does not supply any circuits other than the MiCOM P116 and the distance between P116 and CTs is short, the folowing CTs types are recommended as minimum:
5VA 10P20 for 1A secondary rating
10VA 10P20 for 5A secondary rating
The first method:
Protection type Knee-point voltage
Non-directional DT/IDMT overcurrent and earth fault protection
Time-delayed phase overcurrent
V k
≥
I fp
( R ct
+
R l
+
R rel p
)
2
Time-delayed earth fault overcurrent
V k
≥
I fn
( R ct
+
2
⋅
R l
+
R rel p
+
R rel n
)
2
Non-directional instantenous overcurrent and earth fault protection
Instantenous phase overcurrent V k
≥
I sp
⋅
( R ct
+
R l
+
R rel p
)
Instantenous earth fault overcurrent
V k
≥
I fn
( R ct
+
2
⋅
R l
+
R rel p
+
R rel n
)
2
Where:
V : Required CT knee-point voltage [V] k
I fp
: Maximum prospective secondary phase current [A]
I psc
: Maximum prospective primary phase current [A]
I fn
: Maximum prospective secondary earth fault current [A]
I psc N
: Maximum prospective primary earth fault current [A]
I sp
: Stage 2 and 3 setting [A]
R ct
: Secondary CT winding resistance [
Ω
]
R l
: Resistance of single lead from the relay to current transformer [
Ω
]
AP
AP
P116_EN_AP_A11 v2.7
(AP) 6-80
R rel p
: Resistance of P116 phase current input at 30In [
Ω
]
R rel n
: Resistance of P116 neutral current input at 30In [
Ω
]
Application Notes
MiCOM P116
R : rated (nominal) CT burden resistance bn
R : real CT burden resistance (for example: wires of circuit between CT and the relay and b resistance of all contacts in circuits, etc)
K : CT ratio n
I pn
: rated (nominal) primary phase CT current
I pn N
: rated (nominal) primary CT e/f current
I sn
: rated (nominal) secondary CT current
I sn N
: rated (nominal) secondary CT e/f current
S : rated (nominal) CT power n
P : rated (nominal) CT burden (typically the burden of CT has efective character so bn
P bn
=
S n
) n n
: rated (nominal) CT accuracy limit factor (for example for 5P20: n n
=
20 )
V : rated (nominal) CT knee-point voltage [V] sal
For more details refer to B&CT_EN_AP_D11.pdf (“Burdens & Current Transformer
Requirements of MiCOM Relays, Application Notes.” )
The second method:
Two critical cases have to be checked for different types of faults:
• the set current threshold value at which the relay has to operate.
• the highest possible short-circuit current, which depends on the maximum short-circuit power on the busbar of the substation (maximum current).
The following equation is used for dimensioning a current transformer:
V sal
= n n
⋅
I sn
⋅
(
R ct
+
R bn
)
≥
I psc
K n
⋅
(
R ct
+
R b
)
The current transformer can be dimensioned for the minimum required secondary accuracy limiting voltage acc. to IEC 60044-1, 2.3.4:
V sal
≥
I psc
K n
≥
I psc
I pn
⋅
(
R ct
+
R b
)
⋅
I sn
⋅
(
R ct
+
R b
)
V s a l
≥
K s s c
⋅
I s n
⋅
(
R c t
+
R b
)
Alternatively, the current transformer can also be dimensioned for the minimum required rated accuracy limit factor acc. to IEC 60044-1, 2.3.3: n n
≥
≥
I psc
I psc
I pn
I sn
⋅
K n
(
(
R ct
R ct
⋅
(
(
R ct
R ct
+
+
+
+
R b
R bn
)
)
R b
R bn
)
)
Application Notes
MiCOM P116
P116_EN_AP_A11 v2.7
(AP) 6-81 n n
≥
K s s c
⋅
(
(
R
R c t c t
+
+
R b
R b n
)
)
=
K s s c
⋅
(
(
P c t
P c t
+
+
P b
P b n
)
)
The actual secondary connected burden R b
is given as follow:
( in P 116 : R rel p
=
R rel n
=
R rel
)
•
•
For phase-to-ground faults:
For phase-to-phase faults:
R b
=
2
⋅
R l
+
2
⋅
R rel
R b
=
R l
+
R rel
The relay’s burden R rel
is per table 2 (see section 3.2).
The lead resistance R l
is to be calculated from wire length, cross section and specific resistance.
The relation between secondary accuracy limiting voltage acc. to IEC 60044-1, 2.3.4 and rated (nominal) accuracy limit factor acc. to IEC 60044-1, 2.3.3 is given as follows:
V sal
= n n
⋅
P bn
I sn
+
I sn
⋅
R ct
Sample calculation
The following application data are given:
CT ratio: 100 A /1 A ( I pn
=100A; I = I sn n
(P116) = 1A)
P116 e/f input is connected to star point of phase CTs (no dedicated CT for e/f)
So e/f CT ratio: 100 A /1 A ( I pn
= I pn N
=100A; I sn N
= I =I n
(P116) = I en
(P116) =1A) sn
CT nominal power (producer data value): S n
=2.5 VA
Nominal (rated) CT burden:
R bn
=
S n
I sn
2
=
2 .
5 VA
=
( 1 A )
2
2 .
5
Ω
CT internal burden R ct
= 0.5
Ω
(producer data value or measured for CT secondary wire)
Lead resistance (wires between CTs and P116): R l
= 0.01774
Ω
(2 m one way, 2.5 mm
2
Cu)
Calculation Calculation condition
Current used for calculation
(fault calculation or setting values)
R rel
(R p
– refer Table 2)
Value
Required accuracy limit factor
Checking of
CT accuracy because of the real burden
Symbol
Max prospective short circuit value for I psc
3-phase fault
Max prospective earth fault value for phase-ground fault
The first o/c stage
I psc
I>
N
The second o/c stage
The first e/f stage
I>>
(IN>)
100 I pn
(10 kA)
20 I pn
(2 kA)
1 I n
10 I n
0.240
Ω
@ 30I n
; I n
=1A
0.234
Ω
@ 20I en
; I en
=1A
2.898
Ω
@ 1I n
; I n
=1A
0.250
Ω
@ 10I n
; I n
=1A
0.2 I en
31.061
Ω
@ 0.2I
en
; I en
=1A
AP
AP
P116_EN_AP_A11 v2.7 Application Notes
(AP) 6-82
Checking of CT accuracy because of the real burden at setting point value
MiCOM P116
Phase-earth fault at the first stage current, where
( K s s c
)
=
( I N
> and
R b
=
2
⋅
( R l
+
R rel
)
: : n n
≥
K s s c
⋅
R c t
R c t
+
+
R b
R b n
=
0 .
2
⋅
0 .
5
+
2
⋅
( 0 .
+
3 1 .
0 6 3
0 .
5
+
2 .
5
=
4 .
1 8
Phase-phase fault at the first stage current,
where ( K s s c
)
=
( I
> and R b
=
R l
+
R rel
: n n
≥
K s s c
⋅
R c t
R c t
+
+
R b
R b n
=
1 .
0
⋅
0 .
5
+
( 0 .
+
0 .
5
+
2 .
5
2 .
8 9 8
=
1 .
1 4
Phase-phase fault at the second stage current,
where ( K s s c
)
=
( I
> > and R b
=
R l
+
R rel
: n n
≥
K s s c
⋅
R c t
R c t
+
+
R b
R b n
=
1 0 .
0
⋅
0 .
5
+
( 0 .
+
0 .
2 5 0 )
0 .
5
+
2 .
5
=
2 .
5 6
Checking of accuracy limit factor point for max current:
Phase-earth fault, maximum current,
where
( K s s c
)
=
(
I p s c N
I p n N
)
and
R b
=
2
⋅
( R l
+
R rel
)
: n n
≥
K s s c
⋅
R c t
R c t
+
+
R b
R b n
=
2 0
⋅
0 .
5
+
2
⋅
( 0 .
+
0 .
2 3 4
0 .
5
+
2 .
5
=
6 .
6 9
3 phase fault, maximum current,
where
( K s s c
)
=
( I p s c
/ I n and R b
=
R l
+
R rel
: n n
≥
K s s c
⋅
R c t
R c t
+
+
R b
R b n
=
1 0 0
⋅
0 .
5
+
( 0 .
+
0 .
2 4 0
0 .
5
+
2 .
5
=
2 5 .
2 5 8
Summary of calculation:
The maximum value (for all above cases) of required accuracy limit factor is for three phase fault with maximum current.
Overall, a minimum rated accuracy limit factor of 25.258 is required. A typical (standard) value thus would be n n
= 30.
A typical (standard) value thus would be 2.5 VA (2.5 VA P30);
If a CT with n n
= 20 is to be used, it is necessary to increase the nominal power of the CT based on the following formula:
Application Notes
MiCOM P116 n n 1
⋅
S n 1
= n n 2
⋅
S n 2
P116_EN_AP_A11 v2.7
(AP) 6-83
Where:
S n 1
- nominal power of assumed CT for the first approach of calculation: 2.5VA n n 1
- minimum required accuracy limit factor for the first approach of calculation: 25.258. n n 2
- assumed accuracy limit factor for required CT: n n
= 20.
S n 2
- nominal power of required CT for assumed accuracy limit factor: ?
S n 2
=
S n 1
⋅
( ) n 1
( ) n 2
=
2 .
5 V A
⋅
(
2 5 .
2 5 8
( )
)
=
3 .
1 6 V A
A typical (standard) value thus would be 5 VA (5 VA P20);
The new CT requirement calculation based on 5 VA P20 CT can be repeated again for double check.
AP
AP
P116_EN_AP_A11 v2.7
(AP) 6-84
4. POSSIBLE CONNECTIONS OF CTs AT THE P116's INPUT
Application Notes
MiCOM P116
Connection diagrams are given in the Installation chapter (P116/EN
I
N) of this manual.
4.1 Connection to 3 Phase CTs + Core Balance CT
4.1.1 Core balance CT connected to the Earth Current Measurement Input (terminals A9 – A10)
4.1.2
4.2
This application can be used in systems with a small value of e/f current (isolated neutral or with Petersen coil). To ensure that the P116 is powered during earth fault conditions, the auxiliary voltage supply should be connected to terminals B1 and B2 (Vx). Typically phaseto-phase AC voltage from substation auxiliary transformer or VT is applied. For the above types of system, the phase-to-phase voltage does not disappear during earth faults. For phase-to-phase faults the P116 is supplied from the CTs only.
Refer to Application chapter: P116/EN AP, Figure 3.
Advantage:
In this case, a typical core balance CT can be used.
The earth fault current value has no influence on the CB tripping.
Drawback:
Additional Vx powering from an ac voltage source is required to trip in case of an e/f.
Connection to 2 Phase CTs + Core Balance CT
Refer to Application chapter: P116/EN AP, Figure 4.
Advantage:
Only 2 CTs are used, resulting in saving one phase CT. The third phase is reformed by the wiring.
Drawback:
The phase and earth CTs must be suitably over-dimensioned. The core balance CT must be connected to the supply input of the earth current input (terminals A7 – A8).
We assume that the system is balanced. This solution can be applied in specific applications only, because of the cost of over-dimensioned core balance CTs is significant and there is technical difficulty to turn more than one wire in a core balance CT. It is recommended to use dual powering application with powering from phase-phase AC voltage (for example from the busbar) so that the P116 is powered from the auxiliary voltage (B1 – B2 terminals) in case of e/f with small current value (too small to supply the P116 from the earth fault current).
Earth Current Input Connected to the Summation of the 3 Phase CTs
Refer to Application chapter: P116 EN AP, Figure 2.
Advantage:
In this case, the earth current is detected by summing the 3 phase currents, the use of a core balance CT is therefore not required. The summing operation is performed at terminals
A9 – A10 of the earth current input.
It is not necessary to supply the relay via the earth current input. However, an additional supply (shown Figure 3) via the earth fault current will provide more energy to the P116.
Therefore the CT starts supplying the P116 when the current drops below 0.2
I en (refer to the Technical Data chapter, P116/EN TD)
Drawback:
Less sensitivity than the core balance CT connection.
Application Notes
MiCOM P116
5. AUXILIARY SUPPLY FUSE RATING (Model A)
P116_EN_AP_A11 v2.7
(AP) 6-85
In the Safety section of this manual, the maximum allowable fuse rating of 16 A is quoted.
To allow time grading with upstream fuses, a lower fuse link current rating is often preferable. Use of standard ratings of between 6 A and 16 A is recommended. Low voltage fuse links, rated at 250 V minimum and compliant with IEC 60269-2 general application type gG, with high rupturing capacity are acceptable. This gives equivalent characteristics to
HRC "red spot" fuses type NIT/TIA often specified historically.
The table below recommends advisory limits on relays connected per fused spur.
This applies to the MiCOM P116 , as these have inrush current limitation on switch-on, to conserve the fuse-link.
Maximum Number of MiCOM P116 Relays Recommended Per Fuse
Battery Nominal Voltage 6 A 10 A Fuse 15 or 16 A Fuse Fuse Rating > 16 A
2 4 6 Not permitted 24 to 60 Vac/dc
60 to 240 Vac/
60 to 250 Vdc
6 10 16 Not permitted
Alternatively, miniature circuit breakers (MCB) may be used to protect the auxiliary supply circuits.
AP
AP
P116_EN_AP_A11 v2.7
(AP) 6-86
Application Notes
MiCOM P116
Measurements and Recording
MiCOM P116
P116_EN_MR_A11 v2.7
MEASUREMENTS AND RECORDING
Date:
Hardware Suffix:
Software Version:
Connection Diagrams:
17 th
November 2013
A
1C
10P11602
MR
Measurements and Recording
MiCOM P116
CONTENTS
Instantaneous records (Model A)
P116_EN_MR_A11 v2.7
(MR) 7-1
MR
MR
P116_EN_MR_A11 v2.7
(MR) 7-2
Measurements and Recording
MiCOM P116
Measurements and Recording
MiCOM P116
1. MEASUREMENTS AND RECORDING
1.1 Introduction
1.2
P116_EN_MR_A11 v2.7
(MR) 7-3
The P116 is equipped with integral fault recording facilities suitable for analysis of complex system disturbances. Fault records can be read out by setting software MiCOM S1 via the
USB port accessible on the P116 front panel. The USB port offers a communications facility to the P116.
Communications can be established via the USB port even if the P116 is supplied neither by the CT nor by the auxiliary voltage.
Access to the USB port is protected by means of a plastic cover.
Event records (Model A)
The relay records and time tags up to 200 events and stores them in non-volatile FRAM memory. This enables the system operator to establish the sequence of events that occurred within the relay following a particular power system condition, switching sequence etc. When the available space is exhausted, the oldest event is automatically overwritten by the most recent.
The real time clock within the relay provides the time tag for each event, to a resolution of
1 ms.
The event records are available for remote viewing, via the communications ports RS485 or
USB.
For extraction from a remote source via communications ports, refer to the SCADA
Communications section (P116/EN CT), where the procedure is fully explained.
Types of event
An event may be a change of state of a control input or output relay, a trip condition, etc.
The following sections show the various items that constitute an event:
Change of state of binary inputs
If one or more of the binary inputs has changed state since the last time that the protection algorithm ran, the new status is logged as an event. The information is available if the event is extracted and viewed via a PC.
Change of state of one or more output relay contacts
If one or more of the output relay contacts have changed state since the last time that the protection algorithm ran, then the new status is logged as an event. The information is available if the event is extracted and viewed via PC.
Relay alarm conditions
Any alarm conditions generated by the relays will also be logged as individual events.
The following table shows examples of some of the alarm conditions and how they appear in the event list:
MR
Alarm Condition
Auxiliary Supply Fail
CT Supply Fail
Event Text
Vx Fail ON/OFF
CT Supply Fail ON/OFF
Event Value
Bit position 0 in 32 bit field
Bit position 1 in 32 bit field
The above table shows the abbreviated description that is given to the various alarm conditions and also a corresponding value between 0 and 31. This value is appended to each alarm. It is used by the event extraction software, such as MiCOM S1, to identify the alarm. Either ON or OFF is shown after the description to signify whether the particular condition is operational or has reset.
MR
P116_EN_MR_A11 v2.7
(MR) 7-4
Protection element trips
Measurements and Recording
MiCOM P116
Any operation of protection elements (a trip condition) will be logged as an event record, consisting of a text string indicating the operated element and an event value. Again, this value is intended for use by the event extraction software, such as MiCOM S1.
1.3 Fault records
Each fault record is generated with time stamp.
The following data is recorded for any relevant elements that operated during a fault, and can be viewed in each of the last 20 fault records:
(i) Event Text (the reason for a trip):
Phase Overcurrent:
I
> trip
I
>> trip
I
>>> trip
SOTF trip (Model A)
I
N_1 trip
I
N_2 trip
I
N_3 trip
I
< trip (Model A)
I
2> trip (Model A)
Brkn Cond trip (Model A)
CB Fail trip
AUX1 trip
AUX2 trip
AUX3 trip
AUX4 trip
(Model A)
(Model A)
(Model A)
(Model A)
Therm OL (Model A)
(ii) Active setting Group (Model A)
(iii) Fault Time an Fault Date (Model A)
(iv) Fault Orgin: type of fault (for example: phase A-B, A-B-C, etc)
(v) Event Value:
Per phase record of the current value during the fault:
I ϕ
and measured
I
N
Fault records are stored in non-volatile memory (FRAM memory). This type of memory does not require any maintenance (no battery inside the P116). Fault records are stored without any time limitation even if the P116 is not supplied from any power source.
Measurements and Recording
MiCOM P116
1.4 Alarm records (Model A)
Each alarm record is generated with time stamp.
P116_EN_MR_A11 v2.7
(MR) 7-5
The following data is recorded for any relevant elements that operated during an alarm, and can be viewed in each of the last 5 alarm records:
(i) Event Text (the reason for a protection alarm):
Phase Overcurrent: t
I
> Alarm t
I
>> Alarm t
I
>>> Alarm tSOTF Alarm t
I
N_1 Alarm t
I
N_2 Alarm t
I
N_3 Alarm t
I
< Alarm t
I
2> Alarm tBrkn Cond Alarm tCB Fail Alarm tAUX1 Alarm tAUX2 Alarm tAUX3 Alarm tAUX4 Alarm tTherm OL Alarm
(ii) Active setting Group
(iii) Alarm Time an Alarm Date
(iv) Alarm Orgin: type of alarm (for example: phase A-B, A-B-C, etc)
(v) Event Value:
Per phase record of the current value during the alarm:
I ϕ
and measured
I
N
Alarm records are stored in non-volatile memory (FRAM memory). This type of memory does not require any maintenance (no battery inside the P116). Alarm records are stored without any time limitation even if the P116 is not supplied from any power source.
MR
MR
P116_EN_MR_A11 v2.7
(MR) 7-6
1.5 Instantaneous records (Model A)
Measurements and Recording
MiCOM P116
Each instantaneous record is generated with time stamp if P116 is supplied from auxiliary voltage Vx.
The following data is recorded for any relevant current elements with the crossed threshold, and can be viewed in each of the last 5 instantaneous records:
(i) Event Text (the reason for a current protection start):
Phase Overcurrent:
I
>
I
>>
I
>>>
I
SOTF
I
N_1
I
N_2
N_3
(ii) Active setting Group
(iii) Alarm Time an Alarm Date
(iv) Alarm Orgin: type of alarm (for example: phase A-B, A-B-C, etc)
(v) Event Value:
Per phase record of the current value during the alarm:
I ϕ
and measured
I
N
Instantaneous records are recorded in case of powering from an auxiliary voltage (not recorded if P116 is powered from CTs only) and stored in non-volatile memory (FRAM memory). This type of memory does not require any maintenance (no battery inside the
P116). Instantaneous records are stored without any time limitation even if the P116 is not supplied from any power source.
Measurements and Recording
MiCOM P116
1.6 Alarm status
Alarm status presents the current Alarm signals.
P116_EN_MR_A11 v2.7
(MR) 7-7
The Alarm signals information can be with latching or without latching, depends on the setting value GLOBAL SETTINGS/LOC/
- Alarms Info 0:Self-reset – only current Alarm status is displayed,
- Alarms Info 1:Latching – Alarm information is latched up to reset in cell: ALARM
STATUS/Reset Press ENTER cell.
The following Alarm is viewed: t
I
> Alarm t
I
>> Alarm t
I
>>> Alarm tSOTF Alarm t
I
N_1 Alarm t
I
N_2 Alarm t
I
N_3 Alarm t
I
< Alarm t
I
2> Alarm tBrkn Cond Alarm
CB Fail Alarm tAUX1 Alarm tAUX2 Alarm tAUX3 Alarm tAUX4 Alarm
Thermal Overload
Alarm tCB FLTY Ext.Sign.
Alarm
Inrush Bl. Alarm.
Alarm by the first phase overcurrent stage
Alarm by the second phase overcurrent stage
Alarm by the third phase overcurrent stage
Alarm by SOTF element
Alarm by the first earth fault overcurrent stage
Alarm by the second earth fault overcurrent stage
Alarm by the third earth fault overcurrent stage
Alarm by the undercurrent element
Alarm by the negative sequence overcurrent element
Alarm by Broken Conductor protection
Circuit Breaker Failure protection time-delay elapsed tAUX1 time-delay elapsed tAUX2 time-delay elapsed tAUX3 time-delay elapsed tAUX4 time-delay elapsed
Thermal Alarm stage crossed by actual Thermal State value
An input mapped to this function detects CB problems that may influence control possibilities (for example spring problem, insufficient pressure, etc.)
Inrush Blocking (the second harmonic level crossing threshold
Trip Circuit Supervision detects a problem TC Supervision
Alarm.
CB Time Monit.
Alarm.
CB Curr.Diagn.
Alarm.
The monitoring time for CB opening/closing
Summation of the current interrupted by the CB
CB Nb Diagn. Alarm. CB open operations counter monitoring
[79] Lockout Alarm Auto-recloser lockout condition
Any hardware problem detected Hardw.Warning
Alarm
State of CB Alarm The abnormal CB’s position for two bits CB’s connection
(00 or 11)
[79] Roll.Demand
Alarm
The number of Autoreclose cycles in the defined (set) time window is greater than set value
Model A
Model A
Model A
Model A
Model A
Model A
Model A
Model A
Model A
Model A
Model A
Model A
Model A
Model A
Model A
Model A
MR
MR
P116_EN_MR_A11 v2.7
(MR) 7-8
1.7 Measurements
Measurements and Recording
The relay produces a variety of directly measured power system quantities:
I
A,
I
B,
I
C
I
1,
I
2,
I
2/
I
1
I
N
- R.M.S. values
- calculated fundamental harmonic ratio (Model A)
- measured fundamental harmonic only (E/F analogue input)
MiCOM P116
Thermal - thermal state based on RMS value from the max phase current
I
A 2 nd
harmonic - second harmonic in phase A
I
B 2 nd
harmonic - second harmonic in phase B
I
C 2 nd
harmonic - second harmonic in phase C
Measurements and Recording
MiCOM P116
1.8 Demand values
1.8.1
P116_EN_MR_A11 v2.7
(MR) 7-9
The relay produces fixed and peak demand values. Using the reset demand menu cell it is possible to reset these quantities via the user interface or the remote communications.
The information about actual values is available in the RECORDS/MAX & AVERAGE
I submenu.
Demands values are recorded in case of powering from an auxiliary voltage (not recorded if
P116 is powered from CTs only) and stored in non-volatile memory (FRAM memory). This type of memory does not require any maintenance (no battery inside the P116).
Instantaneous records are stored without any time limitation even if the P116 is not supplied from any power source.
Fixed Demand Values
1.8.2
The fixed demand value is the average value of a quantity over the specified interval ( Time
Window) . Values are produced for each phase current (A, B, C). The fixed demand values displayed by the relay are those for the previous interval, the values are updated at the end of the settable demand period: Time Window cell ( GLOBAL SETTINGS/MAX&AVERAGE
I
CONFIGURATION/ )
Time Window setting: from 1 mn to 24 hours
The three phase Peak value demand are displayed in the RECORDS/MAX & AVERAGE
I menu:
Average
I
A
Average
I
B
Average
I
C
Peak Demand Values
Peak demand values are produced for each phase current quantities. These display the maximum value of the measured quantity since the last reset of the demand values.
The calculation principle for the Peak value demand of
I
A,
I
B and
I
C currents is the following:
For each Time Window , a new average value is compared with the value calculated for the previous Time Window . If this new value is greater than the previously stored value, then this new value is stored instead of the previous one.
On the other hand, if this new value is lower than the previously stored value, then the previous value is stored.
This way the average peak value will be refreshed for each Time Window.
There is no dedicated setting for this calculation. The setting of Time Window is common with that of the Fixed Demand value.
The three phase Peak demand values are displayed in the RECORDS/MAX & AVERAGE
I menu:
MAX
I
A
MAX
I
B
MAX
I
C
MR
MR
P116_EN_MR_A11 v2.7
(MR) 7-10
1.9 Counters
Measurements and Recording
The P116's counters are available in the RECORDS/COUNTERS menu:
MiCOM P116
CONTROL COUNTER ( Model A):
No. Trips – Number of manual trip commands (inputs, menu default Control
Window, trip key, remote control via RS485 or USB)
No. Close - Number of manual close commands (inputs, menu default Control
Window, trip key, remote control via RS485 or USB)
Counters can be reset in the CONTROL COUNTER column.
FAULT COUNTER :
No. Fault Trips – Number of trip commands from protection elements (currentbased protection element trip, AUX trips and Auto-recloser trips)
No. Fault Starts – Number of timer starts by protection elements set to trip
(current-based protection element and AUX)
No. Alarms - Number of Alarm signals from protection elements set to Alarm or functions mapped to an Alarm signal,
No. HW Warnings – Number of hardware problems detected by the selfmonitoring function.
Counters can be reset in the FAULT COUNTER column.
AUTORECLOSE COUNTER (Model A):
No. Total [79] action – Total number of Auto-recloser starts
No. Trips&Lockout – Total number of final trips or lockouts
No. Successful – Total number of successful auto-reclosures (the reclaim time has elapsed without tripping)
Cycle 1 Reclose – Number of first shots (the counter is incremented with each first close shot, even if the following trip occurs during the reclaim time)
Cycle 2 Reclose – Number of second shots (the counter is incremented with each second close shot, even if the following trip occurs during the reclaim time)
Cycle 3 Reclose – Number of third shots (the counter is incremented with each third close shot, even if the following trip occurs during the reclaim time)
Cycle 4 Reclose – Number of fourth shots (the counter is incremented with each fourth close shot, even if the following trip occurs during the reclaim time)
Counters can be reset in the AUTORECLOSE COUNTER column.
Note: For a 4-shot auto-reclose sequence (TCTCTC, the next TCTC, the next TCTCTCTCT and the next TCT (lockout)) the counters shows:
Total [79] action:
Total Trips&Lockout:
Total Successful:
Cycle 1 Reclose:
Cycle 2 Reclose:
Cycle 3 Reclose:
Cycle 4 Reclose:
3
2
2
4
1
4
1
CB MONITORING COUNTER (Model A):
CB Close Mon.
– total number of close commands (auto-recloser included)
CB Open Mon. – total number of open commands (Manual and Fault trips)
CB AMPS Value – cumulative value of current broken by the CB for fault clearance trips.
Measurements and Recording
MiCOM P116
1.10 Disturbance Recorder
P116_EN_MR_A11 v2.7
(MR) 7-11
The integral disturbance recorder has an area of memory specifically set aside for record storage. The number of records that may be stored by the relay is dependent upon the selected recording duration: o One - for set Max Record Time from in range: 3.01s - 6s o Two – for set Max Record Time from in range: 2.01s - 3s o Three – for set Max Record Time from in range: 1.51s - 2s o Four – for set Max Record Time from in range: 1.21s – 1.5s o Five - for set Max Record Time from in range: 0.10s – 1.2s
The recorder stores actual samples that are taken at a rate of 16 samples per cycle. Each disturbance record consists of eight analog data channels and thirty-two digital data channels. The relevant CT and VT ratios for the analog channels are also extracted to enable scaling to primary quantities.
Note: If a CT ratio is set to less than a unit, the relay will choose a scaling factor of zero for the appropriate channel.
The " DISTURBANCE RECORDER " menu column is shown in the following table:
Menu Text Default Setting
Setting Range
Min. Max.
Step Size
Pre-Time 0.1 s 0.1 s 6 s 0.01 s
Setting for the disturbance record pre-fault time. The pre-fault time adjusts the beginning of the disturbance record: In this example, the record starts 100ms before the disturbance. Its length can be limited by setting.
Post-Fault Time 0.1 s 0.1 s 1 s 0.01 s
Setting for the disturbance record post-fault time. The total disturbance recording time is: pre-fault time + high state of triggering criteria (Start or Trip time)+ post-fault time.
The above total recording time is limited by setting.
Disturbance Rec.Trig. 0: on Inst.
0: on Inst.
1: on Trip
Setting for the trigger criteria:
0: on Inst . – the trigger is the disturbance indicated by the starting of a protection element set to trip the CB. If this option is chosen the total recording time is: pre-fault time + duration of protection start + post-fault time, but no longer than the value of Max Record Time .
1: on Trip .
– the trigger is the disturbance indicated by the protection element trip. If this option is chosen the total recording time is: pre-fault time + duration of protection trip+ postfault time, but no longer than the value of Max Record Time .
Max Record Time 1.5 s 0.1 s 6 s 0.01 s
Setting for the maximum total recording time. If default value is kept (3 s) it means that
2 records will be recorded.
It is not possible to display the disturbance records locally on the LCD; they must be extracted using suitable software such as MiCOM S1 or MiCOM S1 Studio.
MR
MR
P116_EN_MR_A11 v2.7
(MR) 7-12
1.11 Measurement Settings
Measurements and Recording
MiCOM P116
The following settings under the measurements heading can be used to configure the relay measurement function.
1.11.1 CT Ratio
GLOBAL SETTINGS/CT RATIO menu
Menu Text Default Setting
Setting Range
Min. Max.
Step Size
Line CT Primary 1.000 A 1 30k
I n = 1 A: Sets the phase current transformer input's primary current rating.
Line CT Primary 5.000 A 5 30k
I n = 5 A: Sets the phase current transformer input's primary current rating.
1
1
Line CT Sec 1.000 A N/A N/A
I n = 1 A: Sets the phase current transformer input's secondary current rating.
N/A
Line CT Sec 5.000 A N/A N/A
I n = 5 A: Sets the phase current transformer input's secondary current rating.
N/A
E/Gnd CT Primary 1.000 A 1 30k 1
I en = 1 A: Sets the earth fault current transformer input's primary current rating.
E/Gnd CT Primary 5.000 A 5 30k 1
I en = 5 A: Sets the earth fault current transformer input's primary current rating.
E/Gnd CT Sec 1.000 A N/A N/A N/A
I en = 1 A: Sets the earth fault current transformer input's secondary current rating.
E/Gnd CT Sec 5.000A N/A N/A N/A
I en = 5 A: Sets the earth fault current transformer input's secondary current rating.
I
N connection 0:terminals:A7-A8
0: terminals:A7-A8
1: terminals: A9-A10
This cell is used to inform the P116 about the
I
N connection: with or without powering of the P116.
1.11.2 Default Measuring Window
Default window is after connection of power supply to P116 or after resetting of signaling.
GLOBAL SETTINGS/LOC menu
Menu Text
Default Display
Default Setting
0:Meas.
I n
Available Settings
0:Meas.
I n
1: Meas.A
2: Control CB (Model A) :
3: [79] CTRL (Model A) :
4:Control Mode (Model A) :
Measurements and Recording
MiCOM P116
Menu Text Default Setting
P116_EN_MR_A11 v2.7
Available Settings
(MR) 7-13
This cell is used to change the default display window
0: Measurements referred to
I n
1: Measurements in Amps
2: Control CB window for control of CB (close and trip command)
3: Auto-reclose control window for blocking of the auto-recloser and readout of autoreclose status information
4: Control Mode window for changing of the CB control mode: Local/Remote and for presenting Control Mode state information
1.11.3 Max and Average Currents
The Max & Average
I
Configuration submenu makes it possible to set parameters associated with this function. (Peak and Average values displayed in the Measurements menu)
GLOBAL SETTINGS/MAX&AVERAGE
I
CONFIGURATION menu
Menu Text Default Setting
Setting Range
Min. Max.
Step Size
Time Window 900 s 0 s 3600 s 1 s
Setting for the length of the time window during which peak and average values are stored.
MR
MR
P116_EN_MR_A11 v2.7
(MR) 7-14
Measurements and Recording
MiCOM P116
Commissioning
MiCOM P116
P116_EN_CM_A11 v2.7
(CM) 8-1
COMMISSIONING
Date:
Hardware Suffix:
Software Version:
Connection Diagrams:
17 th
November 2013
A
1C
10P11602
CM
P116_EN_CM_A11 v2.7
(CM) 8-2
CONTENTS
CM
EQUIPMENT REQUIRED FOR COMMISSIONING
The electromagnetic Flag Indicators
Apply application-Specific Settings
Demonstrate correct relay operation
Overcurrent protection testing
Commissioning
MiCOM P116
Commissioning
MiCOM P116
INTRODUCTION
P116_EN_CM_A11 v2.7
(CM) 8-3
The MiCOM P116 feeder protection relays are fully numerical in design, implementing all protection and non-protection functions in software. The relays employ a high degree of selfmonitoring. The commissioning tests do not need to be as extensive as with non-numeric electronic or electro-mechanical relays.
In the commissioning of numeric relays, it is only necessary to verify that the hardware is functioning correctly and that the application-specific software settings have been applied to the relay. It is considered unnecessary to test every function of the relay if the settings have been verified by one of the following methods:
•
Extracting the settings applied to the relay using appropriate setting software
(preferred method)
•
Via the operator interface
Unless previously agreed to the contrary, the customer will be responsible for determining the application-specific settings applied to the relay and for testing of any scheme logic applied by external wiring.
Blank commissioning test and setting records are provided at the end of this chapter for completion as required.
BEFORE CARRYING OUT ANY WORK ON THE EQUIPMENT, THE
USER SHOULD BE FAMILIAR WITH THE CONTENTS OF THE SAFETY
GUIDE SFTY/4L M/E11 OR LATER ISSUE, OR THE SAFETY AND
TECHNICAL DATA SECTION OF THE TECHNICAL MANUAL AND
ALSO THE RATINGS ON THE EQUIPMENT RATING LABEL.
1.
For safety reasons, no work must be carried out on the P116 until all power sources to the unit have been disconnected.
SETTING FAMILIARIZATION
When commissioning a MiCOM P116 relay for the first time, sufficient time should be allowed to enable the user to become familiar with the method by which the settings are applied.
The Getting Started chapter (P116/EN GS) contains a detailed description of the P116 relay.
Via the front panel all the settings can be changed (refer to Settings chapter P116 /EN ST of this manual), LEDs and alarms reset, and fault and event records cleared. However, menu cells with access levels higher than the default level will require the appropriate password to be entered, before changes can be made.
Alternatively, if a portable PC is available together with suitable setting software (such as
MiCOM S1 or S1 Studio), the menu can be viewed a page at a time to display a full column of data and text. This PC software also allows settings to be entered more easily, saved to a file on disk for future reference or printed to produce a setting record. Refer to the PC software user manual for details (refer to Getting Started P116 /EN GS). If the software is being used for the first time, allow sufficient time to become familiar with its operation.
CM
CM
P116_EN_CM_A11 v2.7
(CM) 8-4
2. EQUIPMENT REQUIRED FOR COMMISSIONING
2.1 Minimum equipment required
Multifunctional dynamic current injection test set.
Commissioning
MiCOM P116
Multimeter with suitable ac current range.
Ensure that the multimeter fuse is not open-circuited if used for CT current measurement.
Multimeter with maximum value recording of the dc voltage (to measure the dc magnitude of the trip pulse)
Continuity tester (if not included in multimeter).
Note: Modern test equipment may contain many of the above features in one unit.
If OMICRON is used the proper configuration of current outputs have to be applied to be sure that test device can offer enough power to supply P116 current inputs and the max voltage level not less than
“20Urms”. For example like for CMC256 below:
When CMC356 is used there is no problem with the voltage level , but max powered should be selected (3x64A; 860VA;25Urms or sometimes even 1x64A; 1.74kVA; 50Urms):
Commissioning
MiCOM P116
3. PRODUCT CHECKS
3.1
3.1.1
P116_EN_CM_A11 v2.7
(CM) 8-5
These product checks cover all aspects of the relay and should be carried out to ensure that the unit has not been physically damaged prior to commissioning, that it is functioning correctly and that all input quantity measurements are within the stated tolerances.
•
•
If the application-specific settings have been applied to the relay prior to commissioning, it is advisable to make a copy of the settings to allow their restoration later. This could be done by:
Obtaining a setting file from the customer.
Extracting the settings from the relay itself (this again requires a portable PC with appropriate setting software)
•
Manually creating a setting record. This could be done using a copy of the setting record located at the end of this chapter to record the settings. As the relay’s menu is scrolled through sequentially via the front panel user interface.
With the relay de-energized
The following group of tests should be carried out without powering the P116 and with the trip circuit and flag indicator isolated.
The current transformer connections must be isolated from the relay for these operations to be carried out.
WARNING: NEVER OPEN CIRCUIT THE SECONDARY CIRCUIT OF A CURRENT
TRANSFORMER SINCE THE HIGH VOLTAGE PRODUCED MAY BE
LETHAL AND COULD DAMAGE INSULATION.
The line current transformers should be short-circuited and disconnected from the relay terminals, using the isolating trip circuit and flag indicator provided. If this is not possible to complete this operation, the wiring to these circuits must be disconnected and the exposed ends suitably short-circuited to prevent a safety hazard.
Visual inspection
The rating information given under the top access cover on the front of the relay should be checked. Check that the relay being tested is correct for the protected line/circuit. Ensure that the circuit reference and system details are entered onto the setting record sheet. Double-check the CT primary current rating, and be sure to record the actual CT setting used.
3.1.2
Carefully examine the relay to check that no physical damage has occurred since installation.
Insulation
Insulation resistance tests are only necessary during commissioning and if they have not been performed during installation.
Isolate all wiring from the earth and test the insulation with an electronic or brushless insulation tester at a dc voltage not exceeding 500V. Terminals of the grouped circuits should be temporarily connected together.
The main groups of relay terminals are:
Current transformer circuits,
Trip coil output
Flag indicator output (Model A)
Auxiliary voltage supply (Model A)
Binary control inputs (Model A)
Relay contacts
EIA(RS)485 communication port (Model A)
CM
CM
P116_EN_CM_A11 v2.7
(CM) 8-6
Case earth
The insulation resistance should be greater than 100 M
Ω
at 500 V.
3.1.3
Commissioning
MiCOM P116
On completion of the insulation resistance tests, ensure all external wiring is correctly reconnected to the relay.
External wiring
3.1.4
Check that the external wiring is correct when compared to the relevant relay and scheme diagram. Ensure as far as practical that the phase sequence is as expected.
The relay diagram number appears on the rating label on the upper side of the case.
The connections should be checked against the scheme (wiring) diagram.
Auxiliary supply voltage (Vx) (Model A)
The relay can be operated from either a dc only or AC/DC auxiliary supply depending on the relay’s nominal supply rating. The incoming voltage must be within the operating range specified in Table 1.
Without energizing the relay measure the auxiliary supply to ensure it is within the operating range.
3.2
3.2.1
Nominal Supply Rating DC [AC r.m.s.]
24 - 60 V [24 - 60 V]
60 - 250 V [60 - 240 V]
DC Operating Range AC Operating Range
19 to 72 V 19 to 66 V
48 to 300 V 48 to 264 V
Table 1: Operational range of auxiliary supply Vx
It should be noted that the relay can withstand an ac ripple of up to 12% of the upper rated voltage on the dc auxiliary supply.
Do not energize the relay or interface unit using the battery charger with the battery disconnected as this can irreparably damage the relay’s power supply circuitry.
Energize the relay only if the auxiliary supply is within the specified operating ranges. If a test block is provided, it may be necessary to link across the front of the test plug to connect the auxiliary supply to the relay.
Note: Vx nominal supply rating is common to auxiliary voltage supply and binary control inputs
With the relay energized
The following group of tests verifies that the relay hardware and software are functioning correctly and should be carried out while the P116 is powered.
MV isolators should be opened and the MV side should be connected to the earth to allow safe operation of the CB.
Light emitting diodes (LEDs)
On power up the green LED should have lit up and stayed on indicating that the relay is healthy. The relay has a non-volatile memory that remembers the state (on or off) of the alarm, trip and, if configured to latch, LED indicators when the relay was last energized from an auxiliary supply. Therefore these indicators may also lit up when the auxiliary supply is applied.
Latching of LEDs can be configured via MiCOM S1 setting software (USB port) or manually by the front panel
Default configuration of LEDs (except Trip LED): without latching
Note: The above default configuration can be changed using the MiCOM S1 setting software (USB port).
Trip LED is fixed to protection trip with latching.
The eight LEDs are on the front panel of the relay:
Commissioning
MiCOM P116
•
P116_EN_CM_A11 v2.7
(CM) 8-7
The green Healthy LED indicates that the P116 is powered and no internal faults are detected. A flashing LED indicates a hardware problem on the P116. Not lit – P116 has no power supply
•
Red Trip elapsed
LED: indicates that the time-delay of the protection element set to trip has
•
Yellow Alarm LED: indicates that the time-delay of the protection element set to Alarm has elapsed or that non-protection functions as issued an Alarm signal. This LED can be programmed as 4-8 LEDs too.
Note: By default Alarm LED is not configured to Alarm. It is necessary to configure this LED for Alarm function via MiCOM S1 setting software (USB port) or manually by the front panel
The red LEDs 3 to 8 are programmable to the following signals:
Protect.Trip: Trip by protection elements
Alarm:
General Start:
Alarm signal
Start of protection elements which is set to trip the CB
AUX4:
AUX5:
AUX6:
t
I
>:
t
I
>>:
t
I
>>>:
tSOTF:
t
I
N_1:
t
I
N_2:
t
I
N_3:
t
I
2>:
t
I
<:
Start Phase A:
Start Phase B:
Start Phase C:
-
I
>:
-
I
>>:
-
I
>>>:
SOTF: -
-
I
N_1:
-
I
N_2:
-
I
N_3:
AUX1:
AUX2:
AUX3:
Start of the phase overcurrent element (set to trip) in phase A
Start of the phase overcurrent element (set to trip) in phase B
Start of the phase overcurrent element (set to trip) in phase C
Start of the first phase overcurrent stage
Start of the second phase overcurrent stage
Start of the third phase overcurrent stage
Start of the Switch On To Fault overcurrent element (model A)
Start of the first earth fault overcurrent stage
Start of the second earth fault overcurrent stage
Start of the third earth fault overcurrent stage
Trigger of the AUX1 timer (via a binary input) (Model A)
Trigger of the AUX2 timer (via a binary input) (Model A)
Trigger of the AUX3 timer (via a binary input) (Model A)
Trigger of the AUX4 timer (via a binary input) (Model A)
Trigger of the AUX5 function (via a binary input) (Model A)
Trigger of the AUX6 function (via a binary input) (Model A)
Trip by the first phase overcurrent stage (if flashing: start)
Trip by the second phase overcurrent stage (if flashing: start)
Trip by the third phase overcurrent stage (if flashing: start)
Trip by the SOTF element (if flashing: start) (Model A)
Trip by the first earth fault overcurrent stage (if flashing: start)
Trip by the second earth fault overcurrent stage (if flashing: start)
Trip by the third earth fault overcurrent stage (if flashing: start)
Trip by the negative sequence overcurrent element (if flashing: start) (Model A)
Trip by the undercurrent element (if flashing: start) (Model A)
CM
CM
P116_EN_CM_A11 v2.7
(CM) 8-8
Commissioning
MiCOM P116
t Brkn Cond: Trip by the Broken Conductor protection (if flashing: start)
(Model A)
Therm Trip: - Trip by Thermal Overload protection (if flashing: alarm)
Therm Alarm:
tCBF:
tAUX1:
tAUX2:
Thermal Overload protection alarm
Circuit Breaker Failure protection alarm
Time delay tAUX1 elapsed (if flashing: start) (Model A)
Time delay tAUX2 elapsed (if flashing: start) (Model A)
tAUX3:
tAUX4:
Time delay tAUX3 elapsed (if flashing: start) (Model A)
Time delay tAUX4 elapsed (if flashing: start) (Model A)
[79] in Progress: The auto-reclose function is running (Model A)
[79] F.Trip: Auto-reclose not successful: Final trip (Model A)
[79] Lockout:
[79] Blocked:
[79] Success .:
Lockout of the auto-reclose function (Model A)
The auto-reclose function is blocked (Model A)
The auto-reclose operation is successful (the CB remains closed) (Model A)
Local CTRL Mode: Local Mode (Model A)
CB Alarm: Circuit Breaker condition alarm signal (CB Open NB, Sum
Amps(n), TCS 52 Fail, CB Open Time and CB Close Time)
(Model A)
Maintenance Mode: Maintenance Mode (outputs are disconnected from all functions)
tCB FLT Ext.Sign.: An input mapped to this function detects CB problems which may influence control possibilities (for example spring problem, insufficient pressure, etc.). Signaling is active during a settable time ( GLOBAL SETTINGS/CIRCUIT BREAKER/ tCB FLT ext
(Model A)
)
Setting Group n: Setting Group n is active (Model A)
After establishing the connection between PC and P116 via the USB port, the green Healthy
LED should be lit permanently (it means that the P116 is powered), even if P116 is not connected to auxiliary voltage supply or powered from current inputs.
3.2.2
The remaining LEDs can be checked via the “LEDs Reset” function. This function can be mapped to the L1 – L6 inputs.
In Model A, check that the correct nominal voltage and polarity are applied to opto inputs L1
– L6 (D1 - D10 terminals), then connect the field voltage to the appropriate terminals for the input being tested.
All red LEDs should be lit within 1 s.
Default LEDs setting (both Setting Groups):
- LED3 - LED8: not configured.
The electromagnetic Flag Indicators
Depends on the hardware version up to five electromagnetic flag indicators can be available
(P116xxxxxxxxx 1 xxxx: the one flag indicator; P116Axxxxxxxx 5 xxxx: the five flag indicators).
Flag indicators can be reset using the key on the front panel or a signaling command (via
RS485 communications, a binary input or the USB port).
Commissioning P116_EN_CM_A11 v2.7
MiCOM P116 (CM) 8-9
NOTE: It is impossible to reset the electromagnetic flag indicators without powering (Vx or
CTs) of P116. Therefore if such a function is required an external flag indicator must be used instead of the electromagnetic flag indicators.
NOTE: It is impossible to reset the electromagnetic flag indicators if P116 is powered from
USB only
In Model A, the four optional electromagnetic Flag Indicators are programmable ( GLOBAL
SETTINGS/OPTIONAL FLAG INDICATORS CONF.) :
Flag Ind. t
I
> –
Flag Ind. t
I
>> –
Trip by the first phase overcurrent stage (if flashing: start)
Trip by the second phase overcurrent stage (if flashing: start)
Flag Ind. t
I
>>> – Trip by the third phase overcurrent stage (if flashing: start)
Flag Ind. tSOTF - Trip by SOTF element (if flashing: start)
Flag Ind. t
I
N_1 –
Flag Ind. t
I
N_2 –
Flag Ind. t
I
N_3 –
Flag Ind. t
I
< -
Flag Ind. t
I
2> –
Trip by the first earth fault overcurrent stage (if flashing: start)
Trip by the second earth fault overcurrent stage (if flashing: start)
Trip by the third earth fault overcurrent stage (if flashing: start)
Trip by the undercurrent element (if flashing: start)
Trip by the negative sequence overcurrent element (if flashing: start)
Flag Ind. t Brkn Cond -Trip by the Broken Conductor protection (if flashing: start)
Flag Ind. Therm Trip -Trip by Thermal Overload protection (if flashing: alarm)
Flag Ind. CB Fail – Circuit Breaker Failure protection time-delay elapsed
Flag Ind. tAUX1 – Time delay tAUX1 elapsed (if flashing: start)
Flag Ind. tAUX2 – Time delay tAUX2 elapsed (if flashing: start)
Flag Ind. tAUX3 – Time delay tAUX3 elapsed (if flashing: start)
Flag Ind. tAUX4 – Time delay tAUX4 elapsed (if flashing: start)
Flag Ind. [79] F. Trip – Auto-reclose not successful: Final trip.
Flag Ind. [79] Lockout – Lockout of the auto-reclose function.
Flag Ind. [79] Success.
- The auto-reclose operation is successful (the CB remains closed)
Default Electromagnetic Flag Indicators settings:
F1: fixed Trip
F2-F5: not configured
CM
CM
P116_EN_CM_A11 v2.7
(CM) 8-10
3.2.3 Binary Inputs (Model A)
Commissioning
MiCOM P116
This test checks that all the binary inputs on the relay are functioning correctly.
The binary inputs should be energized one at a time, see external connection diagrams
(P116/EN IN) for terminal numbers.
The P116 is fitted with an LCD display which makes it possible to view the state of the binary inputs, in the COMMISSIONING/Opto
I
/P Status menu cell. This information is also available via the MiCOM S1/S&R Modbus/ Measurement Viewer software. Refer to
MiCOM S1 user manual for details.
If it is not possible to use the Measurement Viewer software, it is necessary to check the binary inputs by means of a functional test of the entire configuration.
Check that the correct nominal voltage and correct polarity are applied to the opto-inputs, then connect the field voltage to the appropriate terminals for the input being tested.
Note: The binary inputs may be energized from an external DC auxiliary supply (e.g. the substation battery) in some installations. Check that this is not the case before connecting the field voltage, otherwise damage to the relay may result. If an external 24/27 V, 30/34 V,
48/54 V, 110/125 V, 220/250 V supply is being used it will be directly connected to the relay's optically isolated inputs. If an external supply is being used then it must be energized for this test but only if it has been confirmed that it is suitably rated with less than 12% AC ripple.
3.2.4
3.2.5
Default factory settings:
- L1 binary input: not configured
- L2 binary input: not configured
- L3 binary input: not configured
- L4 binary input: not configured
- L5 binary input: not configured
- L6 binary input: not configured
Reverse Input Logic indicates the low state of the Binary Input triggered by a programmable function.
Output Relays
To check output contacts it is necessary to carry out a functional test of the entire configuration.
Note: It should be ensured that thermal ratings of anything connected to the output relays during the contact test procedure are not exceeded by the associated output relay being operated for too long. It is therefore advised that the time between application and removal of the contact test is kept to the minimum.
Default factory settings:
- In Model L: RL1 and Model A: RL1-RL6 outputs: not configured
Reverse Output Logic (Model A) means that after powering the P116, n/o contacts are closed. Output triggering via a programmable function opens the contacts (rest position).
Rear Communications Port (Model A)
This test should only be performed where the relay is to be accessed from a remote location and will vary depending on the communications standard adopted.
It is not the intention of the test to verify the operation of the complete system from the relay to the remote location, just the relay’s rear communications port and any protocol converter necessary.
Commissioning
MiCOM P116
3.2.5.1 IEC60870-5-103 (VDEW) communications
P116_EN_CM_A11 v2.7
(CM) 8-11
IEC60870-5-103/VDEW communication systems are designed to have a local Master Station and this should be used to verify that the relay’s EIA(RS)485 port, is working.
The relay address and baud rate settings for EIA(RS)485 can be set by using local communication via the USB port (setting software) or via the relay's front panel.
Default Factory Setting:
- Baud Rate: 19.2 bps
- Parity: No parity
- Stop Bits: one stop bit
- Data Bits: 8 (fixed)
Also ensure that the relay's address and baud rate settings in the application software are the same as those set via the USB port.
Check that, using the Master Station, communications with the relay can be established.
3.2.5.2 MODBUS communications
Connect a portable PC running the appropriate MODBUS Master Station software to the relay’s first rear EIA(RS)485 port via an EIA(RS)485 to EIA(RS)232 interface converter. The terminal numbers for the relay's EIA(RS)485 port are up to 31.
The relay address, Parity and Baud Rate settings for EIA(RS)485 are set by using local communication via USB port (MiCOM S1 software).
3.2.6
Default Factory Setting:
- Baud Rate: 19.2 bps
- Parity: No parity
- Stop Bits: one stop bit
- Data Bits: 8 (no settable)
Ensure that the relay's address and baud rate settings in the application software are the same as those set via the USB port.
Check that communications with the relay can be established.
USB communications port
The USB port is used for local communications between a PC and the P116.
Note: Max current necessary to supply P116 from USB port is 450mA. USB standard offers 500mA for a one PC’s USB controller, so it is not recommended to connect any additional devices to the same PC’s USB controller. If the total power consumption from a one PC’s USB controller is greater than 500mA, P116 can be in permanent rest (P116 display and the green Healthy LED will be flashing)
Before connection cable to USB socket it is necessary discharge static electricity from the body by touching a metal grounded object (such as an unpainted metal surface) to prevent against ESD damage
The USB port integrates electronic boards only to allow communications with the P116 via the HMI and USB interfaces. Input (binary and current) and Output boards are not supplied.
For local communications, the MiCOM S1 setting software is used.
CM
CM
P116_EN_CM_A11 v2.7
(CM) 8-12
USB parameters (not settable in the P116):
- Protocol: Modbus RTU
- Address: 1
3.2.7
- Baud Rate: 115.2 kbits/s
- Data Bits: 8
- Stop bit: 1
- Parity: None
Commissioning
MiCOM P116
Current inputs
This test verifies that the accuracy of current measurement is within the acceptable tolerances.
The P116 measures the RMS and Fundamental harmonic values.
Apply a current equal to the rating of the line current transformer secondary winding to each current transformer input of the corresponding rating, in turn (see Table 1 or external connection diagram (P116/EN IN) for appropriate terminal numbers), checking its magnitude using a multimeter/test set readout. The corresponding reading can then be checked in the
MEASUREMENT column of the menu or via the MiCOM S1/S&R Modbus/Measurement
Viewer connected to the P116 via USB port. Refer to the PC software user manual for details.
If MiCOM S1 is not available, it is necessary to test the protection stages to measure the accuracy of analogue inputs.
Measuring accuracy of the relay:
Reference Conditions:
Sinusoidal signals with nominal frequency fn total harmonic distortion = 2 %, ambient temperature 20 °C and nominal auxiliary voltage Vx.
Deviation relative to the relevant nominal value under reference conditions.
Operating Data
For currents up to 2
I n (
I en):
Phase and earth current:
Asymmetry current:
±
2% at In (Ien)
±
3% at In
Fault Data
Phase and earth current:
For currents
≤
3
I n (
I en):
For currents > 3
I n (
I en):
±
±
5% at In (Ien)
5% of measured current value
However, an additional allowance must be made for the accuracy of the test equipment being used.
Commissioning
MiCOM P116
4. SETTING CHECKS
P116_EN_CM_A11 v2.7
(CM) 8-13
The setting checks ensure that all of the application-specific relay settings (i.e. the relay’s functions), for the particular installation, have been correctly applied to the relay.
4.1
Note: The trip circuit should remain isolated during these checks to prevent accidental operation of the associated circuit breaker.
Apply application-Specific Settings
There are two methods of applying the settings to the relay:
Downloading them from a pre-prepared setting file to the relay using a portable PC running the MiCOM S1 support software. Communication between the PC and the P116 is done via the relay’s USB front port, located at the bottom of front panel, or rear communications port.
This method is preferred for transferring function settings as it is much faster and there is less margin for error.
If a setting file has been created for the particular application and is available on an external memory disk, this will further reduce the commissioning time.
Enter them manually via the relay’s operator interface.
4.2
Application notes for the setting values are given in Application Notes chapter P116/EN AP of this manual.
Demonstrate correct relay operation
The above tests have already demonstrated that the relay is within calibration, thus the purpose of these tests is as follows:
−
To determine that the primary protection functions of the relay, overcurrent, earth-fault etc. can trip according to the correct application settings.
−
To verify the correct assignment of the CB trip outputs and of the flag indicator output,
− by monitoring the response to a selection of fault injections.
4.2.1 Overcurrent protection testing
This test, performed on stage 1 of the overcurrent protection function, demonstrates that the relay is operating correctly at the application-specific settings.
4.2.1.1 Connection and preliminaries
The testing current is fed via terminals: A1-A2, A3-A4, and A5-A6, A7—A8 connected to
CTs. The type of connection is shown in Figure 1. The external connection diagram is also available in Installation chapter P116/EN IN of this manual..
Ensure that
I
> is mapped to the RL1 output.
Note: The Low Energy Trip output and the Flag Indicator outputs are activated by any protection elements set to trip.
Disconnect the auxiliary voltage supply from the P116's terminals B1 and B2.
Connect the trip output or flag indicator output so that its operation will trip the test set and stop the timer.
Note: During tripping, the trip and flag indicator outputs output energy on terminals is:
trip coil output: 0.1 Ws 24 Vdc or 0.02 Ws 12 V (ordering option)
flag indicator output: 0.01 Ws 24 Vdc
The timer should be compatible with the above outputs.
Connect the current output of the test set to phase “A” of the relay current transformer input
(terminals A1 and A2).
CM
CM
P116_EN_CM_A11 v2.7
(CM) 8-14
Ensure that the timer starts when the current is applied to the relay.
Protection accuracy of the relay:
PROTECTION ACCURACY
Element Range Deviation Trigger Reset
Phase overcurrent elements
(
I
> &
I
>> &
I
>>> &
SOTF)
0.1 to 40
I n
±
3%
±
0.01In DT:
I s
±
2%
±
0.01In
IDMT:
1.1
I s
±
2%
±
0.01In
0.95
I s
±
2%
±
0.001In
1.05
I s
±
2%
±
0.01In
(
Earth fault overcurrent elements
I
I
N_1 &
N_3)
I
N_2 &
0.002 to 1
0.01 to 8
0.1 to 40
I
I
I en en en
±
±
±
3%
3%
3%
±
±
±
0.001
0.002
0.01
I
I
I en en en
DT:
±
±
±
3%
3%
I
3%
±
± es
±
0.001
0.002
0.01
I
I
I en en en
0.002 to 1
I en
0.01 to 8
I en
0.1 to 40
I en
±
3%
±
0.001
I en
±
3%
±
0.002
I en
±
3%
±
0.01
I en
IDMT: 1.1
I es
±
3%
±
0.001
I en
±
3%
±
0.002
I en
±
3%
±
0.01
I en
Negative sequence phase overcurrent elements
(
I
2>)
0.1 to 4
I n
±
3%
±
0.01In DT:
I
2s
±
3%
±
0.01In
0.95
I es
±
3%
±
0.001
I en
±
±
±
±
±
3%
3%
1.05
3%
3%
3%
±
±
±
±
I
±
0.002
0.01
es
±
0.01
I
I en en
3%
0.001
0.002
I
I
I en en en
0.95
I
2s
±
3%
±
0.001In
IDMT:
1.1
I
2s
±
3%
±
0.01In 1.05
I
2s
±
3%
±
0.01In
(
(
Phase undercurrent element (
I
<)
Broken conductor
I
2/
I
1).
0.1 to 2
I n
±
3%
±
0.01In DT:
I
<
±
2%
±
0.005A
20 to 100%
±
5%
±
0.01In DT:
I
2/
I
1
±
5%
±
0.01In
Thermal overload
I therm
Trip)
,
θ
Alarm,
θ
0.95
±
±
2%
0.95
5%
±
±
I
I
<
0.01In
2/
I
1
0.01In
0.10 to 3.0
I n
±
3%
±
0.01In
I therm
±
3%
±
0.01In 0.97
I therm
±
3%
±
0.01In
Commissioning
MiCOM P116
Time deviation
±
2% +20…50 ms
±
5% +20…50 ms
±
2% +20…50 ms
±
5% +20…50 ms
±
2% +20…50 ms
±
5% +20…50 ms
±
2% +20…50 ms
±
2% +20…50 ms
–5% +20…50 ms
(ref. IEC 60255-8)
Commissioning
MiCOM P116
P116_EN_CM_A11 v2.7
(CM) 8-15
P2
S2
S2
S2
S1
S1
S1
P1
A1
A2
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A3
A4
A5
A11
A12
Binary Input L1
D1
D2
Binary Input L2
D3
D4
D5
Binary Input L3
D6
D7
Binary Input L4
D8
D9
Binary Input L5
Binary Input L6
D10
D11
D12
E2
Contact Output RL5 E3
E4
Ia
Ib
Ic
IN
IN
L1
L2
P116
RL1
RL2
B6
B7
B8
B9
RL3
B10
B11
12-24Vdc/0.1J
+ or -
MiTOP
+
-
24Vdc/0.01J
RL4
B12
T+
C1
T-
C2
F+
C3
F-
C4
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
A
B
C
L3
C9
RS485
C10
L4
USB
L5
L6 RL6
E5
E6
E7
E8
RL5
WD
E9
E10
Ic
Ia
Auxiliary
Voltage Vx
Contact
Output RL1
Contact
Output RL2
Contact
Output RL3
Contact
Output RL4
Energy Trip
Flag Indicator
T-
RS485
T+
Ib
Contact Output
RL6
Watchdog
P0808ENb
Figure 1: P116 Model A External Connection Diagram
CM
CM
P116_EN_CM_A11 v2.7
(CM) 8-16
Commissioning
MiCOM P116
P2
S2
S2
S2
S1
S1
S1
P1
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
Ia
Ib
Ic
IN
IN
USB
P116
Model L
12-24Vdc/0.1J
+ or -
MiTOP
RL1
WD
B9
B10
B11
B12
T+
C1
T-
C2
C3
C4
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
A
B
C Ic
Ia
Ib
Contact
Output RL1
Watchdog
Energy Trip
PJ090ENa
Figure 2: P116 Model L External Connection Diagram
4.2.1.2 Perform the test
Ensure that the timer is reset.
Apply to the relay a current of twice the setting for
I
> (refer to chapter P116/EN ST of this manual) and make a note of the time displayed when the chronometer stops.
WARNING: Never open circuit the secondary circuit of a current transformer since the high voltage produced may be lethal and could damage insulation.
4.2.1.3 Check the Operating Time
Check that the operating time recorded by the timer is within the range shown in Table 2.
Notes: Except for the definite time characteristic, the operating times given in
Table 2 are for a time multiplier or time dial setting of 1. Therefore, to obtain the operating time at other time multiplier or time dial settings, the time given in Table 2 must be multiplied by the setting for IDMT characteristics.
In addition, for definite time and inverse characteristics there is an additional delay of up to 0.03 seconds that may need to be added to the relay’s acceptable range of operating times.
If the P116 is not connected to an auxiliary voltage supply (Vx) it is necessary to add an additional start-up time-delay (booting time). The value of this delay depends on the ratio: value current/0.2In. Refer to
Commissioning
MiCOM P116
P116_EN_CM_A11 v2.7
(CM) 8-17 the Application chapter of this manual (P116/EN AP) or the Technical
Data chapter of this manual (P116/EN TD). Typically it is about 0.065 seconds.
For all characteristics, allowance must be made for the accuracy of the test equipment being used.
Characteristic
DT
IEC S Inverse
IEC V Inverse
IEC E Inverse
UK LT Inverse
UK ST Inverse
IEEE M Inverse
IEEE V Inverse
IEEE E Inverse
US Inverse (CO8)
US Inverse (CO2 P40)
RI Inverse
Operating Time at Twice Current Setting and Time
Multiplier/Time Dial Setting of 1.0
Nominal (Seconds) t
I
> Time Delay Setting
10.03
13.50
26.67
120.00
1.78
3.8
7.03
9.52
2.16
12.12
4.52
Range (Seconds)
Setting ±5% +(0.02...0.05)ms
9.28 – 11.78
12.49 – 14.51
24.67 – 29.67
111.00 – 129.00
1.65 – 1.91
3.52 – 4.08
6.51 – 7.55
8.81 – 10.23
2.00 – 2.32
11.22 – 13.02
4.19 – 4.86
Table 2: Characteristic Operating Times for
I
>
Reconfigure to test a phase B fault. Repeat the test in section 0, this time ensuring that the
breaker trip output relative to phase B operation trips correctly. Record the tripping time for phase B. Repeat for phase C fault.
CM
CM
P116_EN_CM_A11 v2.7
(CM) 8-18
4.2.1.4 Check the Outputs
4.2.1.4.1 CB Coil Output
Commissioning
MiCOM P116
Ensure that the CB coil is connected to terminals C1 (+) and C2 (-).
Ensure that the
I
> stage is configured to trip (refer to chapter P116/EN ST of this manual).
Close the CB.
Apply a current of twice the setting for
I
> or use MAINTENANCE MODE to run functional test. The CB will open when the t
I
> time-delay elapses.
P116 should trip CB.
NOTE:
1. The voltage value on the energy output, controlled by an electronic circuit which changes a voltage value in time depends on the current value and a burden connected to the output, so it is not possible to measure voltage value if the multimeter has no pick value (max value) recording function with measuring window not greater than 10ms.
2. For tests of the energy output a test equipment like Omicron can be used. Binary input of test equipment has to be connected to this P116 output. In setting software of test equipment the “wet” option has to be selected and the nominal voltage: 24Vdc has to be set with 0.8 reset ratio.
4.2.1.4.2 Flag Indicator Output (Model A)
Ensure that the flag indicator is connected to terminals C3 (+) and C4 (-).
Reset the Flag indicator.
Apply a current of twice the setting for
I
> use MAINTENANCE MODE to run functional test..
The flag indicator will be triggered when the t
I
> time-delay elapses.
Flag indicator should be tripped.
NOTE:
1. The voltage value on the energy output, controlled by an electronic circuit which changes a voltage value in time depends on the current value and a burden connected to the output, so it is not possible to measure voltage value if the multimeter has no pick value (max value) recording function with measuring window not greater than 10ms.
2. For tests of the energy output a test equipment like Omicron can be used. Binary input of test equipment has to be connected to this P116 output. In setting software of test equipment the “wet” option has to be selected and the nominal voltage: 24Vdc has to be set with 0.8 reset ratio.
Commissioning
MiCOM P116
5. FUNCTIONAL TESTS
P116_EN_CM_A11 v2.7
(CM) 8-19
MiCOM P116 has special functions for this purpose available in COMMISIONING column.
All tests are available in Maintenance Mode only.
Note: If Maintenance Mode is not selected all test cells are hidden in P116 menu.
It is possible to set following Maintenance mode options (settings):
•
“ No ” - Maintenance mode is disabled. All window cells below are hidden
( Maintenance mode is the latest cell in COMMISIONING column)
•
“ Yes,outp.trips
” - Maintenance mode is enabled. In this mode all test cells in
COMMISIONING column are shown. During tests outputs are energized.
•
“ Yes,outp.block
” - Maintenance mode is enabled and all test cells in
COMMISIONING column are shown. In this mode, the high state of output functions are ignored (control of outputs are blocked).
This option allows the user to check the operation of the protection functions without actually sending any external command (Tripping or signalling).
Depends on the rear protocol selected in menu, transmission of information to SCADA is blocked (Modbus RTU) or sent (IEC 103) with additional information to know that
P116 is in Maintenance mode (refer to Communication chapter and EN 60870-5-103 standard).
Changing of setting from “ No ” to “ Yes,….
” from the front panel activate this mode for
10 minutes only . After this time the option is automatically switched to “ No ”.
The selection of the maintenance mode is possible by logic input (the level), control command (rear or front port), or by front panel interface. The maintenance mode is terminated by:
•
Low state of logic input assigned to Maintenance mode function,
•
Control command which activate this mode (rear command or setting: “ Yes,….
”) and by turning off the power supply.
Note: Maintenance rear command is available in Modbus protocol only CM
Maintenance Mode
1: Yes,outp.trips
When this menu is activated (set to YES: “ Yes,outp.trips
” or “ Yes,outp.block
”), and Alarm led is assigned to Maintenance Mode the Alarm led is lit.
In “ Yes,outp.block
” case, all the output contacts are blocked, and no command can be issued to these contacts, even if a protection threshold associated with one of these output contacts has been crossed. (If a protection threshold is crossed, all associated LEDs will be ON, even the TRIP LED, if protection element is set to Trip ).
The commissioning cells allow the user to check the external wiring to the relay's output contacts. This function is available after activation of Maintenance mode. To do this, the user has only to set to 1 the desired output contact's corresponding bit, and this will close the contact and allow the continuity of the wiring to be checked.
Test
Pattern
TF654321
00000000
In the cell below, the contact test time can be set:
CM
P116_EN_CM_A11 v2.7
(CM) 8-20
Commissioning
MiCOM P116
Contact Test
Time 001.00s
If the outputs for test are selected and Time for output closing is set, the closing command can be executed in this cell:
Test output
0: no operation
To execute the test, press OK key, press the
or
key to select 1: Apply test and confirm action by OK . The contact will be closed for the duration of the Contact Test Time pulse.
The next commissioning cells, which appears in Maintenance mode , allows the user to check the functional output configuration of the P116. To do this, the user has only to select which protection element will be triggered, and this will close the contact assigned to this protection element and allow the continuity of the wiring to be checked.
Functional Test
0: I>
In the cell below the end of the functional test can be configured:
Functional Test
End 0: CB trip
The following options are possible:
0: CB trip – after triggering the functional test, the test is interrupted after trip command.
1: Time – the protection element will be triggered for the duration of the pulse time.
If the 1: Time option is selected it is necessary to set the pulse length:
Contact Test
Time 001.00s
The next cell is used for functional test execution:
Functional Test
CTRL: no operation
To execute this test, press the OK key, press the
or
key to select 1: Operate and confirm action by pressing OK . After the time delay of tested protection element, the contact will be closed for the duration of the Contact Test Time pulse.
Note: If the tested protection element is disabled, no any action will be done via Functional
Test function.
Commissioning
MiCOM P116
6. COMMISSIONING TEST RECORD
Date: Engineer:
Station:
P116 Front Plate Information
Circuit:
System Frequency:
P116_EN_CM_A11 v2.7
(CM) 8-21
Hz
Overcurrent protection relay
Model number
Serial number
Test Equipment Used
MiCOM P116
This section should be completed to allow future identification of protective devices that have been commissioned using equipment, that is later found to be defective or incompatible, but may not be detected during the commissioning procedure.
Injection test set
Insulation tester
Setting software:
Model:
Serial No:
Model:
Serial No:
Type:
Version:
CM
CM
P116_EN_CM_A11 v2.7
(CM) 8-22
Have all relevant safety instructions been followed?
1.
1.1
Product Checks
With the relay de-energized
1.1.1 Visual inspection
1.1.1.1 Relay damaged?
1.1.1.2 Rating information correct for installation?
1.1.1.3 Case earth installed?
1.1.2 Insulation resistance >100M
Ω
at 500V dc
1.1.3 External wiring
1.1.3.1 Wiring checked against diagram?
1.1.4 Measured auxiliary voltage supply
Commissioning
MiCOM P116
*Delete as appropriate
Yes* No*
Yes* No*
Yes* No*
Yes* No*
Yes* No*
Not Tested*
Yes* No*
V ac*
Commissioning
MiCOM P116
1.2 With the relay energized
1.2.1 Light-emitting diodes and Watchdog Contact
1.2.1.1
1.2.1.2
1.2.1.3
Connect the auxiliary voltage supply to terminals B1 and
B2. Are the green Healthy LED and the WD output contact (E8-E10) working?
Supply the P116 with a current above the self-powering level (0.7
I n). Is the green Healthy LED and LCD display lit?
WD output contact: Are terminals E8-E10 shorted?
Establish connection between PC and P116 via USB port. Green Healthy LED working?
1.2.1.4
1.2.2
1.2.2.1
1.2.2.2
1.2.2.3
1.2.2.4
1.2.2.5
Reset LEDs by pressing the C key on the P116's front panel up to see the default window and after that all red
LEDs should flashing rapidly. Are all red LEDs flashing rapidly?
Inputs
Auxiliary voltage for binary control inputs:
Value measured (see: COMMISSIONING/Opto
I
/P
Status window of menu)
L1 binary input (D1-D2 terminals) working?
L2 binary input (D3-D4 terminals) working?
L3 binary input (D5-D6 terminals) working?
L4 binary input (D7-D8 terminals) working?
1.2.2.6
1.2.2.7
L5 binary input (D9-D10 terminals) working?
L6 binary input (D11-D12 terminals) working?
1.2.3
1.2.3.1
Outputs (for tests, COMMISSIONING/ Test outputs cell can be used)
Output Relays
1.2.3.1.1 Relay 1 working?
1.2.3.1.2 Relay 2 working?
1.2.3.1.3 Relay 3 working?
1.2.3.1.4 Relay 4 working?
1.2.3.1.5 Relay 5 working?
1.2.3.1.6 Relay 6 working?
Yes*
Yes*
Yes*
Yes*
Yes*
Yes*
P116_EN_CM_A11 v2.7
V dc
No*
No*
No*
No*
No*
No*
(CM) 8-23
Yes* No*
Yes* No*
Yes* No*
Yes* No*
Yes* No*
Yes* No*
Yes* No*
Yes* No*
Yes* No*
Yes* No*
CM
CM
2.
2.1
P116_EN_CM_A11 v2.7
(CM) 8-24
1.2.3.2
Be sure that Tripping Energy Output is used in application. Check that C1 and C2 terminals are connected to a low energy tripping coil with nominal voltage in rage: 12Vdc – 24Vdc with required energy lower than 0.1J or MiTOP.
For this test CB have to be closed.
Configure Trip CB Order to Energy Output.
SETTING GROUP1/OUTPUT RELAYS
CONFIGURATION G1/
Trip CB Order TF654321
10000000
NOTE: Be sure that you work on GROUP 1: see
OP PARAMETRS/Active Set Group should be Group 1
Execute Trip command from the front panel ( O – the trip key). Is CB is Opened?
Return to previous configuration.
1.2.3.3
Be sure that Flag Energy Output is used in application.
Check that C3 and C4 terminals are connected to an external Flag Indicator with nominal voltage: 24Vdc with required energy lower than 0.01J. Reset External Flag
Indicator.
Configure Trip CB Order to Energy Output.
SETTING GROUP1/OUTPUT RELAYS
CONFIGURATION G1/
Trip CB Order TF654321
01000000
NOTE: Be sure that you work on GROUP 1: see
OP PARAMETRS/Active Set Group should be Group 1
Execute Trip command from the front panel ( O – the trip key). Is Flag Indicator is tripped?
Return to previous configuration.
1.2.3.4
1.2.4
Close CB, after which apply current above setting value.
CB has opened?
Communications between PC and MiCOM S1 setting software established?
3.
3.1
Setting Checks
Protection function timing tested?
Applied current
Expected operating time
Measured operating time
Final Checks
All test equipment, leads, shorts and test blocks removed safely?
Yes*
Yes*
Commissioning
No*
No*
MiCOM P116
Yes* No*
Yes* No*
Yes* No*
A
s
s
Yes* No*
3.2
3.3
Disturbed customer wiring re-checked?
All commissioning tests disabled?
Yes* No*
N/A*
Yes* No*
Commissioning
MiCOM P116
3.4 Fault records reset (via S1 software)?
COMMENTS #
P116_EN_CM_A11 v2.7
(CM) 8-25
Yes* No*
(# Optional, for site observations or utility-specific notes).
Commissioning Engineer
Date:
Customer Witness
Date:
CM
CM
P116_EN_CM_A11 v2.7
(CM) 8-26
7. SETTING RECORD
Date:
Station:
Front Plate Information
Overcurrent protection relay
Model number
Serial number
Rated phase current In
Rated e/f current Ien
Engineer:
Circuit:
System Frequency:
CT Ratio (tap in use):
MiCOM P116
Column
OP PARAMETERS
Identification of Relay
Firmware version
Hardware version
Commissioning
MiCOM P116
/
*Delete as appropriate
Hz
A
Column Global Setting Data
GLOBAL
SETTINGS/
LOC
Language
Default Display
LEDs Reset
Ltchd Outp. Reset
Trip Info Reset
Alarm Display
P116xxxxxxxxxxx1xx:
0: English* 1: Deutsch *
2: Francaise *
4: Portugues *
3: Espanol *
5: Regional*
P116xxxxxxxxxxx2xx:
0: English* 1: Russian*
2: Polski *
4: Regional1*
3: Turkey*
5: Regiona2l*
0: Meas. In *
2: Control CB *
4: Control Mode*
1: Meas. A*
3: [79] CTRL*
0: Manual only*
0: Manual only*
0: Manual only*
0: Self-Reset *
Nominal Frequency
Out.WD Hardware
0: 50Hz *
0: Opened *
GLOBAL
SETTINGS/
SETTING GROUP
Control Keys Confirm. 0: No *
Number of Groups
Setting Group
1: One Group*
2: Two Groups *
0: Group 1*
1: Protect.Start*
1: Protect.Start *
1: Protect.Start *
1: Latchig *
1: 60Hz *
1:Closed *
1:Yes *
1: Group 2 *
Commissioning
MiCOM P116
Column
SELECT
GLOBAL
SETTINGS/
CT RATIO
GLOBAL
SETTINGS/
CIRCUIT
BREAKER
GLOBAL
SETTINGS/
INRUSH
BLOCKING
GLOBAL
SETTINGS/
O/C ADVANCED
GLOBAL
SETTINGS/
[79] ADVANCED
SETTINGS
P116_EN_CM_A11 v2.7
(CM) 8-27
Global Setting Data t Change Settings
G1 G2 s
Line CT primary
Line CT Sec
E/Gnd CT primary
E/Gnd CT Sec
IN connection
A
A
A
A
0: terminals: A7-A8*
1: terminals A9-A10* s tOpen pulse min tClose Pulse s
Time Delay for Close s tP pulse. mn tCB FLT Ext. Sign. s
Remote CTRL Mode 0:Remote only * 1:Remote+Local *
52 Unblock SOTF Time s
TC Supervision?
Yes * No *
Yes-52 *
TC Supervision tSUP s
CB Supervision?
Max.CB Open Time
Max.CB Close Time
CB Diagnostic?
Max.CB Open No.
0:No * s s
0:No *
MA^n
1:Yes *
1:Yes *
Max Sum AMPS^n
AMPS’s n= 1* 2 *
Inrush Blocking?
0:No *
2:Closing*
1:Yes *
2 nd
Harmonic Ratio %
Inrush Reset Time
Unblock Inrush Time s s
[46BC] Brkn Cond I<
Block
In
IDMT Interlock by DMT 0:No *
CB FLT Monitor.? 0: No *
1:Yes *
1: Yes *
Block.via Input?
Start Dead t on
0: No * 1: Yes *
0: Protect.Reset *
1: CB trips *
0: No * 1: Yes * Rolling Demand?
Max cycles No.
Rol.Demand
CM
CM
P116_EN_CM_A11 v2.7
(CM) 8-28
Column
GLOBAL
SETTINGS/
COMMUNICATION
ORDERS
Global Setting Data
Time period Rol.
Demand mn
Inhibit Time tI on Close s
Signaling Reset
Pulse Time tCOM1
Pulse Time tCOM2
COM2 Order Conf.
0: No * 1: Close via 79 * s s
GLOBAL
SETTINGS/
OPTIONAL FLAG
INDICATORS
CONF
Flag Ind. t
Flag Ind. t
Flag Ind. t
I
I
I
>
>>
>>>
Flag Ind. tSOTF
Flag Ind. t
Flag Ind. t lag Ind. t
I
Flag Ind. t
Flag Ind. t
I
I
I
I
N_1
N_2
N_3
<
2>
Commissioning
MiCOM P116
Flag2
Flag3
Flag4
Flag5
Flag2
Flag3
Flag4
Flag5
Flag2
Flag3
Flag4
Flag5
Flag2
Flag3
Flag4
Flag5
Flag2
Flag3
Flag4
Flag5
Flag2
Flag3
Flag4
Flag5
Flag2
Flag3
Flag4
Flag5
Flag2
Flag3
Flag4
Flag5
0: RS485 * 1: RS485+Button C *
2: Button C *
Flag2
Flag3
Flag4
Flag5
Commissioning
MiCOM P116
Column
P116_EN_CM_A11 v2.7
GLOBAL
SETTINGS/
GENERAL INPUT
CONFIGURATION
Global Setting Data
Flag Ind. tBrkn Cond
Flag Ind. Therm. Trip
Flag Ind. tCB Fail
Flag Ind. tAUX1
Flag Ind. tAUX2
Flag Ind. tAUX3
Flag Ind. tAUX4
[79] F.Trip
[79] Lockout
[79] Success.
Inp.1 Filtering? *
Inp.2 Filtering? *
Inp.3 Filtering? *
Flag2
Flag3
Flag4
Flag5
Flag2
Flag3
Flag4
Flag5
Flag2
Flag3
Flag4
Flag5
Flag2
Flag3
Flag4
Flag5
Flag2
Flag3
Flag4
Flag5
Flag2
Flag3
Flag4
Flag5
Flag2
Flag3
Flag4
Flag5
Flag2
Flag3
Flag4
Flag5
Flag2
Flag3
Flag4
Flag5
Flag2
Flag3
Flag4
Flag5
0: dc/ac ENA *
2: dc*
1: ac *
n/a
0: dc/ac ENA *
2: dc*
1: ac * n/a
0: dc/ac ENA *
2: dc*
1: ac * n/a
(CM) 8-29
CM
CM
P116_EN_CM_A11 v2.7
(CM) 8-30
Column
Commissioning
MiCOM P116
Global Setting Data
Inp.4 Filtering? *
Inp.5 Filtering? *
Inp.6 Filtering? *
0: dc/ac ENA *
2: dc*
0: dc/ac ENA *
2: dc*
0: dc/ac ENA *
2: dc*
1: ac * n/a
1: ac * n/a
1: ac * n/a
Global nominal V *
Protocol
0: Modbus RTU*
1: IEC103*
Relay Address RS485
GLOBAL
SETTINGS/
COMMUNICATION
Baud Rate RS485
Parity RS485
StopBits RS485
0: 220Vdc *
2: 110Vdc *
4800 *
38400 *
0: No parity* 1: Odd parity *
2: Even parity*
0: 1 stop bit*
1: 2 stop bits*
1: 129Vdc* n/a
9600 * 19200 *
57200 * 115200 *
GLOBAL
SETTINGS/
MAX & AVERAGE
I
CONFIGURATION
Time Window s
GLOBAL
SETTINGS/
DISTURBANCE
RECORDER
Pre-Time
Post Trip Time
Disturbance Rec.Trig.
Max Record Time s s
0: on Inst.* s
1: on Trip *
Commissioning
MiCOM P116
OVERCURRENT G1
SETTING GROUP 1/ PROTECTION G1/
PHASE O/C [50/51] G1
1
2
5
6
7
8
9
3
4
10
11
12
13
14
15
I
> Threshold
Delay Type
I
> t
I
>/TMS/TD
Reset Delay Type
I
>
DMT tReset
I
>
RTD/RTMS Reset
I
>
I
>> Threshold
Delay Type
I
>> t
I
>>/TMS/TD
Reset Delay Type
I
>>
DMT tReset
I
>
RTD/RTMS Reset
I
> t
I
I
I
I
I
> ?
>> ?
>>> ?
>>> Threshold
>>>
P116_EN_CM_A11 v2.7
(CM) 8-31
Settings
0: Disabled*
1: Trip*
2: Alarm*
3: Trip-Inrush Bl *
4: Trip-Latch *
In
s *
0: DMT*
1: IDMT *
0: Disabled*
1: Trip*
2: Alarm*
3: Trip-Inrush Bl *
4: Trip-Latch *
In
s
0: DMT*
1: IDMT *
0: Disabled*
1: Trip*
2: Alarm*
3: Trip-Inrush Bl *
4: Trip-Latch *
In
s
CM
CM
P116_EN_CM_A11 v2.7
(CM) 8-32
SETTING GROUP 1/ PROTECTION G1/
SOTF [50/51] G1
SOTF G1
Commissioning
Settings
MiCOM P116
1 SOTF?
0: Disabled*
1: Trip*
2: Alarm*
3: Trip-Inrush Bl *
4: Trip-Latch *
In
s
2
3
SOTF Threshold tSOTF
7
8
9
2
3
4
EARTH FAULT (Measured) G1
SETTING GROUP 1/ PROTECTION G1 /
E/GND FAULT [50N/51N] G1
1
5
6
I
I
N_1 stage ?
N_1 Threshold
Delay Type
I
N_1 t
I
N_1/TMS/TD
Reset Delay Type
I
N_1
DMT tReset
IN
_1
RTD/RTMS Reset
I
N_1
s
Settings
0: Disabled*
1: IN>Trip*
2: IN> Alarm*
3: IN> Trip-Inrush Bl *
4: IN> Trip-Latch *
I en
s
0: DMT*
1: IDMT *
10
11
12 t t
I
I
I
I
I
I
N_2 stage ?
N_2 Threshold
N_2
N_3 stage ?
N_3 Threshold
N_3
0: Disabled*
1: IN>>Trip*
2: IN>> Alarm*
3: IN>> Trip-Inrush Bl *
4: IN>> Trip-Latch *
s
0: Disabled*
1: IN>>>Trip*
2: IN>>> Alarm*
3: IN>>> Trip-Inrush Bl*
4: IN>>> Trip-Latch *
s
Commissioning
MiCOM P116
Undercurrent [37] G1
SETTING GROUP 1/ PROTECTION G1/
UNDERCURRENT [37]
1
I
< ?
Settings
P116_EN_CM_A11 v2.7
(CM) 8-33
0: Disabled*
1: Trip*
2: Alarm*
3: Trip-Inrush Bl *
4: Trip-Latch *
5: Trip-Inhib 52A *
6: Alarm-Inhib 52 *
In
s
2
3 t
I
I
< Threshold
<
Negative Sequence O/C [46] G1
SETTING GROUP 1/ PROTECTION G1 / NEGATIVE
SEQ.O/C [46] G1
1
2
I
2> ?
Settings
0: Disabled*
1: Trip*
2: Alarm*
3: Trip-Inrush Bl *
4: Trip-Latch *
In
3
4
I
2> Threshold
Delay Type
I
2> t
I
2>/TMS/TD
5 Reset Delay Type
I
2>
s
0: DMT*
1: IDMT *
6
DMT tReset
I
2>
RTD/RTMS Reset
I
2>
s
Broken Conductor G1
SETTING GROUP 1/ PROTECTION G1/
BROKEN CONDUCTOR [46BC] G1
Settings
1 Broken Cond.?
2
3
Ratio
I
2/ tBCond
I
1
[49] Thermal Overload G1
SETTING GROUP 1/ PROTECTION G1 /
THERMAL OVERLOAD [49] G1
0: Disabled*
1: Trip*
2: Alarm*
3: Trip-Inrush Bl *
4: Trip-Latch *
%
s
Settings
CM
CM
P116_EN_CM_A11 v2.7
(CM) 8-34
[49] Thermal Overload G1
SETTING GROUP 1/ PROTECTION G1 /
THERMAL OVERLOAD [49] G1
1
2
3
4
5
6
Therm OL?
Itherm
Te (heating)
Tr (cooling)
Theta Trip
Commissioning
Settings
0: Disabled*
1: Enabled*
In
mn
mn
%
MiCOM P116
7 Alarm OL?
0: Disabled*
1: Enabled*
% 8 Theta Alarm
[50BF] CB Fail G1
SETTING GROUP 1/ PROTECTION G1 /
CB Fail [50BF] G1
1
2
3
4
5
6
CB Fail ?
CB Fail Time tBF
I
< Threshold CBF
I
N< Threshold CBF
Block
I
> ?
Block IN> ?
AUX TIMERS G1
SETTING GROUP 1/ PROTECTION G1 / AUX TIMERS G1
Settings
0: Disabled*
1: Retrip*
2: Alarm*
s
I n
I en
0: No*
0: No*
1: Yes*
1: Yes*
1
2
AUX1 ? tAUX1
Group 1 Settings
0: Disabled*
1: Trip*
2: Alarm*
3: Trip-Inrush Bl *
4: Trip-Latch *
5: Load Shedding*
6: AR after LS Hi*
7: AR after LS Lo*
s
Commissioning
MiCOM P116
AUX TIMERS G1
SETTING GROUP 1/ PROTECTION G1 / AUX TIMERS G1
3
4
5
6
7
AUX2 ? tAUX2
AUX3 ? tAUX3
AUX4 ?
P116_EN_CM_A11 v2.7
(CM) 8-35
Group 1 Settings
0: Disabled*
1: Trip*
2: Alarm*
3: Trip-Inrush Bl *
4: Trip-Latch *
5: Load Shedding*
6: AR after LS Hi*
7: AR after LS Lo*
s
0: Disabled*
1: Trip*
2: Alarm*
3: Trip-Inrush Bl *
4: Trip-Latch *
5: Load Shedding*
6: AR after LS Hi*
7: AR after LS Lo*
s
0: Disabled*
1: Trip*
2: Alarm*
3: Trip-Inrush Bl *
4: Trip-Latch *
5: Load Shedding*
6: AR after LS Hi*
7: AR after LS Lo*
s 8 tAUX4
Logic Selectivity G1
SETTING GROUP 1/ PROTECTION G1 /
LOGIC SELECT. G1
Settings
1
2
3
Sel1? tSel1
Sel2? tSel2
0: Disabled*
1: Enabled*
s
0: Disabled*
1: Enabled*
s 4
Cold Load Pick Up G1
SETTING GROUP 1/ PROTECTION G1 /
COLD LOAD PU G1
1 Cold Load PU ?
Settings
0: Disabled*
1: Current+Input*
CM
CM
P116_EN_CM_A11 v2.7
(CM) 8-36
Cold Load Pick Up G1
SETTING GROUP 1/ PROTECTION G1 /
COLD LOAD PU G1
2
3
4
5
10
11
12
8
9
6
7
1
4
5
2
3
6
Cold Load PU Level
Cold Load PU tCL
Cold Load PU
I
>
Cold Load PU
I
>>
Cold Load PU
I
>>>
Cold Load PU IN_1
Cold Load PU IN_2
Cold Load PU IN_3
Cold Load PU Brkn.Cond
Cold Load PU Itherm
Cold Load PU I2>
Autoreclose [79] G1
SETTING GROUP 1/ PROTECTION G1 /
AUTORECLOSE [79] G1
7
8
9
10
11
12
Autoreclose ?
Dead Time tD1
Dead Time tD2
Dead Time tD3
Dead Time tD4
Reclaim Time tR
Fast O/C Trip
Fast O/C Trip Delay
Fast E/Gnd Trip
Fast E/Gnd Trip Delay
Close Shot? tI>
Inhib.Trip tI>: Shot
Commissioning
Settings
0: Disabled*
1: Enabled*
s
s
s
s
s
1 Trip Shot*
2 Trip Shot *
3 Trip Shot *
4 Trip Shot *
5 Trip Shot *
s
1 Trip Shot *
2 Trip Shot *
3 Trip Shot *
4 Trip Shot *
5 Trip Shot *
s
1 Close Shot*
2 Close Shot*
3 Close Shot*
4 Close Shot*
1 Close Shot*
MiCOM P116
Settings
2: Input*
%
s
0: No*
0: No*
0: No*
0: No*
0: No*
0: No*
0: No*
0: No*
0: No*
1: Yes*
1: Yes*
1: Yes*
1: Yes*
1: Yes*
1: Yes*
1: Yes*
1: Yes*
1: Yes*
Commissioning
MiCOM P116
Autoreclose [79] G1
SETTING GROUP 1/ PROTECTION G1 /
AUTORECLOSE [79] G1
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
Close Shot? tI>>
Inhib.Trip tI>>: Shot
Close Shot? tI>>>
Inhib.Trip tI>>>: Shot
Close Shot? tIN_1
Inhib.Trip tIN_1: Shot
Close Shot? tIN_2
Inhib.Trip tIN_2: Shot
Close Shot? tIN_3
Inhib.Trip tIN_3: Shot
Close Shot? tAUX1
P116_EN_CM_A11 v2.7
(CM) 8-37
Settings
1 Close Shot*
2 Close Shot*
3 Close Shot*
4 Close Shot*
1 Close Shot*
2 Close Shot*
3 Close Shot*
4 Close Shot*
1 Close Shot*
2 Close Shot*
3 Close Shot*
4 Close Shot*
1 Close Shot*
2 Close Shot*
3 Close Shot*
4 Close Shot*
2 Close Shot*
3 Close Shot*
4 Close Shot*
1 Close Shot*
2 Close Shot*
3 Close Shot*
4 Close Shot*
1 Close Shot*
2 Close Shot*
3 Close Shot*
4 Close Shot*
1 Close Shot*
2 Close Shot*
3 Close Shot*
4 Close Shot*
1 Close Shot*
2 Close Shot*
3 Close Shot*
4 Close Shot*
1 Close Shot*
2 Close Shot*
3 Close Shot*
4 Close Shot*
1 Close Shot*
2 Close Shot*
3 Close Shot*
4 Close Shot*
1 Close Shot*
2 Close Shot*
CM
CM
P116_EN_CM_A11 v2.7
(CM) 8-38
Autoreclose [79] G1
SETTING GROUP 1/ PROTECTION G1 /
AUTORECLOSE [79] G1
24
25
26
Inhib.Trip tAUX1: Shot
Close Shot? tAUX2
Inhib.Trip tAUX2: Shot
Commissioning
MiCOM P116
Settings
3 Close Shot*
4 Close Shot*
1 Close Shot*
2 Close Shot*
3 Close Shot*
4 Close Shot*
1 Close Shot*
2 Close Shot*
3 Close Shot*
4 Close Shot*
1 Close Shot*
2 Close Shot*
3 Close Shot*
4 Close Shot*
7
8
9
10
3
4
5
SETTING GROUP 1/
OUTPUT RELAY
CONFIGURATION G1
OUTPUT RELAYS CONFIGURATION G1
TC FI RL6 RL5 RL4 RL3 RL2 RL1
1
2
Latched outputs
Reverse outp. logic
Protect. Trip
Prot.Trip pulse
6
Trip CB Order
Close CB
Order
Alarm
Start Phase A
11
12
13
14
15
16
Start Phase B
Start Phase C start
I
> start
I
>> start
I
>>>
Start SOTF start
I
N_1 start
I
N_2
Commissioning
MiCOM P116
P116_EN_CM_A11 v2.7
(CM) 8-39
OUTPUT RELAYS CONFIGURATION G1
SETTING GROUP 1/
OUTPUT RELAY
CONFIGURATION G1
17 start
I
N_3
18 Start
I
<
19 start
I
2>
TC
20
Start Brkn
Cond
FI RL6 RL5 RL4 RL3 RL2 RL1
21 AUX1
22 AUX2
23 AUX3
24 AUX4
25 AUX5
26 AUX6
27 t
I
>
28 t
I
>>
29 t
I
>>>
30 tSOTF
31 t
I
N_1
32 t
I
N_2
33 t
I
N_3
34 t
I<
35 t
I
2>
36 tBrkn Cond.
37 Thermal Trip
38 Thermal Alarm
39 tCB Fail
40 tAUX1
41 tAUX2
42 tAUX3
43 tAUX4
44 Comm. Order 1
45 Comm. Order 2
46 [79]in Progress
47 [79] F.Trip
48 [79] Lockout
49 [79] Blocked
50 [79] Success.
51 TCS 52 Fail
52 CB Alarm
CM
CM
P116_EN_CM_A11 v2.7
(CM) 8-40
Commissioning
MiCOM P116
SETTING GROUP 1/
OUTPUT RELAY
CONFIGURATION G1
53
OUTPUT RELAYS CONFIGURATION G1
TC FI RL6 RL5 RL4 RL3 RL2 RL1
54
Trip pulse tP tCB FLT
Ext.Sign
55
Setting Group
1
Commissioning
MiCOM P116
INPUTS CONFIGURATION G1
SETTING GROUP 1/
INPUT
CONFIGURATION
G1
L6 L5 L4 L3
1
2
L2 L1
Reverse Input
Logic
Mainten. Mode
P116_EN_CM_A11 v2.7
(CM) 8-41
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Reset Latch
Sign
Reset Latchd
Out
Block. t
I
>
Block. t
I
>>
Block. t
I
>>
Block.tSOTF
Block. t
I
N_1
Block. t
I
N_2
Block. t
I
N_3
Block. t
I<
Block. tI2>
Block. tBrkn
Cond
Block. Itherm.
Block. AUX1
Block. AUX2
Block. AUX3
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
Block. CB Fail
Block. [79]
SEL1 t
I
>>
SEL1 t
I
>>>
SEL1 t
I
N_2
SEL1 t
I
N_3
SEL2 t
I
>>
SEL2 t
I
>>>
SEL2 t
I
N_2
SEL2 t
I
N_3
AUX1
AUX2
AUX3
AUX4
AUX5
AUX6
CM
CM
P116_EN_CM_A11 v2.7
(CM) 8-42
INPUTS CONFIGURATION G1
SETTING GROUP 1/
INPUT
CONFIGURATION
G1
L6 L5 L4 L3
35
36
37
38
39
Cold Load PU
Strt tBF
CB Status 52A
CB FLT
Ext.Sign
L2 L1
CB Status 52B
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
Setting Group 2
Manual Close
Manual Trip
Trip Circ
Supervis.
Reset Theta val.
Start Distur. R.
Local CTRL
Mode
Time Synchr. 47
Commissioning
MiCOM P116
Commissioning
MiCOM P116
P116_EN_CM_A11 v2.7
(CM) 8-43
33
34
35
36
18
19
20
21
29
30
31
32
14
15
16
17
8
9
5
6
3
4
7
SETTING GROUP 1/
LEDs CONFIGURATION G1
1
2
Latched LEDs
Protect. Trip
10
11
12
13
Alarm
General Start
Start Phase A
Start Phase B
Start Phase C
Start
I
>
Start
I
>>
Start
I
>>>
Start SOTF
Start
I
N_1
Start
I
N_2
Start
I
N_3
AUX1
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
AUX2
AUX3
AUX4
AUX5
AUX6 t
I
> t
I
>> t
I
>>> tSOTF t
I
N_1 t
I
N_2 t
I
N_3 t
I
< t
I
2> tBrkn Cond.
Thermal Trip
Thermal Alarm
CB Fail tAUX1
37
38 tAUX2 tAUX3 tAUX4
[79] in Progress
LEDs CONFIGURATION G1
LED3 LED4 LED5 LED6 LED7 LED8
CM
CM
P116_EN_CM_A11 v2.7
(CM) 8-44
Commissioning
MiCOM P116
41
42
43
44
SETTING GROUP 1/
LEDs CONFIGURATION G1
39
40
[79] F.Trip
[79] Lockout
[79] Blocked
[79] Success.
Local CRTL Mode
CB Alarm
45
46
47
Maintenance Mode tCB FLT Ext.Sign
Setting Group 1
LEDs CONFIGURATION G1
LED3 LED4 LED5 LED6 LED7 LED8
Commissioning
MiCOM P116
OVERCURRENT G2
SETTING GROUP 2/ PROTECTION G2/
PHASE O/C [50/51] G2
1
2
5
6
7
8
9
3
4
10
11
12
13
14
15
I
> Threshold
Delay Type
I
> t
I
>/TMS/TD
Reset Delay Type
I
>
DMT tReset
I
>
RTD/RTMS Reset
I
>
I
>> Threshold
Delay Type
I
>> t
I
>>/TMS/TD
Reset Delay Type
I
>>
DMT tReset
I
>
RTD/RTMS Reset
I
> t
I
I
I
I
I
> ?
>> ?
>>> ?
>>> Threshold
>>>
P116_EN_CM_A11 v2.7
(CM) 8-45
Settings
0: Disabled*
1: Trip*
2: Alarm*
3: Trip-Inrush Bl *
4: Trip-Latch *
In
s *
0: DMT*
1: IDMT *
0: Disabled*
1: Trip*
2: Alarm*
3: Trip-Inrush Bl *
4: Trip-Latch *
In
s
0: DMT*
1: IDMT *
0: Disabled*
1: Trip*
2: Alarm*
3: Trip-Inrush Bl *
4: Trip-Latch *
In
s
CM
CM
P116_EN_CM_A11 v2.7
(CM) 8-46
SETTING GROUP 2/ PROTECTION G2/
SOTF [50/51] G2
SOTF G2
Commissioning
Settings
MiCOM P116
1 SOTF?
0: Disabled*
1: Trip*
2: Alarm*
3: Trip-Inrush Bl *
4: Trip-Latch *
In
s
2
3
SOTF Threshold tSOTF
7
8
9
2
3
4
EARTH FAULT (Measured) G2
SETTING GROUP 2/ PROTECTION G2 /
E/GND FAULT [50N/51N] G2
1
5
6
I
I
N_1 stage ?
N_1 Threshold
Delay Type
I
N_1 t
I
N_1/TMS/TD
Reset Delay Type
I
N_1
DMT tReset
IN
_1
RTD/RTMS Reset
I
N_1
s
Settings
0: Disabled*
1: IN>Trip*
2: IN> Alarm*
3: IN> Trip-Inrush Bl *
4: IN> Trip-Latch *
I en
s
0: DMT*
1: IDMT *
10
11
12 t t
I
I
I
I
I
I
N_2 stage ?
N_2 Threshold
N_2
N_3 stage ?
N_3 Threshold
N_3
0: Disabled*
1: IN>>Trip*
2: IN>> Alarm*
3: IN>> Trip-Inrush Bl *
4: IN>> Trip-Latch *
s
0: Disabled*
1: IN>>>Trip*
2: IN>>> Alarm*
3: IN>>> Trip-Inrush Bl*
4: IN>>> Trip-Latch *
s
Commissioning
MiCOM P116
Undercurrent [37] G2
SETTING GROUP 2/ PROTECTION G2/
UNDERCURRENT [37]
1
I
< ?
Settings
P116_EN_CM_A11 v2.7
(CM) 8-47
0: Disabled*
1: Trip*
2: Alarm*
3: Trip-Inrush Bl *
4: Trip-Latch *
5: Trip-Inhib 52A *
6: Alarm-Inhib 52 *
In
s
2
3 t
I
I
< Threshold
<
Negative Sequence O/C [46] G2
SETTING GROUP 2/ PROTECTION G2 / NEGATIVE
SEQ.O/C [46] G2
1
2
I
2> ?
Settings
0: Disabled*
1: Trip*
2: Alarm*
3: Trip-Inrush Bl *
4: Trip-Latch *
In
3
4
I
2> Threshold
Delay Type
I
2> t
I
2>/TMS/TD
5 Reset Delay Type
I
2>
s
0: DMT*
1: IDMT *
6
DMT tReset
I
2>
RTD/RTMS Reset
I
2>
s
Broken Conductor G2
SETTING GROUP 2/ PROTECTION G2/
BROKEN CONDUCTOR [46BC] G2
Settings
1 Broken Cond.?
2
3
Ratio
I
2/ tBCond
I
1
[49] Thermal Overload G2
SETTING GROUP 2/ PROTECTION G2 /
THERMAL OVERLOAD [49] G2
0: Disabled*
1: Trip*
2: Alarm*
3: Trip-Inrush Bl *
4: Trip-Latch *
%
s
Settings
CM
CM
P116_EN_CM_A11 v2.7
(CM) 8-48
[49] Thermal Overload G2
SETTING GROUP 2/ PROTECTION G2 /
THERMAL OVERLOAD [49] G2
1
2
3
4
5
6
Therm OL?
Itherm
Te (heating)
Tr (cooling)
Theta Trip
Commissioning
Settings
0: Disabled*
1: Enabled*
In
mn
mn
%
MiCOM P116
7 Alarm OL?
0: Disabled*
1: Enabled*
% 8 Theta Alarm
[50BF] CB Fail G2
SETTING GROUP 2/ PROTECTION G2 /
CB Fail [50BF] G2
1 CB Fail ?
CB Fail Time tBF
I
< Threshold CBF
I
N< Threshold CBF
Block
I
> ?
Block IN> ?
Settings
0: Disabled*
1: Retrip*
2: Alarm*
s
I n
I en
0: No*
0: No*
1: Yes*
1: Yes*
2
3
4
5
6
Commissioning
MiCOM P116
AUX TIMERS G2
SETTING GROUP 2/ PROTECTION G2 / AUX TIMERS G2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
AUX1 ? tAUX1
AUX2 ? tAUX2
AUX3 ? tAUX3
AUX4 ?
P116_EN_CM_A11 v2.7
(CM) 8-49
Group 1 Settings
0: Disabled*
1: Trip*
2: Alarm*
3: Trip-Inrush Bl *
4: Trip-Latch *
5: Load Shedding*
6: AR after LS Hi*
7: AR after LS Lo*
s
0: Disabled*
1: Trip*
2: Alarm*
3: Trip-Inrush Bl *
4: Trip-Latch *
5: Load Shedding*
6: AR after LS Hi*
7: AR after LS Lo*
s
0: Disabled*
1: Trip*
2: Alarm*
3: Trip-Inrush Bl *
4: Trip-Latch *
5: Load Shedding*
6: AR after LS Hi*
7: AR after LS Lo*
s
0: Disabled*
1: Trip*
2: Alarm*
3: Trip-Inrush Bl *
4: Trip-Latch *
5: Load Shedding*
6: AR after LS Hi*
7: AR after LS Lo*
s 8 tAUX4
Logic Selectivity G2
SETTING GROUP 2/ PROTECTION G2 /
LOGIC SELECT. G2
1
2
3
Sel1? tSel1
Sel2?
Settings
0: Disabled*
1: Enabled*
s
0: Disabled*
1: Enabled*
CM
CM
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
P116_EN_CM_A11 v2.7
(CM) 8-50
4
Logic Selectivity G2
SETTING GROUP 2/ PROTECTION G2 /
LOGIC SELECT. G2 tSel2
Cold Load Pick Up G2
SETTING GROUP 2/ PROTECTION G2 /
COLD LOAD PU G2
1
1
4
5
2
3
6
7
8
9
Cold Load PU ?
Cold Load PU Level
Cold Load PU tCL
Cold Load PU
I
>
Cold Load PU
I
>>
Cold Load PU
I
>>>
Cold Load PU IN_1
Cold Load PU IN_2
Cold Load PU IN_3
Cold Load PU Brkn.Cond
Cold Load PU Itherm
Cold Load PU I2>
Autoreclose [79] G2
SETTING GROUP 2/ PROTECTION G2 /
AUTORECLOSE [79] G2
Autoreclose ?
Dead Time tD1
Dead Time tD2
Dead Time tD3
Dead Time tD4
Reclaim Time tR
Fast O/C Trip
Fast O/C Trip Delay
Fast E/Gnd Trip
s
Commissioning
Settings
Settings
0: Disabled*
1: Enabled*
s
s
s
s
s
1 Trip Shot*
2 Trip Shot *
3 Trip Shot *
4 Trip Shot *
5 Trip Shot *
s
1 Trip Shot *
2 Trip Shot *
MiCOM P116
Settings
0: Disabled*
1: Current+Input*
2: Input*
%
s
0: No*
0: No*
0: No*
0: No*
0: No*
0: No*
0: No*
0: No*
0: No*
1: Yes*
1: Yes*
1: Yes*
1: Yes*
1: Yes*
1: Yes*
1: Yes*
1: Yes*
1: Yes*
Commissioning
MiCOM P116
Autoreclose [79] G2
SETTING GROUP 2/ PROTECTION G2 /
AUTORECLOSE [79] G2
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
Fast E/Gnd Trip Delay
Close Shot? tI>
Inhib.Trip tI>: Shot
Close Shot? tI>>
Inhib.Trip tI>>: Shot
Close Shot? tI>>>
Inhib.Trip tI>>>: Shot
Close Shot? tIN_1
Inhib.Trip tIN_1: Shot
Close Shot? tIN_2
P116_EN_CM_A11 v2.7
(CM) 8-51
Settings
1 Close Shot*
2 Close Shot*
3 Close Shot*
4 Close Shot*
1 Close Shot*
2 Close Shot*
3 Close Shot*
4 Close Shot*
1 Close Shot*
2 Close Shot*
3 Close Shot*
4 Close Shot*
1 Close Shot*
2 Close Shot*
3 Close Shot*
4 Close Shot*
3 Trip Shot *
4 Trip Shot *
5 Trip Shot *
s
1 Close Shot*
2 Close Shot*
3 Close Shot*
4 Close Shot*
1 Close Shot*
2 Close Shot*
3 Close Shot*
4 Close Shot*
1 Close Shot*
2 Close Shot*
3 Close Shot*
4 Close Shot*
1 Close Shot*
2 Close Shot*
3 Close Shot*
4 Close Shot*
1 Close Shot*
2 Close Shot*
3 Close Shot*
4 Close Shot*
CM
CM
P116_EN_CM_A11 v2.7
(CM) 8-52
Autoreclose [79] G2
SETTING GROUP 2/ PROTECTION G2 /
AUTORECLOSE [79] G2
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
Inhib.Trip tIN_2: Shot
Close Shot? tIN_3
Inhib.Trip tIN_3: Shot
Close Shot? tAUX1
Inhib.Trip tAUX1: Shot
Close Shot? tAUX2
Inhib.Trip tAUX2: Shot
Commissioning
MiCOM P116
Settings
1 Close Shot*
2 Close Shot*
3 Close Shot*
4 Close Shot*
1 Close Shot*
2 Close Shot*
3 Close Shot*
4 Close Shot*
1 Close Shot*
2 Close Shot*
3 Close Shot*
4 Close Shot*
1 Close Shot*
2 Close Shot*
3 Close Shot*
4 Close Shot*
1 Close Shot*
2 Close Shot*
3 Close Shot*
4 Close Shot*
1 Close Shot*
2 Close Shot*
3 Close Shot*
4 Close Shot*
1 Close Shot*
2 Close Shot*
3 Close Shot*
4 Close Shot*
Commissioning
MiCOM P116
P116_EN_CM_A11 v2.7
(CM) 8-53
OUTPUT RELAYS CONFIGURATION G2
SETTING GROUP 2/
OUTPUT RELAY
CONFIGURATION G2
TC FI RL6 RL5 RL4 RL3 RL2 RL1
1
2
3
4
5
Latched outputs
Reverse outp. logic
Protect. Trip
Prot.Trip pulse
6
7
8
Trip CB Order
Close CB
Order
Alarm
Start Phase A
9 Start Phase B
10 Start Phase C
11 start
I
>
12 start
I
>>
13 start
I
>>>
14 Start SOTF
15 start
I
N_1
16 start
I
N_2
17 start
I
N_3
18 Start
I
<
19 start
I
2>
20
Start Brkn
Cond
21 AUX1
22 AUX2
23 AUX3
24 AUX4
25 AUX5
26 AUX6
27 t
I
>
28 t
I
>>
29 t
I
>>>
30 tSOTF
31 t
I
N_1
32 t
I
N_2
33 t
I
N_3
34 t
I<
CM
CM
P116_EN_CM_A11 v2.7
(CM) 8-54
Commissioning
MiCOM P116
OUTPUT RELAYS CONFIGURATION G2
SETTING GROUP 2/
OUTPUT RELAY
CONFIGURATION G2
35 t
I
2>
TC FI RL6 RL5 RL4 RL3 RL2 RL1
36 tBrkn Cond.
37
38
39
40
Thermal Trip
Thermal Alarm tCB Fail tAUX1
45
46
47
48
41
42
43
44
49
50
51
52
53
54
55 tAUX2 tAUX3 tAUX4
[79] Blocked
[79] Success.
TCS 52 Fail
CB Alarm
Trip pulse tP tCB FLT
Ext.Sign
Setting Group
2
Comm. Order 1
Comm. Order 2
[79]in Progress
[79] F.Trip
[79] Lockout
Commissioning
MiCOM P116
INPUTS CONFIGURATION G2
SETTING GROUP 2/
INPUT
CONFIGURATION
G2
L6 L5 L4 L3
1
2
L2 L1
Reverse Input
Logic
Mainten. Mode
P116_EN_CM_A11 v2.7
(CM) 8-55
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Reset Latch
Sign
Reset Latchd
Out
Block. t
I
>
Block. t
I
>>
Block. t
I
>>
Block.tSOTF
Block. t
I
N_1
Block. t
I
N_2
Block. t
I
N_3
Block. t
I<
Block. tI2>
Block. tBrkn
Cond
Block. Itherm.
Block. AUX1
Block. AUX2
Block. AUX3
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
Block. CB Fail
Block. [79]
SEL1 t
I
>>
SEL1 t
I
>>>
SEL1 t
I
N_2
SEL1 t
I
N_3
SEL2 t
I
>>
SEL2 t
I
>>>
SEL2 t
I
N_2
SEL2 t
I
N_3
AUX1
AUX2
AUX3
AUX4
AUX5
AUX6
CM
CM
P116_EN_CM_A11 v2.7
(CM) 8-56
INPUTS CONFIGURATION G2
SETTING GROUP 2/
INPUT
CONFIGURATION
G2
L6 L5 L4 L3
35
36
37
38
39
Cold Load PU
Strt tBF
CB Status 52A
CB FLT
Ext.Sign
L2 L1
CB Status 52B
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
Setting Group 2
Manual Close
Manual Trip
Trip Circ
Supervis.
Reset Theta val.
Start Distur. R.
Local CTRL
Mode
Time Synchr. 47
Commissioning
MiCOM P116
Commissioning
MiCOM P116
P116_EN_CM_A11 v2.7
(CM) 8-57
33
34
35
36
18
19
20
21
29
30
31
32
14
15
16
17
8
9
5
6
3
4
7
SETTING GROUP 2/
LEDs CONFIGURATION G2
1
2
Latched LEDs
Protect. Trip
10
11
12
13
Alarm
General Start
Start Phase A
Start Phase B
Start Phase C
Start
I
>
Start
I
>>
Start
I
>>>
Start SOTF
Start
I
N_1
Start
I
N_2
Start
I
N_3
AUX1
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
AUX2
AUX3
AUX4
AUX5
AUX6 t
I
> t
I
>> t
I
>>> tSOTF t
I
N_1 t
I
N_2 t
I
N_3 t
I
< t
I
2> tBrkn Cond.
Thermal Trip
Thermal Alarm
CB Fail tAUX1
37
38 tAUX2 tAUX3 tAUX4
[79] in Progress
LEDs CONFIGURATION G2
LED3 LED4 LED5 LED6 LED7 LED8
CM
CM
P116_EN_CM_A11 v2.7
(CM) 8-58
Commissioning
MiCOM P116
41
42
43
44
SETTING GROUP 2/
LEDs CONFIGURATION G2
39
40
[79] F.Trip
[79] Lockout
[79] Blocked
[79] Success.
Local CRTL Mode
CB Alarm
45
46
47
Maintenance Mode tCB FLT Ext.Sign
Setting Group 2
LEDs CONFIGURATION G2
LED3 LED4 LED5 LED6 LED7 LED8
Commissioning Engineer
Date:
Customer Witness
Date:
Commissioning
MiCOM P116
P116_EN_CM_A11 v2.7
(CM) 8-59
CM
CM
P116_EN_CM_A11 v2.7
(CM) 8-60
Commissioning
MiCOM P116
Maintenance
MiCOM P116
P116_EN_MT_A11 v2.7
(MT) 9-1
Date:
Hardware Suffix:
Software Version:
Connection Diagrams:
MAINTENANCE
17 th
November 2013
A
1C
10P11602
MT
MT
P116_EN_MT_A11 v2.7
(MT) 9-2
CONTENTS
Maintenance
MiCOM P116
Maintenance
MiCOM P116
Maintenance
1.1 Maintenance period
P116_EN_MT_A11 v2.7
(MT) 9-3
It is recommended that products supplied by SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC ENERGY receive periodic monitoring after installation. In view of the critical nature of protective relays and their infrequent operation, it is desirable to confirm that they are operating correctly, at regular intervals.
1.2
SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC ENERGY protective relays are designed for a life in excess of 20 years.
MiCOM relays are self-monitoring and so require less maintenance than earlier designs of relay. Most problems will set off an alarm so that remedial action can be taken. However, some periodic tests should be carried out to ensure that the relay is functioning correctly and that the external wiring is intact.
Maintenance checks
Although some functionality checks can be performed from a remote location by utilizing the communications ability of the relays, these are predominantly restricted to checking that the relay is measuring the applied currents accurately. Therefore it is recommended that maintenance checks are performed locally (i.e. at the substation itself).
Before carrying out any work on the equipment, the user should be familiar with the contents of the Safety Guide SFTY/4L M/E11 or later issue, OR the safety and technical data section of the technical manual and also the ratings on the equipment rating label.
1.2.1
1.2.2
1.2.3
For safety reasons, no work must be carried out on the P116 until all power sources to the unit have been disconnected.
Binary Inputs (Model A)
Binary inputs can be checked to ensure that the relay responds to its energization by repeating the commissioning test detailed in section 3.2.3 of the Commissioning chapter
(P116/EN CM).
Outputs
Output relays' operation can be checked by repeating the commissioning test detailed in section 3.2.4 of the Commissioning chapter (P116/EN CM).
Measurement Accuracy
If the power system is energized, the values measured by the relay can be compared with known system values to check that they are in the approximate expected range.. If they are, then the analogue/digital conversion and calculations are being performed correctly by the relay. Suitable test methods can be found in sections 3.2.7 of the Commissioning chapter
(P116/EN CM).
Alternatively, the values measured by the relay can be checked against known values injected into the relay via the test block, if fitted, or injected directly into the relay terminals.
These tests will prove the calibration accuracy is being maintained.
MT
MT
P116_EN_MT_A11 v2.7
(MT) 9-4
1.3 Method of Repair
Maintenance
MiCOM P116
It is recommended that the P116 relay is returned to an SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC ENERGY service centre for repair.
Before carrying out any work on the equipment, the user should be familiar with the contents of the Safety Guide SFTY/4L M/E11 or later issue, OR the safety and technical data section of the technical manual and also the ratings on the equipment rating label.
1.4
For safety reasons, no work must be carried out on the P116 until all power sources to the unit have been disconnected.
Cleaning
Before cleaning the equipment ensure that all current transformers and voltage input connections are isolated to prevent any possibility of an electric shock whilst cleaning.
The equipment may be cleaned using a lint-free cloth moistened with clean water.
The use of detergents, solvents or abrasive cleaners is not recommended as they may damage the relay’s surface and leave a conductive residue.
Troubleshooting
MiCOM P116
P116_EN_TS_A11 v2.7
(TS) 10-1
TROUBLESHOOTING
Date:
Hardware Suffix:
Software Version:
Connection Diagrams:
17 th
November 2013
A
1C
10P11602
TS
TS
P116_EN_TS_A11 v2.7
(TS) 10-2
CONTENTS
INITIAL PROBLEM IDENTIFICATION
MALOPERATION OF THE RELAY DURING TESTING
Failure of Binary Inputs (Model A)
REPAIR AND MODIFICATION PROCEDURE
Troubleshooting
MiCOM P116
Troubleshooting
MiCOM P116
1. INTRODUCTION
P116_EN_TS_A11 v2.7
(TS) 10-3
BEFORE CARRYING OUT ANY WORK ON THE EQUIPMENT, THE
USER SHOULD BE FAMILIAR WITH THE CONTENTS OF THE
SAFETY GUIDE SFTY/4L M/E11 OR LATER ISSUE, or THE SAFETY
AND TECHNICAL DATA SECTION OF THE TECHNICAL MANUAL
AND ALSO THE RATINGS ON THE EQUIPMENT RATING LABEL.
2.
For safety reasons, no work must be carried out on the P116 until all power sources to the unit have been disconnected.
The purpose of this section of the service manual is to allow an error condition on the relay to be identified so that appropriate corrective action can be taken.
In cases where a faulty relay is being returned to the manufacturer or one of their approved service centers, a completed copy of the Repair/Modification Return Authorization Form located at the end of this section should be included.
INITIAL PROBLEM IDENTIFICATION
Consult the table below to find the description that best matches the problem experienced, then consult the section referenced to perform a more detailed analysis of the problem.
Symptom
Relay fails to power up
Maloperation of the relay during testing
Table 1: Problem identification
Refer To
Section 3
Section 4
TS
TS
P116_EN_TS_A11 v2.7
(TS) 10-4
3. POWER UP ERRORS
Troubleshooting
MiCOM P116
•
•
P116 can be powered up using the following power sources:
•
USB connection to PC
Auxiliary voltage (Vx) (Model A)
Current inputs
If the relay does not appear to power up then the following procedure can be used to determine whether the fault is in the external wiring or in the power supply module of the relay.
Note: Max current necessary to supply P116 from USB port is 450mA. USB standard offers 500mA for a one PC’s USB controller, so it is not recommended to connect any additional devices to the same PC’s USB controller. If the total power consumption from a one PC’s USB controller is greater than 500mA, P116 can be in permanent rest (P116 display and the green Healthy LED will be flashing)
Test
1
3
Check
1. Connect the P116 to a
PC via the USB port.
2. Disconnect the PC from the P116 USB port.
2
(Model A)
1. Apply a Vx auxiliary voltage on terminals B1-
B2 (check the level on the P116 nominal label)
2. Check whether the green
“Healthy” LED on the
P116 front panel is lit.
3. Disconnect the ac auxiliary voltage from terminals B1-B2.
1. Connect the Current Test equipment to the current input terminals: A1-A2.
2. Apply 0.8 In current
3. Disconnect the Current
Test equipment from current input terminals:
A1-A2.
4. Repeat procedure for terminals: A3-A4, A5-A6 and A7-A8 (0.8
I en)
Action
(i) If the green “Healthy” LED and display are lit then proceed to test 2.
(ii) If the green “Healthy” LED and display are not lit then proceed to test 2.
(i) If the green “Healthy” LED and display are lit then proceed to test 3.
(ii) If the green “Healthy” LED and display are not lit then send the relay back to
SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC ENERGY's repair centre.
(i) If the green “Healthy” LED and display are not lit in all four tests, it means that
P116 is damaged. Send the relay back to SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC ENERGY's repair centre.
(ii) If the green “Healthy” LED and display are lit in test 1 and 2 but not lit in test 3, check the current circuit wiring.
If all connections are OK, send the relay and CTs back to SCHNEIDER
ELECTRIC ENERGY's repair centre.
(iii) Model A: If the green “Healthy” LED and display are lit in test 1 and 3 but not lit in test 2, check the auxiliary voltage level on terminals B1-B2 and connections in that circuit.
If all connections are OK and the voltage level is in the required range
(refer to Technical Data chapter of this manual), send the relay back to
SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC ENERGY's repair centre.
Table 2: Failure of relay to power up
Troubleshooting
MiCOM P116
4. MALOPERATION OF THE RELAY DURING TESTING
4.1
4.2
P116_EN_TS_A11 v2.7
(TS) 10-5
Failure of Binary Inputs (Model A)
The binary inputs are configured in the SETTING GROUPx/INPUTS CONFIGURATION column for each setting group. If an input does not appear to be recognized by the relay scheme logic the COMMISSIONING / Opto I/P Status menu option can be used to verify whether the problem is in the binary input itself or the mapping of its signal to the scheme logic functions. If the binary input appears to be read correctly then it is necessary to examine its configuration.
Ensure the voltage rating for the opto inputs has been configured correctly with applied voltage. If the binary input state is not read correctly by the relay the applied signal should be tested. Verify the connections to the binary input using the correct wiring diagram. Next, using a voltmeter verify that 80% opto setting voltage is present on the terminals of the binary input in the energized state. If the signal is being correctly applied to the relay then the failure may be on the input card itself.
Notes: 1. If the P116 is exclusively powered from the USB port, only some of the relay's electronic circuits (necessary for communications) are supplied.
For this reason, inputs are in high state (independent of the voltage at the terminals). Any action pertaining to binary inputs is blocked.
2. Only the logical state of the inputs is given in the COMMISSIONING
/Opto I/P Status cell, not presence of voltage at the terminals. For example: If Vx (high state) and Reverse Input Logic are set (function active in low state of binary input) at the terminals of a binary input in the
COMMISSIONING /Opto I/P Status cell, the logical state of the input is low (logical status after application of the Reverse Input Logic function).
Failure of Output Contacts
An apparent failure of the relay's output contacts may be caused by the relay configuration; the following tests should be performed to identify the real cause of the failure. Tests of outputs can be performed using the COMMISSIONING/Test outputs cell. The command is executed and the configured outputs ( COMMISSIONING/Test Pattern ) will be energized for the duration of Contact Test Time ( COMMISSIONING ).
Test
1
2
3
4
Is the Out of Service LED illuminated?
Examine the menu.
Check
Test outputs in the
Commissioning section of the
Verify by examination of the fault record whether the protection element is operating correctly.
Using the procedure described in the Commissioning chapter
(P116/EN CM) energize every output (note the correct external connection diagram should be consulted). A continuity tester can be connected at the rear of the relay for this purpose.
Action
Illumination of this LED may indicate that the relay is in test mode or that the protection has been disabled due to a hardware verify error (see Table 2).
If the relevant bits of the contact status are operated then proceed to test 4, if not proceed to test 3.
If the protection element does not operate verify whether the test is being correctly applied.
If the protection element operates then it is necessary to check the configuration, to ensure that the configuration of the protection element to the contacts is correct.
If the output relay operates then the problem must be situated in the external wiring to the relay. If the output relay does not operate this could indicate a failure of the output relay contacts (note that the self-tests verify that the relay coil is being energized).
Ensure that the closed resistance is not too high for the continuity tester to detect.
Table 3: Failure of Output Contacts
TS
P116_EN_TS_A11 v2.7
(TS) 10-6
5. LOST PASSWORD
Troubleshooting
MiCOM P116
The password lost
If the password is lost please contact with Schneider Electric organization in the country or use the Website link: http://www.schneider-electric.com/CCC
Complete the form (see below)
TS
In the “Massage” field, write information that it is a problem with forgotten password, add information about the type of the relay and serial number of P116..
Note: MiCOM P116 serial number can be read from the nominal plate on the case (for example: SN 00036046) or in the main: “OP Parameters” column of the menu (for example:
00036046)
For example:
“Massage:
Protection password for my MiCOM P116 is lost.
Send me the temporary password for P116 serial number: SN00036046”
If the temporary password is known, navigate to the SETTING CHANGE MODE main header (see Figure 9 Getting Started chapter of the manual), then press the
key: enter the temporary password in the window like below:
Edit settings?
Enter PSWD
Press the OK navigation key.
Edit settings?
Enter PSWD 0000
The 0 digit furthest to the right is flashing.
Troubleshooting
MiCOM P116
Enter the password:
P116_EN_TS_A11 v2.7
(TS) 10-7
1. If the digit is flashing, change the digit to the required value by pressing the
key or the
key.
2. Change the flashing digit by pressing the
key or
key.
3. Continue as above to set the whole password (4 digits)
4. If the correct password is set, press the OK navigation key
The following cell will be displayed:
Setting change:
Protected
After above operation all passwords (administrator, protection, test control) will be deleted and set to the default value: 0000
For more information about password changing see: Getting Started chapter point 2.4 of the manual
TS
TS
P116_EN_TS_A11 v2.7
(TS) 10-8
6. REPAIR AND MODIFICATION PROCEDURE
Please follow these 5 steps to return an Automation product to us:
1. Get the Repair and Modification Authorization Form (RMA)
Troubleshooting
MiCOM P116
Find a copy of the RMA form at the end of this section.
To obtain an electronic version of the RMA form for e-mailing, please connect your lical Schneider Electric Energy service.
2. Fill in RMA form
Fill in only the white part of the form.
Please ensure that all fields marked (M) are completed such as:
Equipment model
Model No. and Serial No.
Description of failure or modification required (please be specific)
Value for customs (in case the product requires export)
Delivery and invoice addresses
Contact details
3. Send RMA form to your local contact
4. Receive shipping information from local service contact
Your local service contact will provide you with all the information:
Pricing details
RMA n°
Repair center address
If required, an acceptance of the quote must be delivered before going to the next step. .
5. Send the product to the repair center
Address the shipment to the repair center specified by your local contact
Ensure all items are protected by appropriate packaging: anti-static bag and foam protection
Ensure a copy of the import invoice is enclosed with the unit being returned
Ensure a copy of the RMA form is enclosed with the unit being returned
E-mail or fax a copy of the import invoice and air waybill to your local contact.
Symbols and Glossary
MiCOM P116
P116_EN_SG_ v2.7
SYMBOLS AND GLOSSARY
Date:
Hardware Suffix:
Software Version:
Connection Diagrams:
17 th
November 2013
A
1C
10P11602
SG
SG
P116_EN_SG_A11 v2.7 Symbols and Glossary
MiCOM P116
Symbols and Glossary
MiCOM P116
Logic Symbols
P116_EN_SG_A11 v2.7
(SG) 11-1
CB
CT
Dly
DT
FN
Gnd.
I
I
>>
I
2
I
1
I
A
Symbols
>
C/O
E/F
FLC
Flt.
I
I
I
I
I
I
>>
>>>
N>
2>
B
C
IDMT
Explanation
Greater than:
Used to indicate an “over” threshold, such as overcurrent (current overload).
A changeover contact having normally closed and normally open connections:
Often called a “form C” contact.
Circuit breaker.
Current transformer.
Time delay.
Abbreviation of “Definite Time”:
An element which always responds with the same constant time-delay on operation.
Earth fault:
Directly equivalent to ground fault.
Full load current:
The nominal rated current for the circuit.
Abbreviation of “Fault”:
Typically used to indicate faulted phase selection.
Function.
Abbreviation of “Ground”:
Used in distance settings to identify settings that relate to ground (earth) faults.
Current.
First stage of phase overcurrent protection:
Could be labeled 51-1 in ANSI terminology.
Second stage of phase overcurrent protection:
Could be labeled 51-2 in ANSI terminology.
Third stage of phase overcurrent protection:
Could be labeled 51-3 in ANSI terminology.
Earth Fault current:
Equals the neutral current measured at the analog input.
Negative sequence overcurrent protection
Could be labeled 46 in ANSI terminology.
Negative sequence current .
Positive sequence current .
Phase A current:
Might be phase L1, red phase.. or other, in customer terminology.
Phase B current:
Might be phase L2, yellow phase.. or other, in customer terminology.
Phase C current:
Might be phase L3, blue phase.. or other, in customer terminology.
Inverse definite minimum time:
A characteristic whose trip time depends on the measured input (e.g. current) according to an inverse-time curve.
SG
SG
P116_EN_SG_A11 v2.7
I
N
I/P
LD
N/A
N/C
O/P
Opto
PCB
Ph
IN_1
IN_2
Rx
T
TE
TMS
TD
Tx
Symbols and Glossary
MiCOM P116 (SG) 12-2
Symbols
In
Ien
Inst.
I/O
LED
N
N/O
Explanation
The rated nominal current of the CT:
Software selectable as 1 amp or 5 amp to match the line CT input.
The rated nominal current of the E/F CT:
Software selectable as 1 amp or 5 amp to match the line E/F CT input.
Neutral current, or residual current:
This results from an external summation of the three measured phase currents.
An element with “instantaneous” operation: i.e. having no deliberate time delay.
Abbreviation of “Inputs and Outputs”:
Used in connection with the number of opto-coupled inputs and output contacts within the relay.
Abbreviation of “Input”.
Abbreviation of “Level Detector”:
An element responding to a current or voltage below its set threshold.
Light emitting diode:
Red or green indicator on the relay front-panel.
Indication of “Neutral” involvement in a fault: i.e. a ground (earth) fault.
Not applicable.
A normally closed or “break” contact:
Often called a “form B” contact.
A normally open or “make” contact:
Often called a “form A” contact.
Abbreviation of “output”.
An opto-coupled logic input:
Alternative terminology: binary input.
Printed circuit board.
Abbreviation of “Phase”:
Used in distance settings to identify settings that relate to phase-phase faults.
The first stage of earth fault protection element [50/50N]
The second stage of earth fault protection element [50/50N]
Abbreviation of “Receive”:
Typically used to indicate a communication receive line/pin.
A time delay.
A standard for measuring the width of a relay case:
One inch = 5TE units.
The time multiplier setting applied to IEC or UK inverse-time curves
The time multiplier setting applied to IEEE or US inverse-time curves
Abbreviation of “Transmit”:
Typically used to indicate a communication transmit line/pin.
Installation
MiCOM P116
P116_EN_IN_A11 v2.7
(IN) 12-1
INSTALLATION
Date:
Hardware Suffix:
Software Version:
Connection Diagrams:
17 th
November 2013
A
1C
10P11602
IN
Installation
(IN) 12-2
P116_EN_IN_A11 v2.7
MiCOM P116
Installation
MiCOM P116
CONTENTS
HANDLING OF ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT
MICOM P116 removal from the Cassette.
Assembly of MICOM P116 & Cassette set.
5.2 Flush version without Cassette
Assembly of MICOM P116 without the Cassette.
Instruction for MICOM P116 removal from the Adapter.
Assembly of MICOM P116 – Wall version
Protective Conductor (Earthing)
Flush version with/without Cassette
APPLICATION CONNECTION DIAGRAMS
Tripping CB using energy provided by an external capacitor unit
The CB using energy from a tripping transformer
P116_EN_IN_A11 v2.7
(IN) 12-3
IN
Installation
(IN) 12-4
FIGURES
P116_EN_IN_A11 v2.7
MiCOM P116
Figure 1: Dimensions: P116 flush mounting case – basic and withdrawable solution with cassette 17
Figure 2: Dimensions: P116 wall mounting basic case 18
Figure 3: Model A - Typical Connection to 3 Phase CTs 19
Figure 4: Model A - Typical Connection to 3 Phase CTs + a Core Balance CT 20
Figure 5: Model A - Typical Connection to 2 Phase CTs + a Core Balance CT 21
Figure 6: Model L - Typical Connection to 3 Phase CTs 22
Installation P116_EN_IN_A11 v2.7
(IN) 12-5 MiCOM P116
1. RECEIPT OF RELAYS
Upon receipt, relays should be examined immediately to ensure no external damage has been sustained in transit. If damage has been sustained, a claim should be made to the transport contractor and SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC ENERGY should be promptly notified.
Relays that are supplied unmounted and not intended for immediate installation should be
returned to their protective polythene bags and delivery carton. Section 3 of P116/EN IN
gives more information about the storage of relays.
2. HANDLING OF ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT
A person’s normal movements can easily generate electrostatic potentials of several thousand volts. Discharge of these voltages into semi-conductor devices when handling electronic circuits can cause serious damage that, although not always immediately apparent can reduce the reliability of the circuit. The relay’s electronic circuits are protected from electrostatic discharge when housed in the case. Do not expose them to risk by removing the front panel or printed circuit boards unnecessarily.
Each printed circuit board incorporates the highest practicable protection for its semiconductor devices. However, if it becomes necessary to remove a printed circuit board, the following precautions should be taken to preserve the high reliability and long life for which the relay has been designed and manufactured.
Before removing a printed circuit board, ensure that you are at the same electrostatic potential as the equipment by touching the case.
Handle analog input modules by the front panel, frame or edges of the circuit boards.
Printed circuit boards should only be handled by their edges. Avoid touching the electronic components, printed circuit tracks or connectors.
Do not pass the module to another person without first ensuring you are both at the same electrostatic potential. Shaking hands achieves equipotential.
Place the module on an anti-static surface, or on a conducting surface that is at the same potential as you.
If it is necessary to store or transport printed circuit boards removed from the case, place them individually in electrically conducting anti-static bags.
In the unlikely event that you are making measurements on the internal electronic circuitry of a relay in service, it is preferable that you are earthed to the case with a conductive wrist strap. Wrist straps should have a resistance to ground between 500 k
Ω
and 10 M
Ω
. If a wrist strap is not available you should maintain regular contact with the case to prevent a build-up of electrostatic potential. Instrumentation which may be used for making measurements should also be earthed to the case whenever possible.
More information on safe working procedures for all electronic equipment can be found in
BS EN 100015: Part 1:1992. It is strongly recommended that detailed investigations on electronic circuitry or modification work should be carried out in a special handling area such as described in the British Standard document.
IN
Installation P116_EN_IN_A11 v2.7
MiCOM P116 (IN) 12-6
3. STORAGE
If relays are not to be installed immediately upon receipt, they should be stored in a place free from dust and moisture in their original cartons. Where de-humidifier bags have been included in the packing they should be retained.
Care should be taken on subsequent unpacking that any dust, which has collected on the carton, does not fall inside. In locations of high humidity the carton and packing may become impregnated with moisture and the de-humidifier crystals will lose their efficiency.
Prior to installation, relays should be stored at a temperature of between –25°C to +70°C
(-13°F to +158°F).
4. UNPACKING
Care must be taken when unpacking and installing the relays so that none of the parts are damaged and additional components are not accidentally left in the packing or lost. Ensure that any User’s CD ROM or technical documentation is NOT discarded – this should accompany the relay to its destination substation.
Relays must only be handled by qualified persons.
The site should be well lit to facilitate inspection, clean, dry and reasonably free from dust and excessive vibration.
Installation
MiCOM P116
5. RELAY MOUNTING
5.1 Flush version with Cassette
5.1.1 MICOM P116 removal from the Cassette.
P116_EN_IN_A11 v2.7
(IN) 12-7
Pic. 1
Step 1 Unscrew the two screw marked with an arrow (as shown in the picture).
Pic. 2
Step 2 In order to remove MICOM pull it out of the Cassette.
IN
Pic. 3
Step 3 MICOM outside of the Cassette.
Assembly the device in reverse order
Installation
(IN) 12-8
5.1.2 Assembly of MICOM P116 & Cassette set.
P116_EN_IN_A11 v2.7
MiCOM P116
051-174-40-120 BN2723
058-044-40-1 PZP014-03 M4
053-047-40-1 BN161 M4
Mounting Kit
screw M4x12 4 pcs
protective washer M4 4 pcs
nut M4 4 pcs
Pic. 6
The second variant of the assembly Fasten the
Cassette with screws, protective washers and nuts
Pic. 4
Pic. 8
The first variant of the assembly
Fasten the Cassette with only screws
Pic. 5
Pic. 7
The earthing wire should be connected to the bold marked with an arrow.
CAUTION
Do not connect any wires or put any nuts to the bolt marked with an X (the bolt is to be used only when
MICOM is fastened without the Cassette)
Installation
MiCOM P116
5.2 Flush version without Cassette
5.2.1 Assembly of MICOM P116 without the Cassette.
051-174-40-200 BN2723 M4x20
058-044-40-1 PZP014-03 M4
053-047-40-1 BN161 M4
021-319-00-011
P116_EN_IN_A11 v2.7
(IN) 12-9
Mounting Kit
screw M4x20 4 pcs
protective washer M4 4 pcs
nut M4
bushing
4 pcs
4 pcs
To remove screw blinding plugs turn each by 90 degrees to the right (to vertical position)
Pull screw blinding plugs.
Pic. 10
On the rear side of the frame push four bushings.
Pic. 11
Pic. 9 Pic. 12
The first variant of the assembly
Fasten the Cassette with only screws
The second variant of the assembly
Fasten the Cassette with screws, protective washers and nuts
Pic. 13 Pic. 14
Pic. 15
Insert the screw blinding plugs in horizontal position
(as shown in the picture no. 15)
IN
5.3.2
Installation
(IN) 12-10
5.3 Wall version
5.3.1 Instruction for MICOM P116 removal from the Adapter.
Pic. 17
Step 1 unlock.
Push as shown in the picture no.16 and
Pic. 16
Assembly of MICOM P116 – Wall version
Pic. 19
P116_EN_IN_A11 v2.7
MiCOM P116
Pic. 18
Step 2
Remove MICOM pull it out of the Adapter.
Prepare 4 holes M4 and assembly device mount the adapter using screws included in the package
Assembly the device in reverse order
Installation P116_EN_IN_A11 v2.7
(IN) 12-11 MiCOM P116
6. RELAY UNMOUNTING
Removing MICOM P116 after installation depends on the case variant.
The basic withdrawable case.
In the basic case 5 external plug in terminal blocks (1 current plug and 4 signal plugs) are removable after unscrew fixing screws. The current plug enables a safe disconnect of
MICOM from energized system – the plug itself shorts CT circuits. After that follow instruction included in section: 5.RELAY MOUNTING in this chapter, but in the opposite direction.
IN
Installation
(IN) 12-12
P116 with the optional flush mounting cassette.
P116_EN_IN_A11 v2.7
MiCOM P116
Step 1
Unscrew the two screw marked with an arrow
(as shown the picture).
Step 2
In order to remove MICOM pull it out of the Cassette.
Step 3
MICOM outside of the Cassette.
Installation
MiCOM P116
The basic P116 case can be put into the Cassette in following steps:
P116_EN_IN_A11 v2.7
(IN) 12-13
Step 1
Push MICOM into the Cassette
Step 2
Tighten the 2 screws marked with an arrow (as shown the picture).
Step 3
MICOM inside of the Cassette.
IN
Installation P116_EN_IN_A11 v2.7
MiCOM P116 (IN) 12-14
7. RELAY WIRING
BEFORE CARRYING OUT ANY WORK ON THE EQUIPMENT, THE
USER SHOULD BE FAMILIAR WITH THE CONTENTS OF THE SAFETY
GUIDE SFTY/4L M/E11 OR LATER ISSUE, OR THE SAFETY AND
TECHNICAL DATA SECTION OF THE TECHNICAL MANUAL AND
ALSO THE RATINGS ON THE EQUIPMENT RATING LABEL.
7.1
For safety reasons, no work must be carried out on the P116 until all power sources to the unit have been disconnected.
The measuring current inputs of the P116 should be connected to the secondary wires of the power system CTs as shown in the connection diagrams in section 9. ” External Connection
Diagram” of this chapter P116/EN IN.
The CT types which can be connected to the P116’s current input terminals are shown in section 3 of the Applications chapter P116/EN AP.
Terminal Block Connections
AC Current Input Terminals
Loose relays are supplied with sufficient M4 screws for making connections to the rear mounted terminal blocks using ring terminals, with a recommended maximum of two crimp ring terminals per relay terminal.
M4 90° crimp ring terminals ( ) have different sizes depending on wire size, so follow recommendation of a crimp ring terminals producer for max./min. wire size.
Due to the limitations of the ring terminal, the maximum wire size that can be used for AC current inputs is 6.0mm
2
.
If a larger wire size is required, two wires should be used in parallel, each terminated in a separate ring terminal at the relay
If M4 crimp ring terminals are un-insulated, to maintain the terminal block insulation requirements for safety, an insulating sleeve should be fitted over the ring terminal after crimping.
Recommended minimum wire size: 2.5mm
2
General Input/Output Terminals
Recommended minimum wire size:
power supply: 1.5mm
2
EIA(RS)485 Port: See separate section
Other Circuits 1.0mm
2
Flush mounting case (basic case or flush mounting cassette):
For power supply, binary inputs, contact output contacts and COM for rear communications.
Threaded M3 screw-type plug-in terminals (MSTB 2.5/xx-ST-5.08)
•
0.2 - 4 mm
2
single-core
•
0.2 - 2.5 mm
2 finely stranded
Wall mounting cassette:
For power supply, binary inputs, contact output contacts and COM for rear communications.
Threaded M2.5 screw-type plug-in terminals (FRONT-MSTB 2.5/xx-STF-5.08), with wire protection for conductor cross-section
Installation P116_EN_IN_A11 v2.7
(IN) 12-15 MiCOM P116
•
0.2 – 2.5 mm
2
single-core
•
0.2 - 2.5 mm
2 finely stranded
Connections to the equipment must only be made using single strand wire or stranded wire with the use of insulated crimp terminals to maintain insulation requirements.
The length of connecting wires between Impulse Outputs (Terminals: C1, C2, C3, C4) and low energy CB tripping coil/Striker/MiTOP/Flag Indicator must be less than 3 m.
Where UL Listing of the equipment is not required the recommended fuse type for external wiring is a high rupture capacity (HRC) type with a maximum current rating of 16 Amps and a minimum DC rating of 250 Vdc, for example the Red Spot NIT or TIA type.
To maintain UL and CUL Listing of the equipment for North America a UL Listed fuse shall be used. The UL Listed type shall be a Class J time delay fuse, with a maximum current rating of 15 A and a minimum DC rating of 250 Vdc, for example type AJT15.
The protective fuse(s) should be located as close to the unit as possible.
7.2 USB Port
Connection to the USB port can be made by means of an USB cable. The USB port allows the user to download settings or fault records from the P116 or change I/O configuration.
To access this port it is necessary to remove the cover plate (protection against unauthorized setting changes) on the P116 front panel.
A typical cable specification would be:
•
Type of cable: USB 2.0
•
Connectors:
PC: type A male
P116: type mini B 5-pin male
USB Cable: minimum 1P*28AWG/2C*24AWG, max : 2m
Communication software: MiCOM S1 Studio
The virtual COM port for USB communications should be set in as follows:
Address
1
Baud rate
115 200 bits/s
Data bit
8
Stop bit
1
Parity
None
Max current necessary to supply P116 from USB port is 450mA. USB standard offers 500mA for a one PC’s USB controller, so it is not recommended to connect any additional devices to the same PC’s USB controller. If the total power consumption from a one PC’s USB controller is greater than 500mA, P116 can be in permanent rest (P116 display and the green Healthy LED will be flashing)
Before connection cable to USB socket it is necessary discharge static electricity from the body by touching a metal grounded object (such as an unpainted metal surface) to prevent against ESD damage
IN
Installation
(IN) 12-16
7.3 Rear Communications Port
EIA(RS)485 signal levels, two wire
Connections located on the general-purpose terminal block
P116_EN_IN_A11 v2.7
MiCOM P116
Isolation to SELV level
For screened twisted pair cable, distance to be bridged: multi-endpoint link: max. 100 m, with a maximum 200nF total cable capacitance. A typical cable specification would be:
•
A two core screened cable, each core: 16/0.2mm copper conductors; PVC insulated
•
Nominal conductor area: 0.5mm
2 per core
•
Screen: Overall braid, PVC sheathed
•
Linear capacitance between conductor and earth: 100pF/m
It is strongly recommended to use termination resistors for any length of RS485 line (even for short line).
If the network cable is close to a source of disturbances or too long, undesirable transmission line effects could arise. The best method for mitigating energy on transmission conductor is to dissipate the energy as heat by terminating resistors.
The resistance of the resistors should be equal to the characteristic impedance of the line. The most common RS485 twisted pair has a characteristic impedance of
100-120 ohms.
Termination resistor should be connected between two transmission lines (“TR+” and “TR-“) and installed on both side of RS485 line: on the beginning (RTU) and on the end (the most distant point).
The screen of RS485 line must be earthed in a one point only: on the beginning
(RTU) or on the end of RS485 line, due to noise which can be caused by a potential current flowing between two (or more) earthing points of the screen.
7.4 Protective Conductor (Earthing)
The equipment must be connected to the protective conductor via the M4 earth terminal (refer point 6.) marked with the earth symbol. We recommend a wire of minimal cross section of 2,5 mm².
To prevent any electrolytic risk between copper conductor or brass conductors and the back plate of the equipment, it is necessary to take precautions to isolate them one from the other. This can be done in several ways, for example by inserting between the conductor and the case a plated nickel washer or by using tinned terminations.
Installation
MiCOM P116
8. P116 CASE DIMENSIONS
8.1 Flush version with/without Cassette
P116_EN_IN_A11 v2.7
(IN) 12-17
Figure 1: Dimensions: P116 flush mounting case – basic and withdrawable solution with cassette
IN
Installation
(IN) 12-18
8.2 Wall version with Adapter
P116_EN_IN_A11 v2.7
MiCOM P116
Figure 2: Dimensions: P116 wall mounting basic case
Installation
MiCOM P116
9. EXTERNAL CONNECTION DIAGRAMS
P116_EN_IN_A11 v2.7
(IN) 12-19
Note: The current leads should be connected exactly as shown in Figures: 3 to 6.
P2
S2
S2
S2
P1
A
S1
B
S1
S1
Binary Input L1
Binary Input L2
Binary Input L3
Binary Input L4
Binary Input L5
A1
P116
B1
Ia
A2
B2
A3
B3
Ib
A4
A5
RL1
B4
B5
Ic
A6
B6
RL2
A7
B7
IN
A8
B8
A9
B9
IN
RL3
A10
B10
A11
A12
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
Model A
L1
L2
B11
12-24Vdc/0.1J
+ or
-
MiTOP
+
-
24Vdc/0.01J
RL4
B12
T+
C1
T-
C2
F+
C3
F-
C4
L3
D6
C9
RS485
D7
C10
L4
D8
D9
USB
L5
D10 E5
C
E6
Binary Input L6
D11
D12
E2
Contact
Output
RL5
E3
E4
L6
RL5
RL6
WD
E7
E8
E9
E10
Ic
Contact
Output
RL1
Contact
Output
RL2
Contact
Output
RL3
Contact
Output
RL4
Low Energy
Trip Coil: 12-
24Vdc/0.1J or
MiTOP
Flag Indicator
24Vdc/0.01J
T-
RS485
T+
Ia
Contact
Output
RL6
Ib
Auxiliary
Voltage Vx
Watchdog
P0937ENb
Figure 3: Model A - Typical Connection to 3 Phase CTs
IN
Installation P116_EN_IN_A11 v2.7
MiCOM P116 (IN) 12-20
S2 S1
P2
S2
S2
S2
S1
S1
S1
P1
Binary Input L1
Binary Input L2
Binary Input L3
Binary Input L4
Binary Input L5
Binary Input L6
Contact Output
RL5
A12
D1
D2
D8
D9
D10
D11
D12
E2
E3
E4
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
Ia
Ib
Ic
IN
A11
P116
RL1
RL2
B9
IN
RL3
B10
Model A
L1
L2
+
-
+
-
B11
RL4
B12
T+
C1
T-
C2
F+
C3
F-
C4
L3
L4
L5
L6
RL5
USB
RS485
RL6
WD
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B1
B2
B3
C9
C10
E5
E6
E7
E8
E9
E10
A
B
C
Ic
Ia
Contact
Output
RL1
Contact
Output
RL2
Contact
Output
RL3
Contact
Output
RL4
Low Energy
Trip Coil: 12-
24Vdc/0.1J or
MiTOP
Flag Indicator
24Vdc/0.01J
T-
RS485
T+
Contact
Output
RL6
Ib
Auxiliary
Voltage Vx
Watchdog
P0938ENb
Figure 4: Model A - Typical Connection to 3 Phase CTs + a Core Balance CT
The P116 Model A is not supplied via a core balance CT.
An auxiliary voltage source should be connected to terminals B1-B2 in order to ensure that the P116 is supplied for earth fault currents below 0.2
I n.
Refer to Application chapter: P116/EN AP.
Installation P116_EN_IN_A11 v2.7
(IN) 12-21 MiCOM P116
P2
S2
S1
P1
A
B
C Ic
Ia
Ib
S2
S2 S1
S1
Binary Input L1
Binary Input L2
Binary Input L3
Binary Input L4
Binary Input L5
Binary Input L6
Contact
Output
RL5
D11
D12
E2
E3
A1
P116
B1
Ia
A2
B2
A3
B3
Ib
RL1
A4
A5
B4
B5
Ic
A6
B6
RL2
A7
B7
IN
A8
A9
B8
B9
IN
RL3
A10
B10
A11 Model A
A12
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
L1
L2
+
-
+
-
B11
RL4
B12
T+
C1
T-
C2
F+
C3
F-
C4
L3
D6
C9
RS485
D7
C10
L4
D8
D9
USB
L5
D10 E5
E6
L6
RL5
RL6
WD
E7
E8
E9
E4 E10
Auxiliary
Voltage Vx
Contact
Output
RL1
Contact
Output
RL2
Contact
Output
RL3
Contact
Output
RL4
Low Energy
Trip Coil: 12-
24Vdc/0.1J or
MiTOP
Flag Indicator
24Vdc/0.01J
T-
RS485
T+
Contact
Output
RL6
Watchdog
P0939ENb
Figure 5: Model A - Typical Connection to 2 Phase CTs + a Core Balance CT
The P116 is not supplied via a core balance CT.
An auxiliary voltage source should be connected to terminals B1-B2 in order to ensure that the P116 is supplied for earth fault currents below 0.2
I n.
Refer to Application chapter: P116/EN AP.
IN
Installation
(IN) 12-22
P116_EN_IN_A11 v2.7
MiCOM P116
P2
S2
S2
S2
S1
S1
S1
P1
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A1
A2
A3
Ia
Ib
Ic
IN
IN
P116
RL1
WD
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
A
B
C
12-24Vdc/0.1J
+ or
-
MiTOP
T+
C1
T-
C2
Ic
Ia
Ib
Contact
Output
RL1
Watchdog
Low Energy
Trip Coil: 12-
24Vdc/0.1J or
MiTOP
Model L
USB
Figure 6: Model L - Typical Connection to 3 Phase CTs
PJ091ENa
Installation
MiCOM P116
10. APPLICATION CONNECTION DIAGRAMS
10.1 Tripping CB using energy provided by an external capacitor unit
Connecting an E124 Capacitor Trip Unit
P116_EN_IN_A11 v2.7
(IN) 12-23
The MiCOM E124 capacitor trip unit is an auxiliary device typically used to provide energy to the trip coil of a circuit breaker in distribution systems. The trip unit can be used in all cases where a battery and charger would otherwise be necessary to trip the circuit breaker. Such is the case in substations where there is no auxiliary supply, and where protection relays draw their auxiliary power from current and voltage transformer circuits. The easiest way to store the energy for trip coils is in a capacitor trip unit.
Serially connected with a protection relay, it will release its full energy (300V / 59J) to the trip coil upon closure of the relay's trip contact.
E124 auxiliary supply: 48-230Vac or 48-250Vdc.
•
•
•
•
•
•
E124 key features:
•
Extended autonomy (over 8 days without recharge)
•
- Two independent capacitor banks, monitored by a microprocessor to guarantee two consecutive trips at maximum power (300V / 59J) without recharge
Connection in parallel possible to control the trip coil if it requires more than 59J.
Available output power: 118J (2*59J)
Output impedance (per capacitor bank): 10 Ohms
Capacitance: two capacitor banks of 1320 μF each
Power consumption to charge the capacitors (under 100V): <5 VA or 2.5W
Power consumption when the capacitors are charged (under 100V): <1.5 VA or
0.25 W
Note: The current leads should be connected exactly as shown in Figures 7 to 8.
IN
Installation
(IN) 12-24
P116_EN_IN_A11 v2.7
MiCOM P116
A
B
C
Tripping Coil
220Vdc
Auxiliary Voltage
(ac or dc)
Optional Connection
MiCOM P116
Auxiliary Voltage
(Vx)
B1
B2
A1
Analogue Inputs
Measure.
A2
I
A
A3 Measure.
Power
Supply
A4
I
B
A5 Measure.
A6
I
C
A7
I
N
Power
Supply
Measure.
A8
A9
A10
Measure.
Capacitor Trip Unit
E124
Voltage up to 300Vdc /
59J
AUX1 AUX2
10 11
VDVD+
6 2
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
D10
D11
D12
Binary
Inputs
L1
L2
L3
L4
L5
L6
Communication port
RS485
C9
C10
Energy Outputs
C1
+
-
C2
C3
+
-
C4
Output
Contacts
Trip
RL1
RL2
RL3
RL4
RL5
RL6
WD
B10
B11
E6
E5
E10
E9
E8
B12
E4
E3
E2
E7
B4
B5
B3
B7
B8
B6
B9
P0940ENb
Figure 7: Model A - Connection example for a P116 powered by an E124 and with a
4-pole connection (A-B-C-N)
The earth input supplies the relay (refer to Application chapter: P116/EN AP).
Installation
MiCOM P116
A
B
C
Auxiliary Voltage
(ac or dc)
Tripping Coil
220Vdc
Capacitor Trip Unit
E124
Voltage up to
300Vdc / 59J
AUX1 AUX2
10 11
VDVD+
6 2
P116_EN_IN_A11 v2.7
(IN) 12-25
D5
D6
D7
D8
D1
D2
D3
D4
D9
D10
D11
D12
MiCOM P116
Auxiliary Voltage
(Vx)
B1
B2
A1
Analogue Inputs
Measure.
A2
I
A
A3 Measure.
Power
Supply
A4
I
B
A5 Measure.
I
C A6
A7 I
N
Power
Supply
Measure.
A8
A9
A10
Measure.
Binary
Inputs
L1
L2
L3
L4
L5
L6
Communication port
RS485
C9
C10
Energy Outputs
+
-
C1
C2
C3
+
-
C4
Output
Contacts
Trip
RL1
RL2
RL3
RL4
RL5
RL6
WD
B10
B11
B12
E4
E3
E2
E7
E6
E5
E10
E9
E8
B4
B5
B3
B7
B8
B6
B9
P0941ENb
Figure 8: Model A - Connection example for a P116 powered by an E124 and with a
4-pole connection (A-B-C-N)
The P116 is not supplied via the earth input.
(refer to Application chapter: P116/EN AP).
IN
Installation
(IN) 12-26
10.2 The CB using energy from a tripping transformer
P116_EN_IN_A11 v2.7
MiCOM P116
Design of the Main Current Transformers
The main current transformer load is composed essentially of the P116’s power consumption, the consumption of the supply conductors wiring, and, in the event of transformer current tripping, the consumption of the tripping transformer that is normally short-circuited on the secondary side. In the event of transformer current tripping the maximum load occurs during closing of the tripping device. The CT requirements of the P116 are given in the technical data chapter. When selecting the main current transformers one should keep in mind that the impedances of the protection device and of the tripping transformer decrease when the current increases, due to saturation. The current transformers rating matching the overcurrent factor and the short-circuit withstand capability can be based on the corresponding low loads. These main current transformers can be considerably overburdened in the nominal current range even when the fault does not exceed the accuracy class rating. Typically, main current transformers having a nominal power rating of 15 VA 10 P10 or 30 VA10 P5 should be provided, but in any case, the required parameters of the main current transformers must be defined as a result of calculation analysis (refer to Application chapter: P116/EN AP).
Connecting the Tripping Transformers
The measured variable is fed into the P116 through the primary winding of the tripping transformer, WA 25 O. During fault-free operation the secondary side of the tripping transformer is short-circuited via one of the P115’s contacts. In the event of a trip the contact opens and the circuit breaker is actuated (see Figures 9 to 11).
Installation
MiCOM P116
P116_EN_IN_A11 v2.7
(IN) 12-27
A
B
C
Trip
Element
0.5 (1) A
4
W
A
11
1
W
F b2
5
12
W
E
W
B
9 b1
6
13
3
W
D
W
C b2
WA 25 O
7
14 ac Auxiliary
Voltage
Auxiliary Voltage
(Vx)
B1
B2
A1
Analogue Inputs
Measure.
A2
I
A
A3 Measure.
Power
Supply
A4
I
B
A5 Measure.
I
C
A6
A7 I
N
Power
Supply
Measure.
A8
A9
A10
Measure.
Communication port
RS485
C9
C10
Output
Contacts
Trip
RL1
RL2
MiCOM P116
D5
D6
D7
D8
D1
D2
D3
D4
D9
D10
D11
D12
Binary
Inputs
L1
L2
L3
L4
L5
L6
RL3
RL4
RL5
RL6
WD
Energy Outputs
C1
+
-
C2
C3
+
-
C4
B10
B11
E6
E5
E10
E9
E8
B12
E4
E3
E2
E7
B4
B5
B3
B7
B8
B6
B9
Hardware configuration of WA 25 for Trip element 0.5A or 1A:
11 12 13 b2 b2
Trip element: 1 A
14
11 12 13 b1
Trip element: 0.5 A
14
PJ020ENb
Figure 9: Model A - Connection example for a P116 powered by a WA 25 O and with a 4-pole connection (A-B-C-N)
IN
Installation
(IN) 12-28
P116_EN_IN_A11 v2.7
MiCOM P116
A
B
C
Trip
Element
0.5 (1) A
4
W
A
11
1
W
F b2
5
12
W
E
W
B b1
9
6
13
3
W
D
W
C b2
WA 25 O
7
14 ac Auxiliary
Voltage
Auxiliary Voltage
(Vx)
B1
B2
A1
Analogue Inputs
Measure.
A2
I
A
A3 Measure.
Power
Supply
A4
I
B
A5 Measure.
I
C
A6
A7 I
N
Power
Supply
A8
A9
A10
Measure.
Communication port
RS485
C9
C10
Output
Contacts
Trip
RL1
RL2
MiCOM P116
D5
D6
D7
D8
D1
D2
D3
D4
D9
D10
D11
D12
Binary
Inputs
L1
L2
L3
L4
L5
L6
RL3
RL4
RL5
RL6
WD
Energy Outputs
C1
+
-
C2
C3
+
-
C4
B4
B5
B3
B7
B8
B6
B9
B10
B11
E6
E5
E10
E9
E8
B12
E4
E3
E2
E7
Hardware configuration of WA 25 for Trip element 0.5A or 1A:
11 12 13 b2 b2
Trip element: 1 A
14
11 12 13 b1
Trip element: 0.5 A
14
PJ021ENb
Figure 10: Model A - Connection example for a P116 powered by a WA 25 O and with a 3-pole connection (A-B-C)
Installation
MiCOM P116
P116_EN_IN_A11 v2.7
(IN) 12-29
A
B
C
Trip
Element
0.5 (1) A
4
W
A
11
1
W
F b2
5
12
W
E
W
B b1
9
6
13
3
W
D
W
C b2
WA 25 O
7
14 ac Auxiliary
Voltage
Auxiliary Voltage
(Vx)
B1
B2
A1
Analogue Inputs
Measure.
A2
I
A
A3 Measure.
Power
Supply
A4
I
B
A5 Measure.
I
C
A6
A7 I
N
Power
Supply
A8
A9
A10
Measure.
D5
D6
D7
D8
D1
D2
D3
D4
D9
D10
D11
D12
Communication port
RS485
C9
C10
Energy Outputs
C1
+
-
C2
C3
+
-
C4
MiCOM P116
Binary
Inputs
L1
L2
L3
L4
L5
L6
Output
Contacts
Trip
RL1
RL2
RL3
RL4
RL5
RL6
WD
B10
B11
B12
E4
E3
E2
E7
E6
E5
E10
E9
E8
B4
B5
B3
B7
B8
B6
B9
Hardware configuration of WA 25 for Trip element 0.5A or 1A:
11 12 13 b2 b2
Trip element: 1 A
14
11 12 13 b1
Trip element: 0.5 A
14
PJ022ENb
Figure 11: Model A - Connection example for a P116 powered by a WA 25 O and with a 2-pole connection (A-C)
IN
Installation
(IN) 12-30
P116_EN_IN_A11 v2.7
MiCOM P116
Installation
MiCOM P116
P116_EN_IN_A11 v2.7
(IN) 12-31
IN
Installation
(IN) 12-32
P116_EN_IN_A11 v2.7
MiCOM P116
Communication Database
MiCOM P116
P116_EN_CT_A11 v2.7
COMMUNICATION DATABASE
(P116 Model A)
Date:
Hardware Suffix:
Software Version:
Connection Diagrams:
17 th
November 2013
A
1C
10P11602
CT
CT
P116_EN_CT_A11 v2.7 Communication Database
MiCOM P116
Communication Database
MiCOM P116
CONTENT
Technical characteristics of the MODBUS connection
Parameters of the MODBUS connection
Synchronisation of exchanges messages
MODBUS functions of the MiCOM relays
Presentation of the MODBUS protocol
Format of frames sent by the MiCOM relay
MiCOM P116 Dual-powered relay database organisation
Description of the application mapping
Page 0h : Product information, remote signalling, measurements
Page 1h, MiCOM P116 : general remote parameters
Page 8h : time synchronisation
Mapping access characteristics
Page 9h to 21h: disturbance record data (25 pages)
Page 22h: disturbance record index frame
Page 35h (addresses 3500h to 354Ah) : event record data (9 words)
Page 37h : fault record value data
Page 3Eh : most older Fault record value data
Page 38h to 3Ch: Disturbance recorder
Pages 3Dh : number of disturbance records available
Description of the mapping format, MiCOM P116 Dual-powered
Request to retrieve the oldest non-acknowledge event
Request to retrieve a dedicated event
Modbus request definition used to retrieve the fault records
P116_EN_CT_A11 v2.7
(CT) 13-1
CT
CT
P116_EN_CT_A11 v2.7
(CT) 13-2
1.
1.1
1.2
INTRODUCTION
Purpose of this document
Communication Database
MiCOM P116
This document describes the characteristics of the different communication protocol of
MiCOM P116 relay.
The available communication protocols of
MiCOM P116 relay are as follows:
•
MODBUS.
•
IEC 60870-5-103.
Glossary
IA, IB, IC : currents measured on the concerned phases (A, B, C)
IN : residual current measured by earth input (= 3.I zero sequence) pf
PF
: soft weight of a word of 16 bits
: heavy weight of a word of 16 bits.
Communication Database
MiCOM P116
2.
2.1
2.1.1
P116_EN_CT_A11 v2.7
(CT) 13-3
MODBUS PROTOCOL
MiCOM P116 relay can communicate by a RS 485 link behind the unit following the
MODBUS MODICON RTU protocol.
Technical characteristics of the MODBUS connection
Parameters of the MODBUS connection
The different parameters of the MODBUS connection are as follows :
•
Isolated two-point RS485 connection (2kV 50Hz),
•
MODBUS MODICON line protocol in RTU mode
•
Communication speed can be configured by an operator dialog in the front panel of the relay :
Baud rate
4800
9600
38400
57600
115200
Transmission mode of the configured characters by operator dialog:
2.1.2
2.1.3
Mode
1 start / 8 bits / 1 stop : total 10 bits
1 start / 8 bits / even parity / 1 stop : total 11 bits
1 start / 8 bits / odd parity / 1 stop : total 11 bits
1 start / 8 bits / 2 stop : total 11 bits
Synchronisation of exchanges messages
All character received after a silence on the line with more or equal to a transmission time of
3 characters is considered as a firm start.
Message validity check
The frame validity is working with a cyclical redundancy code CRC with 16 bits. The generator polynomial is:
1 + x² + x
15
+ x
16
= 1010 0000 0000 0001 binary = A001h
Address of the MiCOM relays
The address of the MiCOM relay on a same MODBUS network is situated between 1 and
255. The address 0 is reserved for the broadcast messages
CT
CT
P116_EN_CT_A11 v2.7
(CT) 13-4
2.2 MODBUS functions of the MiCOM relays
The MODBUS functions implemented on the MiCOM relays are :
Function 3 or 4 : Reading of n words
Function 5 : Writing of 1 bit
Communication Database
MiCOM P116
2.3
Function 6 :
Function 7 :
Writing of 1 word
Fast reading of 8 bits
Function 16 : Writing of n words
Presentation of the MODBUS protocol
Master slave protocol, all exchange understands a master query and a slave response
Frame size received from
MiCOM P116 Dual-powered
relay
Frame transmitted by the master ( query) :
Slave number
1 byte
0 à FFh
Function code
1 byte
1 à 10h
Information n bytes
CRC1 6
2 bytes
2.3.1
Slave number:
The slave number is situated between 1 and 255.
A frame transmitted with a slave number 0 is globally addressed to all pieces of equipment
(broadcast frame )
Function code:
Requested MODBUS function (1 to 16)
Information:
Contains the parameters of the selected function.
CRC16:
Value of the CRC16 calculated by the master.
Note: The MiCOM relay does not respond to globally broadcast frames sent out by the master.
Format of frames sent by the MiCOM relay
Frame sent by the MiCOM relay ( response)
Slave number
1 byte
1 à FFh
Function code
1 byte
1 à 10h
Data n bytes
CRC16
2 bytes
Slave number :
The slave number is situated between 1 and 255.
Function code :
Processed MODBUS function (1 to 16) .
Communication Database
MiCOM P116
Data :
Contains reply data to master query .
CRC 16:
Value of the CRC 16 calculated by the slave.
2.3.2
P116_EN_CT_A11 v2.7
(CT) 13-5
Messages validity check
When
MiCOM P116
relay receive a master query, it validates the frame :
•
If the CRC is false, the frame is invalid.
MiCOM P116
relay do not reply to the query.
The master must retransmit its query. Excepting a broadcast message, this is the only case of non-reply by
MiCOM P116
relay to a master query.
•
If the CRC is good but the MiCOM relay can not process the query, it sends an exception response.
Warning frame sent by the MiCOM relay (response)
Slave number
1 byte
1 to FFh
Function code
1 byte
81h or 83h or 8Ah or 8Bh
Warning code CRC16
1 byte 2 bytes pf ... PF
Slave number :
The slave number is situated between 1 and 255.
Function code :
The function code returned by the MiCOM relay in the warning frame is the code in which the most significant bit (b7) is forced to 1.
Warning code :
On the 8 warning codes of the MODBUS protocol, the MiCOM relay manages two of them :
• code 01 : function code unauthorised or unknown.
• code 03 : a value in the data field is unauthorised ( incorrect data ).
Control of pages being read
Control of pages being written
Control of addresses in pages
Length of request messages
CRC16:
Value of the CRC16 calculated by the slave.
CT
CT
P116_EN_CT_A11 v2.7
(CT) 13-6
2.4 MiCOM P116 Dual-powered relay database organisation
2.4.1 Description of the application mapping
2.4.1.1 Settings
MiCOM P116 application mapping has 9 pages of parameters.
Communication Database
Page 0h: Product information, remote signalling, measurements
Page 1h: General remote parameters
Page 2h:
Page 3h:
Setting group 1 remote parameters
Setting group 2 remote parameters
Page 4h: Remote controls
Pages 5h/6h: Reserved pages
Pages 7h: Quick reading byte
Pages 8h: Time synchronisation
MiCOM P116
2.4.1.2 Disturbance Records
Before uploading any disturbance record, a service request must be send to select the record number to be uploaded.
The answer following this request contain the following information:
•
Numbers of samples (pre and post time)
•
Phase CT ratio
•
Earth CT ratio
•
Internal phase and earth ratios
•
Number of the last disturbance mapping page
•
Number of samples in this last disturbance mapping page
The mapping pages used for this service request are from 38h to 3Ch.
Pages 9h to 21h : Contain the disturbance data (25 pages)
A disturbance mapping page contains 250 words:
0900 to 09FAh :
0A00 to 0AFAh :
0B00 to 0BFAh :
250 disturbance data words
250 disturbance data words
250 disturbance data words
......
2100 to 21FAh : 250 disturbance data words
The disturbance data pages contain the sample of a single channel from a record.
Page 22h : contains the index of the disturbance
Page 38h to 3Ch : Selection of the disturbance record and channel
Page 3Dh : A dedicated request allows to know the number of disturbance records stored in
FRAM memory.
Communication Database
MiCOM P116
2.4.1.3 Event records
To upload the event records two requests are allowed:
P116_EN_CT_A11 v2.7
Page 35h
: Request to upload an event record without acknowledge of this event.
(CT) 13-7
Used addresses:
3500h : EVENT 1
.....
3563h : EVENT 100
Page 36h
: Request to upload the non-acknowledged oldest stored event record.
Two modes are available for the acknowledgement: automatic acknowledgement or manual acknowledgement
The mode depends of the state of bit 12 of telecommand word (address 400 h).
If this bit is set, then the acknowledgement is manual else the acknowledgement is automatic.
In automatic mode, the reading of the event acknowledges the event.
In manual mode, it is necessary to write a specific command to acknowledge the oldest event
(set the bit 13 of control word 400 h )
2.4.1.4 Fault records
Page 37h
: Page dedicated to upload fault record
Used addresses:
3700h : FAULT 1
3701h : FAULT 2
.....
3704h : FAULT 5
Page 3Eh
: Request to upload the non-acknowledged oldest stored fault record.
Two modes are available for the acknowledgement: automatic acknowledgement or manual acknowledgement
The mode depends of the state of bit 12 of telecommand word (address 400 h).
If this bit is set, then the acknowledgement is manual else the acknowledgement is automatic.
In automatic mode, the reading of the fault acknowledges automatically the event.
In manual mode, it is necessary to write a specific command to acknowledge the oldest fault.
(set the bit 14 of control word 400 h )
2.4.1.5 Characteristics
Page 0h can only be read through communication.
Pages 1h, 2h, 3h and 4h can be read and write.
Page 7h can be access in quick reading only.
Page 8h can be write.
They are describe more precisely in the following chapters.
CT
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
000A
000B
P116_EN_CT_A11 v2.7
(CT) 13-8
2.4.2 Page 0h : Product information, remote signalling, measurements
Communication Database
MiCOM P116
Read access only
Address
0000
0001
Group
Product
Information
Description
Relay description characters 1 and 2
Values range
32-127
Step
1 -
Unit Format
Default
Value
F10 P1
1 - F10 16
000C
000D-000F
0010 Remote signalling
0011
Relay description characters 3 and 4
Relay description characters 5 and 6
Unit reference characters
1 and 2
Unit reference characters
3 and 4
Software Version
Hardware Version
Line CT Sec
E/Gnd CT Sec
Active Set Group
32-127
32-127
32-127
32-127
10 to 99
0 to 3
0 to 1
0 to 1
0 to 1
Nominal frequency 0 to 1
Special (DC) Inputs hardware board
0 to 1
4 Additional Flags Installed 0 to 1
Reserved
Logical inputs 0 to 15
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- bits bits
F10
F10
F10
F15
F17
F23
F23A
F32
F57
F68
F68
F11
F12
SE
0
0
1
1
0012
0013
0014
0015
0016
0017
CT
0018
0019
001A
001B
001C
001D
Current Protection disable status (1)
Protection Function disable status (2)
Output contacts status
Logical LEDs status
Output information: Current
Protection starting status (1)
0 to 15
0 to 15
0 to 15
0 to 15
0 to 15
Output information: Protection
Function starting status (2)
0 to 15
Output information: Currrent
Protection trip status (1)
0 to 15
Output information: Protection
Function trip status (2)
0 to 15
Output information: Currrent
Protection Alarm status 1
0 to 15
Output information: Protection
Function Alarm status 2
0 to 15
CB status
[79] Status
[79] Blocking Status
0 to 15
0 to 15
0 to 15
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 bits
-
-
- bits bits bits
bits
bits
bits
bits
bits
F12A
F24
F25
F28
F28A
F29
F29A
F31
F31A
F30
F59
F60
0025
0026
0027
0028
0029
002A
001E
001F
0020
0021
0022
0023
0024
Communication Database
MiCOM P116
Address Group Description
Values range
Local/Romote Mode Status 0 to 15
Maintance Mode
Hardware Warning
Output information: I>
0 to 15
0 to 15
0 to 15
Output information: I>>
Output information: I>>>
0 to 15
0 to 15
Output information: IN_1 stage 0 to 15
Output information: IN_2 stage 0 to 15
Output information: IN_3 stage 0 to 15
Output information: AUX1 0 to 15
Output information: AUX2 0 to 15
Output information: CB Fail 0 to 15
002B
002C
002D
002E
002F
0030
0031
0032
0033
0034
0035
0036
0037
003F
0040
0041
0042
0043
0044 to sign
Output information: SOTF
Output information: I<
Output information: I2>
0 to 15
0 to 15
0 to 15
Output information: Brkn.Cond 0 to 15
Output information: Thermal
OL
0 to 15
Output information: AUX3
Output information: AUX4
Output information: Input
Protection blocking 1
Output information: Input
Protection blocking 2
0 to 15
0 to 15
0 to 15
0 to 15
Output information: Input
Selective logic 1
0 to 15
Output information: Input logic data
0 to 15
0 to 15 Output information: Internal logic data
Reserved
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Remote measurements
Phase IA (L1) current [A]
Phase IB (L2) current [A]
Phase IC (L3) current [A]
0 to 60 000
0 to 60 000
0 to 60 000
1
1
1
E/GND IN (IE) current [A]
- 0.1-40Ien
- 0.01-8Ien
- 0.002-1Ien
0 to 60 000
I2 (negative sequence) current
[A]
0 to 60 000
I1 (positive sequence) current 0 to 60 000
1
Step
0044
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
P116_EN_CT_A11 v2.7 bits bits bits bits bits
F37
F50
F50
F50
F50
F51
F51
F101
(CT) 13-9 bits bits bits bits bits bits
-
Unit Format
Default
Value
F61
-
- bits
F63
F26
F37 bits bits bits
F37
F37
F50
F50
F50
F51
F51
F51
F51 bits bits bits bits bits bits bits
F102
F103
F104
F105
[A]/100 F1
[A]/100 F1
[A]/100 F1
[A] x100
[A] x1000
[A] x1000
F1
[A] x 100 F1
[